Scholarly Sale 2018: Springer Wirtschaft, Finanzen, Jura, Sozial- und Geisteswissenschaften >>



Scholarly Sale 2018: Springer Wirtschaft, Finanzen, Jura, Sozial- und Geisteswissenschaften


Scholarly Sale 2018: Springer Wirtschaft, Finanzen, Jura, Sozial- und Geisteswissenschaften

Studium Fachbücher zum Aktionspreis

Scholarly Sale: Jetzt stark reduzierte Angebote bis zu 50% Rabatt auf Bücher der Wirtschaft, Finanzen, Jura, Sozial- und Geisteswissenschaften
Wir freuen uns, Ihnen dieses Jahr ausgewählte Wirtschaft, Finanzen, Jura, Sozial- und Geisteswissenschaften-Bücher im Scholarly Sale bei TU-BOOKS anbieten zu können.


S. Khosravi

'Illegal' Traveller

An Auto-Ethnography of Borders
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten X, 150 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-0-230-23079-8
       9780230230798
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Relations / Development Studies
Based on fieldwork among undocumented immigrants and asylum seekers Illegal Traveller offers a narrative of the polysemic nature of borders, border politics, and rituals and performances of border-crossing. Interjecting personal experiences into ethnographic writing it is 'a form of self-narrative that places the self within a social context'.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction Accustomed Soil Border Guards and Border People The Community of Displacement The Invisible Border Homelessness We Borders Conclusion
S. Khosravi

'Illegal' Traveller

An Auto-Ethnography of Borders
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten X, 150 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-0-230-33674-2
       9780230336742
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
48,14 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Relations / Development Studies
Based on fieldwork among undocumented immigrants and asylum seekers Illegal Traveller offers a narrative of the polysemic nature of borders, border politics, and rituals and performances of border-crossing. Interjecting personal experiences into ethnographic writing it is 'a form of self-narrative that places the self within a social context'.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction Accustomed Soil Border Guards and Border People The Community of Displacement The Invisible Border Homelessness We Borders Conclusion
Ronald W. Jones, University of Rochester, Rochester, NY, USA; Rolf Weder, University of Basel, Basel, BS, Switzerland

200 Years of Ricardian Trade Theory

Challenges of Globalization
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XX, 268 p. 40 illus., 35 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-60605-7
       9783319606057
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
123,04 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Economics / Globalization
This book offers a comprehensive and insightful reflection on David Ricardo’s ingenious theory of international trade. Divided into three parts, Part I presents the “birthday boy”, his concept and the many applications and insights that have been derived from it, particularly in modern times. Part II explores in depth important aspects of the Ricardian trade theory through the eyes and experience of leading experts on international trade theory, taking into account the latest research in the field. Lastly, Part III discusses current challenges of globalization in the light of Ricardian trade theory and includes the original 'On Foreign Trade' written and published by David Ricardo in 1817.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: Celebrating 200 Years of Ricardian Trade Theory.- Part I David Ricardo and the Ricardian Trade Theory: 1817 to Today.- David Ricardo: His Personality, his Time and his Principles.- David Ricardo’s “On Foreign Trade”: The Original Idea.- The Standard Ricardian Trade Model.- The Ricardian Trade Theory: Implications and Applications.- Part II Scientific Conference “Celebrating 200 Years Ricardian Trade Theory” on May 12, 2017 at the University of Basel in Switzerland.- The Main Contribution of the Ricardian Trade Theory.- Comments on “The Main Contribution of the Ricardian Trade Theory” by Ronald W. Jones.- Discussion about “The Main Contribution of the Ricardian Trade Theory”.- Mill and Ricardo: The Genesis of Comparative Advantage.- Comments on “Mill and Ricardo: The Genesis of Comparative Advantage” by Roy J. Ruffin.- Discussion about “Mill and Ricardo: The Genesis of Comparative Advantage”.- Putting Ricardian Trade Theory to Work in 2017: Current Empirical Analyses.- Comments on “Putting Ricardian Trade Theory to Work in 2017: Current Empirical Analyses” by Jonathan Eaton.- Short Discussion about “Putting Ricardian Trade Theory to Work in 2017: Current Empirical Analyses”.- The Relevance of Ricardian Trade Theory for the Political Economy of Trade Policy.- What Next for Ricardo? Incorporating More Trade Distortions.- 200 Years of Ricardian Trade Theory: The Missing Dynamics.- Final Panel Discussion: Wilfred J. Ethier, Simon Evenett, Esteban Rossi-Hansberg and Rolf Weder.- Part III Back to the Future: Challenges of 2017 and the Original Idea of 1817.- Current Challenges of Globalization in the Light of the Ricardian Trade Theory.- On Foreign Trade. Chapter VII of On the Principles of Political Economy and Taxation (1817).
Shane O'Mara, Trinity College Dublin, Dublin, Ireland

A Brain for Business – A Brain for Life

How insights from behavioural and brain science can change business and business practice for the better
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XI, 163 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-49153-0
       9783319491530
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Human Resource Development / Industrial and Organizational Psychology
Behaviour change is hard, but O’Mara shows that by adopting strategies that are well-founded in the science of brain and behaviour individuals and organisations can adapt to the demands of the modern world.
The brain matters in business. The problem is that our brains have many biases, heuristics and predilections that can distort behaviour and decision making. The good news is that we know more about how these work than ever before.
O’Mara’s starting point is that, as our behaviour arises from the structure and function of our brains, careful examination of a series of brain–based (‘neurocognitive’) analyses of common aspects of human behaviour relevant to business and management practice reveals lessons that can be used at work. He begins by looking at neuroplasticity and how it is enables a shift from a restrictive ‘fixed mindset’ to an enabling ‘growth mindset’. He shows how this changing mindset approach – where the focus is on task and improvements based on effort – is scalable within organisations. Next, as the brain is a living organ like the heart and lungs, O’Mara shows how to keep it physically in the best possible shape before examining how we exercise control over our behaviour, build resilience and create positive brain states. He also considers the implications for business of our brains wiring for status and illustrates how research shows that it is possible to de-bias assumptions about gender and race – and the impact that this has on performance.

Inhaltsangaben

Chatper1.Setting the Scene.- Chapter2.Mindsets - what they are, how they are inscribed in the brain, how they have implications for organisations.- Chapter3.Brain Hygiene: Optimising performance.- Chapter4.Self-regulation and self-control: How we exercise control over our behaviour.- Chapter5.Resilience including lifestyle.- Chapter6.Positive Brain States: happiness & meaning; subjective well-being.- Chapter7.How our brains are wired for status.- Chapter8.De-biasing Groups; De-biasing Gender Roles.
Francisco Aboitiz, Pontificia Universidad Católica de Chile, Santiago, Chile

A Brain for Speech

A View from Evolutionary Neuroanatomy
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXIV, 505 p. 22 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-54059-1
       9781137540591
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Neuropsychology / Cognitive Psychology

This book discusses evolution of the human brain, the origin of speech and language. It covers past and present perspectives on the contentious issue of the acquisition of the language capacity. Divided into two parts, this insightful work covers several characteristics of the human brain including the language-specific network, the size of the human brain, its lateralization of functions and interhemispheric integration, in particular the phonological loop. Aboitiz argues that it is the phonological loop that allowed us to increase our vocal memory capacity and to generate a shared semantic space that gave rise to modern language. The second part examines the neuroanatomy of the monkey brain, vocal learning birds like parrots, emergent evidence of vocal learning capacities in mammals, mirror neurons, and the ecological and social context in which speech evolved in our early ancestors. This book's interdisciplinary topic will appeal to scholars of psychology, neuroscience, linguistics, biology and history.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: The beginning of words.- 1. Pandora’s box.- 2. A matter of size.- 3. Broken symmetry.- 4. Bridging hemispheres.- 5. A loop for speech.- 6. Monkey brain, human brain.- 7. Grasping mirrors.- 8. Of birds and men.- 9. Talking heads.- 10. Taming ourselves.- Epilogue.
Cenap Çakmak, Eskisehir Osmangazi University, Eskisehir, Turkey

A Brief History of International Criminal Law and International Criminal Court

Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten X, 305 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-56735-2
       9781137567352
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
State Crimes / World History, Global and Transnational History
This book offers a historical presentation of how international criminal law has evolved from a national setting to embodying a truly international outlook. As a growing part of international law this is an area that has attracted growing attention as a result of the mass atrocities and heinous crimes committed in different parts of the world. Çakmak pays particular attention to how the first permanent international criminal court was created and goes on to show how solutions developed to address international crimes have remained inadequate and failed to restore justice. Calling for a truly global approach as the only real solution to dealing with the most severe international crimes, this text will be of great interest to scholars of criminal justice, political science, and international relations. 

Inhaltsangaben

Part I- Evolution of International Criminal Law: Historical Overview.- Chapter 1. Historical Background.- Chapter 2. Prior to World War I.- Chapter 3. Interwar Period.- Chapter 4. From World War II to End of Cold War.- Chapter 5. From End of Cold War to Present Time.- Chapter 6. Review of Analysis.- Part II- Forming the International Criminal Court.- Chapter 7. Before Rome Conference.- Chapter 8. Rome Conference.- Chapter 9. Negotiations at Rome Conference.- Chapter 10. Inherent or Pre-authorized Jurisdiction.- Chapter 11. No Reservations, No Statute of Limitations.- Part III- International Criminal Court in World Politics.- Chapter 12. Introduction.- Chapter 13. Overview and Significance of the International Criminal Court.- Chapter 14. ICC versus National Sovereignty.- Chapter 15. Global Civil Society and the ICC and US Opposition.- Part IV- Conclusion
Panicos Demetriades, University of Leicester, Leicester, UK

A Diary of the Euro Crisis in Cyprus

Lessons for Bank Recovery and Resolution
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVIII, 215 p. 15 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-62222-4
       9783319622224
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
42,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Financial Crises /
This book tells the story of the euro crisis in Cyprus from the inside. Written by the former Governor of the Central Bank of Cyprus, Panicos Demetriades, who was in office during this turbulent period, this book shows how the crisis unravelled through a series of key events that occurred during his tenure.Written in chronological order, and broadly based on the author’s personal diary, starting from his first day in office, this volume brings together economics, banking, regulation, governance, history, politics and international relations.Presenting personal witness statements, including records of noteworthy telephone conversations, informal meetings and other milestones, it examines crucial questions like: How did Cyprus become so systemically important to the rest of the euro area? Why was Cyprus treated so differently in comparison to other peripheral countries in Europe? Why were bank depositors targeted? What role did Cyprus’ links with Russia play in the design of the programme? What has been the toxic fallout from the bail-in? Are there any longer-term implications for the euro? What are the lessons for regulators around the world?The book will appeal to readers interested in financial crises, the euro’s architecture, the evolution of the European Monetary Union, and those with an interest in how Europe and the IMF dealt with crises in peripheral European countries.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1 Introduction.- Chapter2 Baptism of Fire (Barcelona).- Chapter3 Entering a War Zone (Nicosia).- Chapter4 A Secret Lunch (Frankfurt).- Chapter5 In the Footsteps of Alexander.- Chapter6 A €13.5 Billion IMF Bill (or ‘Your country is bankrupt’).- Chapter7 A Russian Playground and a German Election.- Chapter8 An Ultimatum, a Bank Run and a Tearful Agreement.- Chapter9 Hostage to those who want to Destroy the Euro.- Chapter10 Nyet from Moscow.- Chapter11 An Angry Prez.- Chapter12 Taxing the Poor to Help the Rich.- Chapter13 Looking at the Abyss.- Chapter14 Sleepless Nights.- Chapter15 Dragoman of the Troika.- Chapter16 The Independents (Two Englishmen, a Cypriot and A Swiss).- Chapter17 The Toxic Fallout from Bail-in.- Chapter18 Lessons from Cyprus.
Jing Ding, South China University of Technology, Guangzhou, China

A Lexical Semantic Study of Chinese Opposites

Springer Singapore
Seiten XIX, 135 p. 22 illus., 19 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-981-10-6183-7
       9789811061837
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Semantics / Ontology
This book studies Chinese opposites. It uses a large corpus (GigaWord) to trace the behavior of opposite pairings’ co-occurrence, focusing on the following questions: In what types of constructions, from window-size restricted and bi-syllabic to quad-syllabic, will the opposite pairings appear together? And, on a larger scale, i.e. in constrained-free contexts, in which syntactic frames will the opposite pairings appear together? The data suggests aspects that have been ignored by previous theoretical studies, such as the ordering rules in co-occurrent pairings, the differences between the three main sub-types of opposites (that is, antonym, complementary, converse) in discourse function distributions. The author also considers the features of this Chinese study and compares it to similar studies of English and Japanese. In all, it offers a practical view of how opposites are used in a certain language as a response to the puzzles lingering in theoretical fields.
This study appeals to linguists, computational linguists and language-lovers. With numerous tables, illustrations and examples, it is easy to read but also encourages readers to link their personal instincts with the results from a large corpus to experience the beauty of language as a shared human resource. 

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 1.1 Motivations.- 1.2 Research Questions.- 1.3 Organization of Chapters.- 2. Literature Review.- 2.1 Definition and Categorization.- 2.2 Some Properties of Being Opposites.- 3. Opposites in Constructions.- 3.1 Research Question.- 3.2 Methodology, Candidate List and Corpus.- 3. 3 Results.- 3. 4 Discussion.- 3.5 Summary.- 4. Opposites in Discourse.- 4.1 Research Question and Previous Experiments.- 4.2 Methodology, Candidate List and Corpus.- 4.3 Result.- 4.4 Discussion.- 4.5 Summary.- 5. Opposites and Negation.- 5.1 Research Question.- 5.2 Methodology, Candidate List and Corpus.- 5.3 Result.- 5.4 Discussion.- 5.5 Summary.- 6. Conclusion.
 
Bill Cope, University of Illinois, USA; Mary Kalantzis, University of Illinois, USA

A Pedagogy of Multiliteracies

Learning by Design
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVI, 309 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-53971-7
       9781137539717
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
English / Language Education
The concept of 'Multiliteracies' has gained increasing influence since it was coined by the New London Group in 1994. This collection edited by two of the original members of the group brings together a representative range of authors, each of whom has been involved in the application of the pedagogy of Multiliteracies.

Inhaltsangaben

Matt Clement, University of Winchester, UK, Winchester

A People’s History of Riots, Protest and the Law

The Sound of the Crowd
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVII, 225 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-52750-9
       9781137527509
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Crime and Society / Criminological Theory
This book examines how movements from below pose challenges to the status quo. The 2010s have seen an explosion of protest movements, sometimes characterised as riots by governments and the media. But these are not new phenomena, rather reflecting thousands of years of conflict between different social classes. Beginning with struggles for democracy and control of the state in Athens and ancient Rome, this book traces the common threads of resistance through the Middle Ages in Europe and into the modern age. As classes change so does the composition of the protestors and the goals of their movements; the one common factor being how groups can mobilise to resist unbearable oppression, thereby developing a crowd consciousness that widens their political horizons and demonstrates the possibility of overthrowing the existing order. To appreciate the roots and motivations of these so-called deviants the author argues that we need to listen to the sound of the crowd. This book will be of interest to researchers of social movements, protests and riots across sociology, history and international relations.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Chapter 1. Democracy and Protest in the Ancient World.- Chapter 2. Medieval Riots.-
Chapter 3. Artisans and Citizens: Riots from 1500 - 1700.- Chapter 4. Custom, Law and Class.- Chapter 5. 1968: Protest and the Growth of a Critical Criminology (with Vincenzo Scalia).- Chapter 6. The 2010s - A Decade of Riot and Protest.
Simon Grennan, University of Chester , Chester

A Theory of Narrative Drawing

Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XII, 277 p. 26 illus., 10 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-52165-1
       9781137521651
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Media and Communication / Fine Arts
This book offers an original new conception of visual story telling, proposing that drawing, depictive drawing and narrative drawing are produced in an encompassing dialogic system of embodied social behavior. It refigures the existing descriptions of visual story-telling that pause with theorizations of perception and the articulation of form. The book identifies and examines key issues in the field, including: the relationships between vision, visualization and imagination; the theoretical remediation of linguistic and narratological concepts; the systematization of discourse; the production of the subject; idea and institution; and the significance of resources of the body in depiction, representation and narrative. It then tests this new conception in practice: two original visual demonstrations clarify the particular dialectic relationships between subjects and media, in an examination of drawing style and genre, social consensus and self-conscious constraint. The book’s originality derives from its clear articulation of a wide range of sources in proposing a conception of narrative drawing, and the extrapolation of this new conception in two new visual demonstrations.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Drawing, depicting and imagining.- Chapter 2: Narrative.- Chapter 3: Drawing Demonstration One: expounding another’s thought in the style of that thought.- Chapter 4: Drawing Demonstration Two: time and self-observation.
Jack Mangala, Grand Valley State University , Allendale, MI, USA

Africa and its Global Diaspora

The Policy and Politics of Emigration
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIII, 370 p. 8 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-50052-2
       9783319500522
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
African History /
The book presents a thorough study of the changing landscape of state-diaspora relations in Africa, as well as a robust analysis of diaspora engagement policies being pursued across the continent. As the Africa diaspora strengthens its socio-economic and political clout, countries of origin in Africa have sought to engage their citizens living abroad. Over the past decade, the role of diaspora in the homeland development has become a core tenet of national strategies and policies. Against the backdrop of expanding globalization and deepening regional integration, the book presents a thorough study of the changing landscape of state-diaspora relations in Africa, as well as a robust analysis of diaspora engagement policies being pursued across the continent as states seek to extend rights to and extract obligations from their global citizens.

Inhaltsangaben

I. International and Regional Perspectives on Diaspora Engagement.- 1. The Migration-Development Nexus: Contours and Outcomes of International Policymaking.- 2. The African Union Perspective on the African Diaspora.- II. Diaspora Engagement in National Context.- 3. Morroco and Diaspora Engagement: A Contemporary Portrait.- 4. Engaging with its Diaspora: The Case of Senegal.- 5. Nigeria: Diaspora Engagement Policies in National Context.- 6. Evolution and Nature of Diaspora Engagement Policies in Ghana.- 7. Reaching out to the Diaspora: The Liberian State’s Formulation of a Diaspora Engagement Policy.- 8. Engaging the Ethiopian Diaspora: Policies, Pratices and Performance.- 9. A Provisional Analysis of Diaspora Engagement Policies in Kenya.- 10. The State of Leadership and Diaspora Engagement in the Democratic Republic of the Congo.- 11. Brain Drain or Brain Gain? : Leveraging Zambia’s Diaspora Dividend.- 12. Mutual Antagonisms: Why the South African Diaspora and the South African Government Do Not Engage.
Bernardo Nicoletti, University of Tor Vergata, Rome, Italy

Agile Procurement

Volume I: Adding Value with Lean Processes
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 275 p. 24 illus., 9 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-61081-8
       9783319610818
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Procurement / Innovation/Technology Management
This book is the first of two volumes presenting a business model to add value through Procurement. Including several case studies of successful implementation, it demonstrates how the increasing complexity of the business environment requires a significant intervention on the management of processes and information within individual organizations and through inter-company relations. Agile Procurement presents the application of the Agile method which optimises and digitizes processes in order to reduce wastage and defects. As a method, tool and a culture aimed at effectiveness, efficiency and economy of organisations, agile procurement requires a change of paradigm. This volume examines these areas of improvement and presents best practice in improving processes. Each chapter of the book presents and substantiates the costs and benefits of process improvement through agile procurement. This is is seen as the integration of Lean Six Sigma and digitization.  

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction to Agile Procurement Processes.- Chapter 2: Procurement Processes.- Chapter 3: Agile Procurement.- Chapter 4: Agile Procurement support of the Value for the Customer.- Chapter 5: Customer Relationships and Agile Procurement.- Chapter 6: Processes in the Agile Procurement.- Chapter 7: Resources and Agile Procurement.- Chapter 8: Costs and Agile Procurement.- Chapter 9: Conclusions for the Agile Procurement Processes.
Bernardo Nicoletti, Rome, Italy

Agile Procurement

Volume II: Designing and Implementing a Digital Transformation
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 281 p. 31 illus., 4 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-61084-9
       9783319610849
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Procurement / Innovation/Technology Management
This book is the second of two volumes presenting a business model to add value through Procurement. Including several case studies of successful implementation, it demonstrates how the increasing complexity of the business environment requires a significant intervention on the management of processes and information within individual organizations and through inter-company relations. Agile Procurement presents the application of the Agile method which optimizes and digitizes processes in order to reduce wastage and defects. As a method, tool and a culture aimed at effectiveness, efficiency and economy of organizations, Agile Procurement requires a change of paradigm. This volume examines these areas of improvement and presents best practice in the digitization of the processes. The last chapter examines the near future developments of the procurement, which the author labels Procurement 4.0. It presents also how new solutions, like Blockchain, could revolutionize procurement.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction to Agile Procurement Systems.- Chapter 2: Customers in the Agile Procurement.- Chapter 3: Systems in Agile Procurement.- Chapter 4: Channels in Agile Procurement.- Chapter 5: Partnerships in Agile Procurement.- Chapter 6: Revenues and Agile Procurement.- Chapter 7: A Case study in Agile Procurement.- Chapter 8: The Future: Procurement 4.0.- Chapter 9: Conclusions for Agile Procurement Systems.
Marc Henrard, Open Gamma, London, UK

Algorithmic Differentiation in Finance Explained

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 103 p. 7 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-53978-2
       9783319539782
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
26,74 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Financial Engineering / Quantitative Finance
This book provides the first practical guide to the function and implementation of algorithmic differentiation in finance. Written in a highly accessible way, Algorithmic Differentiation Explained will take readers through all the major applications of AD in the derivatives setting with a focus on implementation.Algorithmic Differentiation (AD) has been popular in engineering and computer science, in areas such as fluid dynamics and data assimilation for many years.  Over the last decade, it has been increasingly (and successfully) applied to financial risk management, where it provides an efficient way to obtain financial instrument price derivatives with respect to the data inputs. Calculating derivatives exposure across a portfolio is no simple task.  It requires many complex calculations and a large amount of computer power, which in prohibitively expensive and can be time consuming.  Algorithmic differentiation techniques can be very successfully in computing Greeks and sensitivities of a portfolio with machine precision.
Written by a leading practitioner who works and programmes AD, it offers a practical analysis of all the major applications of AD in the derivatives setting and guides the reader towards implementation.  Open source code of the examples is provided with the book, with which readers can experiment and perform their own test scenarios without writing the related code themselves.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1 Introduction.- Chapter2 The Principles of Algorithmic Differentiation.- Chapter3 Applications to Finance.- Chapter4 Automated Algorithmic differentiation.- Chapter5 Derivatives to Non-inputs and Non-derivatives to Inputs.- Chapter 6 Calibration.
Joseph Shaanan, Bryant University , Smithfield, RI, USA

America's Free Market Myths

Debunking Market Fundamentalism
Springer International Publishing
Seiten VIII, 303 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-50635-7
       9783319506357
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Economic Systems / History of Economic Thought/Methodology
This book describes and refutes thirteen ideas involving free market principles and the US economic system, arguing that these (mostly familiar) ideas are myths. The myths are deeply ingrained in the United States' self-image and in political discourse, and are hailed as indisputable, scientifically grounded truths. Unfortunately, an economy dominated by giant corporations bears little resemblance to a free market. So why is so much effort and expense devoted to disseminating these stories? The answer is simple. The different myths generate the recommendation that the system's rewards should flow upward to corporations and a small group of wealthy and politically influential people. The myths help entrench existing economic and political power while distancing America from a more productive and widely beneficial form of capitalism.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Myth 1. America Has Free Markets.- Myth 2. A Great Wall Separates Politics and the Economy.- Myth 3. The Less Government, The Better.- Myth 4. Deregulation Always Improves the Economy.- Myth 5. The Economy Has Superior Efficiency.- Myth 6.Exceptional Living Standards.- Myth 7. An Egalitarian Nation.- Myth 8. Free Markets Protect Democracy.- Myth 9. Corporations Represent Economic Freedom.- Myth 10. Free Market and Laissez Faire Are the Same.- Myth 11. A Free Market Nation Does Not Need a Society.- Myth 12. The Government Caused the Crash of 2007-08.- Myth 13. The Bailouts' Purpose Was to Save the Free Market Economy.
Donna Maria Moses, Dominican Sisters of Mission San Jose, Mission San Jose, CA, USA

American Catholic Women Religious

Radicalized by Mission
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIX, 207 p. 20 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-60464-0
       9783319604640
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Catholicism / Religion and Society
This book depicts the significant role played by American Catholic Women Religious in the broader narratives of modern American history and the history of the Catholic Church. The book is a guide to fifty foreign missions founded by Dominican and Maryknoll Sisters in the twentieth century. Sister Donna Moses examines root causes for the radical political stances taken by American Catholic Women Religious in the latter half of the century and for the conservative backlash that followed. The book identifies key events that contributed to the present state of division within the American Catholic Church and describes current efforts to engage in dynamic dialogue.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. Post-Colonial American Imperialism (1900-1920).- 3. Evangelization of Asia and the Pacific (1920-1940).- 4. Christian Democratization (1940-1950).- 5. Sanctification and Triumphalism (1950-1960).- 6. Liberation: Movements and Theology (1960-1970).- 7. Immersion and Diversification (1970-1980).- 8. Individuation and Radicalization (1980-1990).- 9. Political Tension and Polarization (1990-2000).- 10. Conclusion.
Anthony Robert Booth, University of Sussex, Brighton, UK

Analytic Islamic Philosophy

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XV, 222 p. 3 illus., 2 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-54156-7
       9781137541567
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Philosophy, general / Islam
This book is an introduction to Islamic Philosophy, beginning with its Medieval inception, right through to its more contemporary incarnations. Using the language and conceptual apparatus of contemporary Anglo-American ‘Analytic’ philosophy, this book represents a novel and creative attempt to rejuvenate Islamic Philosophy for a modern audience. It adopts a ‘rational reconstructive’ approach to the history of philosophy by affording maximum hermeneutical priority to the strongest possible interpretation of a philosopher’s arguments while also paying attention to the historical context in which they worked. The central canonical figures of Medieval Islamic Philosophy – al-Kindi, al-Farabi, Avicenna, al-Ghazali, Averroes – are presented chronologically along with an introduction to the central themes of Islamic theology and the Greek philosophical tradition they inherited. The book then briefly introduces what the author collectively refers to as the ‘Pre-Modern’ figures including Suhrawardi, Mulla Sadra, and Ibn Taymiyyah, and presents all of these thinkers, along with their Medieval predecessors, as forerunners to the more modern incarnation of Islamic Philosophy: Political Islam. 

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction 1. Islam and Philosophy 2. The Greek Legacy 3. Al Kindi and the Rise of the Falasifa 4. Al Farabi and Islamic Neo-Platonism 5. Avicenna and the Flying Man Argument 6. Al Ghazali's Attack on the Falasifa 7. The Philosophers Strike Back: Averroes 8. Sufism 9. The Illuminationist School to Contemporary Islamic Philosophy 10. Islam, Philosophy and Politics Conclusion
Clifford S. Ang, Compass Lexecon, Chicago, IL, USA

Analyzing Financial Data and Implementing Financial Models Using R

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 351 p. 60 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-14074-2
       9783319140742
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
80,24 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Finance, general / Econometrics
This book is a comprehensive introduction to financial modeling that teaches advanced undergraduate and graduate students in finance and economics how to use R to analyze financial data and implement financial models. This text will show students how to obtain publicly available data, manipulate such data, implement the models, and generate typical output expected for a particular analysis.This text aims to overcome several common obstacles in teaching financial modeling. First, most texts do not provide students with enough information to allow them to implement models from start to finish. In this book, we walk through each step in relatively more detail and show intermediate R output to help students make sure they are implementing the analyses correctly. Second, most books deal with sanitized or clean data that have been organized to suit a particular analysis. Consequently, many students do not know how to deal with real-world data or know how to apply simple data manipulation techniques to get the real-world data into a usable form. This book will expose students to the notion of data checking and make them aware of problems that exist when using real-world data. Third, most classes or texts use expensive commercial software or toolboxes. In this text, we use R to analyze financial data and implement models. R and the accompanying packages used in the text are freely available; therefore, any code or models we implement do not require any additional expenditure on the part of the student.Demonstrating rigorous techniques applied to real-world data, this text covers a wide spectrum of timely and practical issues in financial modeling, including return and risk measurement, portfolio management, options pricing, and fixed income analysis.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1 Prices.- Chapter 2 Individual Security Returns.- Chapter 3 Portfolio Returns.- Chapter 4 Risk.- Chapter 5 Factor Models.- Chapter 6 Risk-Adjusted Portfolio Performance Measures.- Chapter 7 Markowitz Mean-Variance Optimization.- Chapter 8 Fixed Income.- Chapter 9 Options.- Appendix A Getting Started with R. Appendix B Constructing a Hypothetical Portfolio.
Clifford S. Ang, Compass Lexecon, Chicago, IL, USA

Analyzing Financial Data and Implementing Financial Models Using R

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 351 p. 60 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-35731-7
       9783319357317
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
80,24 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Finance, general / Econometrics
This book is a comprehensive introduction to financial modeling that teaches advanced undergraduate and graduate students in finance and economics how to use R to analyze financial data and implement financial models. This text will show students how to obtain publicly available data, manipulate such data, implement the models, and generate typical output expected for a particular analysis.This text aims to overcome several common obstacles in teaching financial modeling. First, most texts do not provide students with enough information to allow them to implement models from start to finish. In this book, we walk through each step in relatively more detail and show intermediate R output to help students make sure they are implementing the analyses correctly. Second, most books deal with sanitized or clean data that have been organized to suit a particular analysis. Consequently, many students do not know how to deal with real-world data or know how to apply simple data manipulation techniques to get the real-world data into a usable form. This book will expose students to the notion of data checking and make them aware of problems that exist when using real-world data. Third, most classes or texts use expensive commercial software or toolboxes. In this text, we use R to analyze financial data and implement models. R and the accompanying packages used in the text are freely available; therefore, any code or models we implement do not require any additional expenditure on the part of the student.Demonstrating rigorous techniques applied to real-world data, this text covers a wide spectrum of timely and practical issues in financial modeling, including return and risk measurement, portfolio management, options pricing, and fixed income analysis.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1 Prices.- Chapter 2 Individual Security Returns.- Chapter 3 Portfolio Returns.- Chapter 4 Risk.- Chapter 5 Factor Models.- Chapter 6 Risk-Adjusted Portfolio Performance Measures.- Chapter 7 Markowitz Mean-Variance Optimization.- Chapter 8 Fixed Income.- Chapter 9 Options.- Appendix A Getting Started with R. Appendix B Constructing a Hypothetical Portfolio.
Kevin Sullivan

Anti-Money Laundering in a Nutshell

Awareness and Compliance for Financial Personnel and Business Managers
Apress
Seiten XIV, 204 p. 5 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-4302-6160-5
       9781430261605
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Finance, general /
Anti–Money Laundering in a Nutshellis a concise, accessible, and practical guide to compliance with anti–money laundering law for financial professionals, corporate investigators, business managers, and all personnel of financial institutions who are required, under penalty of hefty fines, to get anti–money laundering training.Money laundering is endemic. As much as 5 percent of global GDP ($3.6 trillion) is laundered by criminals each year. It’s no wonder that every financial institution in the United States—including banks, credit card companies, insurers, securities brokerages, private funds, and money service businesses—must comply with complex examination, training, and reporting requirements mandated by a welter of federal anti–money laundering (AML) laws. Ignorance of crime is no excuse before the law. Financial institutions and businesses that unknowingly serve as conduits for money laundering are no less liable to prosecution and fines than those that condone or abet it.In Anti–Money Laundering in a Nutshell: Awareness and Compliance for Financial Personnel and Business Managers, Kevin Sullivan draws on a distinguished career as an AML agent and consultant to teach personnel in financial institutions what money laundering is, who does it, how they do it, how to prevent it, how to detect it, and how to report it in compliance with federal law. He traces the dynamic interplay among employees, regulatory examiners, compliance officers, fraud and forensic accountants and technologists, criminal investigators, and prosecutors in following up on reports, catching launderers, and protecting the integrity and reputations of financial institutions and businesses. In particular, corporate investigators will gain rich insights winnowed from the author's experiences as a New York State and federal investigator.

Inhaltsangaben

Mark A. Wood, University of Melbourne, Parkville, VIC, , Australia

Antisocial Media

Crime-watching in the Internet Age
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XI, 238 p. 4 illus., 2 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-63984-0
       9783319639840
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Cybercrime / Crime and the Media
This book provides a cutting-edge introduction to Internet-facilitated crime-watching and examines how social media have shifted the landscape for producing, distributing, and consuming footage of crime. In this thought-provoking work, Mark Wood examines the phenomenon of antisocial media: participatory online domains where footage of crime is aggregated, sympathetically curated, and consumed as entertainment. Focusing on Facebook pages dedicated to hosting footage of street fights, brawls, and other forms of bareknuckle violence, Wood demonstrates that to properly grapple with antisocial media, we must address not only their content, but also their software. In doing so, this study goes a long way to addressing the fundamental question: how have social media changed the way we consume crime?
Synthesizing criminology, media theory, software studies, and digital sociology, Antisocial Media is media criminology for the Facebook age. It is essential reading for students and scholars interested in social media, cultural criminology, and the crime-media interface.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Breaking the First Two Rules of Fight Club.- Chapter 3. Unpacking a Punch.- Chapter 4. Feeding Violence?.- Chapter 5. The Digital Arena.- Chapter 6. Conclusion: Breaking up and Breaking down the Fight. 
Kimberly Maich, Brock University, St. Catharines, ON, Canada; Darren Levine, Brock University, St. Catharines, ON, Canada; Carmen Hall, Fanshawe College, London, ON, Canada

Applied Behavior Analysis

Fifty Case Studies in Home, School, and Community Settings
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVIII, 392 p. 70 illus., 6 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-44792-6
       9783319447926
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Child and School Psychology / Behavioral Therapy
This textbook offers real-world case studies for using Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) to create, implement, and appraise behavior intervention programs across a variety of client situations. Its chapters are formatted for ease of use and retention and organized to focus on the core components of ABA: assessment, planning, implementation, evaluation, and research/ethics. Illustrative cases represent a diversity of problem behaviors, settings, social contexts, and life stages, and includes questions about data collection, goal setting, communication with families, and other processes of effective ABA practice. Together they emphasize not only the content knowledge involved in designing interventions, but also the interpersonal skills necessary for helping change complex challenging behaviors. These fifty case studies:Are suited to individual or team training.Present guiding questions regarding ABA process and professional practice.Feature charts, forms, templates, and other practical tools.Include links to Behavior Analyst Certification Board resources.Demonstrate the flexibility of ABA for use with children, adolescents, adults, or seniors.Applied Behavior Analysis: Fifty Case Studies in Home, School, and Community Settings is an essential text for graduate students, researchers, and practitioners in child and school psychology, behavior analysis, learning and instruction, counseling, and education. This singular volume models critical thinking and professional development in keeping with best practices and professional standards.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I. Assessment.- Chapter 1. Assessment Case Studies for Preschool to School-age Children.- Chapter 2. Assessment Case Studies from Adolescence to Adulthood.- Part II. Planning.- Chapter 3. Planning-Focused Case Studies for Preschool to School-age Children.- Chapter 4. Planning-Focused Case Studies from Adolescence to Adulthood.- Part III. Implementation.- Chapter 5. Implementation-based Case Studies for Preschool to School-age Children.- Chapter 6. Implementation-based Case Studies from Adolescence to Adulthood.- Part IV. Evaluation.- Chapter 7. Evaluation-centered Case Studies for Preschool to School-age Children.- Chapter 8. Evaluation-centered Case Studies from Adolescence to Adulthood.- Part V. Research and Ethics.- Chapter 9. Preschool to School-age Case Studies Constructed Around Research and Ethics.- Chapter 10. Adolescence to Adulthood Case Studies Constructed Around Research and Ethics.
Robert T. McGee

Applied Financial Macroeconomics and Investment Strategy

A Practitioner’s Guide to Tactical Asset Allocation
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVII, 251 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-42839-4
       9781137428394
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics / Investments and Securities
The absolute and relative performance of various asset classes is systematically related to macroeconomic trends. In this new book, Robert McGee provides a thorough guide to each stage of the business cycle and analyzes the investment implications using real-world examples linking economic dynamics to investment results.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Cycles and Trends 2. Business Cycles and Trends 3. Monetary Policy Cycles and Trends 4. Credit Cycles and Trends 5. Equity Market Cycles and Trends 6. Commodity Market Cycles and Trends 7. Other Major Trend Drivers: Technological Change and Globalization 8. Case Study: The 2007-2008 Financial Crisis
Robert T. McGee

Applied Financial Macroeconomics and Investment Strategy

A Practitioner’s Guide to Tactical Asset Allocation
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVII, 251 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-349-49143-8
       9781349491438
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics / Investments and Securities
The absolute and relative performance of various asset classes is systematically related to macroeconomic trends. In this new book, Robert McGee provides a thorough guide to each stage of the business cycle and analyzes the investment implications using real-world examples linking economic dynamics to investment results.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Cycles and Trends 2. Business Cycles and Trends 3. Monetary Policy Cycles and Trends 4. Credit Cycles and Trends 5. Equity Market Cycles and Trends 6. Commodity Market Cycles and Trends 7. Other Major Trend Drivers: Technological Change and Globalization 8. Case Study: The 2007-2008 Financial Crisis
Martyn Lyons, University of New South Wales , Sydney, NSW, Australia; Rita Marquilhas, Universidade de Lisboa, Lisboa, Portugal

Approaches to the History of Written Culture

A World Inscribed
Springer International Publishing
Seiten IX, 272 p. 14 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-54135-8
       9783319541358
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of the Book / Cultural History
This book investigates the history of writing as a cultural practice in a variety of contexts and periods. It analyses the rituals and practices determining intimate or ‘ordinary’ writing as well as bureaucratic and religious writing. From the inscribed images of ‘pre-literate’ societies, to the democratization of writing in the modern era, access to writing technology and its public and private uses are examined. In ten studies, presented by leading historians of scribal culture from seven countries, the book investigates the uses of writing in non-alphabetical as well as alphabetical script, in societies ranging from Native America and ancient Korea to modern Europe. The authors emphasise the material characteristics of writing, and in so doing they pose questions about the definition of writing itself. Drawing on expertise in various disciplines, they give an up-to-date account of the current state of knowledge in a field at the forefront of ‘Book History’.

Inhaltsangaben

1. A World Inscribed - Introduction.- 2. The Babylonian Scribes and their Libraries.- 3. Writings in the Korean Han’g?l Script by and for the Women of Chos?n Korea.- 4. Paper World: The Materiality of Loss in the Pre-modern Age.- 5. Writings on the Streets: Ephemeral Texts and Public Space in the Early Modern Hispanic World.- 6. Writing One’s Life: The French School of the Anthropology of Writing.- 7. Calendar, Chronicle and Songs of Sorrows: Generic Sources of Life Writing in Nineteenth-Century Finland.- 8. Reading the ‘Cheyenne Letter’: Towards a Typology of Inscription Beyond the Alphabet.- 9. The Scribal Culture of Children: A Fragmentary History.- 10. Policing Writing in the City, 1852-1945: The Invention of Scriptural Delinquency.- 11. QWERTYUIOP: How the Typewriter Influenced Writing Practices.- 12. The Future of the History of Writing.- Bibliography.- Index.
Olga Hubard, Columbia University, USA

Art Museum Education

Facilitating Gallery Experiences
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten IX, 191 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-41287-4
       9781137412874
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociology of Education / Early Childhood Education
How can museum educators facilitate experiences with artworks that are meaningful to viewers? How might educators negotiate divergences between visitors' perspectives and official information? What is the place of emotions and bodily sensations in art viewing? This book explores these and other questions key to generative gallery teaching.

Inhaltsangaben

Richard Ned Lebow, King’s College London, London, UK

Avoiding War, Making Peace

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 241 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-56092-2
       9783319560922
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
42,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Popular Science in Political Science and International Relations / Conflict Studies
This book recapitulates and extends Ned Lebow’s decades’ long research on conflict management and resolution. It updates his critique of conventional and nuclear deterrence, analysis of reassurance, and the conditions in which international conflicts may be amenable to resolution, or failing that, a significant reduction in tensions. This text offers a holistic approach to conflict management and resolution by exploring interactions among deterrence, reassurance, and diplomacy, and how they might most effectively be staged and combined.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: Generational Learning and Foreign Policy.- Chapter 3: Deterrence: A Political and Psychological Critique.- Chapter 4: Lessons of World War I.- Chapter 5: Lessons of the Cold War.- Chapter 6: How are Conflicts Resolved?.- Chapter 7: Conclusion.
Julie A. Chappell, Tarleton State University, Stephenville, TX, USA; Mallory Young, Tarleton State University, Stephenville, TX, USA

Bad Girls and Transgressive Women in Popular Television, Fiction, and Film

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 289 p. 18 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-47258-4
       9783319472584
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Culture and Gender / Popular Culture
This collection of essays focuses on the representations of a variety of “bad girls”—women who challenge, refuse, or transgress the patriarchal limits intended to circumscribe them—in television, popular fiction, and mainstream film from the mid-twentieth century to the present. Perhaps not surprisingly, the initial introduction of women into Western cultural narrative coincides with the introduction of transgressive women. From the beginning, for good or ill, women have been depicted as insubordinate. Today’s popular manifestations include such widely known figures as Lisbeth Salander (the “girl with the dragon tattoo”), The Walking Dead’s Michonne, and the queen bees of teen television series. While the existence and prominence of transgressive women has continued uninterrupted, however, attitudes towards them have varied considerably. It is those attitudes that are explored in this collection. At the same time, these essays place feminist/postfeminist analysis in a larger context, entering into ongoing debates about power, equality, sexuality, and gender.

Inhaltsangaben

1.Introduction - Mallory Young.- 2.“How do you like my darkness now?”: Women, Violence, and the Good ‘Bad Girl’ in Buffy the Vampire Slayer - Kaley A. Kramer.- 3. Hollywood’s Warrior Woman for the New Millennium - Kate Waites.- 4. Reading Kathleen Mallory: Trauma and Survival in the Detective Fiction of Carol O’Connell - Kathleen A. Kennedy.- 5. Vera Caspary’s Bedelia: Murder as a Domestic Art, or Lethal Home Economics - Kirsten T. Saxton.- 6. The Dirty Secret: Domestic Disarray in Chick Lit - Joanne Knowles.- 7. Good Teachers, Bad Teachers, and Comedic Performance in Popular American Cinema - Joel Gwynne.- 8. Mean Girls End Up Dead: The Dismal Fate of Teen Queen Bees in Popular Culture - Sara K. Day.- 9. Bad Girl, Bad Mother, Bad Queen: Catherine de’ Medici in Contemporary Fiction, Film, and History - William B. Robison.- 10. “Let Them Know That Men Did This”: Medusa, Rape, and Female Rivalry in Contemporary Film and Women’s Writing - Elizabeth Johnston.- 11. At the Crossroads: Carnival, Hybridity, Legendary Womanhood in Nalo Hopkinson’s Midnight Robber - N.A. Pierce.- 12. Just Another Monster: Michonne’s Defiance in The Walking Dead - Samaa Abdurraqib.- 13. Bad Girls in Outer Space: Brian K. Vaughan and Fiona Staples’ Saga and the Graphic Representation of Subversive Femininity - Mihaela Precup and Drago? Manea.
Patricia J. Robinson, Mountainview Consulting Group, Inc., Zillah, WA, USA; Jeffrey T. Reiter, HealthPoint , SEATTLE, WA

Behavioral Consultation and Primary Care

A Guide to Integrating Services
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIII, 347 p. 49 illus., 1 illus. in color. With online files/update.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-13953-1
       9783319139531
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Clinical Psychology / Primary Care Medicine
“In this 2nd edition, Robinson and Reiter give us an updated blueprint for full integration of behavioral health and primary care in practice. They review the compelling rationale, but their real contribution is telling us exactly HOW to think about it and how to do it. This latest book is a must for anyone interested in population health and the nuts and bolts of full integration through using the Primary Care Behavioral Health Consultation model.”Susan H McDaniel Ph.D., 2016 President, American Psychological Association Professor, University of Rochester Medical CenterThe best-selling guide to integrating behavioral health services into primary care is now updated, expanded and better than ever! Integration is exploding in growth, and it is moving inexorably toward the model outlined here. To keep pace, this revised text is a must for primary care clinicians and administrators. It is also essential reading for graduate classes in a variety of disciplines, including social work, psychology, and medicine. This updated edition includes: · A refined presentation of the Primary Care Behavioral Health (PCBH) model · The latest terms, trends and innovations in primary care · Comprehensive strategies and resource lists for hiring and training new Behavioral Health Consultants (BHC) · Step-by-step guidance for implementing the PCBH model · A plethora of evolved practice tools, including new Core Competency Tools for BHCs and primary care providers · Sample interventions for behaviorally influenced problems · The use of “Third Wave” behavior therapies in primary care · Detailed program evaluation instructions and tools · The latest on financing integrated care · An entire chapter on understanding and addressing the prescription drug abuse epidemic · Experienced guidance on ethical issues in the PCBH model · Improved patient education handoutsWith all of the changes in health care, the potential for the Primary Care Behavioral Health (PCBH) model to improve primary care—and the health of the population—is greater than ever.This book should be the first read for anyone interested in realizing the potential of integration.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I: The Perfect Storm of Primary Care.- Behavioral Consultation and Primary Care: The “Why Now?” and “How”.- A Primer on Primary Care.- Part II: The New Primary Care Team.- Recruiting and Training a Behavioral Health Consultant.- Behavioral Health Consultant Services, Location and Support.- Behavioral Health Consultant Core Competencies.- PCP and RN Competencies.- Part III: Making a Difference.- Theory and Action.- PCBH Program Evaluation.- Part IV: Let the Adventure Begin.- Practice Tools for the Behavioral Health Consultant.- Starting Up and Growing Up.- A Day in the Life of a Behavioral Health Consultant.- Pathway and Group Services.- Part V: Addressing the Challenges.- Common Ethical Issues.- Prescription Drug Abuse in Primary Care.- Challenging Moments: Provider, Patient and System.
Masao Ogaki, Keio University, Minato-Ku, Japan; Saori C. Tanaka, ATR Brain Information Communication Research Laboratory Group, Kyoto, Japan

Behavioral Economics

Toward a New Economics by Integration with Traditional Economics
Springer Singapore
Seiten XVII, 211 p. 24 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-981-10-6438-8
       9789811064388
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Behavioral/Experimental Economics / Neuropsychology
This book is intended as a textbook for a course in behavioral economics for advanced undergraduate and graduate students who have already learned basic economics. The book will also be useful for introducing behavioral economics to researchers. Unlike some general audience books that discuss behavioral economics, this book does not take a position of completely negating traditional economics. Its position is that both behavioral and traditional economics are tools that have their own uses and limitations. Moreover, this work makes clear that knowledge of traditional economics is a necessary basis to fully understand behavioral economics. Some of the special features compared with other textbooks on behavioral economics are that this volume has full chapters on neuroeconomics, cultural and identity economics, and economics of happiness. These are distinctive subfields of economics that are different from, but closely related to, behavioral economics with many important overlaps with behavioral economics. Neuroeconomics, which is developing fast partly because of technological progress, seeks to understand how the workings of our minds affect our economic decision making. In addition to a full chapter on neuroeconomics, the book provides explanations of findings in neuroeconomics in chapters on prospect theory (a major decision theory of behavioral economics under uncertainty), intertemporal economic behavior, and social preferences (preferences that exhibit concerns for others). Cultural and identity economics seek to explain how cultures and people’s identities affect economic behaviors, and economics of happiness utilizes measures of subjective well-being. There is also a full chapter on behavioral normative economics, which evaluates economic policies based on findings and theories of behavioral economics.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I Behavioral Economics and Neuroeconomics.- 1 What Is Behavioral Economics?.- 2 What Is Neuroeconomics?.- Part II   Prospect Theory and Bounded Rationality.- 3 Economic Behavior Under Uncertainty.- 4 Prospect Theory.- 5 Bounded Rationality.- Part III: Time-Discounting and Social Preferences.- 6 Intertemporal Behavior.- 7 Learning Theory and Experiments in Neuroeconomics.- 8 Social Preferences.- 9 Culture and Identity.- 10 Economics of Happiness.- 11 Normative Behavioral Economics.- Index.
J. Lee Whittington, University of Dallas

Biblical Perspectives on Leadership and Organizations

Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten IX, 223 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-47803-0
       9781137478030
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Management / Innovation/Technology Management
Biblical Perspectives on Leadership and Organizations links biblically-based principles to the study of organizational practices by examining topics including motives, meaningful work, and spiritual leadership from a biblical perspective integrated with findings from contemporary research.

Inhaltsangaben

Ben Kei Daniel, University of Otago, Dunedin, New Zealand

Big Data and Learning Analytics in Higher Education

Current Theory and Practice
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XX, 272 p. 56 illus., 48 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-06519-9
       9783319065199
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Educational Technology / Learning & Instruction
?This book focuses on the uses of big data in the context of higher education. The book describes a wide range of administrative and operational data gathering processes aimed at assessing institutional performance and progress in order to predict future performance, and identifies potential issues related to academic programming, research, teaching and learning?. Big data refers to data which is fundamentally too big and complex and moves too fast for the processing capacity of conventional database systems. The value of big data is the ability to identify useful data and turn it into useable information by identifying patterns and deviations from patterns?.

Inhaltsangaben

?Theory and Practice.- Global challenges in higher education.- Technological trends in higher education.- Data Science.- Big data in higher education.- Learning analytics.- Big Data Platforms and Systems.- Analytical platforms.- Systems.- Databases.- Tools.- Visualization.- Dashboards.- Measurement and Methodologies.- Measures, indicators, metrics.- Data mining techniques.- Data capture.- Data tracking.- Metadata.- Methodologies.- Institutional Best Practices.- Case studies/best practices.- Polyicy implication on learning, teaching, and research.- Challenges and opportunities.- Future Trends.- Lessons learned.- Future perspectives in big data.- Conclusions.
Daniel O'Brien, Southampton

Black Masculinity on Film

Native Sons and White Lies
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten IX, 221 p. 20 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-59322-1
       9781137593221
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
African American Culture / American Cinema
This book provides wide-ranging commentary on depictions of the black male in mainstream cinema. O’Brien explores the extent to which counter-representations of black masculinity have been achieved within a predominately white industry, with an emphasis on agency, the negotiation and malleability of racial status, and the inherent instability of imposed racial categories. Focusing on American and European cinema, the chapters  highlight actors (Woody Strode, Noble Johnson, Eddie Anderson, Will Smith), genres (jungle pictures, westerns, science fiction) and franchises (Tarzan, James Bond) underrepresented in previous critical and scholarly commentary in the field. The author argues that although the characters and performances generated in these areas invoke popular genre types, they display complexity, diversity and ambiguity, exhibiting aspects that are positive, progressive and subversive. This book will appeal to both the academic and the general reader interested in film, race, gender and colonial issues.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. The Natives Are Still Restless: Black representation in whitened Africa from Tarzan to Mandela.- 3. A King Among Bit Players: Noble Johnson and the art of racial ambiguity.- 4. Also Known as Rochester: Eddie Anderson, black stardom and World War II.- 5. Tall and Black in the Saddle: How African-American cowboys rode out of the shadows and into the sunset.- 6. Due afro-americani a Roma: John Kitzmiller, Woody Strode and remoulding stereotypes in Italian popular cinema.- 7. Bond and Blackness: Challenging racial schism in the 007 universe.- 8. Leaving the Overlook: Black heroism and white nightmare in The Shining.- 9. Saving the World for White Folks? Will Smith racializes science fiction as black man and man in black.
Olivia N. Perlow, Northeastern Illinois University , Chicago, IL, USA; Durene I. Wheeler, Northeastern Illinois University , Chicago, IL, USA; Sharon L. Bethea, Northeastern Illinois University , Chicago, IL, USA; BarBara M. Scott, Northeastern Illin

Black Women's Liberatory Pedagogies

Resistance, Transformation, and Healing Within and Beyond the Academy
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIII, 331 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-65788-2
       9783319657882
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Gender and Education / Higher Education
This interdisciplinary anthology sheds light on the frameworks and lived experiences of Black women educators. Contributors for this anthology submitted works from an array of academic disciplines and learning environments, inviting readers to bear witness to black women faculty’s classroom experiences, as well as their pedagogical approaches both inside and outside of the higher education classroom that have fostered transformative teaching-learning environments. Through this multidimensional lens, the editors and contributors view instruction and learning as a political endeavor aimed at changing the way we think about teaching, learning. and praxis. 

Inhaltsangaben

1. The curriculum that has no name.- 2. Dismantling the master’s house.- 3. Managing microaggressions.- 4. “Black skin, white masks”.- 5. “Black butterfly, set the sky on fire”.- 6. Black women challenging racism and sexism at the federal university of the recôncavo of bahia.- 7. Towards  a more adequate assessment of black women faculty’s teaching effectiveness.- 8. Teaching to transform: Social justice at the intersection of spirituality, feminism, art, and education.- 9. Calling on the divine and sacred energy of queens: Bringing Afrikan indigenous wisdom and spirituality to the academy.- 10. Pedagogy of healing in the creative writing classroom.- 11. Beyond diversity and inclusion.- 12. Challenging western hegemony through Caribbean literature.- 13. Philosophical “special topics”.- 14. How shall we learn to “sing our sacred song”?.-&nbs
p;15. Can you hear (and see) me now?.- 16. Challenging State Violence through Students’ Performance of Literature.- 17. “Uses of Anger” in the Classroom.- 18. Race-based learning communities.- 19. Critically engaged praxis.- 20. The Higher Education of Home. 
Daniel Drescher, Frankfurt am Main, Germany

Blockchain Basics

A Non-Technical Introduction in 25 Steps
Apress
Seiten XV, 255 p. 57 illus., 1 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-4842-2603-2
       9781484226032
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
24,60 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Database Management / Data Encryption
In 25 concise steps, you will learn the basics of blockchain technology. No mathematical formulas, program code, or computer science jargon are used. No previous knowledge in computer science, mathematics, programming, or cryptography is required. Terminology is explained through pictures, analogies, and metaphors.This book bridges the gap that exists between purely technical books about the blockchain and purely business-focused books. It does so by explaining both the technical concepts that make up the blockchain and their role in business-relevant applications.What You'll LearnWhat the blockchain is Why it is needed and what problem it solves Why there is so much excitement about the blockchain and its potential Major components and their purpose How various components of the blockchain work and interact Limitations, why they exist, and what has been done to overcome them Major application scenariosWho This Book Is For Everyone who wants to get a general idea of what blockchain technology is, how it works, and how it will potentially change the financial system as we know it

Inhaltsangaben

Stage 1: Terminology and Technical Foundations.- Step 1: Thinking in Layers and Aspects.- Step 2: Seeing the Big Picture.- Step 3: Recognizing the Potential.- Stage 2: Why the Blockchain Is Needed.- Step 4: Discovering the Core Problem.- Step 5: Disambiguating the Term.- Step 6: Understanding the Nature of Ownership.- Step 7: Spending Money Twice.- Stage 3: How the Blockchain Works.- Step 8: Planning the Blockchain.- Step 9: Documenting Ownership.- Step 10: Hashing Data.- Step 11: Hashing in the Real World.- Step 12: Identifying and Protecting User Accounts.- Step 13: Authorizing Transactions.- Step 14: Storing Transaction Data.- Step 15: Using the Data Store.- Step 16: Protecting the Data Store.- Step 17: Distributing the Data Store Among Peers.- Step 18: Verifying and Adding Transactions.- Step 19: Choosing a Transaction History.- Step 20: Paying for Integrity.- Step 21: Bringing the Pieces Together.- Stage 4: Limitations and Their Solutions.- Step 22: Seeing the Limitations.- Step 23: Reinventing the Blockchain.- Stage 5: Using the Blockchain, Summary, and Outlook.- Step 24: Using the Blockchain.- Step 25: Summarizing and Going Further.- Bibliography.-
A. Furnham; E. Petrova

Body Language in Business

Decoding the Signals
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XI, 217 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-0-230-24146-6
       9780230241466
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
48,14 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Office Management / Management
This innovative new work clarifies the misconceptions around body language while providing a scientific approach to understanding non-verbal communication at work. The authors explain why it is so important to understand body language in business, combining hard research evidence with unambiguous tips and practical applications.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction The Signal System Channels of Communication Everyday Signs and Signals Applying the Theory Personality, Emotions and Attitudes Lying and Body Language Conclusion
A. Furnham; E. Petrova

Body Language in Business

Decoding the Signals
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XI, 217 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-1-349-31719-6
       9781349317196
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Office Management / Management
This innovative new work clarifies the misconceptions around body language while providing a scientific approach to understanding non-verbal communication at work. The authors explain why it is so important to understand body language in business, combining hard research evidence with unambiguous tips and practical applications.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction The Signal System Channels of Communication Everyday Signs and Signals Applying the Theory Personality, Emotions and Attitudes Lying and Body Language Conclusion
David C. Evans, Kenmore, WA

Bottlenecks

Aligning UX Design with User Psychology
Apress
Seiten XXI, 260 p. 122 illus., 115 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-4842-2579-0
       9781484225790
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
26,74 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
User Interfaces and Human Computer Interaction / Applied Psychology
Learn the psychological constrictions of attention, perception, memory, disposition, motivation, and social influence that determine whether customers will be receptive to your digital innovations. Bottlenecks: Aligning UX Design with User Psychology fills a need for entrepreneurs, designers, and marketing professionals in the application of foundational psychology to user-experience design. The first generation of books on the topic focused on web pages and cognitive psychology. This book covers apps, social media, in-car infotainment, and multiplayer video games, and it explores the crucial roles played by behaviorism, development, personality, and social psychology. Author David Evans is an experimental psychology Ph.D. and senior manager of consumer research at Microsoft who recounts high-stakes case studies in which behavioral theory aligned digital designs with the bottlenecks in human nature to the benefit of users and businesses alike. Innovators in design and students of psychology will learn: The psychological processes determining users’ perception of, engagement with, and recommendation of digital innovations
Examples of interfaces before and after simple psychological alignments that vastly enhanced their effectiveness
Strategies for marketing and product development in an age of social media and behavioral targeting
Hypotheses for research that both academics and enterprises can perform to better meet users’ needs
Who This Book Is For Designers and entrepreneurs will use this book to give their innovations an edge on what are increasingly competitive platforms such as apps, bots, in-car apps, augmented reality content. Usability researchers and market researchers will leverage it to enhance their consulting and reporting. Students and lecturers in psychology departments will want it to help land employment in the private sector.  Praise “Bottlenecks’ is a tight and eminently actionable read for business leaders in startups and enterprises alike. Evans gives us a rich sense of key psychological processes and even richer examples of them in action.” - Nir Eyal, Author of Hooked: How to Build Habit-Forming Products  “Clients frequently ask our UX researchers and designers for deeper truths about why certain designs work and others fail. Bottlenecks offers practical explanations and evidence based on the idea that human cognition did not begin with the digital age.” - John Dirks, UX Director and Partner, Blink UX  “Bottlenecks brings together two very important aspects of user experience design: understanding users and translating this into business impact. A must-read for anyone who wants to learn both.” - Josh Lamar, Sr. UX Lead, Microsoft Outlook

Inhaltsangaben

Part I: The Bottlenecks of Attention.- Chapter 1: Foveal Acuity.- Chapter 2: Task Orientation.- Chapter 3: Attentional Focus.- Chapter 4: Gestalt Perception.- Part II: The Bottlenecks of Perception.- Chapter 5: Depth Perception.- Chapter 6: Motion Perception.- Part III: The Bottlenecks of Memory.- Chapter 7: Working Memory.- Chapter 8: Signal Detection Theory.- Chapter 9: Long-term Memory.- Chapter 10: Encoding and Retrieval.- Part IV: The Bottlenecks of Disposition.- Chapter 11: Personality.- Chapter 12: Development.- Chapter 13: Needs.- Chapter 14: Fun.- Part V: The Bottlenecks of Motivation.- Chapter 15: Schedules of Reinforcement.- Chapter 16: Escalating Commitment.- Chapter 17: Approach Avoidance.- Chapter 18: Routes to Persuasion.- Part VI: The Bottlenecks of Social Influence.- Chapter 19: Social Capital.- Chapter 20: Group Polarization.- Chapter 21: Social Influence.- Part VII: Then we will be maximally receptive to it and reward you with a viral cascade that has the potential to reach.- Chapter 22: Receptivity Thresholds.- Chapter 23: Six Degrees of Recommendation.- Chapter 24: Epilogue.- 
S. Vandermerwe

Breaking Through, 2nd Edition

Implementing Disruptive Customer Centricity
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVII, 292 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-137-39549-8
       9781137395498
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
42,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Marketing / Business Strategy/Leadership
Customer centricity is fundamental to business growth and ongoing success. Most executives appreciate the importance of it yet don't know how to execute it or sell the processes internally. This thoroughly revised edition of Breaking Through guides readers systematically through the ten breakthrough points of implementation, to explain how to execute a transformation to customer centricity, so that a company can engage continuously with its customers, making them allies and advocates with all the rewards that it brings. With updates on digital opportunities, social media, emerging markets (including Africa), and the social as well as financial impacts of customer centricity , this book successfully blends strategy with implementation and also features a range of innovative new and traditional business examples from across the globe. Easy to read, in-depth and full of practical advice, this is the essential step-by-step guide to implementing customer centricity to endure in the long-term.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction PART I: FIRST PHASE: THE AWAKENING Breakthrough 1: Create Strategic Discomfort and Excitement Breakthrough 2: Reframe New Beliefs PART II: SECOND PHASE: THE DISCOVERY Breakthrough 3: Articulate the 'Market Space' Breakthrough 4: Identify the Value Opportunities PART III: THIRD PHASE: THE STORY Breakthrough 5: Build a Compelling Case Breakthrough 6: Size the Prize PART IV: FOURTH PHASE: THE ENGAGEMENT Breakthrough 7: Model the Concept Breakthrough 8: Get People Working Together PART V: FIFTH PHASE: THE REWARD Breakthrough 9: Reach Critical Mass Breakthrough 10: Gather and Sustain Momentum
S. Vandermerwe

Breaking Through, 2nd Edition

Implementing Disruptive Customer Centricity
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVII, 292 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-349-48419-5
       9781349484195
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Marketing / Business Strategy/Leadership
Customer centricity is fundamental to business growth and ongoing success. Most executives appreciate the importance of it yet don't know how to execute it or sell the processes internally. This thoroughly revised edition of Breaking Through guides readers systematically through the ten breakthrough points of implementation, to explain how to execute a transformation to customer centricity, so that a company can engage continuously with its customers, making them allies and advocates with all the rewards that it brings. With updates on digital opportunities, social media, emerging markets (including Africa), and the social as well as financial impacts of customer centricity , this book successfully blends strategy with implementation and also features a range of innovative new and traditional business examples from across the globe. Easy to read, in-depth and full of practical advice, this is the essential step-by-step guide to implementing customer centricity to endure in the long-term.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction PART I: FIRST PHASE: THE AWAKENING Breakthrough 1: Create Strategic Discomfort and Excitement Breakthrough 2: Reframe New Beliefs PART II: SECOND PHASE: THE DISCOVERY Breakthrough 3: Articulate the 'Market Space' Breakthrough 4: Identify the Value Opportunities PART III: THIRD PHASE: THE STORY Breakthrough 5: Build a Compelling Case Breakthrough 6: Size the Prize PART IV: FOURTH PHASE: THE ENGAGEMENT Breakthrough 7: Model the Concept Breakthrough 8: Get People Working Together PART V: FIFTH PHASE: THE REWARD Breakthrough 9: Reach Critical Mass Breakthrough 10: Gather and Sustain Momentum
T. Calkins

Breakthrough Marketing Plans

How to Stop Wasting Time and Start Driving Growth
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten VII, 248 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-0-230-34033-6
       9780230340336
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
29,95 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Marketing / Business Strategy/Leadership
Almost every company creates a marketing plan each year, and many spend hundreds of employee hours researching, preparing and presenting their tomes to senior executives. But most marketing plans are a waste of time; they are too long, too complicated and too dense. They end up sitting on a shelf, unread and unrealized. Breakthrough Marketing Plans is an essential tool for people who create marketing plans and people who review them. The book provides simple, clear frameworks that are easy to apply, and highlights why marketing plans matter, where they go wrong and how to create a powerful plan that will help build a strong, profitable business.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction Who Needs a Marketing Plan, Anyway Why So Many Marketing Plans Are a Waste of Time What Really Matters: The One Page Summary The Best of the Best The Road Map: Step by Step Writing the Plan The Big Show Marketing Plan Template Example Twenty Strategic Initiatives Common Questions Sources Acknowledgements
David Feinleib, San Francisco, CA, USA

Bricks to Clicks

Why Some Brands Will Thrive in E-Commerce and Others Won't
Apress
Seiten XIV, 156 p. 21 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-4842-2804-3
       9781484228043
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
26,74 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Online Marketing/Social Media / Branding
Learn how to sell online. Real-world case studies and market insights from the world's largest brands reveal what the best brands are doing right to win online. Gain knowledge of best practices that enable brands and retailers to survive and thrive in the dynamic, fast-paced, and highly competitive world of e-commerce. Leveraging his first-hand knowledge as founder and CEO of Content Analytics, serial entrepreneur and author David Feinleib examines the threats and immense opportunity facing today’s most valuable brands. He demonstrates how brands that want to succeed in the fiercely competitive environment of e-commerce must understand and embrace the four key elements that control how much is sold and by whom: algorithms, content, convenience, and execution. What You'll Learn Learn the best practices in e-commerce of the world's leading brands and how to:Make the transition from selling in-store to selling (and winning) onlineConduct online brand audits to pinpoint opportunities for improvement Increase brand equity through high-quality content Maximize onine sales by understanding the key metrics you need to measure and optimize Who This Book Is For Brand managers, shopper marketing professionals, e-commerce managers, and sales professionals at brands and manufacturers; buyers, category managers, and merchants at retailers; and agency and search engine marketing professionals looking to develop expertise in e-commerce so they can expand the work they do with their brand and retailer clients

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Transforming the Organization.- Chapter 2: Regaining Control.- Chapter 3: First Insight, Then Action.- Chapter 4: Confront the New Path to Purchase (And Then Lead the Charge).- Chapter 5: Activate Your Brand Content.- Chapter 6: Using the Master Catalog.- Chapter 7: The Retailer Challenge (And Opportunity).- Chapter 8: The eCommerce Flywheel.- Chapter 9: From Bricks to Clicks to Omnichannel.- Chapter 10: Glossary.
Sheshalatha Reddy, Howard University, Washington, DC, , USA

British Empire and the Literature of Rebellion

Revolting Bodies, Laboring Subjects
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XL, 271 p. 7 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-57662-6
       9783319576626
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Postcolonial/World Literature / Twentieth-Century Literature
This book examines imperial and nationalist discourses surrounding three contemporaneous and unsuccessful mid-nineteenth-century colonial uprisings against the British Empire: the Sepoy Rebellion (1857) in India, the Morant Bay Rebellion (1865) in Jamaica, and the Fenian Rebellion (1867) in Ireland. In reading these three mid-century rebellions as flashpoints for the varying yet parallel attempts by imperialist colonialists, nationalists, and socialists to transform the oppressed colonized worker (the subjected laborer) into one whose identity is created and limited by labor (a laboring subject), this book also tracks varying modes of resistance to those attempts in all three colonies. In drawing from a range of historical, literary, and visual sources outside the borders of the Anglophone literary canon, this book contends that these texts not only serve as points of engagements with the rebellions but also constitute an archive of oppression and resistance.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: Revolting Bodies.- 1. Rise of the Machines: The State, its Subjects, and the Sepoy Rebellion.- 2. Inspiriting Flesh/Fleshing Out Spirit.- 3. Cellular Structures, Boundaries, and Networks: Tracing the Fenian Rebellion.- 4. Bodies in Labor, Bodies as Revolt.- Index.
J. Pendergast; J. Ward

Building a Successful Family Business Board

A Guide for Leaders, Directors, and Families
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten X, 263 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2011
ISBN 978-0-230-11154-7
       9780230111547
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
42,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Management / Organization
In Building a Successful Family Business Board , the authors show why private firms need the in-depth expertise and objective feedback that a well-chosen board, including qualified independent directors, can provide, and demonstrates how owners and directors can work together to ensure a long and profitable life for the firm.

Inhaltsangaben

Independent Boards of Directors and Family Business: Introduction to a Powerful Alliance Truth and Myths About Boards Meeting the Challenge The Role of the Board in the Family Business The Special Value of Independent Directors to the Family Business The Vital Role of the Board in Family Business Continuity Planning Designing the Board Finding and Selecting Directors Managing the Board Making The Most of Your Board Linking Family and Business Governance in Later Generations How You Can Contribute As a Director Close: Our Call to Action Appendices
D. Tjosvold, Lingnan Univeristy, Hong Kong

Building the Team Organization

How To Open Minds, Resolve Conflict, and Ensure Cooperation
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIV, 222 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-0-230-24712-3
       9780230247123
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
42,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Management / Organization
Interdependence is a basic characteristic of organizations, yet it is only recently that managers, professionals, and employees have begun to appreciate that organizational success depends upon teamwork. This book provides managers, professionals, and employees with a concise and powerful understanding of productive teamwork in organizations.

Inhaltsangaben

PART I: PRODUCTIVE TEAMWORK 1. Team Building is a Necessity 2. What Makes Teams Effective 3. Applying the Model: The Method Reinforces the Message 4. Get Started PART II: BUILDING TEAM RELATIONSHIPS 5. Leadership for Teamwork, Teamwork for Leadership 6. Strengthen Cooperative Goals 7. Working Open-Mindedly 8. Managing Conflict Constructively PART III: MAKING THE ORGANIZATION A TEAM 9. Teamwork with Customers 10. Team Organization: Departments Working Together 11. Partnering with Competitors and Government: Moving to the Teamwork Economy 12. Reflection: Becoming a Better Team
Anurag K. Agarwal, Indian Institute of Management, Ahmedabad, India

Business Leadership and Law

Springer India
Seiten XVII, 185 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-81-322-3680-1
       9788132236801
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership / International Economic Law, Trade Law
This book discusses doing business and making profit on the right side of the law. It explores the role of aligning business and legal strategies, and using the law as a powerful tool in making businesses successful. In this unique book, the author draws on his experience teaching future business leaders at the IIM Ahmedabad for more than a decade. Numerous case studies from across the globe and involving top-notch companies are discussed from both the business leadership and legal perspective, with takeaways included at the end. Intended for senior managers who would prefer to have the law as their friend, philosopher and guide, the book offers analyses of judgments from various courts, but mainly from the Supreme Court of India and the US Supreme Court, and provides judicial finality on several issues commonly faced by business leaders. As such, it serves as a valuable reference guide for senior business managers aspiring to take on top leadership positions.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. I am a Businessperson. Do I Need to Know Law?.- Chapter 2. How Can the Government Affect My Business?.- Chapter 3. How do I Align Legal and Business Strategy?.- Chapter 4. Can I Have a Role in Law Making?.- Chapter 5. Should I Really Take Contracts Seriously?.- Chapter 6. Will Intellectual Property Help My Business?.- Chapter 7. I Love Peace. No Disputes Please.- Chapter 8. I Must Make Profits. Do I Need to be Ethical?.- Chapter 9. Please Get Me a Good Lawyer.- Chapter 10. Law is My Friend, Philosopher and Guide.
Jan vom Brocke, University of Liechtenstein, Vaduz, Liechtenstein; Jan Mendling, Vienna University of Economics & Business, Vienna, Austria

Business Process Management Cases

Digital Innovation and Business Transformation in Practice
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 610 p. 292 illus., 2 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-58306-8
       9783319583068
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Process Management / Information Systems Applications (incl. Internet)
This book is the first to present a rich selection of over 30 real-world cases of how leading organizations conduct Business Process Management (BPM). The cases stem from a diverse set of industry sectors and countries on different continents, reporting on best practices and lessons learned. The book showcases how BPM can contribute to both exploitation and exploration in a digital world. All cases are presented using a uniform structure in order to provide valuable insights and essential guidance for students and practitioners.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Part I: Strategy and Governance.- Part II: Methods.- Part III: Information Technology.- Part IV: People and Culture.
Edward Chancellor, Trinity College, Cambridge, UK

Capital Returns

Investing Through the Capital Cycle: A Money Manager’s Reports 2002-15
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIV, 211 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-57164-9
       9781137571649
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
48,14 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Investments and Securities / Organization
We live in an age of serial asset bubbles and spectacular busts. Economists, policymakers, central bankers and most people in the financial world have been blindsided by these busts, while investors have lost trillions. Economists argue that bubbles can only be spotted after they burst and that market moves are unpredictable. Yet Marathon Asset Management, a London-based investment firm managing over $50 billion of assets has developed a relatively simple method for identifying and potentially avoiding them: follow the money, or rather the trail of investment. Bubbles whether they affect a whole economy or merely a single industry, tend to attract a splurge of capital spending. Excessive investment drives down returns and leads inexorably to a bust. This was the case with both the technology bubble at the turn of the century and the US housing bubble which followed shortly after. More recently, vast sums have been invested in mining and energy. From an investor's perspective, the trick is to avoid investing in sectors, or markets, where investment spending is unduly elevated and competition is fierce, and to put one's money to work where capital expenditure is depressed, competitive conditions are more favourable and, as a result, prospective investment returns are higher. This capital cycle strategy encourages investors to eschew the simple 'growth' and 'value' dichotomy and identify firms that can deliver superior returns either because capital has been taken out of an industry, or because the business has strong barriers to entry (what Warren Buffett refers to as a 'moat'). Some of Marathon's most successful investments have come from obscure, sometimes niche operations whose businesses are protected from the destructive forces of the capital cycle. Capital Returns is a comprehensive introduction to the theory and practical implementation of the capital cycle approach to investment. Edited and with an introduction by Edward Chancellor, the book brings together 60 of the most insightful reports written between 2002 and 2014 by Marathon portfolio managers. Capital Returns provides key insights into the capital cycle strategy, all supported with real life examples from global brewers to the semiconductor industry - showing how this approach can be usefully applied to different industry conditions and how, prior to 2008, it helped protect assets from financial catastrophe. This book will be a welcome reference for serious investors who looking to maximise portfolio returns over the long run.

Inhaltsangaben

Contents List Of Charts And Tables Foreword Editor '' ''s Note Introduction PART I: INVESTMENT PHILOSOPHY 1. Capital Cycle Revolution 1.1 Evolution Of Cooperation (February 2004) 1.2 Cod Philosophy (August 2004) 1.3 This Time '' ''s No Different (May 2006) 1.4 Supercycle Woes (May 2011) 1.5 No Small Beer (February 2010) 1.6 Oil Peak (February 2012) 1.7 Major Concerns (March 2014) 1.8 A Capital Cycle Revolution (March 2014) 1.9 Growth Paradox (September 2014) 2. Value In Growth 2.1 Warning Labels (September 2002) 2.2 Long Game (March 2003) 2.3 Double Agents (June 2004) 2.4 Digital Moats (August 2007) 2.5 Quality Time (August 2011) 2.6 Escaping The Semis '' '' Cycle (February 2013) 2.7 Research Enabler (March 2013) 2.8 Value In Growth (August 2013) 2.9 Quality Control (May 2014) 2.10 Under The Radar (February 2015) 3. Management Matters 3.1 Food For Thought (September 2003) 3.2 Meet The Management (March 2007) 3.3 Cyclical Misteps (August 2010) 3.4 A Capital Allocator (September 2010) 3.5 Northern Stars (March 2011) 3.6 Say On Pay (February 2012) 3.7 Happy Families (March 2012) 3.8 The Wit And Wisdom Of Johann Rupert (June 2013) 3.9a Meeting Of Minds (June 2014) 3.10 Culture Vulture (February 2015) PART II - BOOM, BUST, BOOM 4. Accidents-In-Waiting 4.1 Accidents-In-Waiting (2002-08) 4.2 The Builders '' '' Bank (May 2004) 4.3 Insecuritization (November 2002) 4.4 Carry On Private Equity (December 2004) 4.5 Blowing Bubbles (May 2006) 4.6 Pass The Parcel (February 2007) 4.7 Property Fiesta (February 2007) 4.8 Conduit Street (August 2007) 4.9 On The Rocks (September 2007) 4.10 Seven Deadly Sins (November 2009) 5. The Living Dead 5.1 Right To Buy (November 2008) 5.2 Spanish Deconstruction (November 2010) 5.3 Piigs Can Fly (November 2011) 5.4 Broken Banks (September 2012) 5.5 Twilight Zone (November 2012) 5.6 Capital Punishment (March 2013) 5.7 Living Dead (November 2013) 5.8 Relax, Mr Piketty (August 2014) 6. China Syndrome 6.1 Oriental Tricks (February 2003) 6.2 Dressed To Impress (November 2003) 6.3 Game Of Loans (March 2005) 6.4 What Lies Beneath (February 2014) 6.5 Value Traps (September 2014) 7. Inside The Mind Of Wall Street 7.1 A Complaint (December 2003) 7.2 Private Party (December 2005) 7.3 Christmas Cheer (December 2008) 7.4 Former Greedspin Boss Flees China (December 2010) 7.5 Occupy Bundestag (December 2011) 7.6 Season '' ''s Greetings (December 2012) 7.7 Lunch With The Gir (December 2013) 7.8 All Change (December 2014)
Marina Zosya

CFO Techniques

A Hands-on Guide to Keeping Your Business Solvent and Successful
Apress
Seiten XIII, 380 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2011
ISBN 978-1-4302-3756-3
       9781430237563
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business and Management, general /
CFO Techniques: A Hands-on Guide to Keeping Your Business Solvent and Successful is a comprehensive and instructive working manual for multitasking chief financial officers and controllers working in the fast-paced commercial environment. Every senior financial professional with an ever-broadening span of control will benefit from this complete outline of the core activities—with specific descriptions of individual tasks—comprising the daily agenda of a successful CFO or controller. It covers everything from traditional responsibilities like budgeting and financial reporting, to more innovative tasks like performance analytics and business strategy development. While emphasizing specific guidelines on what it takes to excel as a company's head of finance, the book refrains from overwhelming dryness by using cultural references, real-life examples, and a casual tone. With its bite-sized, easy-to-read chapters, CFO Techniques serves as both an invaluable desktop reference handbook and a good bedtime read. Whether you need a quick recommendation on treasury procedures, adhering to GAAP, keeping funds safe from embezzlers, or advice on dealing with the CEO, you will find the answers in this book. Guides you through CFO/controller core responsibilities, function by function Serves as a reference manual on financial matters specific to the small and mid-size commercial environment Goes beyond finance and accounting, addressing the administrative and behavioral issues all CFOs occasionally must address 

Inhaltsangaben

Josh Steimle, Lantau Island, Hong Kong

Chief Marketing Officers at Work

Apress
Seiten XVI, 330 p. 1 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-4842-1930-0
       9781484219300
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
28,88 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Marketing / Careers in Business and Mangagement
Read 29 in-depth, candid interviews with people holding the top marketing roles within their organizations. Interviewees include CMOs and other top marketers from established companies and organizations—such as Linda Boff of GE, Jeff Jones of Target, and Kenny Brian of the Harvard Business School—to startups—such as Matt Price of Zendesk, Seth Farbman of Spotify, and Heather Zynczak of Domo. Interviewer Josh Steimle (contributor to business publications such as Forbes, Mashable, and TechCrunch and founder of an international marketing agency) elicits a bounty of biographical anecdotes, professional insights, and career advice from each of the prominent marketers profiled in this book. Chief Marketing Officers at Work:Tells how CMOs and other top marketers from leading corporations, nonprofits, government entities, and startups got to where they are today, what their jobs entail, and the skills they use to thrive in their roles.Shows how top marketing executives continuously adapt to changes in technology, language, and culture that have an impact on their jobs.Locates where the boundaries between role of CMOs and the roles of CEOs, CTOs, and COOs are blurring.Explores how the CMO decisions are now driven by data rather than gut feelings.The current realities in marketing are clearly revealed in this book as interviewees discuss the challenges of their jobs and share their visions and techniques for breaking down silos, working with other departments, and following the data. These no-holds-barred interviews will be of great interest to all those who interact with marketing departments, including other C-level executives, managers, and other professionals at any level within the organization.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Seth Farbman.- Chapter 2 : Heather Zynczak.- Chapter 3: Brian Kenny.- Chapter 4: Louis Gagnon.- Chapter 5: Kevin Marasco.- Chapter 6: Kraig Swensrud.- Chapter 7: Patrick Adams.- Chapter 8: Edith Wong.- Chapter 9: Michael Mendenhall.- Chapter 10: Virginie Glaenzer.- Chapter 11: Ada Chen Rekhi.- Chapter 12: Kieran Hannon.- Chapter 13: Phil Bienert.- Chapter 14: Margaret Molloy.- Chapter 15: Tom Buday.- Chapter 16: John Costello.- Chapter 17: Luanne Calvert.- Chapter 18: Trish Mueller.- Chapter 19: Peter Horst.- Chapter 20: Brian Beitler.- Chapter 21: Walter Levitt.- Chapter 22: Geraldine Calpin.- Chapter 23: Matt Price.- Chapter 24: Susan Lintonsmith.- Chapter 25: Linda Boff.- Chapter 26: Lauren Crampsie.- Chapter 27: Jeff Jones.- Chapter 28: David Doctorow.- Chapter 29: Rishi Dave.
Stephanie Olsen, Max Planck Institute for Human Development, Germany

Childhood, Youth and Emotions in Modern History

National, Colonial and Global Perspectives
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIII, 264 p. 10 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-48483-3
       9781137484833
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Social History / World History, Global and Transnational History
Childhood, Youth and Emotions in Modern History is the first book to innovatively combine the history of childhood and youth with the history of emotions, combining multiple national, colonial, and global perspectives.

Inhaltsangaben

Keith O'Sullivan, Dublin City University, Dublin, Ireland; Pádraic Whyte, Trinity College Dublin, Dublin, Ireland

Children's Literature Collections

Approaches to Research
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten X, 261 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-60311-1
       9781137603111
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Children's Literature / European Literature
This book provides scholars, both national and international, with a basis for advanced research in children’s literature in collections. Examining books for children published across five centuries, gathered from the collections in Dublin, this unique volume advances causes in collecting, librarianship, education, and children’s literature studies more generally. It facilitates processes of discovery and recovery that present various pathways for researchers with diverse interests in children’s books to engage with collections. From book histories, through bookselling, information on collectors, and histories of education to close text analyses, it is evident that there are various approaches to researching collections. In this volume, three dominant approaches emerge: history and canonicity, author and text, ideals and institutions. Through its focus on varied materials, from fiction to textbooks, this volume illuminates how cities can articulate a vision of children's literature through particular collections and institutional practices.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction; Pádraic Whyte and Keith O’Sullivan.- Chapter 1. Instruction with Delight; Máire Kennedy.- Chapter 2. Irish Children’s Books 1696?1810; Anne Markey.- Chapter 3. The Great Famine in Irish History Textbooks, 1900–1971; Ciara Boylan.- Chapter 4. The Development of the Irish Immigrant Experience in Irish-American Children’s Literature 1850?1900; Ciara Gallagher.- Chapter 5. Time and the Child; Aileen Douglas.- Chapter 6. Picking Grandmamma’s Pockets; Jarlath Killeen and Marion Durnin.- Chapter 7. From Superstition to Enchantment; Ciara Ní Bhroin.- Chapter 8. ‘Firing for the Hearth’; Pádraic Whyte.- Chapter 9. Kildare Place Society and the Beginnings of Formal Education in Ireland; Susan M. Parkes.- Chapter 10. Homespun Books; Julie Anne Stevens.- Chapter 11. The Puffin Story Books Phenomenon; Keith O’Sullivan.- Chapter 12. Picturing Possibilities in Children’s Book Collections; Valerie Coghlan.
X. Zhang, University of Cape Town, South Africa; H. Wasserman, University of Westminster, UK; W. Mano, University of Nottingham Ningbo, China

China's Media and Soft Power in Africa

Promotion and Perceptions
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XII, 237 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-54565-7
       9781137545657
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
African Culture / Asian Culture
This volume brings together scholars from different disciplines and nations to examine and assess the effectiveness of China's soft power initiatives in Africa. It throws light not only on China's engagement with Africa but also on how China's increasing influence is received in the African media.

Inhaltsangaben

1. A World of Shared Influence; Xiaoling Zhang 2. Reflections of a Soft Power Agnostic; Gary D. Rawnsley 3. The Scramble for Asian Soft Power in Africa; Daya Kishan Thussu 4. Evolving Media Interactions between China and Africa; Ran Jijun 5. How Much 'Soft Power' Does China Have in Africa?; Helge Rønning 6. Why Are Chinese Media in Africa? Evidence from Three Decades of Xinhua's News Coverage of Africa; Dani Madrid-Morales 7. Constructive Journalism: A New Journalistic Paradigm of Chinese Media in Africa; Zhang Yanqiu and Simon Matingwina 8. Chinese Perception of Soft Power: The Role of the Media in Shaping Chinese Views and Discourses of Foreign Aid to Africa; May Tan-Mullins 9. Journalists and Public Perceptions of the Politics of China's Soft Power in Kenya under the 'Look East' Foreign Policy; Jacinta Mwende Maweu 10. Building Blocks and Themes in Chinese Soft Power towards Africa; Bob Wekesa 11. Positive Portrayal of Sino-African Relations in the Ethiopian Press; Terje Skjerdal and Fufa Gusu 12. Engaging with China's Soft Power in Zimbabwe: Harare Citizens' Perception of China-Zimbabwe Relations; Winston Mano 13. China's Soft Power in Sudan: Increasing Activity but How Effective?; Daniel Johanson 14. Chinese Soft Power in Africa: Findings, Perspectives, and More Questions; Herman Wasserman
X. Zhang, University of Cape Town, South Africa; H. Wasserman, University of Westminster, UK; W. Mano, University of Nottingham Ningbo, China

China's Media and Soft Power in Africa

Promotion and Perceptions
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XII, 237 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-349-71377-6
       9781349713776
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
69,54 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
African Culture / Asian Culture
This volume brings together scholars from different disciplines and nations to examine and assess the effectiveness of China's soft power initiatives in Africa. It throws light not only on China's engagement with Africa but also on how China's increasing influence is received in the African media.

Inhaltsangaben

1. A World of Shared Influence; Xiaoling Zhang 2. Reflections of a Soft Power Agnostic; Gary D. Rawnsley 3. The Scramble for Asian Soft Power in Africa; Daya Kishan Thussu 4. Evolving Media Interactions between China and Africa; Ran Jijun 5. How Much 'Soft Power' Does China Have in Africa?; Helge Rønning 6. Why Are Chinese Media in Africa? Evidence from Three Decades of Xinhua's News Coverage of Africa; Dani Madrid-Morales 7. Constructive Journalism: A New Journalistic Paradigm of Chinese Media in Africa; Zhang Yanqiu and Simon Matingwina 8. Chinese Perception of Soft Power: The Role of the Media in Shaping Chinese Views and Discourses of Foreign Aid to Africa; May Tan-Mullins 9. Journalists and Public Perceptions of the Politics of China's Soft Power in Kenya under the 'Look East' Foreign Policy; Jacinta Mwende Maweu 10. Building Blocks and Themes in Chinese Soft Power towards Africa; Bob Wekesa 11. Positive Portrayal of Sino-African Relations in the Ethiopian Press; Terje Skjerdal and Fufa Gusu 12. Engaging with China's Soft Power in Zimbabwe: Harare Citizens' Perception of China-Zimbabwe Relations; Winston Mano 13. China's Soft Power in Sudan: Increasing Activity but How Effective?; Daniel Johanson 14. Chinese Soft Power in Africa: Findings, Perspectives, and More Questions; Herman Wasserman
G. Roberts

Christian Scripture and Human Resource Management

Building a Path to Servant Leadership through Faith
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten IX, 253 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-44066-2
       9781137440662
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Christianity / Management
Christian Scripture and Human Resource Management provides a much-needed Christian faith-based perspective on human resources management written for both line and human resource managers using the framework of servant leadership, the mandated leadership approach used by Jesus.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Servant Leader Human Resource Management (SLHRM): The 'City on the Hill' Foundational Principles of Organizational Integrity 2. Biblical Foundation for Servant Leader Principles 3. Servant Leader Human Resource Management Organizational Integrity 4. The SLHRM Change Management Process and the Barriers to Effective Change 5. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Principles of Empowerment and Discipleship Making 6. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Principles of Fair Employee Treatment 7. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Principles of Work/life Balance and Margin 8. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Performance Management Principle 9. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Staffing Principles 10. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Training and Development 11. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Compensation Management 12. Final Reflections
G. Roberts

Christian Scripture and Human Resource Management

Building a Path to Servant Leadership through Faith
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten IX, 253 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-349-49454-5
       9781349494545
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Christianity / Management
Christian Scripture and Human Resource Management provides a much-needed Christian faith-based perspective on human resources management written for both line and human resource managers using the framework of servant leadership, the mandated leadership approach used by Jesus.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Servant Leader Human Resource Management (SLHRM): The 'City on the Hill' Foundational Principles of Organizational Integrity 2. Biblical Foundation for Servant Leader Principles 3. Servant Leader Human Resource Management Organizational Integrity 4. The SLHRM Change Management Process and the Barriers to Effective Change 5. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Principles of Empowerment and Discipleship Making 6. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Principles of Fair Employee Treatment 7. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Principles of Work/life Balance and Margin 8. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Performance Management Principle 9. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Staffing Principles 10. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Training and Development 11. Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Compensation Management 12. Final Reflections
François Penz, University of Cambridge, Cambridge, UK; Richard Koeck, University of Liverpool, Liverpool, UK

Cinematic Urban Geographies

Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XXI, 350 p. 74 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-46830-7
       9781137468307
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Film Theory / Film History
This book proposes new methodological tools and approaches in order to tease out and elicit the different facets of urban fragmentation through the medium of cinema and the moving image, as a contribution to our understanding of cities and their topographies. In doing so it makes a significant contribution to the literature in the growing field of cartographic cinema and urban cinematics, by charting the many trajectories and points of contact between film and its topographical context. Under the influence of new technologies, the opening and the availability of previously unexplored archives but also the contribution of new scholars with novel approaches in addition to new work by experienced academics, Cinematic Urban Geographies demonstrates how we can reread the cinematic past with a view to construct the urban present and anticipate its future.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. The cinema in the map - the case of Braun and Hogenberg’s Civitates Orbis Terrarum .- 3. Cinematic cartographies of urban space and the descriptive spectacle of aerial views (1898-1948).- 4. Charting the Criminal: Maps as devices for orientation and control in Fritz Lang´s “M” (1931) and Francesco Rosi´s “Hands Over the City” (1963).- 5. ‘Merely local’: film and the depiction of place, especially in local documentary.- 6. The Cine-Tourist’s Map of New Wave Paris.- 7. Set-jetting, Film Pilgrimage and The Third Man.- 8. The Cinematic Shtetl as a Site of Postmemory.- 9. “Where Is The Dust That Has Not Been Alive?”: Screening The Vanished Polis In Stirbitch: An Imaginary.- 10. Melancholy Urbanism: Distant Horizons and the Presentation of Place.- 11. Cinematic urban archaeology – the Battersea case.- 12. The cinematic and the televisual city: south London revisited.- 13. Los Angeles and Hollywood in Film and French Theory: Agnès Varda’s Lions Love (1969) and Edgar Morin’s California Journal (1970).- 14. Urban Cinematic Palimpsests: Moving Image Databases for the City.- 15. Geographies of the Moving Image: Translating cinematic representation into geographic information.- 16. Ghost Cinema App: Temporal Ubiquity and the Condition of Being in Everytime.
Emmanuel K. Ngwainmbi, Independent Scholar, Elizabeth City, NC, USA

Citizenship, Democracies, and Media Engagement among Emerging Economies and Marginalized Communities

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIII, 387 p. 14 illus., 6 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-56214-8
       9783319562148
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Cultural Policy and Politics / Media and Communication
This volume analyzes the contexts in which emerging economies in Africa, the Caribbean, Central and South America, the Middle East, and Asia can chart their socioeconomic futures through progressive democratic practices and media engagement. Using political and development communication, along with case studies from selected countries in these regions, the volume addresses human rights policies, diplomatic practices, democratization, good governance, identity politics, terrorism, collective action, gendered crimes, political psychology, and citizen journalism as paradigms for sustainable growth. Through practical experiences and field research in the selected countries, scholars show how personal and national freedoms as well as business deals have been negotiated in a bid to create a new socioeconomic culture within the nations.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. An External Examination of Emerging Democratic Institutions and the Problem of Social and Economic Security.- Chapter 2. Navigating the Development Aid Challenge: Towards a More Encompassing Framework.- Chapter 3. The Impact of Regionalism on Democracy Building: An examination of the Southern African Development Community (SADC).- Chapter 4. The Role of Cyberactivism in Disambiguating the Cosmopolis and Discourse of Democratization.- Chapter 5. The Changing Face of Television and Public Policy Implications in India.- Chapter 6. Television, Political Imagery, and Elections in India.- Chapter 7. Media Exposure of Corruption and Re-election Chances of Incumbent Parties in Africa.- Chapter 8. The Impact of Governmental Strategies on Black Political Discourse Groups: Voices Heard from the Black Panther Party to the Black Lives Matter Movement.- Chapter 9. The Mediatization of Violence: A Model for Utilizing Public Discourse and Networking to Counter Global Terrorism.- Chapter 10. The Assassination of Journalists in Mexico: A Product of Criminal and Electoral Competition.- Chapter 11. Land Tenure, Community Space and Media Engagement as Determinants of Good Governance in a Central American State: The Case of Guyana.- Chapter 12. Moving Beyond “Illiberal Democracy” in Sub-Saharan Africa: Recalling the Significance of Local Governance.- Chapter 13. Use and Misuse of Data in Advocacy, Media and Opinion Polls in Africa: Realities, Challenges and Opportunities.- Chapter 14. Media Advocacy and Strategic Networking in Transforming Norms and Policies.
Susanna Johansson, Lund University, Lund, Sweden; Kari Stefansen, Norwegian Social Research, Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences, Oslo, Norway; Elisiv Bakketeig, Norwegian Social Research, Oslo and Akershus University College of

Collaborating Against Child Abuse

Exploring the Nordic Barnahus Model
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXXIII, 384 p. 6 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-58387-7
       9783319583877
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
29,96 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Crime and Society / Youth Offending and Juvenile Justice
This book is open access under a CC BY 4.0 license.

This edited collection explores the background and implementation of the Nordic Barnahus (or 'Children's House') model – recognised as one of the most important reforms related to children who are the victims of crime in the Nordic region. This book discusses both its potential to affect change and the challenges facing it. The model was introduced as a response to a growing recognition of the need for more integrated and child-centred services for children exposed to violence and sexual abuse. In the Barnahus structure, different professions work together to ensure that victimized children receive help and treatment and that their legal rights are met. This original study is organised into four broad themes: child-friendliness, support and treatment; the forensic child investigative interview; children’s rights perspectives; and interagency collaboration and professional autonomy. Each themed section includes in-depth chapters from different Nordic countries, outlining and analysing the practice and outcomes of the collaborative work engaged in by Barnahus from different perspectives. The introductory and concluding chapters offer a comparative lens useful for policy and practice implementation within the Nordic welfare state context and beyond, ensuring this book has global academic and practical appeal.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Implementing the Nordic Barnahus Model.- Theme I: Child-Friendliness, Support and Treatment.- Chapter 2:  Staging a Caring Atmosphere.- Chapter 3: To be Summoned to Barnahus.- Chapter 4: Treatment in Barnahus.- Theme II: The Forensic Child Investigative Interview.- Chapter 5: The Nordic Model of Handling Children`s Testimonies.- Chapter 6: The NICHD Protocol.- Chapter 7: Investigating Suspected Child Abuse at the Forensic Psychology Unit for Children and Adolescents.- Chapter 8: Sequential Interviews with Preschool Children in Norwegian Barnahus.- Theme III: Children’s Rights Perspectives.- Chapter 9: Child Friendly Justice.- Chapter 10: Children’s Right to Information in Barnahus.- Chapter 11: The Swedish ‘Special Representatives for Children’ and their Role in Barnahus.- Theme IV: Interagency Collaboration and Professional Autonomy.- Chapter 12: Power Dynamics in Barnahus Collaboration.- Chapter 13: Exploring Juridification in the Norwegian Barnahus Model.- Chapter 14: The Establishment of Barnahus in Denmark.-  Chapter 15: Barnahus for Adults?.-  Chapter 16: Epilogue: The Barnahus model.
Thijs Bosters, Supreme Court of the Netherlands, The Hague, The Netherlands

Collective Redress and Private International Law in the EU

T.M.C. Asser Press
Seiten XV, 268 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-94-6265-185-2
       9789462651852
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law /
This book specifically covers issues regarding jurisdiction and the recognition andenforcement of judgments in cross-border mass disputes relating to financial services.Collective redress mechanisms, legal mechanisms which can be used to resolve mass disputescollectively, are growing more important. Due to the global increase in cross-bordertrade and financial transactions, the number of cross-border mass disputes has increased.In the EU, several prototypes of collective redress mechanism exist that can be used toresolve mass disputes and, aside from the EU’s recommendation on the drafting oflaws relating to collective redress, a reevaluation of the Brussels Regulation has alsotaken place as on 10 January 2015 the Brussels I-bis Regulation replaced the old BrusselsRegulation dating from 2000. In spite of a minor reference to collective redress in the Commission proposal, BrusselsI-bis does not contain any provision relating to collective redress. As a result, many questionsregarding cross-border mass disputes and the relevant private international law issues remainunanswered and unresolved. This book sets out to describe the most important prototypesby referring to actual collective redress mechanisms. In addition, it also sets out how parties to such mass disputes can confer jurisdiction to courtsin the EU and what the various pitfalls are. Moreover, the rules concerning the recognitionand enforcement of judgments originating from a collective procedure are listed. Ascross-border collective redress mechanisms and the rules of private international law to beused in such a context are still being developed, the goals of private international law andthe goals of the referred collective redress mechanisms are analysed to provide an insightinto how these sets of rules should and could be employed. This book is primarily aimed at researchers, practitioners and lawmakers actively involvedin and/or professionally interested in the field of private international law and collectiveredress mechanisms and should prove very useful in providing them with a greater in-depthunderstanding of the issues at hand. Thijs Bosters is a law clerk at the Dutch Supreme Court. Prior to his work at the SupremeCourt, he was an attorney-at-law with NautaDutilh in The Netherlands, where he workedin the Litigation & Arbitration department.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Collective redress mechanisms in the EU.- German KapMuG procedure.- Dutch collective action.- Dutch WCAM procedure.- Jurisdiction in cross-border mass disputes 76.- Jurisdiction and the KapMuG.- Jurisdiction and the Dutch collective action 127.- Jurisdiction and the WCAM.- Parallel proceedings.- Goals of the Brussels Regulation regarding jurisdiction.- Recognition and enforcement of foreign collective redress judgments.- Recognition and enforcement of KapMuG judgments.- Recognition and enforcement in relation to a collective action procedure.- Recognition and enforcement of a WCAM judgment.- Goals of the Brussels Regulation regarding recognition and enforcement.- Making cross-border collective redress possible.- Summary.- Relevant developments and possible future research.- Bibliography.- Curriculum vitae.- Index7632.
Estelle Paranque, New College of the Humanities, London, UK; Nate Probasco, Briar Cliff University, Sioux City, IA, USA; Claire Jowitt, University of East Anglia, Norwich, UK

Colonization, Piracy, and Trade in Early Modern Europe

The Roles of Powerful Women and Queens
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 255 p. 3 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-57158-4
       9783319571584
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of Early Modern Europe / Imperialism and Colonialism
This collection brings together essays examining the international influence of queens, other female rulers, and their representatives from 1450 through 1700, an era of expanding colonial activity and sea trade. As Europe rose in prominence geopolitically, a number of important women—such as Queen Elizabeth I of England, Catherine de Medici, Caterina Cornaro of Cyprus, and Isabel Clara Eugenia of Austria—exerted influence over foreign affairs. Traditionally male-dominated spheres such as trade, colonization, warfare, and espionage were, sometimes for the first time, under the control of powerful women. This interdisciplinary volume examines how they navigated these activities, and how they are represented in literature. By highlighting the links between female power and foreign affairs, Colonization, Piracy, and Trade in Early Modern Europe contributes to a fuller understanding of early modern queenship.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- I. Demonstration of Power.- 2. Mary I, Mary of Guise and the Strong Hand of the Scots: Marian Policy in Ulster and Anglo-Scottish Diplomacy, 1553-1558.- 3. Catherine de Medici and Huguenot Colonization, 1560-1567.- 4. Isabel Clara Eugenia, Governor of the Spanish Netherlands: Trade, Politics, & Warfare, Ruling like a King, 1621-1633.- II. Diplomatic Strategies.- 5. Caterina Cornaro and the Colonization of Cyprus.- 6. Trade and Piracy: The Role of a Potential Queen Consort in the 1620s.- 7. 'The Princesses' Representative' or Renegade Entrepreneur? Marie Petit, the Silk Trade, and Franco-Persian Diplomacy.- III. Exotic Encounters.- 8. 'I would not have given it for a wilderness of monkeys': Turquoise, Queenship, and the Exotic.- 9. A Vision on Queen Elizabeth's Role in Colonizing America: Stephen Parmenius's De Navigatione (1582).- 10. Captains, Kings, Queens: Politics, Piracy, and the Sea in Middleton's The Phoenix (c. 1603-04)
B. Scott-Quinn, Henley Business School, UK

Commercial and Investment Banking and the International Credit and Capital Markets

A Guide to the Global Finance Industry and its Governance
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XX, 469 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-0-230-37047-0
       9780230370470
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
42,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Banking / Accounting/Auditing
An introductory guide to finance and the financial markets, designed to help professionals and students understand the complex finance industry. It is a modern text that covers all major developments in markets in the period since the year 2000, the beginning of the global financial, eurozone and US government debt crises, up to the start of 2012.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface PART 1: THE FUNDAMENTALS OF FINANCE, MARKETS AND THE FINANCIAL FIRMS The Price Mechanism and the Three Pillars of Finance Appendix - Valuation Models, Issues in Bank Asset Valuation, Discounted Cash Flow Valuation of Bonds and Equities Balance Sheets: The Key to Understanding Financial Intermediation Financial Intermediation: Industry Sectors, Products and Markets Financial Intermediation: Commercial and Investment Bank Structure PART 2: PRIMARY MARKETS: FUNDING LIQUIDITY AND EXTERNAL CAPITAL ALLOCATION THROUGH CREDIT AND CAPITAL MARKETS Liquidity: What is it? Financing the Four Sectors: Companies, Households, Governments and Overseas through Credit and Capital Markets Banking: Credit Intermediation through Depository Institutions Bank Liquidity Management Converting Loans to Securities: Securitisation as a Financing Tool Shadow Banking: Credit Intermediation through Non-depository IPOs and Corporate Bond Origination PART 3: SECONDARY MARKETS: MARKET LIQUIDITY AND MARKET FAILURE Market Liquidity: Order-driven Auction Markets and Quote-driven Dealer Markets The New Secondary Market Structure: Competition, Dark Pools, Algorithmic and High Frequency Trading Clearing and Settlement of Securities Transactions Market Failure: Sub-optimal Allocation of Resources by Credit and Capital Markets, Banking and Sovereign Debt Crises Assessing Risk and Return for Investors in Bank and Sovereign Debt Case Study: Lehman - What might have been Case Study: Greece in Default in 2011 Case Study: Italy, Illiquid or Insolvent in 2011 PART 4: ASSESSING AND MANAGING RISK IN ASSET PORTFOLIOS Investment Management and Portfolio Structuring Investment Management Practice: Funds - Pension, Insurance, Sovereign Wealth, Long-Only, Hedge, Mutual, Cash and Synthetic ETF's and Delta One Trading Desks PART 5: INTERNAL CAPITAL ALLOCATION: THE ROLE OF DIRECTORS, INVESTORS AND THE MARKET FOR CORPORATE CONTROL The Internal Capital Market & Investor Governance of Capital Allocation The Market for Corporate Control: Mergers and Acquisitions Private Equity PART 6: INTERNAL RISK MANAGEMENT AND EXTERNAL REGULATION OF FINANCIAL INTERMEDIARIES AND MARKETS Risk Management in Credit Intermediaries and Investment Banks Regulation of Banks and Investment Banks: Basel I, II, and III Regulation of Securities Markets PART 7: THE ROLE OF GOVERNANCE AND STRATEGY IN RESOURCE ALLOCATION, FIRM AND INDUSTRY STRUCTURE: CASE STUDIES IN FINANCIAL SERVICES Strategy, Governance and Firm and Industry Structure Case Studies in Financial Services - Success and Failures The Future Structure of the Industry: Implications of Re-regulation The Fatal Flaw in Capital Allocation - The Shift from a Trust Model to a Transactional Model The Global Economic and Financial Outlook: 2020 Vision
Jerome Schaufeld, Worcester Polytechnic Institute, Framingham, MA

Commercializing Innovation

Turning Technology Breakthroughs into Products
Apress
Seiten XIII, 190 p. 41 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-4302-6352-4
       9781430263524
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
32,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business and Management, general / R & D/Technology Policy
Commercializing Innovation: Turning Technology Breakthroughs into Products shows how to turn ideas from R&D labs, universities, patent offices, and inventors into commercially successful products and services.Commercializing technology has never been easy, and it's getting tougher all the time. All the decisions you need to make are complicated by today's breakneck rates of change in enabling technology and by competitive pressures disseminated globally at the speed of the internet: Where to get ideas? Which to pursue? Whom to hire? Where to manufacture? How to fund? Create a startup or license to another? To answer these questions adequately and bring sophisticated products and services successfully to market, you need to deploy the systematic methods detailed in this book.Jerry Schaufeld--serial technology entrepreneur, angel investor, and distinguished professor of entrepreneurship--presents in detail his proven step-by-step commercialization process, beginning with technology assessment and culminating with the successful launch of viable products into the global market. Using case studies, models, and practical tips culled from his entrepreneurial career, he shows readers of Commercializing Innovation how toSource technology that can be turned into products Recognize an opportunity to create a viable product Perform feasibility analyses before sinking too much money into a project Find the right method and means to introduce the product to market Plan the project down to the last detail Execute the project in ways that improve chances of its success Comply with government regulation without crippling your project Decide whether offshore manufacturing is your best option Compete globally with globally sourced ideas and funding

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. The Legacy and Myths Of Technology Commercialization.- Chapter 2. The Commercialization Model.- Chapter 3. Sources of Ideas.- Chapter 4. Opportunity Recognition.- Chapter 5. Feasibility Analysis.- Chapter 6. Project Plan.- Chapter 7. How to Go to Market.- Chapter 8. The Numbers.- Chapter 9. Organizational Dynamics.- Chapter 10. ROI: Does It Make Sense?.- Chapter 11. Big Brother: Friend or Foe?.- Chapter 12. Global Competitive Forces: The Final Arbiter
Enver Yücesan

Competitive Supply Chains

A Value-Based Management Perspective
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVI, 168 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-53265-7
       9781137532657
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Business / Management
Competitive Supply Chains uniquely focuses on European and Asian companies, which have found innovative ways of orchestrating effective systems. This new edition builds upon the ideas explored by the author in Competitive Supply Chains (2007), featuring new content and analysis.

Inhaltsangaben

Hermann Simon, Simon-Kucher & Partners Strategy & Marketing Consultants, Bonn, Germany

Confessions of the Pricing Man

How Price Affects Everything
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 221 p. 43 illus., 17 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-20399-7
       9783319203997
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
26,74 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Marketing / Business Strategy/Leadership
The world’s foremost expert on pricing strategy shows how this mysterious process works and how to maximize value through pricing to company and customer.In all walks of life, we constantly make decisions about whether something is worth our money or our time, or try to convince others to part with their money or their time. Price is the place where value and money meet. From the global release of the latest electronic gadget to the bewildering gyrations of oil futures to markdowns at the bargain store, price is the most powerful and pervasive economic force in our day-to-day lives and one of the least understood.The recipe for successful pricing often sounds like an exotic cocktail, with equal parts psychology, economics, strategy, tools and incentives stirred up together, usually with just enough math to sour the taste. That leads managers to water down the drink with hunches and rules of thumb, or leave out the parts with which they don’t feel comfortable. While this makes for a sweeter drink, it often lacks the punch to have an impact on the customer or on the business.It doesn’t have to be that way, though, as Hermann Simon illustrates through dozens of stories collected over four decades in the trenches and behind the scenes. A world-renowned speaker on pricing and a trusted advisor to Fortune 500 executives, Simon’s lifelong journey has taken him from rural farmers’ markets, to a distinguished academic career, to a long second career as an entrepreneur and management consultant to companies large and small throughout the world. Along the way, he has learned from Nobel Prize winners and leading management gurus, and helped countless managers and executives use pricing as a way to create new markets, grow their businesses and gain a sustained competitive advantage. He also learned some tough personal lessons about value, how people perceive it, and how people profit from it.In this engaging and practical narrative, Simon leaves nothing out of the pricing cocktail, but still makes it go down smoothly and leaves you wanting to learn more and do more—as a consumer or as a business person. You will never look at pricing the same way again.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface: Confessions.- Chapter 1 My first painful encounters with prices.- Chapter 2 Everything revolves around price.- Chapter 3 The strange psychology of pricing.- Chapter 4 Price positioning: High or Low.- Chapter 5 Prices and profit.- Chapter 6 Prices and decisions.- Chapter 7 Price differentiation: The high art.- Chapter 8 Innovations in pricing.- Chapter 9 Pricing in crises and price wars.- Chapter 10 What the CEO needs to do.
Thomas Gabor, Independent Scholar, Lake Worth, FL

Confronting Gun Violence in America

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIV, 367 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-33722-7
       9783319337227
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
29,96 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Crime and Society / Organized Crime
This book critically examines the link between guns and violence. It weighs the value of guns for self-protection against the adverse effects of gun ownership and carrying. It also analyses the role of public opinion, the Second Amendment to the US Constitution, and the firearms industry and lobby in impeding efforts to prevent gun violence. Confronting Gun Violence in America explores solutions to the gun violence problem in America, a country where 90 people die from gunshot wounds every day. The wide-range of solutions assessed include: a national gun licensing system; universal background checks; a ban on military-style weapons; better regulatory oversight of the gun industry; the use of technologies, such as the personalization of weapons; child access prevention; repealing laws that encourage violence; changing violent norms; preventing retaliatory violence; and strategies to rebuild American communities. This accessible and incisive book will be of great interest to students and researchers in criminology and sociology, as well as practitioners and policy-makers with an interest in gun ownership and violence.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I. The Scale of America's Gun Problem.- Chapter 1. America's Gun Violence Problem.- Chapter 2. Gun Ownership in the United States.- Part II. Harms Associated with Firearms.- Chapter 3. Gun Deaths: The United States Versus the World.- Chapter 4. Homicide and the Instrumentality Effect.- Chapter 5. Mass Shootings: An Escalating Threat.- Chapter 6. Suicide: Impact of Lethal Methods.- Chapter 7. Unintentional Deaths: Unavoidable or Preventable?.- Chapter 8. The Deadliest States.- Part III. Guns as a Means of Self-Defense.- Chapter 9. Armed Self-Defense 1: The Number of Defensive Gun Uses.- Chapter 10. Armed Self-Defense II: Protection or Hazard?.- Part IV. Obstacles to Gun Violence Prevention Efforts.- Chapter 11. The Firearms Industry: Guns as a Business.- Chapter 12. The 'Guns Everywhere' Movement.- Chapter 13. Public Opinion: An Impediment to Reform?.- Chapter 14. Slogans Relating to Gun Violence: Fact or Fiction?.- Chapter 15. The Second Amendment: Is Gun Regulation Compatible with the Constitution?.- Part V. Preventing Gun Violence.- Chapter 16. A National Strategy for Preventing Gun Violence.
Kim Kyong-Dong, Seoul National University, Seoul, Korea (Republic of)

Confucianism and Modernization in East Asia

Critical Reflections
Springer Singapore
Seiten XXIII, 267 p. 6 illus., 1 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-981-10-3625-5
       9789811036255
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Non-Western Philosophy / Asian Culture
Spanning the 19th and 20th centuries and identifying multiple waves of modernization, this book illustrates how principles originating in Chinese Confucianism have impacted the modernization of East Asia, especially in Korea. It also analyzes how such principles are exercised at personal, interpersonal and organizational levels. As modernization unfolds in East Asia, there is a rising interest in tradition of Confucianism and reconsider the relevance of Confucianism to global development. This book considers the actual historical significance of Confucianism in the modernization of the three nations in this region, China, Korea, and Japan through the nineteenth century and early twentieth century to the aftermath of the end of World War II. Examining the existing literature dealing with how Confucianism has been viewed in connection with modernization, it provides insight into western attitudes towards Confucianism and the changes in perceptions relative to Asia in the very process of modernization itself.

Inhaltsangaben

Confucianism and Modernization: Meta-Theoretical Discourse Analysis.- Confucianism and Modernization in East Asia Compared (I): The First Wave Modernization.- Confucianism and Modernization in East Asia Compared (II): The Second Wave Modernization.- The Aborted Confucian Reformation in Korea's Embryonic Modernization: The Case of Ch?ng Yag-yong (1762-1836).- Is Confucianism Still Relevant Today? Closing Reflections.
Lindsay Coleman, Melbourne, , Australia; Joakim Tillman, Stockholm

Contemporary Film Music

Investigating Cinema Narratives and Composition
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVI, 272 p. 16 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-57374-2
       9781137573742
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Music / Film Theory
The purpose of this book, through its very creation, is to strengthen the dialogue between practitioner and theorist. To that end, a film academic and musicologist have collaborated as editors on this book, which is in turn comprised of interviews with composers alongside complementary chapters that focus on a particular feature of the composer’s approach or style. These chapters are written by a fellow composer, musicologist, or film academic who specializes in that element of the composer’s output. In the interview portions of this book, six major film composers discuss their work from the early 1980s to the present day: Carter Burwell, Mychael Danna, Dario Marianelli, Rachel Portman, Zbigniew Preisner, and A.R. Rahman. The focus is on the practical considerations of film composition, the relationship each composer has with the moving image, narrative, technical considerations, personal motivations in composing, the relationships composers have with their directors, and their own creative processes. Contemporary Film Music also explores the contemporary influence of electronic music, issues surrounding the mixing of soundtracks, music theory, and the evolution of each composer’s musical voice.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Film Composition in the 21st Century.Lindsay Coleman & Joakim Tillman.-2.  
Zbigniew Priesner.-Van den Budenmayer, Three Colours:  Red (1994), Three Colours: Blue (1993), The Double Life of Veronique (1989).Music by Zbigniew Preisner?: Fictional Ccomposers and Ccompositions in the Kie?lowski collaborations.Jonathan Godsall.-3. Mychael Danna.-Mychael Danna and the Modern Conundrum of World Music: An Analysis of Life of Pi and The Ice Storm.Peter Golub and Katy Jarzebowski.-4. Carter Burwell.-Carter Burwell and Space: Inner, Outer, Environmental and Acoustic.Andrew Waggoner.-5. Rachel Portman.-Eero Tarasti and the Narratological Construction of Rachel Portman's Emma.Lindsay Coleman.-6. Elliot Goldenthal.-Conversations with Past and Present: Stylistic Pluralism and Leitmotif Technique in the film music of Elliot Goldenthal.Joakim Tillman.-7. Dario Marianelli.-Dario Marianelli and the Voice of the Cello:  The Gendering of Musical Solos in Atonement, Pride and Prejudice, and Jane Eyre.Lindsay Coleman & Joakim Tillman.-8. A.R. Rahman.The 'Alternate Space' of A.R. Rahman's Film Music.Felicity Wilcox.-9. John Williams.-The Scores of John Williams: Sentence and Period.Emilio Audissino & Konstantinos Zacharopoulos 
Qiao Liu, Peking University, Beijing, China

Corporate China 2.0

The Great Shakeup
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XXXII, 243 p. 35 illus., 20 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-60371-5
       9781137603715
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
53,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Asian Economics /
This book argues that that the rise of great firms - those with sustainable high return on invested capital (ROIC) - will lay the foundation for China’s successful economic transformation. Drawn from the author’s research on corporate finance and the Chinese economy, the author maintains that being big could be easy but means little for corporate China, especially in the context of China’s transition from an investment-led economy to an efficiency-driven one. The work discusses both internal and external impediments that lead to lack of great companies in China and suggests institutional conditions which foster the rise of great companies in China, including, reversing the government’s obsession with GDP, reforming the financial system, and promoting entrepreneurship. Policy makers, investors, corporate executives, and MBA students and scholars will appreciate case studies of Huawei, Alibaba, Xiaomi, and Lenovo, among others, that illustrate the endeavors made by Chinese entrepreneurs at the grassroots level and highlight what makes successful companies in China.

Inhaltsangaben

1. The Improbably Surge of Corporate China.- 2. What Is in a Great Company?.- 3. Does ROIC Apply to Corporate China?.- 4. The “Great” Hope Struggles.- 5. It Is Also About Corporate Governance.- 6. The Perils of Diversification.- 7. Shake up the Foundations.- 8. The Beginning of A Breakthrough.- 9.Conclusion - How Can Chinese Companies Be Truly Great?.
Qiao Liu, Peking University, Beijing, China

Corporate China 2.0

The Great Shakeup
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XXXII, 243 p. 35 illus., 20 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-60372-2
       9781137603722
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Asian Economics /
This book argues that that the rise of great firms - those with sustainable high return on invested capital (ROIC) - will lay the foundation for China’s successful economic transformation. Drawn from the author’s research on corporate finance and the Chinese economy, the author maintains that being big could be easy but means little for corporate China, especially in the context of China’s transition from an investment-led economy to an efficiency-driven one. The work discusses both internal and external impediments that lead to lack of great companies in China and suggests institutional conditions which foster the rise of great companies in China, including, reversing the government’s obsession with GDP, reforming the financial system, and promoting entrepreneurship. Policy makers, investors, corporate executives, and MBA students and scholars will appreciate case studies of Huawei, Alibaba, Xiaomi, and Lenovo, among others, that illustrate the endeavors made by Chinese entrepreneurs at the grassroots level and highlight what makes successful companies in China.

Inhaltsangaben

1. The Improbably Surge of Corporate China.- 2. What Is in a Great Company?.- 3. Does ROIC Apply to Corporate China?.- 4. The “Great” Hope Struggles.- 5. It Is Also About Corporate Governance.- 6. The Perils of Diversification.- 7. Shake up the Foundations.- 8. The Beginning of A Breakthrough.- 9.Conclusion - How Can Chinese Companies Be Truly Great?.
Rens van Loon, Tilburg University, Tilburg, The Netherlands

Creating Organizational Value through Dialogical Leadership

Boiling Rice in Still Water
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXVIII, 271 p. 48 illus., 46 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-58888-9
       9783319588889
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Industrial and Organizational Psychology / Human Resource Management
This book demonstrates Dialogical Leadership which is the workplace application of the Dialogical Self Theory, first developed by Dutch psychologist Hubert Hermans in the 1990s. It encourages scientists and science-practitioners interested in leadership issues to discuss the power of dialogue in solving workplace culture problems. Van Loon’s work extends the concept of Dialogical Self Theory to the leadership of organizations, drawing on social constructionism by the American psychologist Ken Gergen and the leadership framework of British academic Keith Grint. This book explicitly links the health of organizations to the psychological and emotional health of those who lead them, concluding with the factors of teamwork and motivation. Dialogical Leadership jettisons the idea that organizations are run by ‘superheroes’, presenting a more realistic picture of the workplace. This is the first book to isolate ‘generative dialogue’ as the key mechanism for successful change and transformation programs in organizations. It rejects the idea that successful organizations are ‘rational systems’ conforming to scripts laid down by leaders, and it places dialogue and co-creation – ‘reciprocal exchange’ – at the heart of successful change programs. It starts from the kinds of questions leaders ask themselves – their ‘interior dialogue’ – and the quality of their interactions with others – their external dialogues – which can as shown in this book, be the difference between success and failure.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Part 1: The Theory.- Chapter 1. Dialogical Self Theory.- Chapter 2. Dialogical Leadership.- Part 2: The Practice.- Chapter 3. Creating the Conditions for Effective Dialogue.- Part 3: The Impact.- Chapter 4. Dialogical Leadership and ‘Wicked Issues’.- Chapter 5. Dialogical Leadership and Teamwork.- Chapter 6. Dialogical Leadership and Innovation.- Part 4: The Implications.- Chapter 7. Dialogue: The Future of Leadership.
Ji?í Witzany, University of Economics in Prague, Prague, Czech Republic

Credit Risk Management

Pricing, Measurement, and Modeling
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 256 p. 87 illus., 65 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-49799-0
       9783319497990
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Banking / Business Finance
This book introduces to basic and advanced methods for credit risk management. It covers classical debt instruments and modern financial markets products. The author describes not only standard rating and scoring methods like Classification Trees or Logistic Regression, but also less known models that are subject of ongoing research, like e.g. Support Vector Machines, Neural Networks, or Fuzzy Inference Systems. The book also illustrates financial and commodity markets and analyzes the principles of advanced credit risk modeling techniques and credit derivatives pricing methods. Particular attention is given to the challenges of counterparty risk management, Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) and the related regulatory Basel III requirements. As a conclusion, the book provides the reader with all the essential aspects of classical and modern credit risk management and modeling.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Credit Risk Management.- Rating and Scoring Systems.- Portfolio Credit Risk.- Credit Derivatives.- Conclusion.- Index.
Frederick Harry Pitts, University of Bristol, Bristol, UK

Critiquing Capitalism Today

New Ways to Read Marx
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIV, 279 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-62632-1
       9783319626321
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Political Economy / Cultural Economics

This book critically introduces two compelling contemporary schools of Marxian thought: the New Reading of Marx of Michael Heinrich and Werner Bonefeld, and the postoperaismo of Antonio Negri. Each stake novel claims on Marx’s value theory, the first revisiting key categories of the critique of political economy through Frankfurt School critical theory, the second calling the law of value into crisis with reference to Marx’s rediscovered ‘Fragment on Machines’. Today, ‘postcapitalist’ conceptualisations of a changing workplace excite interest in postoperaist projections of a crisis of measurability sparked by so-called immaterial labour. Using the New Reading of Marx to question this prospectus, Critiquing Capitalism Today clarifies complex debates for newcomers to these cutting-edge currents of critical thought, looking anew at value, money, labour, class and crisis.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: Marxian Value Theory in New Times.- 2.  Value, Time and Abstract Labour.- 3. Money and the Exchange Abstraction.- 4. Labour in the Valorisation Process.- 5. Class, Critique and Capitalist Crisis.- 6. Immanence, Multitude and Empire.- 7. The Fragment on Machines.- 8. A Crisis of Measurability.- 9. Creative Industries and Commodity Exchange.- 10. Conclusion: From Postoperaismo to Postcapitalism.
Barry Chazan, Hebrew University of Jerusalem Spertus Institute for Jewish Learning and Leadership, Chicago, IL, USA; Robert Chazan, New York University, New York, NY, USA; Benjamin M. Jacobs, The George Washington University, Washington, District of

Cultures and Contexts of Jewish Education

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIV, 159 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-51585-4
       9783319515854
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Religion and Education / Educational Philosophy
This book examines the history of Jewish education from the Biblical period to the present. It traces how Jews have formally and informally transmitted their culture and worldview over the years, with particular attention to the shift from premodernity to modernity and to the unique opportunities and challenges of contemporary American Jewish education. Its authors combine historical background and insight with educational expertise to provide a robust portrait of the cultures and contexts of Jewish education and address possibilities for the future. 

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Pre-Modern Jewish Education.- Chapter 2. The Crisis of Modernity.- Chapter 3. America: Contexts and Cultures.- Chapter 4. The Culture of American Jewish Schooling.- Chapter 5. The Counterculture of American Jewish Education.- Epilogue. 
Kayo Matsushita, Kyoto University, Sakyo-ku, Japan

Deep Active Learning

Toward Greater Depth in University Education
Springer Singapore
Seiten XII, 226 p. 28 illus., 6 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-981-10-5659-8
       9789811056598
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Higher Education / Learning & Instruction
This is the first book to connect the concepts of active learning and deep learning, and to delineate theory and practice through collaboration between scholars in higher education from three countries (Japan, the United States, and Sweden) as well as different subject areas (education, psychology, learning science, teacher training, dentistry, and business).It is only since the beginning of the twenty-first century that active learning has become key to the shift from teaching to learning in Japanese higher education. However, “active learning” in Japan, as in many other countries, is just an umbrella term for teaching methods that promote students’ active participation, such as group work, discussions, presentations, and so on.What is needed for students is not just active learning but deep active learning. Deep learning focuses on content and quality of learning whereas active learning, especially in Japan, focuses on methods of learning. Deep active learning is placed at the intersection of active learning and deep learning, referring to learning that engages students with the world as an object of learning while interacting with others, and helps the students connect what they are learning with their previous knowledge and experiences as well as their future lives.What curricula, pedagogies, assessments and learning environments facilitate such deep active learning? This book attempts to respond to that question by linking theory with practice.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1 Introduction.- Chapter 2 An Invitation to Deep Active Learning.- Chapter 3 Terms of Engagement: Understanding and Promoting Student Engagement in Today’s College Classroom.- Chapter 4 Towards a Pedagogical Theory of Learning.- Chapter 5 Deep Active Learning from the Perspective of Active Learning Theory.- Chapter 6 The Flipped Classroom: An Instructional Framework for Promotion of Active Learning.- Chapter 7 Class Design Based on High Student Engagement Through Cooperation: Toward Classes that Bring About Profound Development.- Chapter 8 Deep Learning Using Concept Maps: Experiment in an Introductory Philosophy Course.- Chapter 9 Course Design Fostering Significant Learning: Inducing Students to Engage in Coursework as Meaningful Practice for Becoming a Capable Teacher.- Chapter 10 PBL Tutorial Linking Classroom to Practice: Focusing on Assessment as Learning.- Chapter 11 New Leadership Education and Deep Active Learning.
Karl E. Scheibe, Wesleyan University, Middletown, CT, , USA

Deep Drama

Exploring Life as Theater
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 215 p. 10 illus., 2 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-62985-8
       9783319629858
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Personality and Social Psychology / Self and Identity
This book applies a dramaturgical perspective to familiar psychological topics including fear, greed, shame, guilt, rejection, well-being and terrorism. In presenting vivid illustrations of how our understanding of psychological problems can be enriched and enlivened by employing dramatic language and concepts, it brings the well-established field of narrative psychology to life. Providing an accessible and fresh understanding of psychological problems through the language and concepts of theatre, Karl Scheibe builds on the work of leading scholars in the field including Sarbin, Gergen, Bruner and Goffman. This exciting and accessible book acts as a sequel to Scheibe's, The Drama of Everyday Life, and will appeal to students and scholars of narrative and social psychology, theatre studies and the studies of self and identity.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter One:  Introduction: Profound Drama.- Chapter Two:  The Person as Actor, the Actor as Person:  Personality from a Dramaturgical Perspective.- Chapter Three:  Reflections on the Drama of Shame and Guilt.- Chapter Four:  A Dramatic Analysis of the Psychology of Fear.- Chapter Five:  Asymmetries in the Psychology of Confidence.- Chapter Six:  On the Psychological Absurdity of a War on Terror.- Chapter Seven:  Dramatic Narratives of Addiction.- Chapter Eight:  Paradoxes of Wellbeing:  A Dramatic Analysis.- Chapter Nine:  Reflections on the Drama of Rejection.- Chapter Ten: A Case Study in the Use of Dramatic Metaphor:  Daniel Kahneman’s Psychology.
Stella Margariti, Naxos, Greece

Defining International Terrorism

Between State Sovereignty and Cosmopolitanism
T.M.C. Asser Press
Seiten XI, 186 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-94-6265-203-3
       9789462652033
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Criminal Law / Terrorism
This book is an attempt to approach the issue of defining international terrorism, proposing that the most workable way to do so is to achieve due balance between the two principal driving forces of international law developments: State sovereignty interests and cosmopolitan ideals.All those who aspire to the promotion of international criminal justice and the fight against impunity agree that the formulation of a universal definition of international terrorism will further enhance the fight against terrorism and offer a universally acceptable legal framework within which this fight can be conducted.Discussed in an in-depth manner are, for instance, the UN Charter Provisions, the Rome Statute and the principle of complementarity, the Kampala amendments on the crime of aggression, the paradigms of aggression and terrorism, and prominent anti-terrorist Security Council Resolutions such as Resolution 1368 and Resolution 1373.The volume broadens the reader’s understanding on how State sovereignty interests and priorities as well as ideals of cosmopolitanism have influenced the development of international law in general and international criminal law in particular. Furthermore, it simplifies the complicated picture of defining international crimes by explaining how the ‘State sovereignty’ and ‘Cosmopolitanism’ dynamics have also been of relevance throughout the drafting process of the definition of the crime of aggression for the purposes of the Rome Statute for the International Criminal Court. In addition, it equips the reader with an understanding of the reasons behind the lack of an international definition for terrorism and suggests an appropriate context within which such a definition can take shape.It intends to appeal to academics and students with an interest in international criminal law and the international criminal justice system, international law and security, but also to anyone with an interest in transnational crime and counter-terrorism. Stella Margariti has recently graduated from the University of Dundee where she attained the title of Doctor from the School of Law.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- State sovereignty, Cosmopolitanism and the International Criminal Court.- The Paradigm of Aggression: State-centric and Cosmopolitan approaches in the effort to outlaw and criminalise Aggression.- The Paradigm of Aggression: The Kampala Definition and Lessons learnt for the purpose of defining International Terrorism.- The Paradigm of Terrorism: State-centric and Cosmopolitan approaches in some current efforts towards its criminalization.- A Definition of Terrorism in the Making: Balancing State Interests with Cosmopolitan Ideals.- Conclusion.- Index.
Rita Green, , UK

Designing Listening Tests

A Practical Approach
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XX, 210 p. 42 illus., 3 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-45715-8
       9781137457158
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Applied Linguistics / Teaching and Teacher Education
This book examines the crucial role that sound file selection plays in assessing listening ability and introduces the reader to the procedure of textmapping, which explores how to exploit a sound file. The book discusses the role of the task identifier, the task instructions and the example, and analyses the strengths and weaknesses of different test methods. Guidelines for developing listening items, and procedures that can be used in peer review and task revision are also provided. A range of sample listening tasks illustrates the benefits of following the test development approach described in the book. Developing Listening Tests also provides insights into the advantages that field trials, statistical analyses and standard setting can offer the language test developer in determining how well their tasks work. This practical book will be of interest to researchers, language testers, testing commissions, and teachers engaged in assessing listening performance around the world.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: What is involved in assessing listening?.- Chapter 2: How can test specifications help?.- Chapter 3: How do we exploit sound files?.- Chapter 4: How do we develop a listening task?.- Chapter 5: What makes a good listening task?.- Chapter 6: How do we know our listening tasks work?.- Chapter 7: How do we report scores and set pass marks?.
Mark Dunford, University of East London School of Arts and Digital Industries, London; Tricia Jenkins, Middlesex University , London

Digital Storytelling

Form and Content
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIII, 244 p. 14 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-59151-7
       9781137591517
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Film Theory /
This edited collection brings together academics and practitioners to explore the uses of Digital Storytelling, which places the greatest possible emphasis on the voice of the storyteller. Case studies are used as a platform to investigate questions of concept, theory and practice, and to shine an interrogative light on this emergent form of participatory media. The collection examines the creative and academic roots of Digital Storytelling before drawing on a range of international examples to consider the way in which the practice has established itself and evolved in different settings across the world.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Form and Content in Digital Storytelling: An Introduction.- 2. Practice matters in Digital Storytelling by Joe Lambert.- 3. My Story from Kibera by Marita Rainbird.- 4. One Million Life Stories by Carol Misoreli.- 5. Collaborating With Other Artforms. History in Our Hands: A Long-Term Storytelling Project With Older People by Alex Henry.- 6. Digital Storytelling in Multicultural Singapore by Angeline Koh.- 7. Digital Storytelling With Users and Survivors of the UK Mental Health System by Pip Hardy and Tony Sumner.- 8. Digital Storytelling for women’s wellbeing in Turkey by Burcu Simsek.- 9. Going Beyond “the moment”: Towards Making the “Preferably Unheard” Malaysian Sexual Minorities Heard by Angela M. Kuga Thas.- 10. The afterlife of Capture Wales: digital stories and their listening publics by Nicole Matthews and Karen Lewis.- 11. The ethics, aesthetics and practical politics of ownership in co-creative media by Christina Spurgeon.- 12. From the Pre-Story Space: A Proposal of a Story Weaving Method for Digital Storytelling by Akiko Ogawa and Yuko Tsuchiya.- 13. Digital stories as tools for advocacy by Camelia Crisan and Dumitru Bortun.- 14. Reconceptualising Digital Storytelling: Thinking through Audiovisual Inquiry by Darcy Alexander.- 15. Making emotional and social influence: Digital storytelling and the cultivation of creative influence by Chloë Brushwood Rose.- 16. Smiling or Smiting? - Selves, states and stories in the constitution of polities by John Hartley.- 17. Therapy, democracy and the creative practice of digital storytelling by Nancy Thumim.
Grete Jamissen, Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences, Oslo, Norway; Pip Hardy, Pilgrim Projects, Cambridge, UK; Yngve Nordkvelle, Inland Norway University of Applied Sciences, Lillehammer, Norway; Heather Pleasants, University of

Digital Storytelling in Higher Education

International Perspectives
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXXI, 399 p. 16 illus., 14 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-51057-6
       9783319510576
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Technology and Digital Education / Higher Education
This book broadens the scope and impact of digital storytelling in higher education. It outlines how to teach, research and build communities in tertiary institutions through the particular form of audio-visual communication known as digital storytelling by developing relationships across professions, workplaces and civil society. The book is framed within the context of ‘The Four Scholarships’ developed by the Carnegie Foundation for the advancement and redefining of teaching, including the scholarships of discovery, integration, application, and teaching and learning. Across four sections, this volume considers the potential of digital storytelling to improve, enhance and expand teaching, learning, research, and interactions with society. Written by an international range of academics, researchers and practitioners, from disciplines spanning medicine, anthropology, education, social work, film and media studies, rhetoric and the humanities, the book demonstrates the variety of ways in which digital storytelling offers solutions to key challenges within higher education for students, academics and citizens. It will be compelling reading for students and researchers working in education and sociology.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. ‘The Long March’: Digital Storytelling in Higher Education – Overview and Introduction to the Book; Yngve Nordkvelle.- PART I. The Scholarship of Teaching and Learning.- Chapter 2. Introduction to the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning; Pip Hardy.- Chapter 3. Threshold Concepts in Digital Storytelling: Naming What we Know about Storywork; Brooke Hessler & Joe Lambert.- Chapter 4. Physician, Know Thyself: Using Digital Storytelling to Promote Reflection in Medical Education; Pip Hardy.- Chapter 5. From Dewey to the Digital: Designing Digital Storytelling to Deepen Reflection; Bonnie Thompson Long and Tony Hall.- Chapter 6. Let’s get Personnel: Digital Storytelling for Transformational Learning in Social Students; Kim Anderson.- Chapter 7. Navigating Ethical Boundaries when Adopting Digital Storytelling in Higher Education; Daniela Gachago & Pam Sykes.- PART II: The Scholarship of Discovery.- Chapter 8. Introduction to the Scholarship of Discovery; Grete Jamissen.- Chapter 9. The Times They are a’Changin’: Digital Storytelling as a Catalyst for an Ideological Revolution in Healthcare Research; Carol Haigh.- Chapter 10. Building Bridges: Digital Storytelling as a Participatory Research Approach; Inger Kjersti Lindvig.- Chapter 11. Learning to Work through Narratives: Identity and Meaning Making during Digital Storytelling; Satu Hakanurmi.- Chapter 12. My Story or Your Story? Producing Professional Digital Stories on Behalf of Researchers; Ragnhild Larsson.- Chapter 13. The Power of the Eye and the Ear: Experiences from Communicating Research with Digital Storytelling; Ida Hydle.- PART III: The Scholarship of Integration.- Chapter 14. Introduction to the Scholarship of Integration; Yngve Nordkvelle.- Chapter 15. Digital Storytelling: Learning to be in Higher Education; Sandra Ribeiro.- Chapter 16. Reflective Information Seeking: Unpacking Research Skills through Digital Storytelling; Karen Diaz & Brian Leaf.- Chapter 17. ‘Now I See’: Digital Storytelling for Mediating Interprofessional Collaboration; Grete Jamissen & Mike Moulton.- Chapter 18. Aging Narratives: Embedding Digital Storytelling Within the Higher Education Curriculum of Health and Social Care with Older People; Tricia Jenkins.- Chapter 19. The Scholarship of Integration and Digital Storytelling as ‘Bildung’ in Higher Education; Yvonne Fritze, Geir Haugsbakk & Yngve Nordkvelle.- Chapter 20. Critical Story Sharing: A Dialectic Approach to Identity Regulation; Mari Ann Moss.- PART IV. The Scholarship of Engaged Collaboration.- Chapter 21. Introduction to Digital Storytelling in Higher Education as an Engaged Scholarship Practice; Heather Pleasants.- Chapter 22. Engaged Scholarship and Engaging Communities: Navigating Emotion, Affect and Disability through Digital Storytelling; Elaine Bliss.- Chapter 23. In the Time it Takes: Engages Scholarships through Co-Creative Media; Darcy Alexandra.- Chapter 24. Intergenerational Digital Storytelling; Michael Meimaris.- Chapter 25. Faculty at the Intersection of Digital Storytelling and Community Engagement; Beverley Bickel, William Shewbridge, Romy Hübler & Ana Askoz.
Claudio Scardovi, AlixPartners, London, UK

Digital Transformation in Financial Services

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XI, 236 p. 52 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-66944-1
       9783319669441
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Banking / Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics
This book analyzes the set of forces driving the global financial system toward a period of radical transformation and explores the transformational challenges that lie ahead for global and regional or local banks and other financial intermediaries. It is explained how these challenges derive from the newly emerging post-crisis structure of the market and from shadow and digital players across all banking operations. Detailed attention is focused on the impacts of digitalization on the main functions of the financial system, and particularly the banking sector. The author elaborates how an alternative model of banking will enable banks to predict, understand, navigate, and change the external ecosystem in which they compete. The five critical components of this model are data and information mastering; effective use of applied analytics; interconnectivity and “junction playing”; development of new business solutions; and trust and credibility assurance. The analysis is supported by a number of informative case studies. The book will be of interest especially to top and middle managers and employees of banks and financial institutions but also to FinTech players and their advisers and others.

Inhaltsangaben

1 Unbearable lightness of banking.- 2 Synapsis in the global financial system.- 3 In transformation we trust.- 4 Cyber capital at risk.- 5 Digital transformation in payments.- 6 Transformation in funding.- 7 Transformation in investment management.- 8 Transformation in lending.- 9 Transformation in risk management.- 10 Transformation in insurance.- 11 Digital for the greater good.- 12 The synapses challenge ahead.
Debra A. Harley, University of Kentucky, Lexington, KY, USA; Noel A. Ysasi, Northern Illinois University, DeKalb, IL, USA; Malachy L. Bishop, University of Kentucky, Lexington, KY, USA; Allison R. Fleming, Rehabilitation and Human Services, Universit

Disability and Vocational Rehabilitation in Rural Settings

Challenges to Service Delivery
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXVI, 735 p. 7 illus., 4 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-64785-2
       9783319647852
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Social Work / Community and Environmental Psychology
This first-of-its-kind textbook surveys rehabilitation and vocational programs aiding persons with disabilities in remote and developing areas in the U.S. and abroad. Contributors discuss longstanding challenges to these communities, most notably economic and environmental obstacles and ongoing barriers to service delivery, as well as their resilience and strengths. Intersections of health, social, structural, and access disparities are shown affecting rural disabled populations such as women, racial and sexual minorities, youth, and elders. In terms of responses, a comprehensive array of healthcare and health policy solutions and recommendations is critiqued with regard to health, employment, and service effectiveness outcomes.Included among the topics:Healthcare initiatives, strategies, and challenges for people with disabilities in rural, frontier, and territory settings.
Challenges faced by veterans residing in rural communities.
The Asia and Pacific region: rural-urban impact on disability.
Challenges after natural disaster for rural residents with disabilities.
Meeting the needs of rural adults with mental illness and dual diagnoses.
Capacity building in rural communities through community-based collaborative partnerships.
Disability and Vocational Rehabilitation in Rural Settings makes a worthy textbook for graduate students and upper-level undergraduates in the fields of social work, community and environmental psychology, public health, sociology, education, and geography. Its professional audience also includes vocational rehabilitation counselors serving these dynamic populations.

Inhaltsangaben

Entrepreneurship and Economic Development in Rural America.- Disability, Income, and Rural Poverty.- Transportation, Accessibility and Accommodation in Rural Communities.- The Role of Technology in Service Delivery for People With Disabilities in Rural Communities.- Healthcare Initiatives, Strategies, and Challenges for People with Disabilities in Rural, Frontier and Territory Settings.- Ethical Vocational Rehabilitation Practice and Dual Relationships in Rural Settings.- Resilience and Strengths of Rural Communities.- Challenges Faced by Veterans Residing in Rural Communities.- Marginalized Racial and Ethnic Adults with Disabilities in Rural Communities: The Role of Cultural Competence and Social Justice.- Adolescents and Transition Students with Disabilities in Rural Areas.- Women, Older Adult, and LGBTQ Populations with Disabilities in Rural, Frontier, and Territory Communities.- Offender Populations with Disabilities in Rural Settings.- American Indians and Alaska Natives with Disabilities in Rural, Tribal Lands, Frontier Regions, and Plain States.- Agricultural, Farm, and Immigrant Workers with Disabilities.- Sensory Impairments Among Rural Populations in America.- Rehabilitation Practice, Employment, and Policy for Rural Development for People with Disabilities in West Africa.- The Asia and Pacific Region: Rural-Urban Impact on Disability.- Disability and Vocational Rehabilitation in Rural and Remote Australasia.- Rural Development, Employment, Chronic Health, and Economic Conditions in Canada.- People with Disabilities and Mental Health Disorders in Mexico: Rights and Practices.- System of Service Delivery for People with Disabilities in India and Impact in Rural Areas.- Rehabilitation Practices, Employment, and Policy for Rural Development for People with Disabilities in Turkey.- Rehabilitation Services in Colombia.- Disability Policies and Practices in the Rural United Kingdom.- Challenges After Natural Disaster for Rural Residents with Disabilities.- Meeting the Needs of Rural Adults with Mental Illness and Dual Diagnoses.- Multiple Sclerosis Among Rural Residents: Treatment, Psychosocial Implications, and Vocational Implications.- Substance-Related and Addictive Disorders Treatment in Rural, Frontier, and Territory Settings.- Marketing Vocational Rehabilitation Services in Rural Communities.- Implications of Workforce Innovation and Opportunity Act (WIOA) in Rural, Frontier, and Territory Communities.- Americans with Disabilities Act in Rural America: A Case Study.- Rural Forensic Vocational Rehabilitation Practice: Challenges and Opportunities for Rehabilitation Professionals.- Climate and Weather in the United States and Its Impact on People with Disabilities in Rural Communities.- Developing the Personnel to Meet the Needs of Persons with Disabilities in Rural Settings Through Online Learning.- Human Resources Issues: Recruiting and Retaining Rehabilitation Counselors and Human Service Professionals in Rural, Frontier, and Territory Communities.- Capacity Building in Rural Communities Through Community Based Collaborative Partnerships.- Utilizing Indigenous Volunteers and Paraprofessionals for Disability Advocacy and Service in Rural America.- Research and Evidence-Based Practices of Vocational Rehabilitation in Rural, Frontier, and Territory Communities. 
Carlos Hidalgo

Driving Demand

Transforming B2B Marketing to Meet the Needs of the Modern Buyer
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVI, 204 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-52678-6
       9781137526786
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Management / Marketing
Carlos Hidalgo provides a clear roadmap and framework on how B2B organizations can implement change management and transform their Demand Generation. Case studies and excerpts from B2B marketing practitioners and ANNUITAS clients who have transformed their organizations and how they accomplished this change are incorporated throughout the book.

Inhaltsangaben

1. The Issues That Exist With Modern Demand Generation 2. Leading Demand Process Transformation 3. Why Transformations Fails 4. Action Does Not Equal Change 5. Changing the Marketing & Sales Mindset 6. Aligning Content to Your Buyer 7. Adapting the Lead Management Process 8. Measuring for Success 9. Optimizing Data and Technology 10. Creating an Outcome – Accountable Culture 11. Managing People Through Change 12. The Need For Change in Demand Generation 13. Change Ahead 14. Demand Generation Glossary
Meribeth A. Dayme, Veyrier du lac, France

Dynamics of the Singing Voice

Springer Vienna
Seiten XV, 233 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2009
ISBN 978-3-211-88728-8
       9783211887288
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Music / Otorhinolaryngology
During the past decades, 'Dynamics of the singing voice' has successfully been established as a reference text for teachers of singing, singers, choral conductors and organists, speech and voice therapists, laryngologists and other health professionals, psychologists and those in linguistics. It discusses the physiological, psychological, musical and emotional aspects of the voice, particularly as they relate to singing but also to speaking. The book provides a greater understanding of how the voice works and the many factors involved in singing as well as an objective discussion of singing without reference to specific techniques. In this fifth edition, the author has now updated and rearranged the content. Furthermore she has added a new chapter on vocal pedagogic aspects in order to meet the requirements of the art of singing of the 21st century. Thus this new book provides the reader with the established concepts in combination with the latest knowledge about modern approaches to the singing voice.

Inhaltsangaben

The human energy field and singing.- Vocal pedagogy in the 21st Century.- What every singer needs to know: Co-ordination, spontaneity and artistry.- The role and function of the voice: an overview.- Posture and breathing in singing.- Phonation.- Resonation and vocal quality.- Articulation.- Vocal health.- Research in singing.- Appendices.
Wilfred Beckerman, University College London , London

Economics as Applied Ethics

Fact and Value in Economic Policy
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 297 p. 7 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-50318-9
       9783319503189
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Social Choice/Welfare Economics/Public Choice / Economic Theory/Quantitative Economics/Mathematical Methods
This important textbook has been revised and updated to continue its focus on the link between ethics and economic policy analysis, whilst ensuring that perspectives addressing the moral limits of the market, latest behavioural economics literature, and the changes in inequality over the years are included. Basic philosophical concepts are systematically described, followed by conventional welfare economic theory and policy, and applications to some topical economic problems such as income distribution and sustainable development.

Inhaltsangaben

Part 1. Basic Principles.- 1. Preview.- 2. The Main Concepts.- 3. Fact and Value in Personal Choice.- 4. How to Make ‘Bad’ Choices.- 5. Fact and Value in Economic Policy: three examples.- 6. From Economic ‘Efficiency’ to Economic Welfare.- 7. The ‘Social Welfare Function’.- 8. The ‘Mindless’ Society.- 9. Utilitarianism: The Search For A Single Over-riding Value.- 10 Constraints on Utilitarianism.- Part 2. Applications.- 11. GDP and Friends.- 12. Happiness.- 13. The Most Important Price: The Discount Rate.- 14. The Price of life.- 15. Equality: Fact or Value.- 16. Equality of What?.- 17. The Boundary of Society in Space.- Annex to Chapter 17: How to share out equitably he burden of combating climate change.- 18. The Boundary of Society in Time.- 19. Overview: The Role of Welfare Economics
Robert K. Toutkoushian, University of Georgia , Athens, GA, USA; Michael B. Paulsen, University of Iowa , Iowa City, IA, USA

Economics of Higher Education

Background, Concepts, and Applications
Springer Netherlands
Seiten XI, 390 p. 70 illus., 53 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-94-017-7504-5
       9789401775045
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
139,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Higher Education / Microeconomics
This book examines the many ways in which economic concepts, theories and models can be used to examine issues in higher education. The topics explored in the book include how students make college-going decisions, the payoffs to students and society from going to college, markets for higher education services, demand and supply in markets for higher education, why and how state and federal governments intervene in higher education markets, college and university revenues and expenditures, how institutions use net-pricing strategies and non-price product-differentiation strategies to pursue their goals and to compete in higher education markets, as well as issues related to faculty labor markets. The book is written for both economists and non-economists who study higher education issues and provides readers with background information and thorough explanations and illustrations of key economic concepts. In addition to reviewing the contributions economists have made to the study of higher education, it also examines recent research in each of the major topical areas. The book is policy-focused and each chapter analyses how contemporary higher education policies affect the behaviour of students, faculty and/or institutions of higher education. 'Toutkoushian and Paulsen attempted a daunting task: to write a book on the economics of higher education for non-economists that is also useful to economists. A book that could be used for reference and as a textbook for higher education classes in economics, finance, and policy. They accomplish this tough balancing act with stunning success in a large volume that will serve as the go-to place for anyone interested in the history and current thinking on the economics of higher education.” William E. Becker, Jr., Professor Emeritus of Economics, Indiana University

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- 1. Overview of Economic Reasoning and Terminology.- 2. Student Investment in Higher Education.- 3. Private and Social Returns to Higher Education.- 4. Demand and Supply in Higher Education.- 5. The Role of Government in Higher Education.- 6. Higher Education Revenues and Expenditures.- 7. Competition and Production in Higher Education.- 8. Labor Economics and Higher Education.- 9. Current and Emerging Research on Economics of Higher Education.
Kiyohiko G. Nishimura, National Graduate Institute for Policy Studies (GRIPS), Minato-ku, Japan; Hiroyuki Ozaki, Keio University, Minato-ku, Japan

Economics of Pessimism and Optimism

Theory of Knightian Uncertainty and Its Applications
Springer Japan
Seiten XX, 326 p. 12 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-4-431-55901-6
       9784431559016
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
139,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Behavioral/Experimental Economics /
This is the first book to investigate individual’s pessimistic and optimistic prospects for the future and their economic consequences based on sound mathematical foundations. The book focuses on fundamental uncertainty called Knightian uncertainty, where the probability distribution governing uncertainty is unknown, and it provides the reader with methods to formulate how pessimism and optimism act in an economy in a strict and unified way. After presenting decision-theoretic foundations for prudent behaviors under Knightian uncertainty, the book applies these ideas to economic models that include portfolio inertia, indeterminacy of equilibria in the Arrow-Debreu economy and in a stochastic overlapping-generations economy, learning, dynamic asset-pricing models, search, real options, and liquidity preferences. The book then proceeds to characterizations of pessimistic (?-contaminated) and optimistic (?-exuberant) behaviors under Knightian uncertainty and people’s inherent pessimism (surprise aversion) and optimism (surprise loving). Those characterizations are shown to be useful in understanding several observed behaviors in the global financial crisis and in its aftermath. The book is highly recommended not only to researchers who wish to understand the mechanism of how pessimism and optimism affect economic phenomena, but also to policy makers contemplating effective economic policies whose success delicately hinges upon people’s mindsets in the market.Kiyohiko Nishimura is Professor at the National Graduate Institute for Policy Studies (GRIPS) and Professor Emeritus and Distinguished Project Research Fellow of the Center for Advanced Research in Finance at The University of Tokyo. Hiroyuki Ozaki is Professor of Economics at Keio University.

Inhaltsangaben

1 Overall Introduction.- 2 Mathematics for Reading Later Chapters.- 3 Decision-Theoretic Foundations of Knightian Uncertainty.- 4 Portfolio Inertia.- 5 Equilibrium Indeterminacy in Arrow-Debreu Economy with Knightian Uncertainty.- 6 Monetary Equilibria and Knightian Uncertainty.- 7 Dynamic Programming.- 8 Dynamic Asset Pricing.- 9 Search and Knightian Uncertainty.- 10 Irreversible Investment and Knightian Uncertainty.- 11 Liquidity Preference and Knightian Uncertainty.- 12 A Simple Characterization of Pessimism and Optimism: e-Contamination Versus e-Exuberance.- 13 Persistent Pessimism and Optimism in Forecasts: Implicit Means and Law of Iterated Integrals.- 14 Learning Under Knightian Uncertainty.- 15 Areas of Further Research.- Appendix Proofs of Lemmas and Theorems.- Index.
Efraim Turban, University of Hawaii, Kihei, HI, USA; Jon Outland, Herzing University, Rapid City, SD, USA; David King, JDA Software, Scottsdale, AZ, USA; Jae Kyu Lee, Yonsei University, Seodaemun-gu, Seoul, Korea (Republic of); Ting-Peng Liang, Natio

Electronic Commerce 2018

A Managerial and Social Networks Perspective
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXVIII, 636 p. 90 illus., 75 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-58714-1
       9783319587141
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
139,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
e-Business/e-Commerce / Business Information Systems
This new Edition of Electronic Commerce is a complete update of the leading graduate level/advanced undergraduate level textbook on the subject.  Electronic commerce (EC) describes the manner in which transactions take place over electronic networks, mostly the Internet. It is the process of electronically buying and selling goods, services, and information. Certain EC applications, such as buying and selling stocks and airline tickets online, are reaching maturity, some even exceeding non-Internet trades. However, EC is not just about buying and selling; it also is about electronically communicating, collaborating, and discovering information. It is about e-learning, e-government, social networks, and much more. EC is having an impact on a significant portion of the world, affecting businesses, professions, trade, and of course, people.The most important developments in EC since 2014 are the continuous phenomenal growth of social networks, especially Facebook , LinkedIn and Instagram, and the trend toward conducting EC with mobile devices.  Other major developments are the expansion of EC globally, especially in China where you can find the world's largest EC company.  Much attention is lately being given to smart commerce and the use of AI-based analytics and big data to enhance the field.  Finally, some emerging EC business models are changing industries (e.g., the shared economy models of Uber and Airbnb). The 2018 (9th) edition, brings forth the latest trends in e-commerce, including smart commerce, social commerce, social collaboration, shared economy, innovations, and mobility.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Overview of Electronic Commerce.- Chapter 2. E-Commerce: Mechanisms, Platforms, and Tools.- Chapter 3. Retailing in Electronic Commerce: Products and Services.- Chapter 4. Business-to-Business E-Commerce.- Chapter 5. Innovative EC Systems: From E-Government to E-Learning, E-Health, Sharing Economy and P2P Commerce.- Chapter 6. Mobile Commerce and the Internet of Things.- Chapter 7. Intelligent (Smart) E-Commerce.- Chapter 8. Social Commerce: Foundations, Social Marketing, and Advertising.- Chapter 9. Social Enterprise and Other Social Commerce Topics.- Chapter 10. Marketing and Advertising in E-Commerce.- Chapter 11. E-Commerce Security and Fraud Issues and Protections.- Chapter 12. Electronic Commerce Payment Systems.- Chapter 13. Order Fulfillment along the Supply Chain in E-Commerce.- Chapter 14. EC Strategy, Globalization, SMEs and Implementation.- Chapter 15. E-Commerce: Regulatory, Ethical, and Social Environments.
Einav Katan-Schmid, Humboldt University of Berlin, , Germany

Embodied Philosophy in Dance

Gaga and Ohad Naharin's Movement Research
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVIII, 228 p. 10 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-60185-8
       9781137601858
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Dance / Performing Arts
Representing the first comprehensive analysis of Gaga and Ohad Naharin's aesthetic approach, this book follows the sensual and mental emphases of the movement research practiced by dancers of the Batsheva Dance Company. Considering the body as a means of expression, Embodied Philosophy in Dance deciphers forms of meaning in dance as a medium for perception and realization within the body. In doing so, the book addresses embodied philosophies of mind, hermeneutics, pragmatism, and social theories in order to illuminate the perceptual experience of dancing. It also reveals the interconnections between physical and mental processes of reasoning and explores the nature of physical intelligence.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I. Embodied Philosophy in Dance.- Chapter 1. Dance and Philosophy.- Chapter 2. Dance as Embodied Philosophy.- Chapter 3. Habitus, Embodied Knowledge and Physical Intelligence.- Chapter 4. Embodied Reflections.- Part II. The Sensual Emphasis of Gaga.- Chapter 5. “Float!”.- Chapter 6. Enacting Perception.- Chapter 7. Extending Perception.- Chapter 8. Dancing Metaphors.- Chapter 9. The Phenomenological Method of Gaga.- Part III. The Mental Emphasis of Gaga.- Chapter 10. “Connect Effort into Pleasure!”.- Chapter 11. The Challenge of a Perceptual Gap Between Body and Mind.- Chapter 12. The Involvement of Psychology and Physicality.- Chapter 13. Comprehending Emotions.- Chapter 14. Intentionality and the Aesthetic Will.- Part VI. Gaga.- Chapter 15. Multitasking Inquiries.- Chapter 16. Decision Making.- Chapter 17. The Intelligible Form.- Chapter 18. Rhythm.- Chapter 19. The Physical Practice of Intelligence.- Part V. The Moving Forms of Dancing Gaga.- Chapter 20. Bellus.- Chapter 21. The Dancing Body as Means of Expression.- Chapter 22. Understanding Expressions.- Chapter 23. Moving Forms of Dance.
S. Onyeiwu

Emerging Issues in Contemporary African Economies

Structure, Policy, and Sustainability
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XX, 284 p. 52 illus., 33 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-40254-7
       9781137402547
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Economics / Regional/Spatial Science
Onyeiwu focuses on how events of the twenty-first century are shaping key sectors of African economies and societies. He suggests that, compared to East Asia and Latin America, Africa still has a long way to go, despite recent improvements in performance.

Inhaltsangaben

Introducing Africa 1. How New is the "New Africa"? 2. Renaissance or Mirage: Can Growth in Africa Be Sustained? 3. Growth, Employment and Poverty 4. Industrial Performance and Prospects of Structural Transformation 5. Regionalism and Industrial Development 6. Innovation, Technology, and Structural Transformation 7. Information and Communication Technologies 8. Aid, Debt, and Foreign Direct Investment 9. Gender, Youth, and Sustainable Development 10. Closing the Performance Gap in Africa
S. Onyeiwu

Emerging Issues in Contemporary African Economies

Structure, Policy, and Sustainability
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XX, 284 p. 52 illus., 33 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-349-48672-4
       9781349486724
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
93,08 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Economics / Regional/Spatial Science
Onyeiwu focuses on how events of the twenty-first century are shaping key sectors of African economies and societies. He suggests that, compared to East Asia and Latin America, Africa still has a long way to go, despite recent improvements in performance.

Inhaltsangaben

Introducing Africa 1. How New is the "New Africa"? 2. Renaissance or Mirage: Can Growth in Africa Be Sustained? 3. Growth, Employment and Poverty 4. Industrial Performance and Prospects of Structural Transformation 5. Regionalism and Industrial Development 6. Innovation, Technology, and Structural Transformation 7. Information and Communication Technologies 8. Aid, Debt, and Foreign Direct Investment 9. Gender, Youth, and Sustainable Development 10. Closing the Performance Gap in Africa
Craig Morris, Freiburg, Germany; Arne Jungjohann, Institut Geschäftsführung, Stuttgart, Germany

Energy Democracy

Germany’s Energiewende to Renewables
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIII, 437 p. 1 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-31890-5
       9783319318905
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
40,65 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Environmental Sociology / Renewable and Green Energy
This book outlines how Germans convinced their politicians to pass laws allowing citizens to make their own energy, even when it hurt utility companies to do so. It traces the origins of the Energiewende movement in Germany from the Power Rebels of Schönau to German Chancellor Angela Merkel’s shutdown of eight nuclear power plants following the 2011 Fukushima nuclear accident. The authors explore how, by taking ownership of energy efficiency at a local level, community groups are key actors in the bottom-up fight against climate change. Individually, citizens might install solar panels on their roofs, but citizen groups can do much more: community wind farms, local heat supply, walkable cities and more. This book offers evidence that the transition to renewables is a one-time opportunity to strengthen communities and democratize the energy sector – in Germany and around the world.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Energiewende – the solution to more problems than climate change.- Chapter 2: The birth of a movement: 1970s protests for democracy in Wyhl.- Chapter 3: Fledgling wind power – the folly of innovation without deployment.- Chapter 4: German wind pioneers fighting power monopolies in the 1980s.- Chapter 5: The Power Rebels of Schönau.- Chapter 6: Renewable energy in conservative communities.- Chapter 7: The 1990s: laying the foundations for the Energiewende.- Chapter 8: Green capitalism made in Germany.- Chapter 9: The Red-Green revolution (1998-2005) .- Chapter 10: Healthy democracy: key to the Energiewende’s success.- Chapter 11: Utilities bet on gas and coal and renewables boom (2005-2011).- Chapter 12: From Meitner to Merkel: a history of German nuclear power.- Chapter 13: Merkel takes ownership of the Energiewende (2011-today).- Chapter 14: Will the Energiewende succeed?.- Chapter 15: Act now or be left out.
Ricardo G. Barcelona, University of Navarra, Barcelona, Spain

Energy Investments

An Adaptive Approach to Profiting from Uncertainties
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXIX, 496 p. 71 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-59138-8
       9781137591388
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
29,95 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Industries / Business Strategy/Leadership
This book examines what lies behind the uncertainties surrounding the fuel and power markets. Exploring the role of renewables and how they potentially disrupt or create opportunities, it challenges widely accepted wisdoms in investment. The author asks questions such as: Are “business as usual” strategies that favour fossil fuels the best route to future prosperity? What prospects do firms face when their competitors diversify into renewables? Why do generous subsidies to renewables often fail to achieve wide-scale deployment? Illustrating how real options and option games reasoning yield vastly different insights from those gained from NPVs, Energy Investments offers case studies and simulations to demonstrate how firms can benefit from the methods it showcases.  

Inhaltsangaben

Part I. Decision Context.- 1. Decision Framing.- 2. Energy Transitions.- 3. Getting the Sums Wrong.- 4. Strategic Myopia and Certainty.- Part II. Managerial Flexibility and Competition.- 5. Why Flexibility.- 6. Valuing Managerial Flexibility.- 7. Option Games Rivals Play.- 8. Dynamic Competition.- Part III. Energy Markets and Regulatory Actions.- 9. Markets are not created Equal.- 10. Subsidies.- Part IV. Financing and Portfolio Management.- 11. Accessing Funding.- 12. Climate Financing.- 13. Acquire or Build.- Part V. Analytical Foundation and Methodologies.- 14. Costing Energy.- 15. Appropriating Payoffs.- 16. Doing the Managerial Flexibility Maths.- Part VI. Reflections and What Next.-  17. 'So What' and 'What Next'?.
Adrian Wallwork, Pisa, Italy

English for Presentations at International Conferences

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVIII, 284 p. 6 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-26328-1
       9783319263281
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
32,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
English / Language Education
Good presentation skills are key to a successful career in academia. This guide provides examples taken from real presentations given both by native and non-native academics covering a wide variety of disciplines. The easy-to-follow guidelines and tips will teach you how to: plan, prepare and practice a well-organized, interesting presentation avoid errors in English by using short easy-to-say sentences improve your English pronunciation and intonation gain confidence, and overcome nerves and embarrassment highlight the essential points you want your audience to remember attract and retain audience attention deal with questions from the audience This new edition contains several additional features, including stimulating factoids and discussion points both for self-study and in-class use. New chapters also cover:learning from talks on TED networking with potential collaborators, professors, fellow researchers interacting successfully with non-native audiences posters EAP teachers will find this book to be a great source of tips for training students, and for preparing both instructive and entertaining lessons. Other books in the series cover: writing research papers; English grammar, usage, and style; academic correspondence; interacting on campus; plus exercises books and a teacher's guide. Please visit http://www.springer.com/series/13913 for a full list of titles in the series. Adrian Wallwork is the author of more than 30 ELT and EAP textbooks. He has trained several thousand PhD students and academics from 35 countries to write research papers, prepare presentations, and communicate with editors, referees and fellow researchers.

Inhaltsangaben

1. The importance of presentations.- 2. TED and learning from others.- 3. Why you should write out your speech.- 4. Writing the text of your slides.- 5. Visual Elements and Fonts.- 6. Ten ways to Begin a Presentation.- 7. Agenda and Transitions.- 8. Methodology.- 9. Results and Discussion.- 10. Conclusions.- 11. Questions and Answers.- 12. Attracting Audiences and Keeping their Attention.- 13. Handling your Nerves.- 14. Pronunciation and Intonation.- 15. Rehearsing and Self-assessment.- 16. Networking: Preparation for social events.- 17. Networking: Successful informal meetings.- 18. Posters.- 19. Advice for native English speakers on how to present at international conferences and run workshops.- 20. Useful Phrases
J. Lee Whittington, University of Dallas , Irving, TX; Simone Meskelis, University of Dallas , Irving, TX; Enoch Asare, University of Dallas , Irving, TX, USA; Sri Beldona, University of Dallas, Texas , Irving, TX, USA

Enhancing Employee Engagement

An Evidence-Based Approach
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 141 p. 21 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-54731-2
       9783319547312
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership / Human Resource Management
This book provides an evidence-based approach to understanding declining levels of employee engagement, offering a set of practices that individuals and organizations can adopt in order to improve productivity and organizational performance. It introduces a model outlining how the experience of meaningful work impacts engagement and other organizational attitudes and behaviors. It recognizes the antecedents and consequences of such behavior, recognizing that they must be considered as components of an organizational system rather than in isolation. It will be useful for scholars and practitioners in identifying and remedying the endemic trend of disconnected workers and their negative impact on organizational goals.

Inhaltsangaben

1: Employee Engagement.- 2: A Comprehensive, Integrated Model of Employee Engagement.- 3: The Meaningfulness-Engagement Connection.- 4: Creating Meaning at Work through Transformational Leadership.- 5: Creating Meaning in Work through Job Enrichment.- 6: Bringing Meaning to Work through Integrated Faith.- 7: Enhancing Engagement through the Human Resource Value Chain.- 8: Enhancing Engagement through Effective Performance Management.- 9: Engagement Across Cultures.- 10: Enhancing Employee Engagement: A Road-Map for Managers. 
Damien Tricoire, Martin Luther Universität , Halle, Germany

Enlightened Colonialism

Civilization Narratives and Imperial Politics in the Age of Reason
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XI, 318 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-54279-9
       9783319542799
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Imperialism and Colonialism / Political History
This book further qualifies the postcolonial thesis and shows its limits. To reach these goals, it links text analysis and political history on a global comparative scale. Focusing on imperial agents, their narratives of progress, and their political aims and strategies, it asks whether Enlightenment gave birth to a new colonialism between 1760 and 1820. Has Enlightenment provided the cultural and intellectual origins of modern colonialism? For decades, historians of political thought, philosophy, and literature have debated this question. On one side, many postcolonial authors believe that enlightened rationalism helped delegitimize non-European cultures. On the other side, some historians of ideas and literature are willing to defend at least some eighteenth-century philosophers whom they consider to have been “anti-colonialists”. Surprisingly enough, both sides have focused on literary and philosophical texts, but have rarely taken political and social practice into account.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction; Damien Tricoire.- Part I The Invention of Enlightenment and the Return of Assimilationist Policy.- Chapter 2: The Enlightenment and the Politics of Civilization: Self-colonization, Catholicism, and Assimilationism in Eighteenth-century France; Damien Tricoire.- Chapter 3: Enlightened Colonialism? French Assimilationism, Silencing, and Colonial Fantasy on Madagascar; Damien Tricoire.- Part II From Civilizing to Assimilationist Policy.- Chapter 4: Portuguese Indigenous Policy and Indigenous Policies in the Age of Enlightenment: Assimilationist Ideals and the Preservation of Indigenous Identities; Maria Regina Celestino de Almeida.- Chapter 5: New Forms of Colonialism on the Frontiers of Hispanic America: Assimilationist Projects and Economic Disputes (Río de la Plata, late 18th century); Lía Quarleri.- Part III The Invention of Intra-European Colonialism.- Chapter 6: Civilizing Strategies and the Beginning of Colonial Policy in the Eighteenth-century Russian Empire; Ricarda Vulpius.- Chapter 7: Creating Differences for Integration: Enlightened Reforms and the Civilizing Mission in the Eastern European Possessions of the Habsburg monarchy (1750-1815); Klemens Kaps.- Part IV Towards Civilizing Policy in the British Empire.- Chapter 8: “Gradually Reclaiming Them from a State of Barbarism”: Emergence of and Ambivalence in the Aboriginal Civilization Project in Canada (1815-1857); Alain Beaulieu.- Chapter 9: Europe in an Indian mirror: Comparing Conceptions of Civil Government in Abu Taleb’s Travels (1810); Sven Trakulhun.- Part V Civilization, Racial Order, and Slavery.- Chapter 10: Jean-François de Saint-Lambert and His Moral conte “Ziméo” (1769) in the Context of Abolitionist and Imperial Activities; Anja Bandau.- Chapter 11: Slavery and the Enlightenment in Jamaica and the British Empire, 1760-1772: the Afterlife of Tacky’s Rebellion and the Origins of British Abolitionism; Trevor Burnard.- Chapter 12: France, the Abolition of Slavery, and Abolitionisms in the Eighteenth Century; Matthias Middell.- Chapter 13: Colonial Enlightenment and the French Revolution: Julien Raimond and Milscent Créole; Jeremy D. Popkin.- Chapter 14: Black Athena in Haiti: Universal History, Civilization, and the Pre-History of Negritude in the Kingdom of Henry Christophe; Doris L. Garraway.
Steven De Haes, Information Technology Alignment and Governance Research Institute; Antwerp Management School, Antwerp, Belgium; Wim Van Grembergen, Information Technology Alignment and Governance Research Institute; Antwerp Management School, Antwer

Enterprise Governance of Information Technology

Achieving Alignment and Value, Featuring COBIT 5
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIV, 167 p. 116 illus., 60 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-14546-4
       9783319145464
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
IT in Business / Management
Featuring numerous case examples from companies around the world, this second edition integrates theoretical advances and empirical data with practical applications, including in-depth discussion on the COBIT 5 framework which can be used to build, measure and audit enterprise governance of IT approaches. At the forefront of the field, the authors of this volume draw from years of research and advising corporate clients to present a comprehensive resource on enterprise governance of IT (EGIT).Information technology (IT) has become a crucial enabler in the support, sustainability and growth of enterprises. Given this pervasive role of IT, a specific focus on EGIT has arisen over the last two decades, as an integral part of corporate governance. Going well beyond the implementation of a superior IT infrastructure, enterprise governance of IT is about defining and embedding processes and structures throughout the organization that enable boards and business and IT people to execute their responsibilities in support of business/IT alignment and value creation from their IT-enabled investments.Featuring a variety of elements, including executive summaries and sidebars, extensive references and questions and activities (with additional materials available on-line), this book will be an essential resource for professionals, researchers and students alike

Inhaltsangaben

Preface.- Acknowledgments.- Chapter 1 Enterprise Governance of IT, Alignment and Value.- Chapter 2 Enterprise Governance of IT.- Chapter 3 Business / IT Alignment.- Chapter 4 IT enabled Value.- Chapter 5 COBIT as a Framework for Enterprise Governance of IT.- Chapter 6 COBIT as a Framework for IT Assurance.- Chapter 7 Guidelines for the Implementation of Enterprise Governance of IT.
Steven De Haes, Information Technology Alignment and Governance Research Institute; Antwerp Management School, Antwerp, Belgium; Wim Van Grembergen, Information Technology Alignment and Governance Research Institute; Antwerp Management School, Antwer

Enterprise Governance of Information Technology

Achieving Alignment and Value, Featuring COBIT 5
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIV, 167 p. 116 illus., 60 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-37447-5
       9783319374475
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
IT in Business / Management
Featuring numerous case examples from companies around the world, this second edition integrates theoretical advances and empirical data with practical applications, including in-depth discussion on the COBIT 5 framework which can be used to build, measure and audit enterprise governance of IT approaches. At the forefront of the field, the authors of this volume draw from years of research and advising corporate clients to present a comprehensive resource on enterprise governance of IT (EGIT).Information technology (IT) has become a crucial enabler in the support, sustainability and growth of enterprises. Given this pervasive role of IT, a specific focus on EGIT has arisen over the last two decades, as an integral part of corporate governance. Going well beyond the implementation of a superior IT infrastructure, enterprise governance of IT is about defining and embedding processes and structures throughout the organization that enable boards and business and IT people to execute their responsibilities in support of business/IT alignment and value creation from their IT-enabled investments.Featuring a variety of elements, including executive summaries and sidebars, extensive references and questions and activities (with additional materials available on-line), this book will be an essential resource for professionals, researchers and students alike

Inhaltsangaben

Preface.- Acknowledgments.- Chapter 1 Enterprise Governance of IT, Alignment and Value.- Chapter 2 Enterprise Governance of IT.- Chapter 3 Business / IT Alignment.- Chapter 4 IT enabled Value.- Chapter 5 COBIT as a Framework for Enterprise Governance of IT.- Chapter 6 COBIT as a Framework for IT Assurance.- Chapter 7 Guidelines for the Implementation of Enterprise Governance of IT.
Michael D. Maltz, Ohio State University, Columbus, OH, USA; Stephen K. Rice, Seattle University, Seattle, WA, USA

Envisioning Criminology

Researchers on Research as a Process of Discovery
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXVI, 271 p. 30 illus., 16 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-15867-9
       9783319158679
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminology and Criminal Justice, general / Methodology of the Social Sciences
This book covers research design and methodology from a unique and engaging point of view, based on accounts from influential researchers across the field of Criminology and Criminal Justice.Most books and articles about research in criminology and criminal justice focus on how the research was carried out: the data that were used, the methods that were applied, the results that were achieved. While these are all important, they do not present a complete picture. Envisioning Criminology: Researchers on Research as a Process of Discovery aims to fill that gap by providing nuance--the “back story” of why researchers selected particular problems, how they approached those problems, and how their background, training, and experience affected the approaches they took.As the contributions in this book demonstrate, research is not a cut-and-dried process, as all too many methods books imply, but a living, breathing–and in some ways quirky–process that is influenced by non-“scientific” factors. The path taken by a researcher is important, and an appreciation of his or her background, experience, knowledge–and the setbacks and triumphs of performing the research–provides a much more complete picture of how research is done.The twenty-eight chapters in this book describe the back stories of their authors, which serve to enlighten readers about the interplay between the personal and the methodological. While primarily aimed as a textbook, this work will also be of interest to researchers in Criminology and Criminal Justice, and related Social and Behavioral Science fields as an account of how seminal researchers in the field developed their key contributions.

Inhaltsangaben

Foreword Alfred Blumstein.- Chapter 1: Introduction Michael D. Maltz and Stephen K. Rice.- Section 1:Voices from the Street.- Chapter 2: A Conversation with Street Daddy: Pulling Back the Curtain on Twenty Years of Ethnography Scott H. Decker and Dietrich Lester Smith.- Chapter 3: Warping Time and Space: What It Really Takes too do Action Research in Crime Control David Kennedy.- Chapter 4: Observations on the Making of a Police Officer Peter Moskos.- Chapter 5: Cure Violence—Treating Violent Behavior as a Contagious Disease Gary Slutkin, Charles Ransford  and R. Brent Decker.- Chapter 6: Why Criminals Tell Us the Truth Sudhir Venkatesh.- Section 2: Generating New Data.- Chapter 7: Gender & Sexuality as Methodological Confounds in the Study of Transgender Prisoners Valerie Jenness.- Chapter 8: Come Along and Ride on a Fantastic Voyage’: My Journey through Rap Music Lyrics Charis E. Kubrin.- Chapter 9: Getting Emotional Stephen K. Rice.- Chapter 10: The Making of the Chicago Project Robert J. Sampson.- Chapter 11: Surveying Police Officers Wesley G. Skogan.- Section 3: Mining Records.- Chapter 12: Criminology, Terrorism and Serendipity Gary LaFree.- Chapter 13: Playing in the Sandbox: A Methodological Conversation Nicole Rafter and Amy Farrell.- Chapter 14: Getting Things Wrong Really Does Help, as Long as You Keep Trying to Get Things Right: Developing Theories about Why Homicide Rates Rise and Fall Randolph Roth.- Chapter 15: Twists, Turns and Tears on the Path to the Cycle of Violence Cathy Spatz Widom.- Section 4: Analyses of Existing Data.- Chapter 16: Research Adventures with ‘Kinda Big’ Data: Using NIBRS to Study Crime Lynn A. Addington.- Chapter 17: Elusive Facts about Gun Violence: Where Good Surveys Go Bad Philip J. Cook and Jens Ludwig.- Chapter 18: Solving Criminological Puzzles Kenneth C. Land.- Chapter 19: Upon Becoming a Criminologist…And Spending 30 Years Thinking about Interesting Things Pamela K. Lattimore.- Chapter 20: The Devil is in the Details: Crime and Victimization Research with the National Crime Victimization Survey Janet L. Lauritsen.- Chapter 21: What’s the Question? Ask That and You Will Follow the Path of Discovery Alex R. Piquero.- Chapter 22: Predicting Risk: Who Knew It Was Such a Risky Business? Susan Turner.- Section 5: Visual and Geographical Tools.- Chapter 23: Systems Modeling to Inform Drug Policy: A Personal Odyssey Jonathan P. Caulkins.- Chapter 24: Practitioner to Academic: An Interdisciplinary View from both Sides of the Looking Glass Elizabeth R. Groff.- Chapter 25: I Want You to Wear Something for Me’: On the In Situ Measurement of Police Stress and the Potential Rewards of Channeling One’s Inner Experimentalist Matthew J. Hickman.- Chapter 26: Sometimes Pictures Tell the Story Michael D. Maltz.- Chapter 27: Rounding Up Twice the Usual Number of Suspects D. Kim Rossmo.- Chapter 28: Small Worlds of Crime and Criminal Justice Interventions: Discovering Crime Hot Spots David Weisburd.
Michael D. Maltz, Ohio State University, Columbus, OH, USA; Stephen K. Rice, Seattle University, Seattle, WA, USA

Envisioning Criminology

Researchers on Research as a Process of Discovery
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXVI, 271 p. 30 illus., 16 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-37948-7
       9783319379487
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
53,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminology and Criminal Justice, general / Methodology of the Social Sciences
This book covers research design and methodology from a unique and engaging point of view, based on accounts from influential researchers across the field of Criminology and Criminal Justice.Most books and articles about research in criminology and criminal justice focus on how the research was carried out: the data that were used, the methods that were applied, the results that were achieved. While these are all important, they do not present a complete picture. Envisioning Criminology: Researchers on Research as a Process of Discovery aims to fill that gap by providing nuance--the “back story” of why researchers selected particular problems, how they approached those problems, and how their background, training, and experience affected the approaches they took.As the contributions in this book demonstrate, research is not a cut-and-dried process, as all too many methods books imply, but a living, breathing–and in some ways quirky–process that is influenced by non-“scientific” factors. The path taken by a researcher is important, and an appreciation of his or her background, experience, knowledge–and the setbacks and triumphs of performing the research–provides a much more complete picture of how research is done.The twenty-eight chapters in this book describe the back stories of their authors, which serve to enlighten readers about the interplay between the personal and the methodological. While primarily aimed as a textbook, this work will also be of interest to researchers in Criminology and Criminal Justice, and related Social and Behavioral Science fields as an account of how seminal researchers in the field developed their key contributions.

Inhaltsangaben

Foreword Alfred Blumstein.- Chapter 1: Introduction Michael D. Maltz and Stephen K. Rice.- Section 1:Voices from the Street.- Chapter 2: A Conversation with Street Daddy: Pulling Back the Curtain on Twenty Years of Ethnography Scott H. Decker and Dietrich Lester Smith.- Chapter 3: Warping Time and Space: What It Really Takes too do Action Research in Crime Control David Kennedy.- Chapter 4: Observations on the Making of a Police Officer Peter Moskos.- Chapter 5: Cure Violence—Treating Violent Behavior as a Contagious Disease Gary Slutkin, Charles Ransford  and R. Brent Decker.- Chapter 6: Why Criminals Tell Us the Truth Sudhir Venkatesh.- Section 2: Generating New Data.- Chapter 7: Gender & Sexuality as Methodological Confounds in the Study of Transgender Prisoners Valerie Jenness.- Chapter 8: Come Along and Ride on a Fantastic Voyage’: My Journey through Rap Music Lyrics Charis E. Kubrin.- Chapter 9: Getting Emotional Stephen K. Rice.- Chapter 10: The Making of the Chicago Project Robert J. Sampson.- Chapter 11: Surveying Police Officers Wesley G. Skogan.- Section 3: Mining Records.- Chapter 12: Criminology, Terrorism and Serendipity Gary LaFree.- Chapter 13: Playing in the Sandbox: A Methodological Conversation Nicole Rafter and Amy Farrell.- Chapter 14: Getting Things Wrong Really Does Help, as Long as You Keep Trying to Get Things Right: Developing Theories about Why Homicide Rates Rise and Fall Randolph Roth.- Chapter 15: Twists, Turns and Tears on the Path to the Cycle of Violence Cathy Spatz Widom.- Section 4: Analyses of Existing Data.- Chapter 16: Research Adventures with ‘Kinda Big’ Data: Using NIBRS to Study Crime Lynn A. Addington.- Chapter 17: Elusive Facts about Gun Violence: Where Good Surveys Go Bad Philip J. Cook and Jens Ludwig.- Chapter 18: Solving Criminological Puzzles Kenneth C. Land.- Chapter 19: Upon Becoming a Criminologist…And Spending 30 Years Thinking about Interesting Things Pamela K. Lattimore.- Chapter 20: The Devil is in the Details: Crime and Victimization Research with the National Crime Victimization Survey Janet L. Lauritsen.- Chapter 21: What’s the Question? Ask That and You Will Follow the Path of Discovery Alex R. Piquero.- Chapter 22: Predicting Risk: Who Knew It Was Such a Risky Business? Susan Turner.- Section 5: Visual and Geographical Tools.- Chapter 23: Systems Modeling to Inform Drug Policy: A Personal Odyssey Jonathan P. Caulkins.- Chapter 24: Practitioner to Academic: An Interdisciplinary View from both Sides of the Looking Glass Elizabeth R. Groff.- Chapter 25: I Want You to Wear Something for Me’: On the In Situ Measurement of Police Stress and the Potential Rewards of Channeling One’s Inner Experimentalist Matthew J. Hickman.- Chapter 26: Sometimes Pictures Tell the Story Michael D. Maltz.- Chapter 27: Rounding Up Twice the Usual Number of Suspects D. Kim Rossmo.- Chapter 28: Small Worlds of Crime and Criminal Justice Interventions: Discovering Crime Hot Spots David Weisburd.
Andrew Woodhall, Independent Researcher, Huntly, UK; Gabriel Garmendia da Trindade, University of Birmingham, Birmingham, UK

Ethical and Political Approaches to Nonhuman Animal Issues

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXI, 410 p. 2 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-54548-6
       9783319545486
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Philosophy of Nature / Moral Philosophy
This book offers ethical and political approaches to issues that nonhuman animals face. The recent ‘political turn’ in interspecies ethics, from ethical to political approaches, has arisen due to the apparent lack of success of the nonhuman animal movement and dissatisfaction with traditional approaches. Current works largely present general positions rather than address specific issues and principally rely on mainstream approaches. This book offers alternative positions such as cosmopolitan, libertarian, and left humanist thought, as well as applying ethical and political thought to specific issues, such as experimentation, factory farming, nonhuman political agency, and intervention. Presenting work by theorists and activists, insights are offered from both ethics and politics that impact theory and practice and offer essential considerations for those engaging in interspecies ethics within the political turn era.

Inhaltsangaben

1.Introduction; Andrew Woodhall & Gabriel Garmendia da Trindade.-2. Making Light of the Ethical?; Mark Rowlands.- 3. Far-persons; Gary Comstock.- 4. Evolution to Liberation; Steve F. Sapontzis.- 5. Robert Nozick on Nonhuman Animals; Josh Milburn.- 6. Reinventing Left Humanism; Zipporah Weisberg.- 7. Justice for Animals in a Globalizing World; Angie Pepper.- 8. Animal Rights and the Distorting Power of Anthropocentric Prejudice; Gary Steiner.- 9. Interspecies Encounters and the Political Turn; Eva Meijer.- 10. Gandhian Satyagraha and Open Animal Rescue; Tony Milligan.- 11. Shame; Elisa Aaltola.- 12. Are We Smart Enough to Know When to Take the Political Turn for Animals?; Kim Stallwood.- 13. Interspecies Atrocities and the Politics of Memory; Guy Scotton.- 14. Animal Research and the Political Theory of Animal Rights; Gardar Arnason.- 15. Cross-Species Comparisons of Welfare; Tatjana Višak.- 16. Population Dynamics Meets Animal Ethics; Oscar Horta.- 17. Afterword; Carol J. Adams.- Index.
Timothy Johnson, Heriot-Watt University, Edinburgh, UK

Ethics in Quantitative Finance

A Pragmatic Financial Market Theory
Springer International Publishing
Seiten VIII, 339 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-61038-2
       9783319610382
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
48,14 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Finance, general / Quantitative Finance
This book presents an ethical theory for financial transactions that underpins the stability of modern economies. It combines elements from history, ethics, economics and mathematics to show how these combined can be used to develop a pragmatic theory of financial markets. Written in three sections; section one examines the co-evolution of finance and mathematics in an ethical context by focusing on three periods: pre-Socratic Greece, Western Europe in the thirteenth century and North-western Europe in the seventeenth century to demonstrate how the historical development of markets and finance were critical in the development of European ideas of science and democracy. Section two interprets the evidence presented in section one to provide examples of the norms reciprocity, sincerity and charity and introduce the pragmatic theory. Section three uses the pragmatic theory to interpret recent financial crises, address emergent phenomena and relate the theory to alternative contemporary theories of markets. Presenting a unique synthesis of mathematical and behavioural approaches to finance this book provides explicit ethical guidance that will be of interest to academics and practitioners alike.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1 The genesis of money and its impact.- Chapter2 Finance and ethics in medieval Europe.- Chapter3 Finance, mathematics and the foundations of modernity.- Chapter4 The philosophical basis of modernity.- Chapter5 The financial revolution of the late seventeenth century.- Chapter6 The Enlightenment and l’homme éclair.- Chapter7 Practical mathematics: the development of probability theory.- Chapter8 The emergence Homo economicus in the nineteenth century.- Chapter9 The ascendency of Financial Economics.- Chapter10 The Fundamental Theorem of Asset Pricing.- Chapter11 Two women and a duck: a pragmatic theory of markets.- Chapter12 Some implications of a pragmatic approach to finance.
Michael Skey, Loughborough; Marco Antonsich, Loughborough

Everyday Nationhood

Theorising Culture, Identity and Belonging after Banal Nationalism
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XV, 339 p. 5 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-57097-0
       9781137570970
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociology of Culture / Sociology of Racism
This edited collection explores the continuing appeal of nationalism around the world. The authors’ ground-breaking research demonstrates the ways in which national priorities and sensibilities frame an extraordinary array of activities, from classroom discussions and social media posts to global policy-making, as well as identifying the value that can come from feeling part of a national community, especially during times of economic uncertainty and social change. They also note how attachments to nation can often generate powerful emotions, happiness and pride as well as anger and frustration, which can be used to mobilize substantial numbers of people into action. Featuring contributions from leading social scientists across a range of disciplines, including sociology, geography, political science, social psychology, media and cultural studies, the book presents a number of case studies covering a range of countries including Russia, Germany, New Zealand, Serbia, Japan, Azerbaijan, Greece and the USA. Everyday Nationhood will appeal to students and scholars of nationalism, globalization and identity across the social sciences as well as those with an interest in understanding the role of nationalism in shaping some of the most pressing political crises- migration, economic protectionism, populism - of the contemporary era.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: The Persistence of Banal Nationalism; Marco Antonsich & Michael Skey.- Part I: Critical reflections on the Banal Nationalism Thesis.- 2. The rhetoric of nationalism; Craig Calhoun.- 3. The Universality of Banal Nationalism, or can the flag hand unobtrusively outside a Serbian post office?; Ivana Spasi?.- 4. Banal Nationalism in the Internet Age: Rethinking the Relationship between Nations, Nationalisms and the Media; Lukasz Szulc.- Part II – Everyday practices and attitudes; 5. The name and the nation: Banal nationalism and name change practices in the context of co-ethnic migration to Germany; Gesine Wallem.- 6. Collective charisma, selective exclusion and national belonging: ‘false’ and ‘real’ Greeks from the former Soviet Union; Manolis Pratsinakis.- 7. Humming Along: Public and Private Patriotism in Putin’s Russia; J. Paul Goode.- 8. Repertoires of Nationhood in France and Germany; Bart Bonikowski.- Part III– Affect.- 9. On affect, dancing and national bodies; Elisabeth Militz.- 10. Making sense of everyday nationhood: traces in the experiential world; Shanti Sumartojo.- 11. Doing affect around national days: Mundane/banal practice or the call of ‘another space’?; McCreanor, Tim., Muriwai, Emerald., Wetherell, Margaret., Moewaka Barnes, Helen., & Moewaka Barnes, Angela.- Part IV – The trans-national and the global.- 12. Narratives of Legitimacy: Making Nationalism Banal; Melissa Aronczyk.- 13. Banal nationalism and UNESCO’s intangible cultural heritage list: Cases of washoku and the gastronomic meal of the French; Atsuko Ichijo.- 14. Banal Nationalism and Consumer Activism: The Case of #BoycottGermany; Eleftheria J. Lekakis.- 15. Banal nationalism and the imagining of politics; Michael Billig.- 16. Conclusion: The Present and Future of Nationalism; Michael Skey & Marco Antonsich.
J. Hick

Evil and the God of Love

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XX, 389 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-0-230-25279-0
       9780230252790
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
48,14 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Philosophy of Religion / Religious Studies, general
When first published, Evil and the God of Love instantly became recognized as a modern theological classic, widely viewed as the most important work on the problem of evil to appear in English for more than a generation. Including a foreword by Marilyn McCord Adams, this reissue also contains a new preface by the author.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface to the 1985 Reissue Preface to the 2010 Reissue Foreword List of Abbreviations PART I: INTRODUCTORY The Problem and its Terms The Two Poles of Thought - Monism and Dualism PART II: THE AUGUSTINIAN TYPE OF THEODICY The Fountainhead: St Augustine - Evil as Privation of Good Stemming from Misused Freedom The Fountainhead: St Augustine - The Principle of Plenitude and the Aesthetic Theme Catholic Thought from Augustine to the Present Day The Problem of Evil in Reformed Thought Eighteenth-Century 'Optimism' Dividing the Light from the Darkness PART III: THE IRENAEAN TYPE OF THEODICY Sin and the Fall According to the Hellenistic Fathers The Irenaean Type of Theodicy in Schleiermacher The Two Theodicies - Contrasts and Agreements PART IV: A THEODICY FOR TODAY The Starting-Point Moral Evil Pain Suffering The Kingdom of God and the Will of God Recent Work on the Problem of Evil Index
Christoph Franz, Roche Holding Ltd, Basel, Switzerland; Thomas Bieger, University of St. Gallen, St. Gallen, Switzerland; Andreas Herrmann, University of St. Gallen, St. Gallen, Switzerland

Evolving Business Models

How CEOs Transform Traditional Companies
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XII, 219 p. 61 illus., 31 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-48937-7
       9783319489377
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership / Organization
This book addresses the core challenges currently faced by traditional companies. In the age of digitization many industries are now challenged by disruptions of the traditional value chain: new competitors are coming into play, traditional products don’t sell any more, and profits are at risk. As such, CEOs need to adopt new business models for these established industries, while many companies have to reinvent themselves by developing new products for new markets. In this book, leading CEOs share their experiences in transforming established companies. They provide insights on transforming industries and demonstrate what it takes to redefine companies from the ground up. Issues such as organizational transformation, new product development, implementing a new organizational spirit, and many more are discussed.

Inhaltsangaben

Globalization and the Opening of New Markets.- Transformation of Teaching and Research in a Globalized IT Driven World.- Banks Caught Between Regulation, Technical Progress and Profitability.- Business Models in the Chemical Industry Amid a Changing Competitive Landscape.- Business Model Innovation - Some Key Success Factors at Bosch.- Environmental Management.- Industry Expertise: Factors that Determine the Success of Business Models.- Industry Expertise and Dynamic Challenges: Perspectives of an Adopted Railwayman.- The Airline Industry: Flying on Its Own Is not Enough.- From Data to Business: A Paradigm Shift in Industry.- Engineering the Intangible: Strategic Success Factors in the Luxury Watch Industry.- Industry Expertise in the Digital Media Industry: Required Specialisation Versus Potential Disruption of Online Business Models.- Royal Dutch Shell in a Changing World: Navigating Uncertainty.- Into the Future on the Digital Highway.
Kate Newell, Savannah College of Art and Design , Savannah, , USA

Expanding Adaptation Networks

From Illustration to Novelization
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XII, 228 p. 14 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-56711-6
       9781137567116
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Cultural Theory / Movie and TV Adaptations
This book addresses print-based modes of adaptation that have not conventionally been theorized as adaptations—such as novelization, illustration, literary maps, pop-up books, and ekphrasis. It discusses a broad range of image and word-based adaptations of popular literary works, among them The Wizard of Oz, Alice in Wonderland, Daisy Miller, The Strange Case of Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde, Moby Dick, and Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. The study reveals that commercial and franchise works and ephemera play a key role in establishing a work’s iconography. Newell argues that the cultural knowledge and memory of a work is constructed through reiterative processes and proposes a network-based model of adaptation to explain this. Whereas most adaptation studies prioritize film and television, this book’s focus on print invites new entry points for the study of adaptation.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Chapter 1: Introduction: Not in Kansas Anymore: Adaptation Networks.- 2. Chapter 2: “It Wasn’t Like That in the Movie”: Novelization and Expansion.- 3. Chapter 3: Imagining the Unimaginable:  Illustration as Gateway.- 4. Chapter 4: Literary Maps and the Creation of a Legend.- 5. Chapter 5: Pop-up Books: Spectacle and Story.- 6. Chapter 6: “All Text is Lost”: Ekphrastic Reading.- 7. Chapter 7: Conclusion: Like an Open Book. 
Adam Klein, Pace University, New York City, NY, , USA

Fanaticism, Racism, and Rage Online

Corrupting the Digital Sphere
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 189 p. 3 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-51423-9
       9783319514239
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Media and Communication / Digital/New Media
Fanaticism, Racism, and Rage Online is a critical exploration of digital hate culture and its myriad infiltrations into the modern online community. The book examines radical movements that have emerged both on the fringes of the Internet, as well as throughout the web’s most popular spaces where extremist voices now intermix with mainstream politics and popular culture. This investigation brings to light the different forms of extremist culture on the web, from the blatant hate websites, to the much more invasive faux-social networks, racist political blogs, and pseudo-scientific domains.

Inhaltsangaben

.- Introduction.- 1. From Bookshelves to Desktops.- 2. Hate Speech in the Information Age.- 3. Virtual Pleasure Island.- 4. The Websites.- 5. Hate in the Open.- 6. Deceit By Design: A Two-Part Analysis.- 7. Preserving the Digital Sphere.- Conclusion.
Rachel Century, Holocaust Memorial Day Trust, London, UK

Female Administrators of the Third Reich

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten X, 275 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-54892-4
       9781137548924
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of World War II and the Holocaust / Women's Studies
This book compares female administrators who specifically chose to serve the Nazi cause in voluntary roles with those who took on such work as a progression of established careers. Under the Nazi regime, secretaries, SS-Helferinnen (female auxiliaries for the SS) and Nachrichtenhelferinnen des Heeres (female auxiliaries for the army) held similar jobs: taking dictation, answering telephones, sending telegrams. Yet their backgrounds and degree of commitment to Nazi ideology differed markedly. The author explores their motivations and what they knew about the true nature of their work. These women had access to information about the administration of the Holocaust and are a relatively untapped resource. Their recollections shed light on the lives, love lives, and work of their superiors, and the tasks that contributed to the displacement, deportation and death of millions. The question of how gender intersected with Nazism, repression, atrocity and genocide forms the conceptual thread of this book.

Inhaltsangaben

Dedication.- Acknowledgments.- Chapter 1: Introduction.- Part I: Hitler’s Helferinnen.- Chapter 2: Women in Service for the Fatherland.- Chapter 3: Women at Work.- Part II: Sex, Lies and Stenography.- Chapter 4: Typing for the Third Reich.- Chapter 5: Secretaries, Secrets and Genocide.- Chapter 6: Make Love and War.- Part III: Chaos, Confusion and Consequences.- Chapter 7: The End of the War.- Chapter 8: Condemned to the Consequences.- Chapter 9: Conclusion.- Glossary of German Terms and Organisations.- SS Ranks.- Bibliography.- Index
A. Karnani

Fighting Poverty Together

Rethinking Strategies for Business, Governments, and Civil Society to Reduce Poverty
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten V, 297 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2011
ISBN 978-0-230-10587-4
       9780230105874
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
69,54 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Development Economics / International Business
In this hard-hitting polemical Karnani demonstrates what is wrong with today's approaches to reducing poverty. He proposes an eclectic approach to poverty reduction that emphasizes the need for business, government and civil society to partner together to create employment opportunities for the poor.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Fighting Poverty PART I: FAILURE OF THE LIBERTARIAN APPROACH Microcredit Misses its Mark Mirage at the Base of the Pyramid Romanticizing the Poor PART II: FIGHTING POVERTY Selling Beneficial Goods to the Poor Employment is the Solution More Government, Please Social Entrepreneurship: Beyond the Hype
Nick Silver, City, University London, London, UK

Finance, Society and Sustainability

How to Make the Financial System Work for the Economy, People and Planet
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVII, 304 p. 38 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-56060-5
       9781137560605
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
42,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Capital Markets / Public Finance
This book is a critical analysis of the impact of the financial system on the economy, society and the natural environment. It cuts through the noise to looks at its purpose, its activities, and what it does in practice.
Unlike other books that cover the last financial crisis and the risk of another one; this book is about the consequence of the financial system continuing in its current form. It argues that the financial system is a construct of flawed economic theories, designed in the hope that the market will efficiently allocate society’s capital. Instead, the finance sector allocates savings and investment to maximize its own revenues, with resulting collateral damage to the economy, society and the environment.
Although governments try to preserve and regulate the existing system, it is being replaced by a new system driven by technological innovation. The book describes the opportunities this presents for a renaissance of the financial system to actually meet the needs of society, and to re-engineer our economy to avoid environmental crisis.
The book is for anyone who would like to understand the finance system’s purpose, what it does in practice and its impact on the real world. For those working in the industry it provides an overview of the system, their place within it, and how to bring about change. For students and academics it provides a valuable critique of the financial system, and the theories on which it is based. For financial policymakers and regulators it identifies key challenges in their activities.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: What has finance ever done for us?- Chapter 3: Systems thinking and evolution.- Chapter 4: Bad theory and bad practice.- Chapter 5: Financial alchemy: the system now.- Chapter 6: Why pensions are not working.- Chapter 7: Why investment is not working.- Chapter 8: Why banking is not working Chapter 9: The housing pyramid  Chapter 10: The wrong economy.- Chapter 11: Bloodsucking vampire Griffin.- Chapter 12: Conclusion.
Joachim Häcker, German Institute of Corporate Finance, Nürtingen, Germany; Dietmar Ernst, German Institute of Corporate Finance, Nürtingen, Germany

Financial Modeling

An Introductory Guide to Excel and VBA Applications in Finance
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten LXIII, 956 p. 826 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-42657-4
       9781137426574
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Corporate Finance / Business Mathematics
This book provides a comprehensive introduction to modern financial modeling using Excel, VBA, standards of financial modeling and model review.  It offers guidance on essential modeling concepts around the four core financial activities in the modern financial industry today: financial management; corporate finance; portfolio management and financial derivatives. Written in a highly practical, market focused manner, it gives step-by-step guidance on modeling practical problems in a structured manner. Quick and interactive learning is assured due to the structure as a training course which includes applied examples that are easy to follow. All applied examples contained in the book can be reproduced step by step with the help of the Excel files. The content of this book serves as the foundation for the training course Certified Financial Modeler.In an industry that is becoming increasingly complex, financial modeling is a key skill for practitioners across all key sectors of finance and banking, where complicated problems often need to be solved quickly and clearly. This book will equip readers with the basic modeling skills required across the industry today.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1.Financial Modeling Standards.-Chapter2. Model Review.-Chapter3.Excel Workshop(1).-Chapter4.Excel Workshop (2).-Chapter5. Excel Workshop (3).-Chapter6. VBA Workshop.-Chapter7. Investment Appraisal.-Chapter8. Financing.-Chapter9. Corporate Finance (1).-Chapter10. Corporate Finance (2).- Chapter11. Portfolio Management (1).-Chapter 12. Portfolio Management (2).-Chapter 13. Derivatives. 
Raphaël Douady, Labex RéFi and Centre d’Economie de la Sorbonne, Paris, France; Clément Goulet, Université Paris 1 Panthéon-Sorbonne, Paris, France; Pierre-Charles Pradier, Labex RéFi and Centre d’Economie de la Sorbonne, Paris, France

Financial Regulation in the EU

From Resilience to Growth
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIV, 486 p. 65 illus., 31 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-44286-0
       9783319442860
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
51,35 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Public Finance / Corporate Finance
Financial regulation has dramatically evolved and strengthened since the crisis on both sides of the Atlantic, with enhanced international coordination through the G-20 and the Financial Stability Board and, at the regional level, a definite contribution from the European Union. However the new regulatory environment has its critics, with many divergent voices arguing that over-regulation has become a root cause of our current economic stagnation.This book provides a bigger picture view of the impact and future of financial regulation in the EU, exploring the relationship between microeconomic incentives and macroeconomic growth, regulation and financial integration, and the changes required in economic policy to further European integration. Bringing together contributions from law, economics and management science, it offers readers an accessible but rigorous understanding of the current state of play of the regulatory environment, and on the future challenges.Coverage will include:• A review of the recent regulatory changes from a legal and economic perspective• Analysis of how the economic model of financial institutions and entities is impacted by the new frameworks• How to improve securitization and new instruments under MIFID II• Issues in the enhanced supervision under delegated acts for AIFMD, CRR-CRD IV and Solvency II• How long term funding can be supplied in lieu of the non-conventional monetary policies• A new architecture for a safer and more efficient European financial system Financial Regulation in the EU provides much needed clarity on the impact of new financial regulation and the future of the economy, and will prove a must have reference for all those working in, researching and affected by these changes.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction; Raphaël Douady, Clément Goulet and Pierre-Charles Pradier.- Chapter 1) Political economy of the European Monetary Institutions and reform proposals; Jose Martin Flores.- Chapter 2) Fiscal Sustainability and Fiscal Rules in a Monetary Union: Theory and Practice in Europe; Pierre Aldama.- Chapter 3) The composition effect of new fiscal rules in the euro area; Jérôme Creel and Francesco Molteni.- Chapter 4) Banking union and the new economic system; Christian de Boissieu.- Chapter 5) Regulatory capture; Mathilde Poulain.- Chapter 6) Financial Derivatives regulation: a US point of view; Nasser Saber.- Chapter 7) MIFID; Roland Gillet, Stephani Ligot and Hassan Omidi Firouzi.- Chapter 8) Insurance regulation; Pierre-Charles Pradier and Arnaud Chneiweiss.- Chapter 9) Basel III and the retail bank business model; Eric Lamarque.- Chapter 10) Mark-to-market trading portfolios under CRDIV/CRR; Jean-Paul Laurent.- Chapter 11) Rating agencies; Philippe Raimbourg and Federica Salvadè.- Chapter 12) Impact of regulatory capital regulation on balance sheet structure, intermediation cost and growth; Hamza El Khalloufi and Pierre-Charles Pradier.- Chapter 13) Higher Quality securitization; Daphné Héant, Sophie Vermeille and Yann Coatanlem.- Chapter 14) Funding Innovation through institutions; Raphaël Douady and Antoine Kornprobst.- Postface by EP secretary General, Klaus Welle.
Wolfgang Marty, AgaNola AG, Pfaeffikon, Switzerland

Fixed Income Analytics

Bonds in High and Low Interest Rate Environments
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVII, 204 p. 79 illus., 7 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-48540-9
       9783319485409
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Capital Markets / Business Finance
This book analyses and discusses bonds and bond portfolios. Different yields and duration measures are investigated. The transition from a single bond to a bond portfolio leads to the equation for the internal rate of return. Its solution is analyzed and compared to different approaches proposed in the financial industry. The impact of different yield scenarios on a model bond portfolio is illustrated. Market and credit risk are introduced as independent sources of risk. Different concepts for assessing credit markets are described. Lastly, an overview of the benchmark industry is offered and an introduction to convertible bonds is given. This book is a valuable resource not only for students and researchers but also for professionals in the financial industry.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- The Time Value of Money.- The Flat Yield Curve Concept.- The Term Structure of Interest Rate.- Spread Analysis.- Different  Fixed Income Instruments.- Fixed Income Benchmarks.- Convertible.- Appendix. 
Paolo Corvo, Univ Stud Gastronomic Science, Pollenzo

Food Culture, Consumption and Society

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten IX, 169 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-39816-1
       9781137398161
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Organizational Studies, Economic Sociology / Environmental Sociology
This book analyses how consumer food choices have undergone profound changes in the context of the economic crisis, including the rediscovery of local products and the diffusion of multi-ethnic food. Corvo argues that a new ecological relationship between food and the environment is needed to reduce food problems such as food waste and obesity.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction 2. Food culture and Society 3. Crisis and theories of food consumption 4. Problematics of food 5. Food, Environment and Quality of life
Frank D. Tinari, Florham Park, NJ, USA

Forensic Economics

Assessing Personal Damages in Civil Litigation
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XIX, 327 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-57109-0
       9781137571090
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Economic Theory/Quantitative Economics/Mathematical Methods / Public Economics
This edited collection addresses the major issues encountered in the calculation of economic damages to individuals in civil litigation. In federal and state courts in the United States, as well as in other nations, when one party sues another, the suing party is required not only to prove that the harm was, indeed, caused by the other party, but also to claim and demonstrate that a specified dollar value represents just compensation for the harm. Forensic economists are often called upon to evaluate, measure, and opine on the degree of economic loss that is alleged to have occurred. 
Aimed at both practitioners and theorists, the original articles and essays in the edited collection are written by nationally recognized and widely published forensic experts. Its strength is in showcasing theories, methods, and measurements as they differ in a variety of cases, and in its review of the forensic economics literature developed over the past thirty years. Readers will find informative discussions of topics such as establishing earnings capacity for both adults and infants, worklife probability, personal consumption deductions, taxation as treated in federal and state courts, valuing fringe benefits, discounting theory and practice, the effects of the Affordable Care Act, the valuation of personal services, wrongful discharge, hedonics, effective communication by the expert witness, and ethical issues. The volume also covers surveys of the views of practicing forensic economists, the connection between law and forensic economics, alternatives to litigation in the form of VCF-like schedules, and key differences among nations in measuring economic damages.

Inhaltsangaben

1. An Introduction to the Field of Forensic Economics.- 2. The Meaning of Earning Capacity.- 3. Evolution of Worklife Expectancy Measurement.- 4. Personal Consumption and Wrongful Death Damages.- 5. Estimating Educational Attainment and Earning Capacity of a Minor Child.- 6. Incorporating Fringe Benefits in Loss Calculations.- 
7. Federal and State Income Tax Aspects in Forensic Economics; David Schap 8. Issues in Applying Discount Rates.- 9. Potential Effects of the Affordable Care Act on Loss Calculations.- 10. Challenges in Valuing Loss of Services.- 11. Issues in Employment Litigation Analysis.- 12. Differences Among State Court Jurisdictions in Damages Calculations.- 13. Forensic Economists and Their Changing Viewpoints Over Time.- 14. Hedonic Valuation Issues.- 15. Ethical Dimensions of Forensic Economics.- 16. Understanding Law as a Part of Forensic Economic Practice.- 17. Effective Communications as a Forensic Economist.- 18. Reflections on the 911 Victim Compensation Fund.- 19. Differences Among Nations in Measuring Economic Damages.
Johnny L. Matson, Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, USA

Functional Assessment for Challenging Behaviors

Springer New York
Seiten IX, 243 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-1-4614-3036-0
       9781461430360
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
149,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Child and School Psychology / Psychiatry
As the cornerstone of applied behavior analysis, functional assessment is supported by a burgeoning literature that focuses on identification of and interventions for aggressive, self-injurious, and other challenging behaviors. Although the number of research studies continues to grow, full-length volumes on using functional assessment to address these behaviors remain few and far between.Comprehensive in coverage, Functional Assessment for Challenging Behaviors expands the knowledge base by providing information on all aspects of its topic. This unique volume addresses basic questions in salient detail, from types and rates of challenging behaviors to populations that warrant functional assessment. In addition, it examines typical assessment techniques, including interview, scaling, experimental, and in vivo methods. The use of functional assessment in treatment planning – and in combination with other interventions – is covered in depth. An especially timely chapter identifies key ethical and legal concerns in working with challenging behavior populations. Coverage includes:The history of behavior analysis and functional assessment.The nature, prevalence, and characteristics of challenging behaviors.Interview and observation methods in functional assessment and analysis.Experimental functional analysis for challenging behaviors.Treatment methods commonly used with functional assessment.Using functional assessment in treatment planning. Functional Assessment for Challenging Behaviors is an essential resource for researchers, scientist-practitioners, and graduate students in clinical child and school psychology, pediatric psychiatry and medicine, social work, rehabilitation, and developmental psychology.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction; J. L. Matson.- Chapter 2. A Brief History of Functional Analysis and Applied Behavior Analysis; D. R. Dixon, T. Vogel, J. Tarbox.- Chapter 3. Nature, Prevalence and Characteristics of Challenging Behavior; R. Didden, P. Sturmey, J. Sigafoos, R. Lang, M. F. O’Reilly, G. E. Lancioni.- Chapter 4. Function of Challenging Behaviors; G. E. Lancioni, N. N. Singh, M. F. O’Reilly, J. Sigafoos, R. Didden.- Chapter 5. Populations and Problems Evaluated with Functional Assessment; J. M. Huete, P. F. Kurtz, R. J. Boyd.- Chapter 6. Methods of Defining and Observing Behaviors; S. Hurwitz, N. F. Minshawi.- Chapter 7. Interview and Observation Methods in Functional Assessment; A. M. Kozlowski, J. L. Matson.- Chapter 8. Experimental Functional Analysis; T. R. Vollmer, H. S. Roane, A. B. Rone.- Chapter 9. In Vivo Assessment: Issues of Real Time Data; M. Horovitz, J. L. Matson.- Chapter 10. Scaling Methods of Functional Assessment; M. Sipes, J. L. Matson.- Chapter 11. Treatment Methods Commonly Used in Conjunction with Functional Assessment; N. M. Rodriguez, W. W. Fisher, M. E. Kelley.- Chapter 12. The Role of Functional Assessment in Treatment Planning; D. A. Napolitano, V. M. Knapp, E. Speares, D. B. McAdam, H. Brown.- Chapter 13. Ethical Issues and Considerations; A. Poling, J. L. Austin,  S. M. Peterson, A. Mahoney,  M. Weeden.
Johnny L. Matson, Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, USA

Functional Assessment for Challenging Behaviors

Springer New York
Seiten IX, 243 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-1-4939-4127-8
       9781493941278
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
149,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Child and School Psychology / Psychiatry
As the cornerstone of applied behavior analysis, functional assessment is supported by a burgeoning literature that focuses on identification of and interventions for aggressive, self-injurious, and other challenging behaviors. Although the number of research studies continues to grow, full-length volumes on using functional assessment to address these behaviors remain few and far between.Comprehensive in coverage, Functional Assessment for Challenging Behaviors expands the knowledge base by providing information on all aspects of its topic. This unique volume addresses basic questions in salient detail, from types and rates of challenging behaviors to populations that warrant functional assessment. In addition, it examines typical assessment techniques, including interview, scaling, experimental, and in vivo methods. The use of functional assessment in treatment planning – and in combination with other interventions – is covered in depth. An especially timely chapter identifies key ethical and legal concerns in working with challenging behavior populations. Coverage includes:The history of behavior analysis and functional assessment.The nature, prevalence, and characteristics of challenging behaviors.Interview and observation methods in functional assessment and analysis.Experimental functional analysis for challenging behaviors.Treatment methods commonly used with functional assessment.Using functional assessment in treatment planning. Functional Assessment for Challenging Behaviors is an essential resource for researchers, scientist-practitioners, and graduate students in clinical child and school psychology, pediatric psychiatry and medicine, social work, rehabilitation, and developmental psychology.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction; J. L. Matson.- Chapter 2. A Brief History of Functional Analysis and Applied Behavior Analysis; D. R. Dixon, T. Vogel, J. Tarbox.- Chapter 3. Nature, Prevalence and Characteristics of Challenging Behavior; R. Didden, P. Sturmey, J. Sigafoos, R. Lang, M. F. O’Reilly, G. E. Lancioni.- Chapter 4. Function of Challenging Behaviors; G. E. Lancioni, N. N. Singh, M. F. O’Reilly, J. Sigafoos, R. Didden.- Chapter 5. Populations and Problems Evaluated with Functional Assessment; J. M. Huete, P. F. Kurtz, R. J. Boyd.- Chapter 6. Methods of Defining and Observing Behaviors; S. Hurwitz, N. F. Minshawi.- Chapter 7. Interview and Observation Methods in Functional Assessment; A. M. Kozlowski, J. L. Matson.- Chapter 8. Experimental Functional Analysis; T. R. Vollmer, H. S. Roane, A. B. Rone.- Chapter 9. In Vivo Assessment: Issues of Real Time Data; M. Horovitz, J. L. Matson.- Chapter 10. Scaling Methods of Functional Assessment; M. Sipes, J. L. Matson.- Chapter 11. Treatment Methods Commonly Used in Conjunction with Functional Assessment; N. M. Rodriguez, W. W. Fisher, M. E. Kelley.- Chapter 12. The Role of Functional Assessment in Treatment Planning; D. A. Napolitano, V. M. Knapp, E. Speares, D. B. McAdam, H. Brown.- Chapter 13. Ethical Issues and Considerations; A. Poling, J. L. Austin,  S. M. Peterson, A. Mahoney,  M. Weeden.
Hans Peters, Maastricht University, Maastricht, The Netherlands

Game Theory

A Multi-Leveled Approach
Springer Berlin Heidelberg
Seiten XVII, 494 p. 89 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-662-46949-1
       9783662469491
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Game Theory / Game Theory, Economics, Social and Behav. Sciences
This textbook presents the basics of game theory both on an undergraduate level and on a more advanced mathematical level. It is the second, revised version of the successful 2008 edition. The book covers most topics of interest in game theory, including cooperative game theory. Part I presents introductions to all these topics on a basic yet formally precise level. It includes chapters on repeated games, social choice theory, and selected topics such as bargaining theory, exchange economies, and matching. Part II goes deeper into noncooperative theory and treats the theory of zerosum games, refinements of Nash equilibrium in strategic as well as extensive form games, and evolutionary games. Part III covers basic concepts in the theory of transferable utility games, such as core and balancedness, Shapley value and variations, and nucleolus. Some mathematical tools on duality and convexity are collected in Part IV. Every chapter in the book contains a problem section. Hints, answers and solutions are included.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Part I Thinking Strategically.- Finite Two-Person Zero-Sum Games.- Finite Two-Person Games.- Finite Extensive Form Games.- Finite Games with Incomplete Information.- Noncooperative Games: Extensions.- Repeated Games.- An Introduction to Evolutionary Games.- Cooperative Games with Transferable Utility.- Cooperative Game Models.- Social Choice.- Part II Noncooperative Games.- Matrix Games.- Finite Games.- Extensive Form Games.- Evolutionary Games.- Part III Cooperative Games.- TU-Games: Dominationa, Stable Sets, and the Core.- The Shapley Value.- Core, Shapley Value, and Weber Set.- The Nucleolus.- Special Transferable Utility Games.- Bargaining Problems.- Part IV Tools.
Hans Peters, Maastricht University, Maastricht, The Netherlands

Game Theory

A Multi-Leveled Approach
Springer Berlin Heidelberg
Seiten XVII, 494 p. 89 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-662-51877-9
       9783662518779
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Game Theory / Game Theory, Economics, Social and Behav. Sciences
This textbook presents the basics of game theory both on an undergraduate level and on a more advanced mathematical level. It is the second, revised version of the successful 2008 edition. The book covers most topics of interest in game theory, including cooperative game theory. Part I presents introductions to all these topics on a basic yet formally precise level. It includes chapters on repeated games, social choice theory, and selected topics such as bargaining theory, exchange economies, and matching. Part II goes deeper into noncooperative theory and treats the theory of zerosum games, refinements of Nash equilibrium in strategic as well as extensive form games, and evolutionary games. Part III covers basic concepts in the theory of transferable utility games, such as core and balancedness, Shapley value and variations, and nucleolus. Some mathematical tools on duality and convexity are collected in Part IV. Every chapter in the book contains a problem section. Hints, answers and solutions are included.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Part I Thinking Strategically.- Finite Two-Person Zero-Sum Games.- Finite Two-Person Games.- Finite Extensive Form Games.- Finite Games with Incomplete Information.- Noncooperative Games: Extensions.- Repeated Games.- An Introduction to Evolutionary Games.- Cooperative Games with Transferable Utility.- Cooperative Game Models.- Social Choice.- Part II Noncooperative Games.- Matrix Games.- Finite Games.- Extensive Form Games.- Evolutionary Games.- Part III Cooperative Games.- TU-Games: Dominationa, Stable Sets, and the Core.- The Shapley Value.- Core, Shapley Value, and Weber Set.- The Nucleolus.- Special Transferable Utility Games.- Bargaining Problems.- Part IV Tools.
Sangkyun Kim, Kangwon National University, Chuncheon-si, Kangwon-do, Korea (Republic of); Kibong Song, Virginia Tech, Blacksburg, VA, USA; Barbara Lockee, Virginia Tech, Blacksburg, VA, USA; John Burton, Virginia Tech, Blacksburg, VA, USA

Gamification in Learning and Education

Enjoy Learning Like Gaming
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIV, 159 p. 76 illus., 60 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-47282-9
       9783319472829
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Educational Technology / Learning & Instruction
This book explores the theoretical foundations of gamification in learning and education. It has become increasingly difficult to engage and motivate students. Gamification not only makes learning interesting, but also allows game players to solve problems and learn lessons through repeated attempts and failures. This 'positive failure' can motivate students to attempt a difficult mission. Chapters in this volume cover topics such as the definition and characteristics of gamification, gamification in learning and education, theories, research on gamification, framework, strategy, and cases.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Beginning of Journey.- Chapter 2.Engagement and Fun.- Chapter 3. What Is a Game?.- Chapter 4.What is Gamification in Learning and Education?.- Chapter 5.Theories for Gamification in Learning and Education.- Chapter 6.Students’ Perception of Gamification in Learning and Education.- Chapter 7.Gamification Framework.- Chapter 8.Gamification Strategy.- Chapter 9.Legal and Ethical Issues.- Chapter 10. Gamification Cases in Education.- Chapter 11.Gamification Cases in STEM Education.- Chapter 12.Gamification Cases in Liberal Arts and Social Science Education.- Chapter 13.Gamify Your Instruction.
Rachel Connelly, Bowdoin College Dept of Economics, Brunswick, ME, USA; Ebru Kongar, Dickinson College, Carlisle, PA, USA

Gender and Time Use in a Global Context

The Economics of Employment and Unpaid Labor
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XXIII, 505 p. 24 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-56836-6
       9781137568366
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
160,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Economics / Labor Economics
This edited volume uses a feminist approach to explore the economic implications of the complex interrelationship between gender and time use. Household composition, sexuality, migration patterns, income levels, and race/ethnicity are all considered as important factors that interact with gender and time use patterns. The book is split in two sections: The macroeconomic portion explores cutting edge issues such as time poverty and its relationship to income poverty, and the macroeconomic effects of recession and austerity; while the microeconomic section studies topics such as differences by age, activity sequencing, and subjective well-being of time spent. The chapters also examine a range of age groups, from the labor of school-age children to elderly caregivers, and analyze time use in Argentina, Australia, Canada, China, Finland, India, Korea, South Africa, Tanzania, Turkey, and the United States. Each chapter provides a substantial introduction to the academic literature of its focus and is written to be revealing to researchers and accessible to students and policymakers.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Feminist Approaches to Time Use.- 2. Unpaid Work in Macroeconomics: A Stocktaking Exercise.- 3. The Challenge of Austerity For Gender Equality In Europe.- 4. Women, Recession, and Austerity.- 5. Paid and Unpaid Work Time by Labor Force Status of Prime Age Women and Men in Canada.- 6. Gender, Socieconomic Status, Time-Use, and the Great Recession in the U.S..- 7. Time and Income Poverty in the Case of Buenos Aires.- 8. The Dual Problem of Unemployment and Time Poverty in South Africa.- 9. Women and the Urban Economy in India.- 10. The Challenge of “Indirect Care”.- 11. Caregiving by Older Adults in the United States.- 12. Division of Workforce and Domestic Labor among Same-Sex Couples.- 13. Double Shift, Double Balance: Housework in the Presence of Children in the United States.- 14. How Do Caregiving Responsibilities Shape the Time Use of Women and Men in Rural China?.- 15. Gendered Patterns of Time Use over the Life Cycle in Turkey.- 16. Environmental Chores, Household Time Use, and Gender in Rural Tanzania.- 17. Gender Divisions in the Real Time of the Elderly in South Africa.- 18. Is it Just Too Hard? Gender Time Symmetry in Market and Nonmarket Work and Subjective Time Pressure in Australia, Finland, and Korea.
Christina Richards, Nottingham Center for Transgender Health, Nottingham, UK; Walter Pierre Bouman, Nottingham Center for Transgender Health, Nottingham, UK; Meg-John Barker, The Open University Psychology in the Social Sciences, Milton Keynes, UK

Genderqueer and Non-Binary Genders

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XV, 306 p. 17 illus., 15 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-51052-5
       9781137510525
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
32,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Personality and Social Psychology / Gender Studies
This book addresses the emerging field of genderqueer or non-binary genders - that is, individuals who do not identify as male or female. It considers theoretical, research, practice, and activist perspectives; and outlines a basis for good practice when working with non-binary individuals. The first section provides an overview of historical, legal and academic aspects of this phenomenon. The second section explores how psychotherapeutic, psychological and psychiatric theory and practice are adapting to a non-binary model of gender, and the third section considers the body related aspects, from endocrinology to surgery. This work will appeal to a wide readership, from practitioners working with non-binary individuals - including psychologists, surgeons, social workers, nurses, psychiatrists, endocrinologists, psychotherapists and counselors, lawyers, and healthcare workers - to researchers interested in the study of gender identities, to students and gender activists.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction.- Section 1. Societies.- Chapter 2: History and Cultural Diversity.- Chapter 3: Non-Binary Activism.- Chapter 4: Academic Theory.- Chapter 5: Law.- Section 2. Minds.- Chapter 6: Psychotherapy.- Chapter 7: Psychiatry.- Chapter 8: Psychology.- Section 3. Bodies.- Chapter 9: Child and adolescent endocrinology.- Chapter 10: Adult Endocrinology.- Chapter 11: Chest surgeries.- Chapter 12: Surgery for bodies commonly gendered as male.- Chapter 13: Genital surgery for bodies commonly gendered as female.- Chapter 14: Future Directions.
Jan-Benedict Steenkamp, University of North Carolina at Chapell Hill, North Carolina, , USA

Global Brand Strategy

World-wise Marketing in the Age of Branding
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXIV, 319 p. 33 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-349-94993-9
       9781349949939
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Marketing / Emerging Markets/Globalization
Steenkamp introduces the global brand value chain and explains how brand equity factors into shareholder value. The book equips executives with techniques for developing strategy, organizing execution, and measuring results so that your brand will prosper globally.What sets strong global brands apart? First, they generate more than half their revenue and most of their growth outside their home market. Secondly, their brand equity is responsible for a massive percentage of their firm’s market value. Third, they operate as single brands everywhere on the planet. We find them in B2C and B2B industries, among large and small companies, and among established companies and new businesses.The stewards of these brands have a set of skills and knowledge that sets them apart from the typical corporate marketer. So what’s their secret? In a world that is globalizing, but not yet globalized, how do you build a powerful global brand that resonates universally but also accommodates local nuances? How do you ensure that it is dynamic and flexible enough to change at market speed?World-class marketing expert Jan-Benedict Steenkamp has studied global brands for over 25 years on six continents. He has distilled their practices into eight tools that you can start using today. With case studies from around the world, Steenkamp’s book is provocative and timely. Global Brand Strategy speaks to three types of B2C and B2B managers: those who want to strengthen already strong global brands, those who want to launch their brands globally and get results, and those who need to revive their global brand and stop the bleeding.

Inhaltsangaben

Part One: Global Brand Building.- 2. The COMET Framework: How Global Brands Create Value.- 3. Customer Propositions for Global Brands.- 4. Global Marketing Mix Decisions: Global Integration, Not Standardization.- 5. Global Brand Building in the Digital Age.- Part Two: Structures and Processes for Global Brand Building.- 6. Organizational Structures for Global Brands.- 7. Global Brand Management.- 8. Corporate Social Responsibility.- Part Three: Global Brand Performance.- 9. Global Brand Equity.- 10. Global Brands and Shareholder Value.- 11. The Future of Global Brands
Bodo B. Schlegelmilch, Vienna University of Economics and Business, WU Vienna, Vienna, Austria

Global Marketing Strategy

An Executive Digest
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXVII, 249 p. 45 illus., 29 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-26277-2
       9783319262772
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Marketing / Emerging Markets/Globalization
This book has been written for experienced managers and students in postgraduate programs, such as MBA or specialized Masters programs. In a systematic yet concise manner, it addresses all major issues companies face when conducting business across national and cultural boundaries, including assessing and selecting the most promising overseas markets, evaluating market entry alternatives, examining the forces that drive adaptation versus standardization of the marketing mix. It looks at the various global marketing challenges from a strategic perspective and also addresses topics not usually found in international marketing texts, such as aligning marketing strategies with global organizational structures, managing the relationship between national subsidiaries, regional headquarters and global headquarters, as well as corporate social responsibility challenges, and pertinent future trends that are likely to affect global business.

Inhaltsangaben

Marketing: A Global Discipline.- Assessing Global Market Opportunities.- Entering Global Markets.- Segmenting Targeting and Positioning in Global Markets.- Creating Global Product and Service Offerings.- Extracting Value from Global Operations.- Global Supply Chains and Distribution Networks.- Global Branding and Communication.- Organizational Design for Global Marketing Strategy.- Global Marketing Ethics and CSR.- The Future of Global Marketing Strategy.
Akram Al Ariss, Université de Toulouse, Toulouse Business School, Toulouse, France

Global Talent Management

Challenges, Strategies, and Opportunities
Springer International Publishing
Seiten VIII, 289 p. 18 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-3-319-05124-6
       9783319051246
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Human Resource Management / Emerging Markets/Globalization
This book bridges the research and practice of global talent management. It opens important theoretical and practical avenues to understand the concept internationally while focusing on developing and emerging countries. Chapters derive from various geographic regions and embrace cross-national, comparative, and interdisciplinary perspectives. An open and inclusive approach is used in assessing the challenges of global talent management, strategies to overcome these challenges, and in charting opportunities for future talent management. These three dimensions are crucial to academic researchers and business practitioners for envisioning a positive future role of talent management in businesses and societies. ?

Inhaltsangaben

Meaning and Processes of Global Talent Management: Global Talent Management: An Introduction and a Review.- HR Directors' Understanding of 'Talent': A Cross-Cultural Study.- Smart Global Talent Management: A Promising Hybrid.- Coaching of Key Talents in Multinational Companies.- Cultural Intelligence as a Key Construct for Global Talent Management.- Inpatriation as a Key Component of Global Talent Management.- The Global Talent Challenge of Self-Initiated Expatriates.- Opportunities and Challenges for Organisations and Highly Skilled Migrant Professionals.- Global Talent Management Across Geographical Contexts: Global Talent Management in Brazil: Jeitinho as a Managerial Talent.- Talent Management in China.- Global Talent Management in Japanese Multinational Companies: The Case of Nissan Motor Company.- Talent Management in ASEAN: A Study of Thailand.- Global Talent Management in Knowledge Intensive Firms in Europe and India.- Talent Management in the MENA and GCC Regions: Challenges and Opportunities.- Talent Management in Poland: Challenges, Strategies, and Opportunities.- How to Attract and Retain Global Careerists: Evidence from Finland.- Global Talent Management in French Multinationals.- Global Talent Management and the American Female Executive.
Akram Al Ariss, Université de Toulouse, Toulouse Business School, Toulouse, France

Global Talent Management

Challenges, Strategies, and Opportunities
Springer International Publishing
Seiten VIII, 289 p. 18 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-3-319-34300-6
       9783319343006
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Human Resource Management / Emerging Markets/Globalization
This book bridges the research and practice of global talent management. It opens important theoretical and practical avenues to understand the concept internationally while focusing on developing and emerging countries. Chapters derive from various geographic regions and embrace cross-national, comparative, and interdisciplinary perspectives. An open and inclusive approach is used in assessing the challenges of global talent management, strategies to overcome these challenges, and in charting opportunities for future talent management. These three dimensions are crucial to academic researchers and business practitioners for envisioning a positive future role of talent management in businesses and societies. ?

Inhaltsangaben

Meaning and Processes of Global Talent Management: Global Talent Management: An Introduction and a Review.- HR Directors' Understanding of 'Talent': A Cross-Cultural Study.- Smart Global Talent Management: A Promising Hybrid.- Coaching of Key Talents in Multinational Companies.- Cultural Intelligence as a Key Construct for Global Talent Management.- Inpatriation as a Key Component of Global Talent Management.- The Global Talent Challenge of Self-Initiated Expatriates.- Opportunities and Challenges for Organisations and Highly Skilled Migrant Professionals.- Global Talent Management Across Geographical Contexts: Global Talent Management in Brazil: Jeitinho as a Managerial Talent.- Talent Management in China.- Global Talent Management in Japanese Multinational Companies: The Case of Nissan Motor Company.- Talent Management in ASEAN: A Study of Thailand.- Global Talent Management in Knowledge Intensive Firms in Europe and India.- Talent Management in the MENA and GCC Regions: Challenges and Opportunities.- Talent Management in Poland: Challenges, Strategies, and Opportunities.- How to Attract and Retain Global Careerists: Evidence from Finland.- Global Talent Management in French Multinationals.- Global Talent Management and the American Female Executive.
Beverly Barrett, University of Houston, Houston, TX, USA

Globalization and Change in Higher Education

The Political Economy of Policy Reform in Europe
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIX, 323 p. 10 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-52367-5
       9783319523675
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Higher Education / Educational Policy and Politics
This book sets out political economy explanations for higher education policy reform in Europe in the initial decades of the 21st century. With a sustained focus on the national level of policy implementation, institutional change is considered in relationship to broader trends in economic development and globalization. Since the concept of a “Europe of Knowledge” was presented by the European Commission in 1997, the pursuit of global competitiveness sets the context for the international initiative of the Bologna Process that has created the European Higher Education Area (EHEA). Growing from 29 to 48 participating countries, there are three core explanations for change in the policy process: globalization (economic), intergovernmentalism (political), and Europeanization (social). As part of multi-method research analysis, this book presents qualitative case studies on Portugal and Spain to consider points of comparison, including national governance history and modernization of higher education institutions. The structure of government in these countries affects the policy reforms. Ultimately, the Bologna Process serves as a model for integration of higher education reform in other world regions. This book is essential reading for students, researchers, and policy makers in the fields of education, economics, and public policy.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Institutions and Ideas: The Political, Economic, and Social Context for the Bologna Process.- Chapter 2. Historical Institutionalism and Change in Higher Education.- Chapter 3. The Dual Roles of Higher Education Institutions in the Knowledge Economy.- Chapter 4. The Context for Higher Education Attainment: A Quantitative Assessment.- Chapter 5. Portugal: Political Economy Explanations for Centralized Reforms.- Chapter 6. The Stakeholders in Internationalization in Portugal.- Chapter 7. Spain: Political Economy Explanations for Decentralized Reforms.- Chapter 8. The Stakeholders in Internationalization in Spain.- Chapter 9. Lessons for the Future of the Bologna Process and the Internationalization of Higher Education.
F. Soriano, Spanair

Goal: The Ball Doesn't Go In By Chance

Management Ideas from the World of Football
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten IX, 203 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-0-230-35515-6
       9780230355156
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Management / Organization
Contains fascinating facts that aren't found in either the sports or business press that reveal the behind the scenes world of international football. Soriano teaches us the importance of strategy as he examines how managers can waste millions of euros making decisions that lack any logic at all in both football and business.

Inhaltsangaben

It Isn't Luck The Playing Field: What Business Are You In? Strategies: How Do We Play? The Winning Team Leadership: Dr House, Frank Rijkaard and Pep Guardiola Human Resources: Good Criteria and Hygiene Reasons and Emotions on the Negotiating Table Innovation: Science and Art Back To The Future
William Lane Craig, Biola University, La Mirada, CA, USA

God and Abstract Objects

The Coherence of Theism: Aseity
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 540 p. 6 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-55383-2
       9783319553832
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
139,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Philosophy of Religion / Christian Theology
This book is an exploration and defense of the coherence of classical theism’s doctrine of divine aseity in the face of the challenge posed by Platonism with respect to abstract objects. A synoptic work in analytic philosophy of religion, the book engages discussions in philosophy of mathematics, philosophy of language, metaphysics, and metaontology. It addresses absolute creationism, non-Platonic realism, fictionalism, neutralism, and alternative logics and semantics, among other topics. The book offers a helpful taxonomy of the wide range of options available to the classical theist for dealing with the challenge of Platonism. It probes in detail the diverse views on the reality of abstract objects and their compatibility with classical theism. It contains a most thorough discussion, rooted in careful exegesis, of the biblical and patristic basis of the doctrine of divine aseity. Finally, it challenges the influential Quinean metaontological theses concerning the way in which we make ontological commitments.

Inhaltsangaben

Part 1. The Problematic.- Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Theology Proper and Abstract Objects.- Chapter 3. The Indispensability Argument for Platonism.- Part 2. Realist Solutions.- Chapter 4. Absolute Creationism.- Chapter 5. Non-Platonic Realism.- Part 3. Anti-Realist Solutions.- Chapter 6. Alternative Logics and Semantics.- Chapter 7. Fictionalism.- Chapter 8. Ultima Facie Interpretive Strategies.- Chapter 9. Pretense Theory.- Chapter 10. Neo-Meinongianism.- Chapter 11. Neutralism.- Part 4. Conclusion.- Chapter 12. Concluding Remarks.
G. Semenza

Graduate Study for the Twenty-First Century

How to Build an Academic Career in the Humanities
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XX, 340 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-0-230-10033-6
       9780230100336
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
48,14 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Higher Education / Structural Geology
In a straightforward manner, Semenza identifies the obstacles along the path of the academic career and offers tangible advice. Fully revised and updated, this edition's new material on advising, electronic publishing, and the post-financial crisis humanities job market will help students negotiate the changing landscape of academia.

Inhaltsangaben

Foreword by Michael Bérubé Introduction The Culture of a Graduate Program The Structure of a Graduate Career Organization and Time Management The Graduate Seminar The Seminar Paper Teaching Exams The Dissertation Attending Conferences Publishing Service and Participation The Job Market Appendix A: Sample CVs Appendix B: Sample Syllabi Appendix C: Sample Teaching Portfolios Appendix D: Examination Materials Appendix E: Sample Dissertation Prospectus Appendix F: Conference Materials Appendix G: Book Prospectus Materials Appendix H: Job Market Materials Index
Andrea DeCapua, New York University Steinhardt School of Education, New York, NY, USA

Grammar for Teachers

A Guide to American English for Native and Non-Native Speakers
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 439 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-33914-6
       9783319339146
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Language Education / Learning & Instruction
Updated and revised with more examples and expanded discussions, this second edition continues the aim of providing teachers with a solid understanding of the use and function of grammatical structures in American English. The book avoids jargon and presents essential grammatical structures clearly and concisely. Dr. DeCapua approaches grammar from a descriptive rather than a prescriptive standpoint, discussing differences between formal and informal language, and spoken and written English. The text draws examples from a wide variety of authentic materials to illustrate grammatical concepts. The many activities throughout the book engage users in exploring the different elements of grammar and in considering how these elements work together to form meaning. Users are encouraged to tap into their own, often subconscious, knowledge of grammar to consciously apply their knowledge to their own varied teaching settings. The text also emphasizes the importance of understanding grammar from the perspective of English language learners, an approach that allows teachers to better appreciate the difficulties these learners face. Specific areas of difficulties for learners of English are highlighted throughout.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1 What Is Grammar?.- Chapter 2 Morphology: Words and Their Parts.- Chapter 3 The Noun Phrase.- Chapter 4 Adjectives and Adverbs.- Chapter 5 Overview of Verbs and Verb Phrases: The Heart of the Sentence.- Chapter 6 Time, Tense, and Aspect of Verbs.- Chapter 7 Modal Auxiliary Verbs and Related Structures.- Chapter 8 Basic Sentence Patterns and Major Variations.- Chapter 9 Compound Sentences and Introduction to Complex Sentences: Adverbial Clauses.- Chapter 10 Complex Sentences Continued: Relative Clauses.- Chapter 11 Complex Sentences Continued: Noun Clauses.- Chapter 12 Verbal Constructions.- Glossary.- Appendices.
Otto O Yang, UCLA Medical Center Geffen School of Medicine, Los Angeles, CA, USA

Guide to Effective Grant Writing

How to Write a Successful NIH Grant Application
Springer US
Seiten XIV, 90 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-1-4614-1580-0
       9781461415800
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Education, general / Teaching and Teacher Education
Guide to Effective Grant Writing: How to Write a Successful NIH Grant, 2nd edition is a fully updated follow-up to the popular original. It is written to help the 100,000+ post-graduate students and professionals who need to write effective proposals for grants. There is little or no formal teaching about the process of writing grants for NIH, and many grant applications are rejected due to poor writing and weak formulation of ideas. Procuring grant funding is the central key to survival for any academic researcher in the biological sciences; thus, being able to write a proposal that effectively illustrates one's ideas is essential. Covering all aspects of the proposal process, from the most basic questions about form and style to the task of seeking funding, this volume offers clear advice backed up with excellent examples. Included are a number of specimen proposals to help shed light on the important issues surrounding the writing of proposals. The Guide is a clear, straight-forward, and reader-friendly tool. Guide to Effective Grant Writing: How to Write a Successful NIH Grant Writing is based on Dr. Yang's extensive experience serving on NIH grant review panels; it covers the common mistakes and problems he routinely witnesses while reviewing grants.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface To The First Edition.- Preface To The Current Edition.-Overview: Overall Goals When Writing Grant Applications.- Organization And Use This Guide.- Preparing To Write.- Types Of Nih Grants.- Anatomy Of The Nih Grant Application.- Starting To Write: Deciding The Research Aims And Overcoming Writer’s Block.- Organization And Writing Style.- Figures And Tables.- Specific Aims.- Research Strategy: Significance.- Research Strategy: Innovation.- Research Strategy: Approach.- Bibliography And References Cited.- Appendices.- Collaborators And Consultants.- Training And Career Development Grants.- Administrative Sections And Submission Process.- Scoring Process.- Resubmitting An Application.- Non-Nih Grants.- Conclusions.- Appendix:  Useful Web Resources.- Index.
International Association of Universities

Guide to Higher Education in Africa

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVI, 729 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2013
ISBN 978-0-230-36960-3
       9780230369603
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
149,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Theatre History / Administration, Organization and Leadership
The sixth edition of the Guide to Higher Education in Africa contains reliable and up-to-date information on higher education throughout Africa - over 950 institutions in 51 countries, plus details of national education systems and agencies - in a single reference source.

Inhaltsangaben

Detailed Information on Institutions by Country Analysis of the Education System in Each Country Listings of National Bodies Concerned with Higher Education Includes invaluable information on Fees, Funding, Admission Requirements, Credentials, Staff and Student Statistics and much more
Jianhong Liu, University of Macau, Taipa, Macao, Macao; Bill Hebenton, University of Manchester, Manchester, UK; Susyan Jou, National Taipei University, Taipei, Taiwan

Handbook of Asian Criminology

Springer New York
Seiten XV, 443 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2013
ISBN 978-1-4614-5217-1
       9781461452171
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
267,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminology and Criminal Justice, general / Political Science
The Handbook of Asian Criminology aims to be a key reference for international scholars with an interest in the broad theme of international criminology in general, and the Asian region in particular. Contextualization is a key theme in this book. The role of context is often underemphasized in international criminology, so the Handbook of Asian Criminology’s premise that crime and the responses to it are best understood as deeply embedded in the cultural specificity of the environment which produces them will play a key role throughout the work. Attention will be given to country- and region specific attitudes towards crime and punishment.

Inhaltsangaben

Jianhong Liu, University of Macau, Taipa, Macao, Macao; Bill Hebenton, University of Manchester, Manchester, UK; Susyan Jou, National Taipei University, Taipei, Taiwan

Handbook of Asian Criminology

Springer New York
Seiten XV, 443 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2013
ISBN 978-1-4939-5171-0
       9781493951710
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
267,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminology and Criminal Justice, general / Political Science
The Handbook of Asian Criminology aims to be a key reference for international scholars with an interest in the broad theme of international criminology in general, and the Asian region in particular. Contextualization is a key theme in this book. The role of context is often underemphasized in international criminology, so the Handbook of Asian Criminology’s premise that crime and the responses to it are best understood as deeply embedded in the cultural specificity of the environment which produces them will play a key role throughout the work. Attention will be given to country- and region specific attitudes towards crime and punishment.

Inhaltsangaben

Carl Leukefeld, University of Kentucky Dept. Behavioral Science, Lexington, KY, USA; Thomas P. Gullotta, Child and Family Agency of Southeastern, New London, CT, USA; John Gregrich, Columbia, MD, USA

Handbook of Evidence-Based Substance Abuse Treatment in Criminal Justice Settings

Springer New York
Seiten XV, 342 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2011
ISBN 978-1-4419-9469-1
       9781441994691
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
160,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminology and Criminal Justice, general / Psychotherapy and Counseling
Get high. Become addicted. Commit crimes. Get arrested and be sent to jail. Get released. Repeat. It’s a cycle often destined to persist, in large part because the critical step that is often missing in the process, which is treatment geared toward ensuring that addicts are able to reenter society without the constant threat of imminent relapse.The Handbook of Evidence-Based Substance Abuse Treatment in Criminal Justice Setting probes the efficacy of corrections-based drug interventions, particularly behavioral treatment. With straightforward interpretation of data that reveals what works, what doesn’t, and what needs further study, this volume navigates readers through the criminal justice system, the history of drug treatment for offenders, and the practical problems of program design and implementation. Probation and parole issues as well as concerns specific to special populations such as women, juvenile offenders, and inmates living with HIV/AIDS are also examined in detail.The Handbook’s wide-ranging coverage includes:Biology and genetics of the addicted brain.Case management for substance-abusing offenders.Integrated treatment for drug abuse and mental illness. Evidence-based responses to impaired driving.Monitoring technology and alternatives to incarceration.The use of pharmacotherapy in rehabilitation. This must-have reference work is a comprehensive and timely resource for clinicians, researchers, and graduate students across a variety of disciplines including clinical psychology, criminology and criminal justice, counseling, and educational policy makers.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface; T.P. Gullotta.- An Historical Perspective on Offender Drug Abuse Treatment; B.A. Weinman.- Individual Characteristics Associated with Crime and Substance Misuse; S.E. Samenow.- A biological/genetic perspective: The Addicted Brain; W. Heffron, S. Babalonis, M.S. Tindall, L. Molenaar, K. Lommel, T. Kelly, A. Kazura, K. House, and C. Martin.- Screening and Assessment: An Evidence-Based Process for the Management and Care of Adult Drug-Involved Offenders; M.L. Hiller, S. Belenko, W. Welsh, G. Zajac, R.H. Peters.- Substance Abuse Technology: A Primer for Community Corrections Practitioners; M.A. Paparozzi, R. Guy.- Substance Use Prevalence in Criminal Justice Settings; M. Staton-Tindall, J.R. Havens, C.B. Oser, M.C. Burnett.- Evidence-Based Responses to Impaired Driving; B. Chodrow, P. Hora.- Adult and Juvenile Drug Courts; D.B. Marlowe.-Probation; M. Carey.- Case Management for Substance Abusing Offenders; P.F. Rodriguez.- The Impact of Drug Treatment Provided in Correctional Facilities; D.L. MacKenzie, O. Mitchell, D.B. Wilson.- Parole: “What Works” Is Still Under Construction; F.S. Taxman.- Women’s Treatment in Criminal Justice Settings; J.E. Zweben.- Self Help; P.R. Magaletta, C. Leukefeld.- Pharmacotherapy; R.P. Schwartz, S.G. Mitchell, M.S. Gordon, T.W. Kinlock.- Co-Occurring Disorders: Mental Health and Drug Misuse; A.J. Lurigio.- Drug Abuse HIV/AIDS Interventions in Criminal Justice Settings; C.B. Oser, K.L.H. Harp, M. Staton-Tindall.- Epilogue: The Enduring Litany; J. Gregrich.
Carl Leukefeld, University of Kentucky Dept. Behavioral Science, Lexington, KY, USA; Thomas P. Gullotta, Child and Family Agency of Southeastern, New London, CT, USA; John Gregrich, Columbia, MD, USA

Handbook of Evidence-Based Substance Abuse Treatment in Criminal Justice Settings

Springer New York
Seiten XV, 342 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2011
ISBN 978-1-4939-4053-0
       9781493940530
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
160,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminology and Criminal Justice, general / Psychotherapy and Counseling
Get high. Become addicted. Commit crimes. Get arrested and be sent to jail. Get released. Repeat. It’s a cycle often destined to persist, in large part because the critical step that is often missing in the process, which is treatment geared toward ensuring that addicts are able to reenter society without the constant threat of imminent relapse.The Handbook of Evidence-Based Substance Abuse Treatment in Criminal Justice Setting probes the efficacy of corrections-based drug interventions, particularly behavioral treatment. With straightforward interpretation of data that reveals what works, what doesn’t, and what needs further study, this volume navigates readers through the criminal justice system, the history of drug treatment for offenders, and the practical problems of program design and implementation. Probation and parole issues as well as concerns specific to special populations such as women, juvenile offenders, and inmates living with HIV/AIDS are also examined in detail.The Handbook’s wide-ranging coverage includes:Biology and genetics of the addicted brain.Case management for substance-abusing offenders.Integrated treatment for drug abuse and mental illness. Evidence-based responses to impaired driving.Monitoring technology and alternatives to incarceration.The use of pharmacotherapy in rehabilitation. This must-have reference work is a comprehensive and timely resource for clinicians, researchers, and graduate students across a variety of disciplines including clinical psychology, criminology and criminal justice, counseling, and educational policy makers.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface; T.P. Gullotta.- An Historical Perspective on Offender Drug Abuse Treatment; B.A. Weinman.- Individual Characteristics Associated with Crime and Substance Misuse; S.E. Samenow.- A biological/genetic perspective: The Addicted Brain; W. Heffron, S. Babalonis, M.S. Tindall, L. Molenaar, K. Lommel, T. Kelly, A. Kazura, K. House, and C. Martin.- Screening and Assessment: An Evidence-Based Process for the Management and Care of Adult Drug-Involved Offenders; M.L. Hiller, S. Belenko, W. Welsh, G. Zajac, R.H. Peters.- Substance Abuse Technology: A Primer for Community Corrections Practitioners; M.A. Paparozzi, R. Guy.- Substance Use Prevalence in Criminal Justice Settings; M. Staton-Tindall, J.R. Havens, C.B. Oser, M.C. Burnett.- Evidence-Based Responses to Impaired Driving; B. Chodrow, P. Hora.- Adult and Juvenile Drug Courts; D.B. Marlowe.-Probation; M. Carey.- Case Management for Substance Abusing Offenders; P.F. Rodriguez.- The Impact of Drug Treatment Provided in Correctional Facilities; D.L. MacKenzie, O. Mitchell, D.B. Wilson.- Parole: “What Works” Is Still Under Construction; F.S. Taxman.- Women’s Treatment in Criminal Justice Settings; J.E. Zweben.- Self Help; P.R. Magaletta, C. Leukefeld.- Pharmacotherapy; R.P. Schwartz, S.G. Mitchell, M.S. Gordon, T.W. Kinlock.- Co-Occurring Disorders: Mental Health and Drug Misuse; A.J. Lurigio.- Drug Abuse HIV/AIDS Interventions in Criminal Justice Settings; C.B. Oser, K.L.H. Harp, M. Staton-Tindall.- Epilogue: The Enduring Litany; J. Gregrich.
Justin B. Leaf, Autism Partnership Foundation, Seal Beach, CA, USA

Handbook of Social Skills and Autism Spectrum Disorder

Assessment, Curricula, and Intervention
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVII, 445 p. 7 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-62994-0
       9783319629940
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
213,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Child and School Psychology / Behavioral Therapy
This handbook identifies the various social deficiencies widely associated with children and youth diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). It discusses possible causes as well as the lifelong effects if these deficiencies are not addressed. The handbook presents current behavioral and curriculum-based methods for assessing social deficits. Chapters examine the various interventions that have been used to improve social skills and behavior, including video modeling, peer-mediated interventions, and script fading. Chapters also assess various interventions using empirically based procedures, evaluate the research of each of these procedures, provide guidelines for treatment planning, and offer clinical recommendations. The handbook concludes with future directions for the development of both social behavior and clinical social skills interventions.Topics featured in the Handbook include:Impairments in social behavior that may result in negative outcomes such as depression, loneliness, and suicide in individuals with ASD.Bullying among youth with ASD.Behavioral skills training to promote social behavior of individuals with ASD. The Early Start Denver Model approach to helping young children with ASD.The implementation of social skills groups for individuals diagnosed with ASD.The Handbook of Social Skills and Autism Spectrum Disorder is a must-have resource for researchers, clinicians/professionals, and graduate students in clinical child, school, and developmental psychology, behavioral therapy, and social work, as well as such interrelated disciplines as child and adolescent psychiatry, rehabilitation medicine/therapy, pediatrics, and special education/educational psychology.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. An Introduction to the Handbook.- Part I: Social Skills Deficits.- Chapter 2. Understanding the Social Nature of Autism: From Clinical Manifestations to Brain Mechanisms.- Chapter 3. Have a Happy, Fun, Assertive Life! (Avoid Depression, Anxiety, Loneliness, and Suicide!).- Chapter 4. Bullying Among Youth with Autism Spectrum Disorder.- Chapter 5. Friendship in Autism Spectrum Disorder.- Part II: Assessment.- Chapter 6. Standardized Assessment of Social Skills in Autism Spectrum Disorder.- Chapter 7. Assessment of Adaptive Behavior and Autism Spectrum Disorder.- Chapter 8. Curriculum Based Assessment of Social Development: Goal Selection and Sequencing.- Part III: Social Skills Interventions.- Chapter 9. Evidence-Based Interventions.- Chapter 10. Discrete Trial Teaching and Social Skill Training: Don't Throw the Baby out of the Bathwater.- Chapter 11. Incidental Teaching: Happy Progress.- Chapter 12. Pivotal Response Treatment: Empirically Supported Strategies to Target Social Competencies and Motivation in Individuals with ASD.- Chapter 13. Helping Young Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder Develop Social Ability: The Early Start Denver Model Approach.- Chapter 14. Video Based Instruction for Learners with Autism.- Chapter 15. Visual Learning Strategies to Promote Independence and Appropriate Social Behavior.- Chapter 16. Peer Mediation Interventions to Improve Social and Communication Skills for Children and Youth with Autism Spectrum Disorder.- Chapter 17. Parent-Mediated Interventions for Social Communication in Young Children with ASD.- Chapter 18. Using the Teaching Interaction Procedure to Teach Social Skills for Individuals Diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder.- Chapter 19. Behavioral Skills Training to Promote Social Behavior of Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 20. Behavioral Skills Training to Promote Social Behavior of Individuals with Autism.- Chapter 21. Matrix Training Procedures.- Chapter 22. Social Stories™: A Cautionary Tale.- Chapter 23. Emerging Social Skill Interventions for Individuals with Autism.- Part IV: Future Directions.- Chapter 24. Future Research Directions as it Relates to Social Behavior for Individuals Diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder.- Chapter 25. Future Directions for Clinical Social Skills Interventions.
Helaine Selin, Hampshire College, Amherst, MA, USA; Gareth Davey, Hong Kong Shue Yan University, Hong Kong, Hong Kong SAR

Happiness Across Cultures

Views of Happiness and Quality of Life in Non-Western Cultures
Springer Netherlands
Seiten XXIV, 504 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-94-007-2699-4
       9789400726994
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
235,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Regional and Cultural Studies / Cross Cultural Psychology
Different cultures experience happiness differently. Traditionally, the West is considered materialistic, and happiness is said to come from achievement and acquisition. The East is said to be more people-oriented, where happiness is a result of deep personal interactions. Thus, poor people can be happier in the East than the West, because they are not so concerned with possession and more with society. This book considers happiness and quality of life in non-Western countries and cultures. Its coverage is diverse and spans the breadth of the non-Western world, revealing unique perspectives of happiness and life quality embedded in rich cultural traditions and histories.

Inhaltsangaben

INTRODUCTION.- 1: HAPPINESS IN INDIA: Ed Diener, Robert Biswas-Diener and Louis Tay.- 2: HAPPINESS ON THE TIBETAN PLATEAU: Dave Webb.- 3:  HAPPINESS AND LIFE SATISFACTION IN MALAYSIA: Ryan T. Howell, Wan Tien Chong, Colleen J. Howell, & Kurt Schwabe.- 4: HAPPINESS AND QUALITY OF LIFE IN THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA: Gareth Davey.- 5: QUALITY OF LIFE OF AN ASIAN METROPOLIS IN A GOVERNANCE CRISIS: THE CASE OF HONG KONG: Ming Sing.- 6: QUALITY OF WORK LIFE IN MACAU: Ricardo Rato and Gareth Davey.-  7: SATISFACTION AND SOCIETAL QUALITY IN KAZAKHSTAN: Pamela Abbott and Claire Wallace.-  8: SINGAPORE: A HAPPY STATE OF MIND: Siok Kuan Tambyah.-  9: HAPPINESS IN THAILAND: Rossarin Soottipong Gray.- 10: THE POLITICS OF WELLBEING IN INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT: RESEARCH WITH ORGANIC FARMERS IN CAMBODIA: Alice Beban.- 11: FARMERS' HAPPINESS FROM FISH PRODUCTION; A CASE STUDY IN VIETNAM: Nguyen Minh Duc.- 12: CONSTRUCTIONS OF HAPPINESS AND SATISFACTION IN THE KINGDOM OF TONGA: Sean E. Moore and Heather E. Young Leslie.- 13: HAPPINESS IN AN ABORIGINAL AUSTRALIAN COMMUNITY; WHAT IT MEANS ‘TO BE WELL’ AND ‘TO ENJOY LIFE’ IN CENTRAL-WESTERN NEW SOUTH WALES, AUSTRALIA: Daniela Heil.- 14: HAPPINESS IN THE AMAZON: FOLK EXPLANATIONS OF HAPPINESS IN A HUNTER-HORTICULTURALIST SOCIETY IN THE BOLIVIAN AMAZON: Victoria Reyes-García and Tsimane’ Amazonian Panel Study (TAPS).- 15: HAPPINESS IN BRAZIL: Gazi Islam.- 16:  HAPPINESS IN MEXICO: THE IMPORTANCE OF HUMAN RELATIONS: Mariano Rojas.- 17: HAPPY VILLAGES AND UNHAPPY SLUMS? UNDERSTANDING HAPPINESS DETERMINANTS IN PERU: Mònica Guillen-Royo and Jackeline Velazco.- 18: LIFE SATISFACTION IN MALAWI: Tim Hinks and Simon Davies.- 19: HAPPINESS IN NIGERIA: A SOCIO-CULTURAL ANALYSIS: Aaron Agbo, Thaddeus Nzeadibe and Chukwuedozie Ajaero.- 20: GHANAIAN HAPPINESS: GLOBAL, CULTURAL, AND PHENOMENOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVES: Vivian Afi Abui Dzokoto.- 21: LIVING THE GOOD LIFE: AN ECONOMIC VIEW OF HAPPINESS IN SOUTH AFRICA: Jeffrey Bookwalter.- 22: CONCEPTS OF WELLBEING AMONG ORGANIC FARMERS AND PLANTATION WORKERS IN MADAGASCAR: Cathy Rozel Farnworth.- 23: HAPPINESS IN A POST-CONFLICT SOCIETY: RWANDA: Pamela Abbott and Claire Wallace.-  24: HAPPINESS IN NAVAJOS (DINÉ BA’ HÓZHÓ): Angela Willeto.- 25: IT’S ALL IN THE FAMILY: WELL-BEING AMONG INUIT IN ARCTIC CANADA: Michael Kral and Lori Idlout.- 26: CLIMATE, CASH, AND CULTURALLY EMBEDDED HAPPINESS: Evert Van de Vliert.- 27: HINDUISM, HAPPINESS AND WELLBEING: A CASE STUDY OF ADULTHOOD IN AN ORIYA HINDU TEMPLE TOWN: Usha Menon.- 28: THE SCIENCE OF HAPPINESS: A CROSS-CULTURAL PERSPECTIVE: Stephen G. Morris.-  DOES HAPPINESS DIFFER ACROSS CULTURES?: Ruut Veenhoven.- INDEX.                        
Helaine Selin, Hampshire College, Amherst, MA, USA; Gareth Davey, Hong Kong Shue Yan University, Hong Kong, Hong Kong SAR

Happiness Across Cultures

Views of Happiness and Quality of Life in Non-Western Cultures
Springer Netherlands
Seiten XXIV, 504 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-94-007-9929-5
       9789400799295
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
235,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Regional and Cultural Studies / Cross Cultural Psychology
Different cultures experience happiness differently. Traditionally, the West is considered materialistic, and happiness is said to come from achievement and acquisition. The East is said to be more people-oriented, where happiness is a result of deep personal interactions. Thus, poor people can be happier in the East than the West, because they are not so concerned with possession and more with society. This book considers happiness and quality of life in non-Western countries and cultures. Its coverage is diverse and spans the breadth of the non-Western world, revealing unique perspectives of happiness and life quality embedded in rich cultural traditions and histories.

Inhaltsangaben

INTRODUCTION.- 1: HAPPINESS IN INDIA: Ed Diener, Robert Biswas-Diener and Louis Tay.- 2: HAPPINESS ON THE TIBETAN PLATEAU: Dave Webb.- 3:  HAPPINESS AND LIFE SATISFACTION IN MALAYSIA: Ryan T. Howell, Wan Tien Chong, Colleen J. Howell, & Kurt Schwabe.- 4: HAPPINESS AND QUALITY OF LIFE IN THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA: Gareth Davey.- 5: QUALITY OF LIFE OF AN ASIAN METROPOLIS IN A GOVERNANCE CRISIS: THE CASE OF HONG KONG: Ming Sing.- 6: QUALITY OF WORK LIFE IN MACAU: Ricardo Rato and Gareth Davey.-  7: SATISFACTION AND SOCIETAL QUALITY IN KAZAKHSTAN: Pamela Abbott and Claire Wallace.-  8: SINGAPORE: A HAPPY STATE OF MIND: Siok Kuan Tambyah.-  9: HAPPINESS IN THAILAND: Rossarin Soottipong Gray.- 10: THE POLITICS OF WELLBEING IN INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT: RESEARCH WITH ORGANIC FARMERS IN CAMBODIA: Alice Beban.- 11: FARMERS' HAPPINESS FROM FISH PRODUCTION; A CASE STUDY IN VIETNAM: Nguyen Minh Duc.- 12: CONSTRUCTIONS OF HAPPINESS AND SATISFACTION IN THE KINGDOM OF TONGA: Sean E. Moore and Heather E. Young Leslie.- 13: HAPPINESS IN AN ABORIGINAL AUSTRALIAN COMMUNITY; WHAT IT MEANS ‘TO BE WELL’ AND ‘TO ENJOY LIFE’ IN CENTRAL-WESTERN NEW SOUTH WALES, AUSTRALIA: Daniela Heil.- 14: HAPPINESS IN THE AMAZON: FOLK EXPLANATIONS OF HAPPINESS IN A HUNTER-HORTICULTURALIST SOCIETY IN THE BOLIVIAN AMAZON: Victoria Reyes-García and Tsimane’ Amazonian Panel Study (TAPS).- 15: HAPPINESS IN BRAZIL: Gazi Islam.- 16:  HAPPINESS IN MEXICO: THE IMPORTANCE OF HUMAN RELATIONS: Mariano Rojas.- 17: HAPPY VILLAGES AND UNHAPPY SLUMS? UNDERSTANDING HAPPINESS DETERMINANTS IN PERU: Mònica Guillen-Royo and Jackeline Velazco.- 18: LIFE SATISFACTION IN MALAWI: Tim Hinks and Simon Davies.- 19: HAPPINESS IN NIGERIA: A SOCIO-CULTURAL ANALYSIS: Aaron Agbo, Thaddeus Nzeadibe and Chukwuedozie Ajaero.- 20: GHANAIAN HAPPINESS: GLOBAL, CULTURAL, AND PHENOMENOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVES: Vivian Afi Abui Dzokoto.- 21: LIVING THE GOOD LIFE: AN ECONOMIC VIEW OF HAPPINESS IN SOUTH AFRICA: Jeffrey Bookwalter.- 22: CONCEPTS OF WELLBEING AMONG ORGANIC FARMERS AND PLANTATION WORKERS IN MADAGASCAR: Cathy Rozel Farnworth.- 23: HAPPINESS IN A POST-CONFLICT SOCIETY: RWANDA: Pamela Abbott and Claire Wallace.-  24: HAPPINESS IN NAVAJOS (DINÉ BA’ HÓZHÓ): Angela Willeto.- 25: IT’S ALL IN THE FAMILY: WELL-BEING AMONG INUIT IN ARCTIC CANADA: Michael Kral and Lori Idlout.- 26: CLIMATE, CASH, AND CULTURALLY EMBEDDED HAPPINESS: Evert Van de Vliert.- 27: HINDUISM, HAPPINESS AND WELLBEING: A CASE STUDY OF ADULTHOOD IN AN ORIYA HINDU TEMPLE TOWN: Usha Menon.- 28: THE SCIENCE OF HAPPINESS: A CROSS-CULTURAL PERSPECTIVE: Stephen G. Morris.-  DOES HAPPINESS DIFFER ACROSS CULTURES?: Ruut Veenhoven.- INDEX.                        
Matt Foley, Stirling, UK

Haunting Modernisms

Ghostly Aesthetics, Mourning, and Spectral Resistance Fantasies in Literary Modernism
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XII, 222 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-65484-3
       9783319654843
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Twentieth-Century Literature / British and Irish Literature
This book is about haunting in modernist literature. Offering an extended and textually-sensitive reading of modernist spectrality that has yet to be undertaken by scholars of either haunting or modernism, it provides a fresh reconceptualization of modernist haunting by synthesizing recent critical work in the fields of haunting studies, Gothic modernisms, and mourning modernisms. The chapters read the form and function of the ghostly as it appears in the work of a constellation of important modernist contributors, including T. S. Eliot, Virginia Woolf, D. H. Lawrence, Elizabeth Bowen, Wyndham Lewis, Richard Aldington, and Ford Madox Ford. It is of particular significance to scholars and students in a wide range of fields of study, including modernism, literary theory, and the Gothic.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: modernism, mourning, and the ghostly.- 2. Haunted images, deadness, and impossible mourning.- 3. Melancholia and the dead in T. S. Eliot’s aesthetics of purgatory.- 4. Pursuing the phantom in Woolf’s aesthetics of survival.- 5. The gaze in Elizabeth Bowen’s spectral resistance fantasies.- 6. The blood consciousness and Lawrence’s silent ghosts.- 7. Conclusion: The other/Other and locating the ghostly.- Index.
Kenneth L. Shonk, Jr., Chapman University, Orange, CA, USA; Daniel Robert McClure, University of Wisconsin–La Crosse, La Crosse, WI, USA

Historical Theory and Methods through Popular Music, 1970–2000

“Those are the New Saints”
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XII, 311 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-57071-0
       9781137570710
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Cultural Theory / Music
This book examines the post-1960s era of popular music in the Anglo-Black Atlantic through the prism of historical theory and methods. By using a series of case studies, this book mobilizes historical theory and methods to underline different expressions of alternative music functioning within a mainstream musical industry. Each chapter highlights a particular theory or method while simultaneously weaving it through a genre of music expressing a notion of alternativity—an explicit positioning of one’s expression outside and counter to the mainstream. Historical Theory and Methods through Popular Music seeks to fill a gap in current scholarship by offering a collection written specifically for the pedagogical and theoretical needs of those interested in the topic.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: Those are the new saints.- 2. “‘400 Years’: Modernity, the Longue Durée, and Jamaican Music, 1600s-1980s”.- 3.“This Charming Man: Queer and Alternative Masculinities, 1970-1994”.- 4.“Will the Wolf Survive?”: Chicana/o Identity and Punk Rock in Los Angeles, 1977-2000.”.-5. “A Perfect New Loop: Hip-Hop, Deindustrialization, and the Post-Civil Rights Era, and Hip-Hop, 1973-2000”.- 6. “The Pride of History”: Post-Punk and the Aesthetics of Postmodernity.- 7. “Waveless—MTV and the ‘Quiet’ Feminism of the 1980s”.- 8. “Hiraeth—The Celtic Moment in 1980s Alternative Rock”.- 9. “Feels Blind: Counter-Hegemony in Alternative Rock during the Reagan/Thatcher Era”.- 10. “No Depression: The Nostalgia and Authenticity of Alternative Country”.- 11. Conclusion.
Peter Van Aelst, Universiteit Antwerpen, Antwerpen, Belgium; Stefaan Walgrave, Universiteit Antwerpen, Antwerpen, Belgium

How Political Actors Use the Media

A Functional Analysis of the Media’s Role in Politics
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXI, 282 p. 9 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-60248-6
       9783319602486
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Media and Communication / European Politics
This book investigates how individual politicians and political parties strategically make use of the media to reach their political goals. Looking beyond a purely Americentric viewpoint, the chapters present data from more than ten Western democracies to argue that the media are both a source of information and an arena for political communication. This double functional role of the media is examined from both a theoretical and an empirical perspective, including chapters dealing with different aspects of politics - from campaigning to law making - and within different political contexts. The role of the news media is discussed from the perspective of the political actor, focusing on both the opportunities and the constraints the news media provide, resulting in a multidisciplinary text that will appeal to students and scholars of both communication and political science.  

Inhaltsangaben

1.Information and Arena. The Dual Function of the News Media for Political Elites, Peter Van Aelst, Stefaan Walgrave.- Part 1.- 2. An intervening intermediary. Making political sense of media influence, Gunnar Thesen.- 3. Celebrities as Political Actors and Entertainment as Political Media, Amber E. Boydstun, Regina G. Lawrence.- 4. Political Public Relations and Mediatization: The Strategies of News Management, Jesper Strömbäck, Frank Esser.- 5. Too powerful or just doing their job? Explaining Differences in Conceptions of Media Power among Politicians and Journalists, Rens Vliegenthart, Morten Skovsgaard.- Part 2.- 6. What Politicians Learn from the Mass Media and Why They React to it. An Analytical Framework, Julie Sevenans.- 7. The Media Dependency of Political Elites, Stefaan Walgrave, Julie Sevenans, Alon Zoizner, Matthew Ayling.- 8. When do Politicians React to the Media: How the attitudes and goals of political elites moderate the effect of the media on the political agenda, Alon Zoizner, Yair Fogel-Dror, Tamir Sheafer.- Part 3.- 9. Moving Beyond the Single Mediated Arena Model: Media Uses and Influences Across Three Arenas, Aeron Davis.- 10. The Charm of Salient Issues? Parties’ Strategic Behavior in Press Releases, Caroline Dalmus, Regula Hänggli, Laurent Bernhard.- 11. Does News tone Affect the Government in the News?, Christoffer Green-Pedersen, Peter B. Mortensen, Gunnar Thesen.- Part 4.- 12. Why the Media Matters for Politicians. A Study on the Strategic Use of Mass Media in Lawmaking, Lotte Melenhorst, Peter Van Aelst.- 13. Information Source and Political Arena: How Actors from Inside and Outside Politics Use the Media, Nayla Fawzi.- 14. Elaborating and specifying the information & arena framework, Stefaan Walgrave & Peter Van Aelst.
Kenneth Leithwood, Ontario Institute for Studies in Education University of Toronto, Ontario, ON, Canada; Jingping Sun, The College of Education University of Alabama, Tuscaloosa, AL, USA; Katina Pollock, Faculty of Education Western University, Lond

How School Leaders Contribute to Student Success

The Four Paths Framework
Springer International Publishing
Seiten VIII, 365 p. 26 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-50979-2
       9783319509792
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Administration, Organization and Leadership / Schools and Schooling
While considerable evidence indicates that school leaders are able to make important contributions to the success of their students, much less is known about how such contributions are made. This book provides a comprehensive account of research aimed at filling this gap in our knowledge, along with guidelines about how school leaders might use this knowledge for their own school improvement work. Leadership practices known to be effective for improving student success are outlined in the first section of the book while the remaining sections identify four “paths” along which the influence of those practices “flow” to exercise an influence on student success. Each of the Rational, Emotional, Organizational and Family paths are populated by conditions or variables known to have relatively direct effects on student success and also open to influence by effective leadership practices. While the Four Path framework narrows the attention of school leaders to a still-considerable number conditions known to contribute to student success, it leaves school leaders the autonomy to select, for improvement efforts, the sub-set of conditions that make the most sense in their own local circumstances. The approach to leadership described in this book provides evidence-based guidance on what to lead and flexibility on how to lead for purposes of improving student learning.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction; Kenneth Leithwood, Jingping Sun and Katina Pollock.- Section One: The Nature of Successful Leadership.- Section introduction.- 2. A Model of Successful School Leadership from the International Successful School Principalship Project; David Gurr.- 3. The Ontario Leadership Framework; Kenneth Leithwood.- Section Two: The Rational Path.- Section introduction.- 4. Leadership and Learning: Conceptualizing Relations between School Administrative Practice and Instructional Practice; James Spillane.- 5. Effects of Distributed Leadership on School Academic Press and Student Achievement; John Malloy and Kenneth Leithwood.- 6. Towards Sustaining Levels of Reflective Learning: How Do Transformational Leadership, Task Interdependence, and Self-Efficacy Shape Teacher Learning in Schools?; Arnoud Oude Groote Beverborg, Peter J. C. Sleegers, Maaike D. Endedijk and Klaas van Veen.- Section Three: The Emotional Path.- Section introduction.- 7. Leadership Effects on Student Learning Mediated by Teacher Emotions; Jingping Sun and Kenneth Leithwood.- 8. Principals, Trust, and Cultivating Vibrant Schools; Megan Tschannen-Moran and Christopher R. Gareis.- 9. Generation X School Leaders as Agents of Care: Leader and Teacher Perspectives from Toronto, New York City and London; Karen Edge.- Section Four: The Organizational Path.- Section introduction.- 10. Complexity and Volume: An Inquiry into Factors that Drive Principals’ Work; Katina Pollock, Fei Wang and David Cameron Hauseman.- 11. Creating Communities of Professionalism: Addressing Cultural and Structural Barriers; Joseph Murphy.- 12. Effects of Principal Professional Orientation towards Leadership, Professional Teacher Behavior, and School Academic Optimism on School Reading Achievement; Roxanne Mitchell and John Tarter.- 13. Leading Teacher Learning in China: A Mixed Methods Study of Successful School Leadership; Shengnan Liu and Philip Hallinger.- Section Five: The Family Path.- Section introduction.- 14. Effects of Family Educational Cultures on Student Success at School: Directions for Leadership; William Jeynes.- 15. Changing the Educational Culture of the Home to Increase Student Success at School; Kenneth Leithwood and Penny Patrician.- 16. Conclusion; Kenneth Leithwood, Jingping Sun and Katina Pollock.- References by Section introduction and Chapter.
Beatriz Muñoz-Seca, IESE Business School , Madrid, Spain

How to Make Things Happen

A blueprint for applying knowledge, solving problems and designing systems that deliver your service strategy
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXV, 367 p. 105 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-54785-5
       9783319547855
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Operations Management / Innovation/Technology Management
This book offers models and frameworks to analyze your service delivery systems as a whole. It presents the framework to solve customer problems by delivering the right knowledge at the right time to the right place and take advantage of the efficiency that technology and algorithms offer.Why do so many brilliant plans fail to deliver in practice? Why can’t your employees just do what you want them to do? In most cases, because the operations eco-system in which those plans must be deployed fails to fully understand the problem that needs to be solved.The fourth industrial revolution is seeing advances in Artificial Intelligence industrialize the service sector. But, despite the cost-cutting that these advances offer firms are still struggling to stay competitive. That is because they think that cost-cutting delivers increased efficiency whereas it is the other way around: increased efficiency cuts costs. And the heart of efficiency in delivering services is people and their knowledge.As industrialization drives ever more standardized offerings and ever little human contact it is in those rare moments of human interaction where the greatest opportunity to add or destroy value lies. It is human brains and the knowledge they contain that are best suited to problem-solving and individualizing client solutions. The real competitive edge will become the ability to foresee and individualize problem-solving.To do this, firms must start thinking of knowledge as inventory – who knows what, who needs to know what and where and when do they need to know it.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1 A scenario and the fascinating world of operations.- Chapter2 Basic ideas behind SPDM.- Chapter3 the mission, essence and flame red.- Chapter4 You have to walk the streets.- Chapter5 Cost-cutting does not lead to efficiency.- Chapter6 The main thing is not knowing what you know.- Chapter7 We work with brainpower, not manpower.- Chapter 8 Industrialization of service in order to unlock brainpower capacity.- Chapter9 Converting blocking factors into value-adding elements.- Chapter10 Making ideas happen.- Chapter11 One thousand $1,000 improvements.- Chapter12 Quality is a chorus girl cast as a prima donna.- Chapter13 Have you looked to see what is in your refrigerator yet.- Chapter14 Happy people are more productive.- Chapter15 The hallmark of mediocre managers is hiring people worse than they are.- Chapter16 Asking the right question at the right time.-
Emer O'Sullivan, Leuphana University Lüneburg , Lüneburg, Germany; Andrea Immel, Princeton University Library, Princeton, NJ, USA

Imagining Sameness and Difference in Children's Literature

From the Enlightenment to the Present Day
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIV, 268 p. 29 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-46168-1
       9781137461681
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Children's Literature /
This book investigates how cultural sameness and difference has been presented in a variety of forms and genres of children’s literature from Denmark, Germany, France, Russia, Britain, and the United States; ranging from English caricatures of the 1780s to dynamic representations of contemporary cosmopolitan childhood. The chapters address different models of presenting foreigners using examples from children’s educational prints, dramatic performances, travel narratives, comics, and picture books. Contributors illuminate the ways in which the texts negotiate the tensions between the Enlightenment ideal of internationalism and discrete national or ethnic identities cultivated since the Romantic era, providing examples of ethnocentric cultural perspectives and of cultural relativism, as well as instances where discussions of child reader agency indicate how they might participate eventually in a tolerant transnational community.  

Inhaltsangaben

1. Sameness and Difference in Children’s Literature: An Introduction, Emer O’Sullivan.- Part I. Ethnography on Display.- 2. Learning to See: Eighteenth-Century Children’s Prints and the Discourse of Othering, Silke Meyer.- 3. Picturing the World for Children: Early Nineteenth-Century Images of Foreign Nations, Emer O’Sullivan.- 4. Figuring the World: Representing Children’s Encounters with Other Peoples and Cultures at the Great Exhibition of 1851, Gillian Lathey.- 5. Imagining the World in Bavarian Children’s Books: Place and Other as Engineered by Lothar Meggendorfer, Amanda M. Brian.- Part II. Internationalism and Tolerance.- 6. Imagining Equality: The Emergence of the Ideas of Tolerance, Universalism, and Human Rights in Danish Magazines for Children, 1750–1800, Nina Christensen.- 7. An Anthropologist Shows Girls a World of Difference: Louis-François Jauffret’s Géographie dramatique, Cynthia J. Koepp.- 8. Information or Exoticization? Constructing Religious Difference in Children’s Information Books, Gabriele von Glasenapp.- Part III. Constructing Self and Nation.- 9. Anxious Encounters: Picturing the Street Child in On the Sidewalks of New York, Lara Saguisag.- 10. Russian Picturebooks from 1922 to 1934: Modernization, Sense of Nationhood, Internationalism, Verena Rutschmann.- 11. Appropriating the “Wild North”: The Image of Canada and Its Exploitation in German Children’s Literature, Martina Seifert.- 12.- Travel as Construction of Self and Nation, Margaret R. Higonnet.- Index
Andrew DJ Shield, Roskilde University, Roskilde, Denmark

Immigrants in the Sexual Revolution

Perceptions and Participation in Northwest Europe
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 287 p. 12 illus., 5 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-49612-2
       9783319496122
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of Modern Europe / Gender and Sexuality
This book focuses on the latter half of the twentieth century, when much of northwest Europe grew increasingly multicultural with the arrival of foreign workers and (post-)colonial migrants, whilst simultaneously experiencing a boom in feminist and sexual liberation activism. Using multilingual newspapers, foreign worker organizations’ archives, and interviews, this book shows that immigrants in the Netherlands and Denmark held a variety of viewpoints about European gender and sexual cultures. Some immigrants felt solidarity with, and even participated in, European social movements that changed norms and laws in favor of women’s equality, gay and lesbian rights, and sexual liberation. These histories challenge today’s politicians and journalists who strategically link immigration to sexual conservatism, misogyny, and homophobia.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction: “The disaster of Islamization… where gays are not safe to walk the streets, women are seen as inferior”: Pro-Gay, Anti-Immigrant Politics and the Right, 2000-2017.- Chapter 2. “There were no colored people in the classrooms”: The Disavowal of Heterogeneity.- PART I: PERCEPTIONS.- Chapter 3. “Like the Great Pyramids of Egypt… you can’t talk about Denmark without talking about The Danish Woman”: Immigrant Perceptions of European Gender and Sexual Cultures.- Chapter 4. “…[I]t does not have to be because they want to get married and have children”: Teaching Danish Sexuality and Gender Norms to Foreign Workers, 1972.- PART II: SOLIDARITY.- Chapter 5. 'They’re fighting for women’s rights, we’re fighting for equal rights for Turkish people, and that’s the only difference”: Foreign Workers Organize in the Footsteps of the Women’s Movement, The Netherlands, 1974-1980.- Chapter 6. “All of that talk about feminism was very hard to understand”: Immigrant Women and European Feminism, 1974-1985.-  PART III: PARTICIPATION.- Chapter 7. “Help me, an Indonesian boy living in Holland… flee my parents”: Immigrants and Ethnic Minorities in European Gay/Lesbian Contact Ads, 1960s-1980s.- Chapter 8. “I was one of the first colored gays”: Experiences of Immigrants and Ethnic Minorities in European Gay/Lesbian Scenes, 1960s-1980s.- Chapter 9. Epilogue: “It was a cultural evolution”: Rethinking Immigrant Sexual Politics since the 1980s.- Bibliography.- Index.
Abdullahi Usman Bello, Economic and Financial Crimes Commission , Abuja, Nigeria

Improving Anti-Money Laundering Compliance

Self-Protecting Theory and Money Laundering Reporting Officers
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIX, 207 p. 11 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-43263-2
       9783319432632
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Crime and Society / Transnational Crime
This book provides practical recommendations on how to improve the effectiveness and efficiency of AML compliance by introducing the theory, framework and approach for dealing with the concerns of Money Laundering Reporting Officers (MLROs) within the UK banking industry. Accordingly, Bello focusses on providing a theoretical explanation of compliance behaviour which is inadequately covered. Although the research is centred on MLROs within the UK banking industry, the self-protecting theory discovered from the research has general application to other compliance officers within and outside the UK. It is also applicable to regulatory environments in other economic sectors. The choice of MLROs and the UK as the focus of the study was because these individuals are arguably the most important stakeholders in AML and the UK is one of the largest financial centres in the world that provides opportunity for money laundering activities. A methodological and detailed study, this book will be of particular interest to practitioners and the regulatory authorities, as well as scholars of criminology and finance.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. Background of the AML Environment.- 3. Self-Protecting Theory: A Theory of MLROs.- Chapter 4. The Effectiveness and Efficiency Dilemma.- Chapter 5. The Potential Solution to the Dilemma.- Chapter 6. General Application of the Self-Protecting Theory.- Chapter 7. Conclusion.
Robert O'Neill, University of Huddersfield, Huddersfield, UK; Jeff Ralph, Office for National Statistics, Newport, South Wales, UK; Paul A. Smith, University of Southampton, Southampton, UK

Inflation

History and Measurement
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIV, 375 p. 10 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-64124-9
       9783319641249
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics / Economic History
This book is an introduction to the history of – and current measurement practice of – inflation for the United Kingdom. The authors describe the historical development of inflation measures in a global context, and do so without using formal mathematical language and related jargon that relates only to a few specialist scholars. Although inflation is a widely used and quoted statistic, and despite the important role inflation plays in real people’s lives – through pension uprating, train tickets, interest rates and the work of economists – few people understand how it is created. O’Neill, Ralph and Smith mix historical data with a description of practices inside the UK statistical system and abroad, which will aid understanding of how this important economic statistic is produced, and the important and controversial choices that statisticians have made over time.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. What is Inflation?.- Chapter 3. The Origins of Inflation Measurement: 1700–1879.- Chapter 4. What is a Price Index?.- Chapter 5. Developments in the Period 1880–1945.- Chapter 6. The Development of the Retail Prices Index: 1947–1989.- Chapter 7. What’s in the Basket?.- Chapter 8. Price Collection.- Chapter 9. Estimating Household Expenditure Shares.- Chapter 10. Years of Change: 1990–2010.- Chapter 11. Measuring Inflation at a Detailed Level.- Chapter 12. What Should we be Measuring?.- Chapter 13. Recent Developments: 2009–2016.- Chapter 14. Other Price Indices.- Chapter 15. A Look to the Future.
Jürgen Buder, Leibniz-Institut für Wissensmedien (IWM), Tübingen, Germany; Friedrich W. Hesse, Leibniz-Institut für Wissensmedien (IWM), Tübingen, Germany

Informational Environments

Effects of Use, Effective Designs
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 304 p. 31 illus., 22 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-64273-4
       9783319642734
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Cognitive Psychology / Personality and Social Psychology
This book provides a multidisciplinary view into how individuals and groups interact with the information environments that surround them. The book discusses how informational environments shape our daily lives, and how digital technologies can improve the ways in which people make use of informational environments. It presents the research and outcomes of a seven-year multidisciplinary research initiative, the Leibniz-WissenschaftsCampus Tübingen Informational Environments, jointly conducted by the Leibniz-Institut für Wissensmedien (IWM) and the Eberhard Karls Universität Tübingen. Book chapters from leading international experts in psychology, education, computer science, sociology, and medicine provide a multi-layered and multidisciplinary view on how the interplay between individuals and their informational environments unfolds. Featured topics include: Managing obesity prevention using digital media. Using digital media to assess and promote school teacher competence. Informational environments and their effect on college student dropout. Web-Platforms for game-based learning of orthography and numeracy. How to design adaptive information environments to support self-regulated learning with multimedia. Informational Environments will be of interest to advanced undergraduate students, postgraduate students, researchers and practitioners in various fields of educational psychology, social psychology, education, computer science, communication science, sociology, and medicine.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Informational Environments: Cognitive, Motivational-Affective, and Social-Interactive Forays into the Digital Transformation.- Chapter 2. Informational Environments and College Student Dropout.- Chapter 3. The Role of Cognitive Conflicts in Informational Environments: Conflicting Evidence from the Learning Sciences and Social Psychology?.- Chapter 4. Motivated Processing of Health-Related Information in Online Environments.- Chapter 5. Managing Obesity Prevention Using Digital Media – A Double-Sided Approach.- Chapter 6. Using Digital Media to Assess and Promote School and Adult Education Teacher Competence.- Chapter 7. Behavioral and Neurocognitive Evaluation of a Web-Platform for Game-Based Learning of Orthography and Numeracy.- Chapter 8. Brain-Computer Interfaces for Educational Applications.- Chapter 9. Brain-Computer Interfaces for Educational Applications.- Chapter 10. Using Data Visualizations to Foster Emotion Regulation During Self-Regulated Learning with Advanced Learning Technologies.- Chapter 11. Designs for Learning Analytics to Support Information Problem Solving.- Chapter 12. Successes and Failures in Building Learning Environments to Promote Deep Learning: The Value of Conversational Agents.
Jeroen A. Oskam, Hotelschool The Hague, The Hague, The Netherlands; Daphne M. Dekker, Hotelschool The Hague, The Hague, The Netherlands; Karoline Wiegerink, Hotelschool The Hague, The Hague, The Netherlands

Innovation in Hospitality Education

Anticipating the Educational Needs of a Changing Profession
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 232 p. 35 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-61378-9
       9783319613789
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Professional & Vocational Education / Management Education
This book analyses the development of hospitality education from vocational to higher education, and discusses the positioning of hotel schools. It addresses questions such as: Should hospitality management become part of generic business education? Are the technical training programmes that have defined the identity of these schools a remnant of their vocational past, or have they contributed to the successful careers of many hospitality graduates? Topics discussed in the book are curriculum innovation, the theory of experimentation, the nature of hospitable behaviour, information technology, life-long learning and developments for future curricula. The book makes clear that the debate on the balance between theory and practice will not only define the future of hospitality management education, but can also be considered a relevant case study in other business disciplines. The history of hospitality education goes back to the end of the nineteenth and early twentieth century when hotel schools were founded to train the protocol and technical skills required to receive the travellers of those days. Since then, the scale and complexity of the hospitality industry and its professions have changed, as well as our understanding of what makes a business —whether it offers accommodation or something else— “hospitable”.  The scope and educational level of hotel schools have evolved accordingly, and hospitality management has become a popular discipline in the traditional and renowned hotel schools as well as in universities. 

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction. Innovation in Hospitality Education; Jeroen Oskam.- Section 1: Redefining the Hospitality Curriculum.- 2. Hospitality Education – A Third Paradigm; Jeffrey B. Catrett.- 3. Education for Hospitality Management; Conrad Lashley.- Section 2: Design of the Hospitality Curriculum.- 4. Expertise: The theory of experimentation; Clare Hindley and Beverley Wilson-Wünsch.- 5. Genuinely hospitable behaviour in education; Daphne M. Dekker.- 6. Developments for Future Curricula in International Hospitality Management Education; Robert J. Coelen and Sjoerd Gehrels.- 7. Information Technology in Hospitality Education; Giampaolo Viglia, Mirko Pelloia and Dimitrios Buhalis.- Section 3: Curriculum Innovations.- 8. Aligning direction and delivery of education to the needs of the future:  a guideline to finding the right balance between a managerial and educational approach; Jan Willem van Brouwershaven.- 9. Developing the intercultural competence of 21st century learners with blogging during a work placement abroad; Ankie Hoefnagels and Sylvia Schoenmakers.- 10. Addressing the Challenges Facing Hospitality Academic Programmes in the USA: Portfolios and Action-Learning; Ajai Ammachathram and David M. Anderson.- 11. Developing The Edge Hotel School - Peter Jones and Andrew Boer.- 12. Hospitality Business Simulations Today. New Generation Simulations for New Generation Students in a New Generation Marketplace; Peter Starks and William Carroll.- Section 4: Life-long Learning.- 13. Investing in People: training is not a cost!; Conrad Lashley.- 14. Value Creation through Hospitality. A case study on the effect of hospitality trainings; Karoline Wiegerink.- 15. Conclusion: the Future of Hospitality Education; Jeroen Oskam.
Suman Fernando, London Metropolitan University, London, UK

Institutional Racism in Psychiatry and Clinical Psychology

Race Matters in Mental Health
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIX, 209 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-62727-4
       9783319627274
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of Science / History of Medicine
This book examines the deep roots of racism in the mental health system. Suman Fernando weaves the histories of racial discourse and clinical practice into a narrative of power, knowledge, and black suffering in an ostensibly progressive and scientifically grounded system. Drawing on a lifetime of experience as a practicing psychiatrist, he examines how the system has shifted in response to new forms of racism which have emerged since the 1960s, highlighting the widespread pathologization of black people, the impact of Islamophobia on clinical practice after 9/11, and various struggles to reform. Engaging and accessible, this book makes a compelling case for the entrenchment of racism across all aspects of psychiatry and clinical psychology, and calls for a paradigm shift in both theory and practice.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. How 'race' began, and the emergence of psychiatry and clinical psychology.- 3. Race thinking and racism become the norm.- 4. New racisms appear in the 1960s.- 5. Racism in a context of multiculturalism.- 6. Struggle against racism in the UK.- 7. Persistence of racism through white power.- 8. Racism post 9/11.- 9. Racism with the advent of Trump and after Brexit.
Robert Maribe Branch, University of Georgia, Athens, GA, USA

Instructional Design: The ADDIE Approach

Springer US
Seiten X, 203 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2009
ISBN 978-0-387-09505-9
       9780387095059
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Educational Technology / Learning & Instruction
The Analyze, Design, Develop, Implement, and Evaluate (ADDIE) process is used to introduce an approach to instruction design that has a proven record of success. Instructional Design: The ADDIE Approach is intended to serve as an overview of the ADDIE concept. The primary rationale for this book is to respond to the need for an instruction design primer that addresses the current proliferation of complex educational development models, particularly non-traditional approaches to learning, multimedia development and online learning environments. Many entry level instructional designers and students enrolled in related academic programs indicate they are better prepared to accomplish the challenging work of creating effective training and education materials after they have a thorough understanding of the ADDIE principles. However, a survey of instructional development applications indicate that the overwhelming majority of instructional design models are based on ADDIE, often do not present the ADDIE origins as part of their content, and are poorly applied by people unfamiliar with the ADDIE paradigm. The purpose of this book is to focus on fundamental ADDIE principles, written with a minimum of professional jargon. This is not an attempt to debate scholars or other educational professionals on the finer points of instructional design, however, the book's content is based on sound doctrine and supported by valid empirical research. The only bias toward the topic is that generic terms will be used as often as possible in order to make it easy for the reader to apply the concepts in the book to other specific situations.

Inhaltsangaben

Prologue.- Analyze.- Design.- Develop.- Implement.- Evaluate.- Epilogue.
Robert Maribe Branch, University of Georgia, Athens, GA, USA

Instructional Design: The ADDIE Approach

Springer US
Seiten X, 203 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2009
ISBN 978-1-4899-8423-4
       9781489984234
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,15 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Educational Technology / Learning & Instruction
The Analyze, Design, Develop, Implement, and Evaluate (ADDIE) process is used to introduce an approach to instruction design that has a proven record of success. Instructional Design: The ADDIE Approach is intended to serve as an overview of the ADDIE concept. The primary rationale for this book is to respond to the need for an instruction design primer that addresses the current proliferation of complex educational development models, particularly non-traditional approaches to learning, multimedia development and online learning environments. Many entry level instructional designers and students enrolled in related academic programs indicate they are better prepared to accomplish the challenging work of creating effective training and education materials after they have a thorough understanding of the ADDIE principles. However, a survey of instructional development applications indicate that the overwhelming majority of instructional design models are based on ADDIE, often do not present the ADDIE origins as part of their content, and are poorly applied by people unfamiliar with the ADDIE paradigm. The purpose of this book is to focus on fundamental ADDIE principles, written with a minimum of professional jargon. This is not an attempt to debate scholars or other educational professionals on the finer points of instructional design, however, the book's content is based on sound doctrine and supported by valid empirical research. The only bias toward the topic is that generic terms will be used as often as possible in order to make it easy for the reader to apply the concepts in the book to other specific situations.

Inhaltsangaben

Prologue.- Analyze.- Design.- Develop.- Implement.- Evaluate.- Epilogue.
F. Diane Barth, New York, NY, USA

Integrative Clinical Social Work Practice

A Contemporary Perspective
Springer New York
Seiten XVII, 166 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-4939-0350-4
       9781493903504
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Social Work / Psychotherapy and Counseling
In recent history the practice of medicine and mental health has been increasingly eclectic as more and more practitioners harness seemingly disparate therapies and techniques to arrive at clinical breakthroughs. But while social work professionals have been involved in integrative practice informally and intuitively for years, resources to bring structure to this therapeutic concept have been few and far between.In response, Integrative Social Work Practice offers innovative ways of conceptualizing cases, communicating with clients and making better therapeutic use of client individuality. Rich in research, evidence-based and clinical material from a variety of settings, the book begins with the basic organizing principles behind effective integrative practice. Real-world examples flesh out the theoretical rationales and psychodynamic, cognitive, behavioral and developmental methods are shown in practical context. The author also demonstrates how to balance flexibility and boundaries and manage diverse and even conflicting theories, while providing clear guidelines on:Integrating key psychotherapeutic approaches into social work.Using somatic knowledge to enhance therapy.Making assessments and choosing interventions.Applying an integrative approach to therapeutic relationships.Creating manageable goals based on small steps.Building and working with an integrative team.An important step forward in both professional development and the larger therapeutic picture, Integrative Social Work Practice benefits researchers and practitioners as well as supervisors and students in social work and counseling.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface.- Integration or Eclecticism: Rationale for an Integrative Theory.- Contemporary Psychodynamic Models.- Developmental Models.- Cognitive and Behavioral Models.- The Body-Mind Connection.- Making Assessments and Choosing Interventions.- An Integrative Approach to Therapeutic Relationships.- Small Steps and Manageable Goals.- Building and Working with an Integrative Team.- Working on and Working through.
F. Diane Barth, New York, NY, USA

Integrative Clinical Social Work Practice

A Contemporary Perspective
Springer New York
Seiten XVII, 166 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-4939-2015-0
       9781493920150
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Social Work / Psychotherapy and Counseling
In recent history the practice of medicine and mental health has been increasingly eclectic as more and more practitioners harness seemingly disparate therapies and techniques to arrive at clinical breakthroughs. But while social work professionals have been involved in integrative practice informally and intuitively for years, resources to bring structure to this therapeutic concept have been few and far between.In response, Integrative Social Work Practice offers innovative ways of conceptualizing cases, communicating with clients and making better therapeutic use of client individuality. Rich in research, evidence-based and clinical material from a variety of settings, the book begins with the basic organizing principles behind effective integrative practice. Real-world examples flesh out the theoretical rationales and psychodynamic, cognitive, behavioral and developmental methods are shown in practical context. The author also demonstrates how to balance flexibility and boundaries and manage diverse and even conflicting theories, while providing clear guidelines on:Integrating key psychotherapeutic approaches into social work.Using somatic knowledge to enhance therapy.Making assessments and choosing interventions.Applying an integrative approach to therapeutic relationships.Creating manageable goals based on small steps.Building and working with an integrative team.An important step forward in both professional development and the larger therapeutic picture, Integrative Social Work Practice benefits researchers and practitioners as well as supervisors and students in social work and counseling.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface.- Integration or Eclecticism: Rationale for an Integrative Theory.- Contemporary Psychodynamic Models.- Developmental Models.- Cognitive and Behavioral Models.- The Body-Mind Connection.- Making Assessments and Choosing Interventions.- An Integrative Approach to Therapeutic Relationships.- Small Steps and Manageable Goals.- Building and Working with an Integrative Team.- Working on and Working through.
Deric Shannon, Emory University , Oxford, GA, USA; Jeffery Galle, Emory University , Oxford, GA

Interdisciplinary Approaches to Pedagogy and Place-Based Education

From Abstract to the Quotidian
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 215 p. 3 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-50620-3
       9783319506203
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Educational Philosophy / Higher Education
This book brings together scholars from a wide range of disciplines to creatively engage with place in the context of pedagogy. Beginning with an exploration of traditional place-based forms of education, such as outdoor education, travel courses, and courses on sustainability, the authors go on to expand our popular notions of place, including the classroom, the campus, our interior selves, and our digital ecosystems. This reconsideration of place-based education represents not only an engagement of prior literature on pedagogy and place, but also a re-imagining of the role that place might play in education. Authors stretch the notion of place, arguing for a holistic approach to disciplines in the humanities, social sciences, and natural sciences, bringing into focus an array of contentious issues in philosophies and methods of teaching for multiple academic disciplines and their many intersections.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: Where We Are: Place, Pedagogy, and the Outer Limits.- Section 1: Here.- 1. Teaching on the Farm: Farm as Place in the Sociology of Food and Sustainability.- 2. Reclaiming Interiority as Place and Practice.- 3. Turning Your Place Into Projects.- 4. The Story of Here: Documentary Film Education, Teaching Narratives, and Drawing from the Critical Perspective of Place.- 5. Pedagogy and Place in Science Education.- 6. The Potential for Place Based Learning Experiences on the College Campus.- Section 2: There.- 7. Stepping off the Page: Teaching Literature with a Pedagogy of Place.- 8. Public Education Against Neoliberal Capitalism: Illustrations and Opportunities.- 9. Queering Place: Using the Classroom to Describe the World.- 10. Seeking Peace, Seeking Justice: Place-Based Pedagogies and Global Connections.- 11. Redefining Learning Places in the Emerging Digital Ecosystem.- 12. Teaching and Learning from Within: A Placed-Based Pedagogy for Heartfelt Hope.
Rosalind Latiner Raby, California State University Northridge, Chatsworth, CA, USA; Edward J. Valeau, Hartnell Community College District President Emeritus, CCIE, Salinas, , USA

International Education at Community Colleges

Themes, Practices, and Case Studies
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XIX, 351 p. 2 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-53335-7
       9781137533357
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Higher Education / International and Comparative Education
This book brings together distinguished scholars, community college practitioners, and emerging leaders to expand upon existing theories, provide reflection on practice, and demonstrate the dynamic nature of community college internationalization. There is a special challenge for United States community colleges to move from selected international programs that impact a few students to sustainable change that influences the entire college community. A key importance is realization that reform is not based on chance, but on intentional designs that are intended to guide future endeavors. The research, case studies, and experiences of the authors in this book are both inspiring and critical in the quest to encourage an academic shift for long-term change that promotes international literacy as an integral component of the community college and celebrates the needs of the changing local communities.

Inhaltsangaben

SECTION ONE : EXPLORING THE FIELD.- Chapter 1 Global is Not the Opposite of Local: Advocacy For Community College International Education Rosalind Latiner Raby and Edward J. Valeau.- Chapter 2 Faculty International Experience and Internationalization Efforts at Community Colleges in the United States Krishna Bista.- Chapter 3 Mentoring in an International Professional Development Program Tod Treat.- Chapter 4 International Students Struggles: Community College to the Rescue Linda Serra Hagedorn, Shaohua Pei, and Lu Yan.- Chapter 5 Immigrating to the Title IX Environment: A qualitative cultural analysis of community college international students Leah P. Hollis and Russell A. Davis.- Chapter 6 Appreciative Advising with International Students in American Community Colleges Yi (Leaf) Zhang.- Chapter 7 Self-Authorship Beyond Borders: Reconceptualizing College and Career Readiness Eboni M. Zamani-Gallaher, Raul A. Leon, and John Lang.- Chapter 8 Microaggressions and Intersectionality in the Experiences of Black Women Studying Abroad through Community Colleges: Implications for Practice Tasha Y. Willis.- Chapter 9 Calls for Accountability: Measuring internationalization at community colleges Shawn Woodin.- Chapter 10 Building the Pipeline for Community College International Education Leadership Edward J. Valeau and Rosalind Latiner Raby.- SECTION TWO: CASE-STUDIES AND RESEARCH STUDIES.- STUDY 1 Building a World-Class College: Creating a Global Community at Pima Community College Ricardo Castro-Salazar; Kelley Merriam-Castro, and Yvonne A. Perez.- STUDY 2 Internationalization and the Influence of Environmental Factors: A Case Study Deborah M. Sipe.- STUDY 3 The Texas/Czech Republic International Connection: A Reciprocal Exchange of Faculty and Students Juanita Gamez Vargas.- STUDY 4 Addressing Myths About International Students Deborah Budd, Andreea Serban, Dianne Van Hook, Rosalind Latiner Raby.- STUDY 5 Global certificates: Bringing intentionality and ownership to comprehensive internationalization Paloma Rodriguez.- STUDY 6 Innovative Approaches to Study Abroad at Harper College and Fox Valley Technical College Opal Leeman Bartzis, Kelly J. Kirkwood and Thalia M. Mulvihill.- STUDY 7 Partnering for new possibilities: The development of a global learning certificate Katerine Cierniak and Anne-Maree Ruddy.- STUDY 8 Creating and Enhancing a Global Consciousness Among Students of Color in our Community Colleges Reyes L. Quezada and Paula A. Cordeiro.- STUDY 9 Community College Study Abroad and Implications for Student Success: Comparing California and New Jersey community colleges Gary M. Rhodes, Rosalind Latiner Raby, Janice M. Thomas, Amparo Codding and Andrea Lynch.- STUDY 10 Transformative learning through education abroad: A case study of a community college program Ashley Brenner.- STUDY 11 Ensuring Social Success: Assessing the factors that affect the Social experiences of international students at a large, urban community college in Texas Sharon Miller.- STUDY 12 Community College Education Abroad and Business Internship Programs Cultivation of Competency in Communicating, Collaborating, and Critical Thinking? Marc Thomas.
Gabriela Steier, Food Law International, LLP, Boston, MA, USA; Kiran K. Patel, Food Law International, LLP, Washington, DC, , USA

International Food Law and Policy

Springer International Publishing
Seiten LI, 1425 p. 27 illus., 17 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-07541-9
       9783319075419
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
139,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law / Food Science
International Food Law and Policy is the first interdisciplinary piece of academic literature of its kind with a comprehensive, reader-friendly approach to teaching the major aspects of food regulation, law, policy, food safety and environmental sustainability in a global context.  The sections are grouped by continents and focus on a range of cross-disciplinary subjects, such as public health, international food trade, the right to food, intellectual property and global regulatory aspects of food production. With its systematic approach, this book will be a valuable resource both for professionals working in food regulation and anyone interested in the subject. It provides a solid foundation for courses and master’s programs in environmental management, food law, policy and regulation, and sustainable development around the world.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I: Global Food Law and Policy.- Part II: Interdisciplinary Facets of International Food Law.- Part III: European Food Law.- Part IV: The Americas.- Part V: Australia.- Part VI: Africa.- Part VII: Asia.
Scott H Decker, Arizona State University, Phoenix, AZ, USA; Nerea Marteache, California State University, San Bernardino, CA, USA

International Handbook of Juvenile Justice

Springer International Publishing
Seiten X, 550 p. 66 illus., 39 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-45088-9
       9783319450889
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
246,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminology and Criminal Justice, general / Criminal Law
This comprehensive reference work presents an in-depth analysis of juvenile justice systems across the world. The second edition of this Handbook has been updated with 13 new chapters, now covering a total of 34 countries, across North and South America, Europe, Asia, Africa, and the Middle East from an international and comparative perspective. The International Handbook of Juvenile Justice is the result of research conducted by a group of outstanding scholars working in the field of juvenile justice. It reflects a collective concern about trends in juvenile justice over the past two decades, trends that have begun to blur the difference between criminal and juvenile justice. Also new to the second edition, each chapter is formatted to increase the comparative aspect of the book, highlighting: · The legal status of juveniles · Age of majority · The country’s stance toward the UN Committee on the Rights of the Child · Trends in juvenile crime over the period 2004-2014 · Causes of juvenile crime · Policing and juveniles · Courts and juveniles · Custodial rules for juveniles (detention, prison, mixing juveniles with adults) · Alternative sanctions for juveniles: home confinement, restorative justice, restitution, etc. · Differences in treatment of boys and girls This seminal work highlights similarities and differences between the various systems, and will be an important reference for researchers in criminology and criminal justice, particularly interested in juvenile delinquency and youth crime, as well as related disciplines like sociology, social work, and public policy.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1 . USA.- Chapter 2. Canada.- Chapter 3. Mexico.- Chapter 4. Brazil.- Chapter 5. England and Wales.- Chapter 6. Ireland.- Chapter 7. Belgium.- Chapter 8. Germany.- Chapter 9. Austria.- Chapter 10. Switzerland.- Chapter 11. Spain.- Chapter 12. Scotland.- Chapter 13. Sweden.- Chapter 14. Denmark.- Chapter 15. Poland.- Chapter 16. Slovenia.- Chapter 17. Japan.- Chapter 18. China.- Chapter 19. India.- Chapter 20. Uganda.- Chapter 21. Ghana.- Chapter 22. Kenya.- Chapter 23. Israel.- Chapter 24. Palestine.- Chapter 25. Turkey.
Hans-Joachim Heintze, Ruhr-University Bochum, Bochum, Germany; Pierre Thielbörger, Ruhr-University Bochum, Bochum, Germany

International Humanitarian Action

NOHA Textbook
Springer International Publishing
Seiten IX, 529 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-14453-5
       9783319144535
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Humanitarian Law, Law of Armed Conflict / Human Rights
This textbook examines a wide range of humanitarian action issues in five parts, presented by specialists from different academic fields. The respective parts reflect the five core modules of the International NOHA Joint Master’s Programme “International Humanitarian Action”: a) World Politics, b) International Law, c) Public Health, d) Anthropology, and e) Management. The book serves as a common basis for teaching at all NOHA universities and aims at imparting the basic knowledge and skills needed to excel in a complex interdisciplinary and international learning context. It provides in-depth information on key international humanitarian principles and values, professional codes of conduct, and the commitment to their implementation in practice. The book will thus be useful for all students of the NOHA Joint Master’s Programme and participants of any courses with a similar content, but also for academics and practitioners affiliated with entities such as international organisations and NGOs. It may also serve as an introduction to anyone with an interest in understanding the numerous and inter-linked facets of humanitarian action.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I – World Politics: The Changing Context of Humanitarian Action: Key Challenges and Issues by Cristina Churruca-Muguruza.- Humanitarian Action in International Relations: Power and Politics by Anna Khakee.- World Politics and Humanitarian Action: Mutual Influences by Marie-Josée Domestici-Met.- The Changing Nature of Conflict - The Need for a Conflict Sensitive Approach by Sulagna Maitra.- Humanitarian Aid Governance in World Politics by Uwe Andersen and  Katharina Behmer.- Principles and Professionalism: Towards Humanitarian Intelligence by Andrej Zwitter.- Part II – International Law: Public International Law by El?bieta Mikos-Skuza.- International Human Rights Law by Joana Abrisketa.- International Humanitarian Law by Renata Vaišvilien?.- International Criminal Law by Pierre Thielbörger.- Disaster Law by Ronan McDermott.- Protection of Refugees and Minorities by Hans-Joachim Heintze and Charlotte Lülf.- Part III – Public Health in Humanitarian Action: Approaches and Challenges: Basic Concepts and Current Challenges of Public Health in Humanitarian Action by Siri Tellier, Andreas Kiaby, Lars Peter Nissen, Jonas Torp, Wilma Doedens, Kevin Davies, Dan Brun Petersen, Vibeke Brix and Niall Roche.- Part IV – Anthropology: Anthropology and Humanitarianism? by Ulrika Persson-Fischier.- Anthropological Perspectives by Odina Benoist.- Armed Conflicts and Humanitarian Crises: Insights from the Anthropology of War by Kristina Roepstorff.- Forced Migration and Refugee Settings from an Anthropological Perspective by Relinde Reiffers.- An Anthropological Perspective on the Timeline of Humanitarian Interventions by Juan Carlos Gumucio-Castellon.- Part V – Management: Managing Humanitarian Action - An Introduction by Pat Gibbons.- The Basics of Managing Emergencies by Markus Moke and Thomas Pfeiffer.- Project Management by Sabrina Herold and Bartjan W. Pennink.- Humanitarian Logistics by Gildas Vourc’h.- Security Management in Humanitarian Organisations by Bob Ghosn.- Human Resource Management in the Humanitarian Sector by Sophie Borel.- Financial Management by Philip Byrne.  
J. Barkin

International Organization

Theories and Institutions
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XII, 213 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2013
ISBN 978-1-137-30240-3
       9781137302403
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
53,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Relations / International Organization
The newly revised and updated edition of International Organization is an introduction to the study of international organizations in the field of International Relations intended for students in the discipline. It looks at the different ways in which IOs are studied and then applies these different modes to a variety of specific case studies.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: The State and International Organizations Sovereignty and Globalization Power and Interdependence Regimes and Institutions Efficiency and Ideas The United Nations and Its System From International to Human Security The Institutions of Collective Security Human Rights and Humanitarian Aid Economic Institutions and Trade International Finance Development The Environment The Technical Details The Fuzzy Borders of Intergovernmentalism Conclusions
Ian S. Blackshaw, Sains-les-Fressin, Pas de Calais, France

International Sports Law: An Introductory Guide

T.M.C. Asser Press
Seiten IX, 154 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-94-6265-197-5
       9789462651975
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
123,04 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Sports Law /
This book, written by an expert in the field, covers some of the following issues, namelyhigh-profile WADA cases such as that of Maria Sharapova, the Bosman ruling, decisionsby the Court of Arbitration for Sport (CAS), and footballers’ employment contractsand transfers for enormous amounts. These issues have led to sport no longer beingconfined to the back pages of traditional media such as newspapers, but increasinglyle='font-size: 14px;'>finding its way onto the front pages and into new media.
Since ancient times sport has been practised but today it is a multi-billion dollar ‘industry’,
and Sports Law as a discipline in its own right is developing apace and is increasinglybeing studied and practiced at all levels of interest and competency. Thereby creatinga need amongst students, lawyers, accountants, sports marketers, promoters, agents,sans-serifsports broadcasters, sports administrators and managers for some basic and generalknowledge of the legal aspects of sport.
This introductory guide to international sports law will serve to satisfy the needs currentlynot being met in present-day sports law literature, and should also be of interestto researchers and the general reader. Although the topics covered are necessarily sans-serif'>selective, sports law being such a vast subject, they are representative of the main legalissues facing the world of sport today. Throughout the book, the reader is referred toarticles, publications and other materials that provide further information on the varioussubjects treated in the text, thus enhancing its value and usefulness. The Law is statedas at 1 January 2017, according to the sources available at that date.
Prof. Ian S. Blackshaw is an International Sports Lawyer, a Solicitor of the Supreme Court
of England and Wales, and a Visiting Professor at several Universities, including AngliaRuskin University, Cambridge, United Kingdom, and The University of Pretoria, SouthAfrica. He is also a member of the Court of Arbitration for Sport, Lausanne, Switzerland.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- European and US Models of Sport.- Sport and the General Law.- Sports’ Governing Bodies.- IP and Sport.- Sports Image Rights.- TV and New Media Rights.- Footballers’ Employment Contracts and Transfers.- Sport and the European Union.- Doping in Sport.- Sport and Human Rights.- Corruption in Sport.- Dispute Resolution.- Some Other Landmark Sports Cases.- Conclusion.- About the Author.- Index.
Taweh Beysolow II, San Francisco, CA, USA

Introduction to Deep Learning Using R

A Step-by-Step Guide to Learning and Implementing Deep Learning Models Using R
Apress
Seiten XIX, 227 p. 106 illus., 53 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-4842-2733-6
       9781484227336
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Big Data/Analytics / Computing Methodologies
Understand deep learning, the nuances of its different models, and where these models can be applied.The abundance of data and demand for superior products/services have driven the development of advanced computer science techniques, among them image and speech recognition. Introduction to Deep Learning Using R provides a theoretical and practical understanding of the models that perform these tasks by building upon the fundamentals of data science through machine learning and deep learning. This step-by-step guide will help you understand the disciplines so that you can apply the methodology in a variety of contexts. All examples are taught in the R statistical language, allowing students and professionals to implement these techniques using open source tools.What You'll LearnUnderstand the intuition and mathematics that power deep learning models Utilize various algorithms using the R programming language and its packages Use best practices for experimental design and variable selection Practice the methodology to approach and effectively solve problems as a data scientist Evaluate the effectiveness of algorithmic solutions and enhance their predictive power Who This Book Is For Students, researchers, and data scientists who are familiar with programming using R. This book also is also of use for those who wish to learn how to appropriately deploy these algorithms in applications where they would be most useful.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: What is Deep Learning?.- Chapter 2: Mathematical Review.- Chapter 3: A Review of Optimization and Machine Learning.- Chapter 4: Single and Multi-Layer Perceptron Models.- Chapter 5: Convolutional Neural Networks (CNNs).- Chapter 6: Recurrent Neural Networks (RNNs) .- Chapter 7: Autoencoders, Restricted Boltzmann Machines, and Deep Belief Networks.- Chapter 8: Experimental Design and Heuristics .- Chapter 9: Deep Learning and Machine Learning Hardware/Software Suggestions.- Chapter 10: Machine Learning Example Problems .- Chapter 11: Deep Learning and Other Example Problems .- Chapter 12: Closing Statements.-
Jaap Hage, Maastricht University Faculty of Law, Maastricht, The Netherlands; Antonia Waltermann, Maastricht University, Maastricht, The Netherlands; Bram Akkermans, Maastricht University Faculty of Law, Maastricht, The Netherlands

Introduction to Law

Springer International Publishing
Seiten IX, 397 p. 13 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-57251-2
       9783319572512
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
69,54 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Fundamentals of Law / Philosophy of Law
This book is exceptional in the sense that it provides an introduction to law in general rather than the law of one specific jurisdiction, and it presents a unique way of looking at legal education. It is crucial for lawyers to be aware of the different ways in which societal problems can be solved and to be able to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of different legal solutions. In this respect, being a lawyer involves being able to reason like a lawyer, even more than having detailed knowledge of particular sets of rules. Introduction to Law reflects this view by focusing on the functions of rules and on ways of arguing the relative qualities of alternative legal solutions. Where ‘positive’ law is discussed, the emphasis is on the legal questions that must be addressed by a field of law and on the different solutions which have been adopted by, for instance, the common law and civil law tradition. The law of specific jurisdictions is discussed to illustrate possible answers to questions such as when the existence of a valid contract is assumed.

Inhaltsangaben

1 Sources of Law by Jaap Hage.- 2 Legal Reasoning by Jaap Hage.- 3 Basic Concepts of Law by Jaap Hage.- 4 The Law of Contract by Jan Smits.- 5 Property Law by Bram Akkermans.- 6 Tort Law by Jaap Hage.- 7 Criminal Law by Johannes Keiler, Michele Panzavolta, and David Roef.- 8 Constitutional Law by Aalt Willem Heringa.- 9 Administrative Law by Chris Backes and Mariolina Eliantonio.- 10 The Law of Europe by Jaap Hage.- 11 Tax Law by Marcel Schaper.- 12 International Law by Menno T. Kamminga.- 13 Human Rights by Gustavo Arosemena.- 14 Elements of Procedural Law by Fokke Fernhout and Remco van Rhee.- 15 Philosophy of Law by Jaap Hage.
Marcus Oppitz, Klosterneuburg, Austria; Peter Tomsu, Leitzersdorf, Austria

Inventing the Cloud Century

How Cloudiness Keeps Changing Our Life, Economy and Technology
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXVI, 609 p. 221 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-61160-0
       9783319611600
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business IT Infrastructure / Computer Systems Organization and Communication Networks
This book combines the three dimensions of technology, society and economy to explore the advent of today’s cloud ecosystems as successors to older service ecosystems based on networks. Further, it describes the shifting of services to the cloud as a long-term trend that is still progressing rapidly.The book adopts a comprehensive perspective on the key success factors for the technology – compelling business models and ecosystems including private, public and national organizations. The authors explore the evolution of service ecosystems, describe the similarities and differences, and analyze the way they have created and changed industries. Lastly, based on the current status of cloud computing and related technologies like virtualization, the internet of things, fog computing, big data and analytics, cognitive computing and blockchain, the authors provide a revealing outlook on the possibilities of future technologies, the future of the internet, and the potential impacts on business and society.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- A Short History of Service Ecosystems.- Early Information Network Services.- Making of Digital Computers.- Networks for Sharing and Connecting.- Managing Virtual Storage.- From Physical to Virtual Services.- Software Defined Virtual Networks.- Building the Internet.- World Wide Web.- Cloud Computing.- Building Cloud Business and Ecosystems.- Creating Innovation.- Security and Privacy Challenges.- Changes in Society and Politics.- Internet of Things.- Fog Computing.- Big Data Analytics.- Future Technologies of the Cloud Century.- New Paradigms and Big Disruptive Things.- Summary.
Kayoko Hashimoto, University of Queensland , Brisbane, QLD, Australia

Japanese Language and Soft Power in Asia

Springer Singapore
Seiten XIII, 207 p. 2 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-981-10-5085-5
       9789811050855
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Language Policy and Planning / Asian Culture
This cutting edge collection considers how the Japanese language functions as a key element of Japanese soft power in Asia. Within Japanese culture itself, the promotion of language has been an area of ambivalence. This interdisciplinary book looks across the fields of language policy, language teaching, socio-linguistics, cultural studies and history to identify the links between Japan’s language policies and broader social, economic and political processes. It examines the challenges that undermine Japan’s potential soft power by identifying a gap between the “official Japan” portrayed by the Japanese government and the “cultural Japan” that foreigners perceive. It also reveals historical continuity in the way Japanese language is perceived and promoted by policy makers and how the current practices of Japanese language teaching in Asian countries have been shaped within the framework of “international exchange”, which has been a key concept in Japanese foreign policies since the 1970s. It particularly considers the concept of ‘Cool Japan’ as a symbol of Japan’s interpretation of its cultural power and offers a thoughtful assessment of the future of Japanese as a form of soft power in Asia as the country prepares for the 2020 Tokyo Olympics.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Why language matters in soft power.- Part I Cool Japan and Japan’s soft power.- Cool Japan versus the China threat: Does Japan’s popular culture success mean more soft power?.- Cool Japan and Japanese language: Why does Japan need “Japan fans”?.- Part II Japanese language and the historical construction of Asia.- Japanese language education in the Greater East Asia Co-Prosperity Sphere and the kokuji mondai (National Script Problem).- Media and cultural policy and Japanese language education in Japanese-occupied Singapore, 1942-1945.- Part III Japanese language teaching in Asia.- Japanese language for trainee nurses from Asia: the EPA scheme as a missed opportunity.- The roles of native Japanese speaker in Japanese language programs at high schools in South Korea, Indonesia and Thailand.- Japanese pop culture as a motivating factor for Japanese language learners in Qatar.- Part IV Japanese language and learners’ empowerment.- Japanese Language in the wake of Hong Kong’s Umbrella movement: Is it a form of soft power?.- Accessing the soft power of Japanese language in Australia: Young Korean migrants studying Japanese as a foreign language.
J. Kucia; L. Gravett

Leadership in Balance

New Habits of the Mind
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVII, 178 p. 7 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-137-39433-0
       9781137394330
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
48,14 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Human Resource Management / Business Strategy/Leadership
Leadership in Balance provides readers with a deeper understanding of the art, practice, and discipline of purpose-driven collaboration, and teaches them how new leadership habits of the mind will positively impact an organization's learning, growth, and change.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction PART I: BUILDING THE FUNDAMENTALS 1. Leader as Brand 2. A New Model of Leadership for a Living Organization 3. It's Time for a Different Leadership Paradigm 4. The Structure of the Ways of Leaders in Balance 5. The Power of Leadership in Balance: The Connection to an Organization's Survival 6. New Habits of the Mind: The Ways of a Leader in Balance PART II: WHAT DOES IT ALL MEAN? - TAKING IT TO THE NEXT LEVEL 7. New Behaviors that Correlate to the Eight Ways of Thinking 8. The Kucia Balance Framework in Action 9. Learning from Mentors through the Eight Ways of Thinking 10. The Research Foundation for Leadership in Balance 11. The Fundamental Shift: Capstone Thoughts Appendix 1 Leadership in Balance Assessment #1 – Short Form Appendix 2 Leadership in Balance Assessment #2 – Eight Ways of Thinking Appendix 3 ANOVA Results
J. Kucia; L. Gravett

Leadership in Balance

New Habits of the Mind
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVII, 178 p. 7 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-137-40820-4
       9781137408204
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
32,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Human Resource Management / Business Strategy/Leadership
Leadership in Balance provides readers with a deeper understanding of the art, practice, and discipline of purpose-driven collaboration, and teaches them how new leadership habits of the mind will positively impact an organization's learning, growth, and change.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction PART I: BUILDING THE FUNDAMENTALS 1. Leader as Brand 2. A New Model of Leadership for a Living Organization 3. It's Time for a Different Leadership Paradigm 4. The Structure of the Ways of Leaders in Balance 5. The Power of Leadership in Balance: The Connection to an Organization's Survival 6. New Habits of the Mind: The Ways of a Leader in Balance PART II: WHAT DOES IT ALL MEAN? - TAKING IT TO THE NEXT LEVEL 7. New Behaviors that Correlate to the Eight Ways of Thinking 8. The Kucia Balance Framework in Action 9. Learning from Mentors through the Eight Ways of Thinking 10. The Research Foundation for Leadership in Balance 11. The Fundamental Shift: Capstone Thoughts Appendix 1 Leadership in Balance Assessment #1 – Short Form Appendix 2 Leadership in Balance Assessment #2 – Eight Ways of Thinking Appendix 3 ANOVA Results
David Pendleton, London, UK; Adrian F. Furnham, London, UK

Leadership: All You Need To Know 2nd edition

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXIII, 254 p. 13 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-55434-5
       9781137554345
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
40,65 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership / Project Management
If you only read one book on leadership this year, make it this one! Leadership experts David Pendleton and Adrian Furnham present an innovative model for leadership success in a turbulent world. When times are hard, leadership makes the greatest difference. This thoroughly updated second edition shows how to make the kind of difference that all organizations, both public and private sector, want and need. Early chapters show the powerful effect leadership can have on organizations; subsequent chapters present new ideas that are elegantly simple, conceptually coherent and radically different, based on the best research in the field. The ideas in this book have also been tested in major multinational organizations over recent years. The aim is to provide leaders and those who work with them with a practical guide to how to increase the effectiveness of leadership in any organization.

Inhaltsangaben

Foreword by Sir Rod Eddington.- Introduction.- 1. The History of Thinking about Leadership.- 2. Leadership's Impact on the Performance of Organisations.- 3. The Primary Colours of Leadership.- 4. Five Enablers of Leading.- 5. The Improbability of Being a Complete Leader.- 6. Building a Leadership Team.- 7. Do You Have to be Smart to be a Leader?.- 8. The Impact of Personality on Leadership.- 9. When it all goes wrong.- 9. A Programme of Action.- Summary and Conclusion.
Mario Fernando, University of Wollongong Faculty of Commerce, Gwynville, NSW, Australia

Leading Responsibly in the Asian Century

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIX, 209 p. 12 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-21788-8
       9783319217888
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership / Ethics
The book is one of the first to focus on responsible leadership in the contemporary Asian century context. It adopts a unique context driven social innovation based responsible leadership approach to explain how context can impact and shape the theory and practice of responsible leadership. This unique work will strongly appeal to a broad spectrum of researchers and scholars across disciplines with a particular interest in the interplay between leadership, responsibility and ethics.As Asia’s influence on the global economy continues to grow in the Asian Century, this book offers a culturally integrated view of how the shift in economic power to Asia and the rising new global economic order can influence the theory and practice of responsible leadership. The book focuses particularly on the Asian century opportunities and challenges as a strong contextual factor that shapes the ‘responsibility’ of responsible leadership. The scholarly literature on the topic, the case studies developed through interviews and secondary data, and author’s corporate experiences in the Asia-Pacific region in leading organisations are key sources for the book’s assertions. It fills an important gap in the literature on how Asian cultural factors might influence the predominantly Western developed responsible leadership theory and practice. This book covers key topics including the moral basis for responsibility, theory and practice of responsible leadership, Asian challenges to responsible leadership, and socially innovative responsible leadership. “Fernando’s book provides a fresh and novel perspective on how evolutionary changes in economic power between Asia and the rest of the world undoubtedly will affect the practice of responsible leadership. He examines varying views on responsible leadership across cultures, demonstrating how Asian and Western leadership styles have evolved as our economy continues to become more globally integrated.”Prof. Laura Pincus Hartman Director, Susilo Institute for Ethics in the Global Economy Boston University, Questrom School of Business, Boston, USA“There is little doubt that this is the Asian Century and that economic and political influences from the east will increase. But so too may cultural, ethical and even religious influences. It is therefore important that researchers understand these significant changes. In this book Mario Fernando gives us an insight into what this means for responsible leadership. It is primarily an excellent work of scholarship, written for academics who teach and research in this area by someone who knows Asian business and culture from the inside. But it will also reward careful study by practicing leaders and those who are the potential leaders of the future.”Professor of Business Ethics, Geoff Moore Durham Business School Durham University, UK

Inhaltsangaben

Dedication.- Preface.- Introduction.- Chapter 1: The Context.- Chapter 2: The Moral Basis for Responsibility.- Chapter 3: The Complexity of Leadership.- Chapter 4: Responsible Leadership in Theory.- Chapter 5: Responsible Leadership in Practice.- Chapter 6: Responsible Leadership in the Asian Century.- Chapter 7: The Future for Responsible Leadership.- References.- Appendix: Sample Asian Century Leader Profiles.
Henri de Waele, Radboud University Nijmegen, Nijmegen, The Netherlands

Legal Dynamics of EU External Relations

Dissecting a Layered Global Player
Springer Berlin Heidelberg
Seiten XVI, 199 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-662-54816-5
       9783662548165
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
European Law / International Relations
This book offers a concise yet comprehensive review of the principles of EU external relations law. By carefully examining the role of the Union on the global scene, it provides a systematic overview of the relevant rules and competences, reflecting on the legal developments in their political and societal context. In addition to up-to-date analyses of, inter alia, the Common Foreign and Security Policy, the Common Security and Defence Policy and the Common Commercial Policy, it highlights the EU's external powers with regard to the environment, fundamental rights and development cooperation. Moreover, it includes dedicated chapters exploring the relations with neighbouring countries, and explaining the complex interplay between rules of domestic, European and international provenance.The second edition of this established text (the first edition was published under the title Layered Global Player in 2011) has been geared even more specifically towards students, for example through the inclusion of chapter overviews, clarifying boxes, and supplementary examples, while a meticulous review of the narrative has further enhanced its accessibility. As before, the book’s compact dimensions, transparent structure and engaging style of writing enable readers to master the main features of this gripping field of law with ease. It thus remains an invaluable resource for students and lecturers alike.

Inhaltsangaben

1 Introducing a Layered Global Player.- Part I: Legal Dynamics in the Outer Layer: 2 The Common Foreign and Security Policy.- 3 The Common Security and Defence Policy.- Part II: Legal Dynamics of the Middle Layers: 4 The Common Commercial Policy.- 5 The External Environmental Policy.- 6 The External Human Rights Policy.- 7 The Development Cooperation and Humanitarian Aid Policy.- Part III: Legal Dynamics in the Inner Layer: 8 Special Relationships in the European Neighbourhood and Beyond.- 9 The EU, the Member States and International Law.- 10 Conclusion: An Effective Global Player?.
Visa A.J. Kurki, University of Cambridge, Cambridge, UK; Tomasz Pietrzykowski, University of Silesia in Katowice, Katowice, Poland

Legal Personhood: Animals, Artificial Intelligence and the Unborn

Springer International Publishing
Seiten IX, 158 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-53461-9
       9783319534619
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Theories of Law, Philosophy of Law, Legal History / Philosophy of Law
This edited work collates novel contributions on contemporary topics that are related to human rights. The essays address analytic-descriptive questions, such as what legal personality actually means, and normative questions, such as who or what should be recognised as a legal person. As is well-known among jurists, the law has a special conception of personhood: corporations are persons, whereas slaves have traditionally been considered property rather than persons. This odd state of affairs has not garnered the interest of legal theorists for a while and the theory of legal personhood has been a relatively peripheral topic in jurisprudence for at least 50 years. As readers will see, there have recently been many developments and debates that justify a theoretical investigation of this topic. Animal rights activists have been demanding that some animals be recognized as legal persons. The field of robotics has prompted questions about driverless cars: should they be granted a limited legal personality, so that the car itself would be responsible for damages?This book explores such concepts and touches on matters of bioethics, animal law and medical law. It includes matters of legal history and appeals to both legal scholars and philosophers, especially those with an interest in theories of law and the philosophy of law.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I: Identifying the Legal Person.- 1. The Troublesome ‘Person (Bartosz Brozek).- 2. Legal Persons as Abstractions (Ngaire Naffine).- 3. The Idea of Non-Personal Subjects of Law (Tomasz Pietrzykowski).- Part II Persons, Things and Rights.- 4. Why Things Can Hold Rights: Reconceptualizing the Legal Person (Visa Kurki).- 5. The Right of a House (Qing Xiangyang).- 6. Animals' Race Against Machines (Rafal Michalczak).- Part III: Humanity, Personhood and Bioethics.- 7. Person and Human Being in Bioethics and Law (Laura Palazzani).- 8. Detaching Personhood from Human Nature (Denis Franco Silva).- 9. Are Human Beings with Extreme Mental Disabilities and Animals Comparable? An Account on Personality (Ana Paula Barbosa-Fohrmann & Gustavo Augusto Ferreira Barreto).- 10. Is (Only) Sex Essential for Personhood? To Be 'Between' Male and Female under Polish Law (Agnieszka Bielska-Brodziak & Aneta Gawlik).- 11. Private Selves – An Analysis of Legal Individualism (Susanna Lindroos-Hovinheimo).
Michael Harrington, University of Queensland, Brisbane, QLD, , Australia

Lexical Facility

Size, Recognition Speed and Consistency as Dimensions of Second Language Vocabulary Knowledge
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXVIII, 305 p. 27 illus., 6 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-1-137-37261-1
       9781137372611
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Applied Linguistics / Psycholinguistics
This book examines the simultaneous contribution of learner vocabulary size and speed to second language performance differences across learner levels and settings. Harrington considers vocabulary size and speed, as reflected in retrieval speed and consistency, as a three-dimensional measurement construct termed lexical facility. While size and retrieval speed are generally known, this is the first attempt to incorporate consistency, as measured by the coefficient of variation, as an index of vocabulary skill. Part 1 describes the three dimensions and the roles they play on lower level text processing and thus on second language performance more generally. Part 2 reports on seven studies and related research that investigate the sensitivity of the three dimensions, both individually and in combination, to proficiency differences in common domains of academic English performance. Harrington’s framework and the theoretical and methodological issues that arise are presented in a manner accessible to a wide readership, including second language acquisition vocabulary researchers, testing and assessment practitioners, and those interested in second language research methodology. 

Inhaltsangaben

- Chapter 1. Size as a dimension of L2 Vocabulary Skill.- Chapter 2. Measuring Recognition Vocabulary Size.- Chapter 3. Word recognition skill as an aspect of L2 vocabulary knowledge.- Chapter 4. Lexical Facility: Bringing size and speed together.- Chapter 5. Measuring lexical facility.- Chapter 6. Lexical Facility as an index of L2 Proficiency.- Chapter 7. Lexical Facility and Academic English Proficiency.- Chapter 8. Lexical Facility and IELTS performance.- Chapter 9. Lexical Facility and Language Program Placement.- Chapter 10. Lexical Facility and academic performance in English.- Chapter 11. The effect of Lexical Facility.- Chapter 12. The future of Lexical Facility
Richard W. Cottle, Stanford University, Stanford, CA, USA; Mukund N. Thapa, Optical Fusion, Inc., Palo Alto, CA, USA

Linear and Nonlinear Optimization

Springer New York
Seiten XXXI, 614 p. 58 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-4939-7053-7
       9781493970537
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Operations Research/Decision Theory / Operations Research, Management Science
?This textbook on Linear and Nonlinear Optimization is intended for graduate and advanced undergraduate students in operations research and related fields. It is both literate and mathematically strong, yet requires no prior course in optimization. As suggested by its title, the book is divided into two parts covering in their individual chapters LP Models and Applications; Linear Equations and Inequalities; The Simplex Algorithm; Simplex Algorithm Continued; Duality and the Dual Simplex Algorithm; Postoptimality Analyses; Computational Considerations; Nonlinear (NLP) Models and Applications; Unconstrained Optimization; Descent Methods; Optimality Conditions; Problems with Linear Constraints; Problems with Nonlinear Constraints; Interior-Point Methods; and an Appendix covering Mathematical Concepts. Each chapter ends with a set of exercises. The book is based on lecture notes the authors have used in numerous optimization courses the authors have taught at Stanford University. It emphasizes modeling and numerical algorithms for optimization with continuous (not integer) variables. The discussion presents the underlying theory without always focusing on formal mathematical proofs (which can be found in cited references). Another feature of this book is its inclusion of cultural and historical matters, most often appearing among the footnotes. 'This book is a real gem. The authors do a masterful job of rigorously presenting all of the relevant theory clearly and concisely while managing to avoid unnecessary tedious mathematical details. This is an ideal book for teaching a one or two semester masters-level course in optimization – it broadly covers linear and nonlinear programming effectively balancing modeling, algorithmic theory, computation, implementation, illuminating historical facts, and numerous interesting examples and exercises. Due to the clarity of the exposition, this book also serves as a valuable reference for self-study.' Professor Ilan Adler, IEOR Department, UC Berkeley 'A carefully crafted introduction to the main elements and applications of mathematical optimization. This volume presents the essential concepts of linear and nonlinear programming in an accessible format filled with anecdotes, examples, and exercises that bring the topic to life. The authors plumb their decades of experience in optimization to provide an enriching layer of historical context. Suitable for advanced undergraduates and masters students in management science, operations research, and related fields.'Michael P. Friedlander, IBM Professor of Computer Science, Professor of Mathematics, University of British Columbia

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. LP Models and Applications.- Chapter 2. Linear Equations and Inequalities.- Chapter 3. The Simplex Algorithm.- Chapter 4. The Simplex Algorithm Continued.- Chapter 5. Duality and the Dual Simplex Algorithm.- Chapter 6. Postoptimality Analysis.- Chapter 7. Some Computational Considerations.- Chapter 8. NLP Models and Applications.- Chapter 9. Unconstrained Optimization.- Chapter 10. Descent Methods.- Chapter 11. Optimality Conditions.- Chapter 12. Problems with Linear Constraints.- Chapter 13. Problems with Nonlinear Constraints.- Chapter 14. Interior-Point Methods.
David G. Luenberger, Stanford University, Stanford, CA, USA; Yinyu Ye, Stanford University, Stanford, CA, USA

Linear and Nonlinear Programming

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 546 p. 90 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-18841-6
       9783319188416
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Operations Research/Decision Theory / Operations Research, Management Science
This new edition covers the central concepts of practical optimization techniques, with an emphasis on methods that are both state-of-the-art and popular. One major insight is the connection between the purely analytical character of an optimization problem and the behavior of algorithms used to solve a problem. This was a major theme of the first edition of this book and the fourth edition expands and further illustrates this relationship. As in the earlier editions, the material in this fourth edition is organized into three separate parts. Part I is a self-contained introduction to linear programming. The presentation in this part is fairly conventional, covering the main elements of the underlying theory of linear programming, many of the most effective numerical algorithms, and many of its important special applications. Part II, which is independent of Part I, covers the theory of unconstrained optimization, including both derivations of the appropriate optimality conditions and an introduction to basic algorithms. This part of the book explores the general properties of algorithms and defines various notions of convergence. Part III extends the concepts developed in the second part to constrained optimization problems. Except for a few isolated sections, this part is also independent of Part I. It is possible to go directly into Parts II and III omitting Part I, and, in fact, the book has been used in this way in many universities.New to this edition is a chapter devoted to Conic Linear Programming, a powerful generalization of Linear Programming. Indeed, many conic structures are possible and useful in a variety of applications. It must be recognized, however, that conic linear programming is an advanced topic, requiring special study. Another important topic is an accelerated steepest descent method that exhibits superior convergence properties, and for this reason, has become quite popular. The proof of the convergence property for both standard and accelerated steepest descent methods are presented in Chapter 8. As in previous editions, end-of-chapter exercises appear for all chapters.From the reviews of the Third Edition:“… this very well-written book is a classic textbook in Optimization. It should be present in the bookcase of each student, researcher, and specialist from the host of disciplines from which practical optimization applications are drawn.” (Jean-Jacques Strodiot, Zentralblatt MATH, Vol. 1207, 2011)

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Part I Linear Programming.- Basic Properties of Linear Programs.- The Simplex Method.- Duality and Complementarity.- Interior-Point Methods.- Conic Linear Programming.- Part II Unconstrained Problems.- Basic Properties of Solutions and Algorithms.- Basic Descent Methods.- Conjugate Direction Methods.- Quasi-Newton Methods.- Part III Constrained Minimization.- Constrained Minimization Conditions.- Primal Methods.- Penalty and Barrier Methods.- Duality and Dual Methods.- Primal-Dual Methods.- Appendix A: Mathematical Review.- Appendix B: Convex Sets.- Appendix C: Gaussian Elimination.- Appendix D: Basic Network Concepts.
David G. Luenberger, Stanford University, Stanford, CA, USA; Yinyu Ye, Stanford University, Stanford, CA, USA

Linear and Nonlinear Programming

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 546 p. 90 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-37439-0
       9783319374390
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Operations Research/Decision Theory / Operations Research, Management Science
This new edition covers the central concepts of practical optimization techniques, with an emphasis on methods that are both state-of-the-art and popular. One major insight is the connection between the purely analytical character of an optimization problem and the behavior of algorithms used to solve a problem. This was a major theme of the first edition of this book and the fourth edition expands and further illustrates this relationship. As in the earlier editions, the material in this fourth edition is organized into three separate parts. Part I is a self-contained introduction to linear programming. The presentation in this part is fairly conventional, covering the main elements of the underlying theory of linear programming, many of the most effective numerical algorithms, and many of its important special applications. Part II, which is independent of Part I, covers the theory of unconstrained optimization, including both derivations of the appropriate optimality conditions and an introduction to basic algorithms. This part of the book explores the general properties of algorithms and defines various notions of convergence. Part III extends the concepts developed in the second part to constrained optimization problems. Except for a few isolated sections, this part is also independent of Part I. It is possible to go directly into Parts II and III omitting Part I, and, in fact, the book has been used in this way in many universities.New to this edition is a chapter devoted to Conic Linear Programming, a powerful generalization of Linear Programming. Indeed, many conic structures are possible and useful in a variety of applications. It must be recognized, however, that conic linear programming is an advanced topic, requiring special study. Another important topic is an accelerated steepest descent method that exhibits superior convergence properties, and for this reason, has become quite popular. The proof of the convergence property for both standard and accelerated steepest descent methods are presented in Chapter 8. As in previous editions, end-of-chapter exercises appear for all chapters.From the reviews of the Third Edition:“… this very well-written book is a classic textbook in Optimization. It should be present in the bookcase of each student, researcher, and specialist from the host of disciplines from which practical optimization applications are drawn.” (Jean-Jacques Strodiot, Zentralblatt MATH, Vol. 1207, 2011)

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Part I Linear Programming.- Basic Properties of Linear Programs.- The Simplex Method.- Duality and Complementarity.- Interior-Point Methods.- Conic Linear Programming.- Part II Unconstrained Problems.- Basic Properties of Solutions and Algorithms.- Basic Descent Methods.- Conjugate Direction Methods.- Quasi-Newton Methods.- Part III Constrained Minimization.- Constrained Minimization Conditions.- Primal Methods.- Penalty and Barrier Methods.- Duality and Dual Methods.- Primal-Dual Methods.- Appendix A: Mathematical Review.- Appendix B: Convex Sets.- Appendix C: Gaussian Elimination.- Appendix D: Basic Network Concepts.
Kai Jacob, SAP SE, Walldorf, Germany; Dierk Schindler, NetApp B.V., Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands; Roger Strathausen, Dr. Strathausen Consultancy, Berlin, Germany

Liquid Legal

Transforming Legal into a Business Savvy, Information Enabled and Performance Driven Industry
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXXII, 454 p. 127 illus., 90 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-45867-0
       9783319458670
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership / Commercial Law
This book compels the legal profession to question its current identity and to aspire to become a strategic partner for corporate executives, clients and stakeholders, transforming legal into a function that creates incremental value. It provides a uniquely broad range of forward-looking perspectives from several different key-players in the legal industry: in-house legal, law firms, LPO’s, legal tech, HR, associations and academia. This publication is a platform for leading legal professionals that offers a new perspective on the accelerating transformation in legal. Combining expert contributions with editorial insights, it argues that the new legal function will shift from a paradigm of security to one of opportunity; that future corporate lawyers will no longer primarily be negotiators, litigators and administrators, but that instead they will be coaches, arbiters and intrapreneurs; that legal knowledge and data-based services will become a commodity; and that analytics and measurement will be key drivers of the future of the profession. A must-read for all legal professionals, this book sets the course for revitalizing the profession.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: 'Run Legal as a Business!'.- Masters of Ambiguity - How Legal Can Lead the Business.- Globalization and the Changing Role of General Counsel: Current Trends and Future Scenarios.- Legal Advisor - Service Provider - Business Partner: Shifting the Mindset of Corporate Lawyers.- Shifting Client Expectations of Law Firms: Morphing Law Firms into Managed Services Providers.- Legal Process Outsourcing: Redefining the Legal Services Delivery Model.- LegalTech on the Rise: Technology Changes Legal Work Behaviours, But Does Not Replace Its Profession.- Key Performance Indicators (KPIs): Run Legal with Business Metrics.- A Rose by Any Other Name Would Smell as Sweet: The New Legal Pro-Occupations in the Contruction Sector.- The Legal Entrepreneur: When Do Corporate Lawyers Act Entrepreneurially?.- Organizations 4.0: Using Legal Competency for Building Fluid and Innovation-driven Structures.- Change Management for Lawyers: What Legal Management Can Learn from Business Management.- The Legal Department: From Business Enabler to Business Creator.- Legal Tech Will Radically Change the Way SMEs Handle Legal: How SMEs Can Run Legal as Effectively and Professionally as Large Corporations.- The Value of Everything!: How to Measure and Deliver Legal Value?.- The Value Add of Legal Department in Disputes: Making a Business Case Rather than Providing Pure Legal Advise.- The Future of In-house Legal Department and Their Impact on the Legal Market: Four Theses for General Counsels, and One for Law Firms.- Procurement of Legal Services: How Customers Professionally Procure Legal Services Today.- CLOC - Joining Forces to Drive Transformation in Legal.- Legal Information Management (LIM) Strategy: How to Transform a Legal Department.- Technology is Changing the Way Legal Works: A Look at How Technology Is Driving Better Business Practices in Legal.- Look to the Moon: Managing and Monitoring the Legal Function.- Building a Legal Department in a Metrics-Driven World: A Guide to Finding the Best Candidates for the Legal Departments of the Future.- Business-Friendly Contracting: How Simplification and Visualization Can Help Bring It to Practice.- Running the Legal Department With Business Discipline: Applying Business Best Practices to the Corporate Legal Function.- Liquid Legal Manifesto.
Kim Toft Hansen, Institute of Culture and Global Studies Aalborg University, Aalborg; Anne Marit Waade, School of Communication and Culture, Aarhus University , Aarhus

Locating Nordic Noir

From Beck to The Bridge
Springer International Publishing
Seiten IX, 313 p. 8 illus., 6 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-59814-7
       9783319598147
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Film and Television Studies / European Culture
This book is a comprehensive study of Nordic Noir television drama from the 1990’s until today. The authors introduce the history of contemporary Nordic Noir from the perspective of place, production and location studies. The chapters include readings of well-known television crime dramas such as Beck, The Killing, Trapped and The Bridge as well as a range of other important Nordic Noir cases. The authors position the development of Nordic Noir in the global market for popular television drama and place the international attention towards Nordic crime dramas within regional development of drama production in Sweden, Denmark, Norway and Iceland. Consequently, Nordic Noir is read as both a transnational financial and creative phenomenon and as a local possibility for community building. Offering a comprehensible, scholarly and methodologically original approach to the popularity of Nordic television crime dramas, this volume is aimed at readers with an interest in crime drama as well as scholars and students of television drama.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: Where is Nordic Noir?.- 2. Part I: Local colour and location studies - Local colour and places on screen.- 3. Location studies: a topography of Nordic noir.- 4. Four perspectives on the Nordic region.- 5. Part II: From bestsellers to blockbusters - Stieg Larsson and Scandinavian crime literature as a stepping stone.- 6. Beck and character adaptations.- 7. Funding models and increasing transnationalism.- 8. Part III: Written for the Danish screen  - The Killing and DR’s Danish model.- 9. Norskov and Danish commercial public service drama.- 10. The Team, Danish transnationalism and the local colour of Europe.- 11. Part IV: Written for the Nordic screen - Blue Eyes and the rise of the Swedish original.- 12. Trapped and original Noir from Iceland and Norway.- 13. The Bridge, transnational co-productions and screen tourism.- 14. Con
clusion: Nordic Noir beyond the Nordic. 
Francis Srun, Hong Kong

Luxury Selling

Lessons from the world of luxury in selling high quality goods and services to high value clients
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXX, 226 p. 10 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-45524-2
       9783319455242
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sales/Distribution / Market Research/Competitive Intelligence
Srun shows how the psychology of luxury brands truly plays into high value customer motivations and unlocks the potential to understand their decision processes which are unlike that of any other customer.Selling to very wealthy, demanding customers – whether you’re selling luxury products or high value bespoke professional services – is a very different process to selling anything else to anyone else. Francis Srun has twenty years experience in the luxury industry, based in France, Switzerland, China and Hong Kong, most recently with Maison Boucheron. The first step is learning how to physically embody “Luxury”. You need to look, speak, and move “Luxury”. The true luxury attitude is not submissive nor is it hauteur – it is gentle, generous and simply, truly human. Success comes from not just being professional but from building a genuinely luxury relationship with clients. To do that you need to truly understand your client. High value customers today are younger, international in outlook and residence, and increasingly from Asia. Their buying motivation is always about self-affirmation and pleasure and never about money. The luxury customer’s decision process is unlike that of other customers. While emotion is important when selling anything to anyone – with luxury selling it is paramount. Srun shows how the psychology of Brand, Product, Place, Price and Time all play a role in customer’s motivations. Finally this book guides you step by step with concrete examples and useful techniques through the seven steps of luxury selling: be prepared to sell, welcome appropriately, listen genuinely, propose and present with style, meet objections with persuasion rather than refutation, conclude sharply and finally gain loyalty for a long term relationship.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1.-Luxury Advisors Chapter2.- Luxury Customers: Understand Luxury Chapter 3.- Luxury Selling Chapter 4.- The 7 Steps of Active Selling.
Farrokh K. Langdana, Rutgers Univ-Newark and New Brunswick, Flemington, NJ, USA

Macroeconomic Policy

Demystifying Monetary and Fiscal Policy
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXI, 318 p. 77 illus., 69 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-32852-2
       9783319328522
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Political Economy/Economic Policy / Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics
This book is an applications-oriented text designed for individuals who desire a hands-on approach to analyzing the effects of fiscal and monetary policies. Significantly updated to provide an understanding of the post-financial crisis economy, the third edition covers the subprime crisis in detail, discussing monetary policies enacted in its wake, such as quantitative easing, tapering, carry trades, CMOs, and monetization. Even more globally oriented than previous editions, this volume links the Great Recession and US Monetary Policy to global hot capital flows and currency pegs. This edition also revisits the Eurozone in significant detail; discussing its history, its macroeconomic design challenges, and its present imperiled state, in the context of global macropolicy. Finally, this volume analyzes the 'China syndrome' and explores the effects of slower trend growth in China on the rest of the world. India, with its different—almost supply-side—approach to macropolicy is also studied in detail. The third edition contains several brand-new cases and media articles that are carefully positioned to relate explicitly to theory, and to look ahead to and preempt global macro situations and polices in the years to come. MBA students and Executive MBA students who appreciate the importance of monetary and fiscal analysis will find this text to be right on target. Financial analysts and individual investors who need to strip away economic myths and jargon and systematically examine and understand the effects of macro policies on variables such as inflation, output, employment and interest rates, will also find the book extremely useful.?

Inhaltsangaben

?1. Introduction and Overview: We are not all Keynesians now.- 2. National Income Accounts.- 3. Budget Deficits, Trade Deficits and Global Capital Flows: The National Savings Identity in its Present Form.- 4. Aggregate Demand: Setting the Stage for Demand-Side Stabilization.- 5. Demand-Side Stabilization: Asset Price Bubbles, Overheating, Hard Landing, and Everything in Between.- 6. The Sub-Prime Crisis and its Global Implications.- 7.Long-Term Interest Rates, the Yield Curve, and Hyperinflation: Why “Bonds Know Best”.- 8. ISLM: The Engine Room.- 9. The Classical Model: The Bedrock of the Supply-Side Model.- 10. The Keynesian Model: Exploring the Keynesian History of the US, China and Southern Europe  .- 11. The Great Depression Re-Examined, and the Nature of Bubbles.- 12. The Supply-Side Model and its Implications for the Eurozone and for the “New” India.- 11. Central Banks,  Monetary Policy and Currency Pegs: The Eurozone, the US After 2008, the Impossible Trinity, and the “Broken Rhombus”.  ?
Volker Böhm, Bielefeld University , Bielefeld, Germany

Macroeconomic Theory

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVII, 423 p. 175 illus., 76 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-60148-9
       9783319601489
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics / Game Theory, Economics, Social and Behav. Sciences
This textbook offers a unique approach to macroeconomic theory built on microeconomic foundations of monetary macroeconomics within a unified framework of an intertemporal general equilibrium model extended to a sequential and dynamic analysis. It investigates the implications of expectations and of stationary fiscal policies on allocations, on the quantity of money, and on the dynamic evolution of the economy with and without noise. The text contrasts and compares the two main competing approaches in macroeconomics within the same intertemporal model of a closed monetary economy: the one postulating full price flexibility to guarantee equilibrium in all markets at all times under perfect foresight or rational expectations, versus the so called disequilibrium approach where trading occurs at non- market-clearing prices and wages when these adjust sluggishly from period to period in response to market disequilibrium signals.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Microeconomic Foundations.- Models of Monetary Equilibrium.- Dynamics of Monetary Equilibrium Models.- Fiscal Policy and the Dynamics of Monetary Equilibrium.- The Keynesian Model with Money.- Dynamics in Disequilibrium - Endogenous Business Cycles.- Disequilibrium Dynamics with Random Perturbations.- Dynamical Systems in Discrete Time.- Proofs and Further Results.
Daniel Bellingradt, Friedrich-Alexander-Universität (FAU), Erlangen-Nürnberg, Germany; Bernd-Christian Otto, Universität Erfurt, Erfurt, Germany

Magical Manuscripts in Early Modern Europe

The Clandestine Trade In Illegal Book Collections
Springer International Publishing
Seiten VII, 166 p. 4 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-59524-5
       9783319595245
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of the Book / Cultural History
This book presents the story of a unique collection of 140 manuscripts of ‘learned magic’ that was sold for a fantastic sum within the clandestine channels of the German book trade in the early eighteenth century. The book will interpret this collection from two angles – as an artefact of the early modern book market as well as the longue-durée tradition of Western learned magic –, thus taking a new stance towards scribal texts that are often regarded as eccentric, peripheral, or marginal. The study is structured by the apparent exceptionality, scarcity, and illegality of the collection, and provides chapters on clandestine activities in European book markets, questions of censorship regimes and efficiency, the use of manuscripts in an age of print, and the history of learned magic in early modern Europe. As the collection has survived till this day in Leipzig University Library, the book provides a critical edition of the 1710 selling catalogue, which includes a brief content analysis of all extant manuscripts. The study will be of interest to scholars and students from a variety of fields, such as early modern book history, the history of magic, cultural history, the sociology of religion, or the study of Western esotericism.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. Exceptionality.- 3.Scarcity.-  4.Illegality.- 5.Conclusions.-  6.Appendix A: The CATALOGUS RARIORUM MANUSCRIPTORUM.- 7. Appendix B: Images of the original catalogue (1710).-
Aoife M. McDermott, Cardiff University, Cardiff, UK; Martin Kitchener, Cardiff University, Cardiff, UK; Mark Exworthy, University of Birmingham, Birmingham, UK

Managing Improvement in Healthcare

Attaining, Sustaining and Spreading Quality
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXXVII, 327 p. 9 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-62234-7
       9783319622347
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
149,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Health Care Management / Sustainability Management
Reflecting the challenges and opportunities of achieving improvement in healthcare systems, the contributions of this innovative new text lend depth and nuance to an increasing area of academic debate.  Encompassing context, processes and agency, Managing Improvements in Healthcare addresses the task of attaining, embedding and sustaining improvement in the industry. The book begins by offering insight into the different valued aspects of quality, providing specific examples of national and organizational interventions in pursuit of improvement. The second part focuses on strategies for embedding good practice and ensuring the spread of high quality through knowledge mobilization, and the final part draws attention to the different groups of change agents involved in delivering, co-creating and benefitting from quality improvement. This inventive text will be insightful to those researchers interested in healthcare and organization, looking to transform theory into policy and practice.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I. Quality Improvement: Aims, Approaches and Context.- 1. Evolving Dimensions of Quality Care: Comparing Physician and Managerial Perspectives; Rebecca Amati, Robert H. Brook, Amer A. Kaissi and Annegret F. Hannawa.- 2. Multi-Level Pluralism: A Pragmatic Approach to Choosing Change and Improvement Methods; Liz Wiggins and Brian Marshall.- 3. Amendments to Reporting of QI Interventions: Insights from the Concept of Affordances; Emilie Berard, Jean-Louis Denis, Olivier Saulpic and Philippe Zarlowski.- 4. Emerging Hybridity: A Comparative Analysis of Regulatory Arrangements in the Four Countries of the United Kingdom; Joy Furnival, Ruth Boaden and Kieran Walshe.- 5. Contextual Factors Affecting Implementation of Team-based Primary Care: A Scoping Review; Dori A. Cross.- Part II. Embedding and Spreading Quality.- 7. Unlearning and Patient Safety; John G. Richmond.- 8. Checklist as Hub: How Medical Checklists Connect Professional Routines; Marlot Kuiper.- 9. Sustaining Healthcare Service Improvements without Collective Dialogue and Participation: A Route to Partial Failure?; Anne McBride and Miguel Martinez-Lucio.- 10. Disseminating from the Centre to the Frontline: The Diffusion and Local Ownership of a National Health Policy through the Use of Icons; David Greenfield, Margaret Banks, Anne Hogden, and Jeffrey Braithwaite.- 11. Processes and Responsibilities for Knowledge Transfer and Mobilization in Health Services Organizations in Wales; Emma Barnes, Alison Bullock and Wendy Warren.- 12. Accelerating Research Translation in Healthcare: The Australian Approach; Helen Dickinson and Jean Ledger.- Part III. Agents, Co-Producers and Recipients of Quality Care.- 13. Framing a Movement for Improvement: Hospital Managers' Use of Social Movement Ideas in the Implementation of a Patient Safety Framework; Amanda Crompton and Justin Waring.- 14. Institutional Work and Innovation in the NHS: The Role of Creating and Disrupting; Kath Checkland, Stephen Parkin, Simon Bailey and Damian Hodgson.- 15. Attaining Improvement without Sustaining It? The Evolution of Facilitation in a Healthcare Knowledge Mobilization Initiative; Roman Kislov, John Humphreys and Gill Harvey.- 16. Stakeholders' Involvement and Service Users' Acceptance in the Implementation of a New Practice Guideline; Comfort Adeosun, Lorna McKee and Hilary Homans.- 17. How Does an Accreditation Program in Residential Aged Care Inform the Way Residents Manage their Healthcare and Lifestyle?; Anne Hogden, David Greenfield, Mark Brandon, Deborah Debono, Virginia Mumford, Johanna Westbrook, and Jeffrey Braithwaite.
Mike Rosenberg, IESE Business School, Barcelona, Spain; Philip H. Seager, IESE Business School, Bareclona, Spain

Managing Media Businesses

A Game Plan to Navigate Disruption and Uncertainty
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVII, 223 p. 30 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-52020-9
       9783319520209
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
40,65 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership / Media Management
This book is a practical guide to every aspect of managing media businesses. Written by a team of experts and illustrated with interviews from leading industry players, it addresses the unprecedented change and uncertainty facing the industry.Do newspapers, magazines or books have a future? Will terrestrial television or cable services exist as meaningful players in five years’ time? Is there a way to make multiple consumption platforms work together in a way that extracts the revenue needed to support the creation and development of quality content? While more and more content is being published, fewer and fewer businesses are finding a way to do so profitably and sustainably.Your answers to these questions that vex your media or entertainment business will depend on your frame – a frame based on experience gained in days that were less uncertain, less fluid and much, much simpler. Those frames need to be broken if you are to survive in times of such rapid change. This book is based on IESE’s Advanced Management Program in Media & Entertainment, which IESE Business School has been running in New York and Los Angeles since 2011. It combines contributions from leading professors and practitioners, as well as real-life case studies, to establish a base upon which you can start to build the set of managerial tools that you will need to manage fast-changing media and entertainment businesses.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1 The Big Picture: Four Trends That Change Everything.- Chapter2 Strategy.- Chapter3 “Show Me The Money!” Getting Inside The Bottom Line.- Chapter4 Marketing In A New Media World.- Chapter5 Decisive Leadership.- Chapter6 Decision Analysis.- Chapter7 Operations Management.- Chapter8 The Digital Economy.- Chapter9 Tips For Managing Creative People.- Chapter10 Corporate & Entrepreneurial Finance.- Chapter11 Future Scenario Planning.
Robert Z. Aliber, USA, , USA; Charles P. Kindleberger, USA, , USA

Manias, Panics, and Crashes

A History of Financial Crises, Seventh Edition
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten IX, 426 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-52575-8
       9781137525758
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
28,88 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics / Financial History
This seventh edition of an investment classic has been thoroughly revised and expanded following the latest crises to hit international markets. Renowned economist Robert Z. Aliber introduces the concept that global financial crises in recent years are not independent events, but symptomatic of an inherent instability in the international system.

Inhaltsangaben

Valeriy Zakamulin, University of Agder , Kristiansand, Norway

Market Timing with Moving Averages

The Anatomy and Performance of Trading Rules
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXXII, 278 p. 64 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-60969-0
       9783319609690
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Financial Engineering / Investments and Securities
This book provides a comprehensive guide to market timing using moving averages. Part I explores the foundations of market timing rules, presenting a methodology for examining how the value of a trading indicator is computed. Using this methodology the author then applies the computation of trading indicators to a variety of market timing rules to analyse the commonalities and differences between the rules. Part II goes on to present a comprehensive analysis of the empirical performance of trading rules based on moving averages.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1 Introduction.- Chapter2 Moving Averages.- Chapter3 Trading Rules.- Chapter4 Anatomy of Trading Rules.- Chapter5 Case Study: Historical Performance of Trading Rules on Other.- Chapter6 Summary and Conclusions.
Robert Sawyer, East Tennessee State University, Johnson City, TN, USA

Marlowe and Shakespeare

The Critical Rivalry
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XI, 382 p. 4 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-349-95226-7
       9781349952267
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
123,04 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Early Modern/Renaissance Literature / Literary History
Instead of asserting any alleged rivalry between Marlowe and Shakespeare, Sawyer examines the literary reception of the two when the writers are placed in tandem during critical discourse or artistic production. Focusing on specific examples from the last 400 years, the study begins with Robert Greene’s comments in 1592 and ends with the post-9/11 and 7/7 era.The study not only looks at literary critics and their assessments, but also at playwrights such as Aphra Behn, novelists such as Anthony Burgess, and late twentieth-century movie and theatre directors. The work concludes by showing how the most recent outbreak of Marlowe as Shakespeare’s ghostwriter accelerates due to a climate of conspiracy, including “belief echoes,” which presently permeate our cultural and critical discourse.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1 Introduction: 'The Rivals of My Watch'.- Chapter 2: 'Locating the Earliest 'Critics''.- Chapter 3: The Seventeenth Century: 'Collaboration, Co-Authorship and the Death of the Author(s)'.- Chapter 4: The Long Eighteenth Century: 'Limbs Torn Asunder, Borrowing the Bones, Identifying the Corpus'.- Chapter 5: The Nineteenth Century: 'The Space(s) of the Critical Rivalry in London'.- Chapter 6: The Twentieth Century: 'Formalization, Polarization, and Fictionalization'.- Chapter 7: The Twenty-First Century: 'Trauma, Drama, and Conspiracy'.-
Igor V. Evstigneev, University of Manchester, Manchester, UK; Thorsten Hens, University of Manchester, Manchester, UK; Klaus Reiner Schenk-Hoppé, University of Manchester, Manchester, UK

Mathematical Financial Economics

A Basic Introduction
Springer International Publishing
Seiten IX, 224 p. 21 illus., 3 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-16570-7
       9783319165707
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
80,24 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics / Quantitative Finance
This textbook is an elementary introduction to the key topics in mathematical finance and financial economics - two realms of ideas that substantially overlap but are often treated separately from each other. Our goal is to present the highlights in the field, with the emphasis on the financial and economic content of the models, concepts and results. The book provides a novel, unified treatment of the subject by deriving each topic from common fundamental principles and showing the interrelations between the key themes. Although the presentation is fully rigorous, with some rare and clearly marked exceptions, the book restricts itself to the use of only elementary mathematical concepts and techniques. No advanced mathematics (such as stochastic calculus) is used.

Inhaltsangaben

?Mean-Variance Portfolio Analysis: Portfolio Selection: Introductory Comments.- Mean-Variance Portfolio Analysis: The Markowitz Model.- Solution to the Markowitz Optimization Problem.- Properties of Efficient Portfolios.- The Markowitz Model with a Risk-Free Asset.- Efficient Portfolios in a Market with a Risk-Free Asset.- Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM).- CAPM Continued.- Factor Models and the Ross-Huberman APT.- Problems and Exercises I.- Derivative Securities Pricing: Dynamic Securities Market Model.- Risk-Neutral Pricing.- The Cox-Ross-Rubinstein Binomial Model.- American Derivative Securities.- From Binomial Model to Black-Scholes Formula.- Problems and Exercises II.- Growth and Equilibrium: Capital Growth Theory: Continued.- General Equilibrium Analysis of Financial Markets.- Behavioral Equilibrium and Evolutionary Dynamics.- Problems and Exercises III.- Mathematical Appendices: Facts from Linear Algebra.- Convexity and Optimization.- Sources.
Igor V. Evstigneev, University of Manchester, Manchester, UK; Thorsten Hens, University of Manchester, Manchester, UK; Klaus Reiner Schenk-Hoppé, University of Manchester, Manchester, UK

Mathematical Financial Economics

A Basic Introduction
Springer International Publishing
Seiten IX, 224 p. 21 illus., 3 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-36249-6
       9783319362496
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
80,24 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics / Quantitative Finance
This textbook is an elementary introduction to the key topics in mathematical finance and financial economics - two realms of ideas that substantially overlap but are often treated separately from each other. Our goal is to present the highlights in the field, with the emphasis on the financial and economic content of the models, concepts and results. The book provides a novel, unified treatment of the subject by deriving each topic from common fundamental principles and showing the interrelations between the key themes. Although the presentation is fully rigorous, with some rare and clearly marked exceptions, the book restricts itself to the use of only elementary mathematical concepts and techniques. No advanced mathematics (such as stochastic calculus) is used.

Inhaltsangaben

?Mean-Variance Portfolio Analysis: Portfolio Selection: Introductory Comments.- Mean-Variance Portfolio Analysis: The Markowitz Model.- Solution to the Markowitz Optimization Problem.- Properties of Efficient Portfolios.- The Markowitz Model with a Risk-Free Asset.- Efficient Portfolios in a Market with a Risk-Free Asset.- Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM).- CAPM Continued.- Factor Models and the Ross-Huberman APT.- Problems and Exercises I.- Derivative Securities Pricing: Dynamic Securities Market Model.- Risk-Neutral Pricing.- The Cox-Ross-Rubinstein Binomial Model.- American Derivative Securities.- From Binomial Model to Black-Scholes Formula.- Problems and Exercises II.- Growth and Equilibrium: Capital Growth Theory: Continued.- General Equilibrium Analysis of Financial Markets.- Behavioral Equilibrium and Evolutionary Dynamics.- Problems and Exercises III.- Mathematical Appendices: Facts from Linear Algebra.- Convexity and Optimization.- Sources.
Thilo Rensmann, University of Augsburg, Augsburg, Germany

Mega-Regional Trade Agreements

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 376 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-56662-7
       9783319566627
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
149,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Economic Law, Trade Law / International Economics
This book provides an in-depth analysis of 'Mega-Regionals', the new generation of trans-regional free-trade agreements (FTAs) currently under negotiation, and their effect on the future of international economic law. The main focus centres on the EU-US Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership (TTIP), the Trans-Pacific Partnership (TPP) and the EU-Canada Comprehensive Economic and Trade Agreement (CETA), but the findings are also applicable to similar agreements under negotiation, such as the Regional Comprehensive Economic Partnership (RCEP).The specific features of Mega-Regional Trade Agreements raise a number of issues with respect to their potential effect on the current system of international trade and investment law. These include the consequences of Mega-Regionals for the most-favoured-nation (MFN) principle, their relation to the multilateral system of the World Trade Organization (WTO), their democratic legitimacy and their interaction with existing bilateral investment treaties (BITs).The book is intended for academics and practitioners working in the field of international economic law.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I Setting the Scene: Peter-Tobias Stoll, Mega Regionals: Challenges, Opportunities and Research Questions.- Part II Strategic and Structural Issues: Edouard Bourcieu, The Strategic Dimension of the Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership.- Ernst-Ulrich Petersmann, Democratic Legitimacy of the CETA and TTIP Agreements?.- Joost Pauwelyn, Not As Preferential As You May Think: How Mega-Regionals Can Benefit Third Countries.- Armand de Mestral and Lukas Vanhonnaeker, Exception Clauses in Mega-Regionals (International Investment Protection and Trade Agreements).- Part III Liberalisation and Protection of Foreign Investment: Stephan W. Schill and Heather L. Bray, The Brave New (American) World of International Investment Law: Substantive Investment Protection Standards in Mega-Regionals.- Karsten Nowrot, Interactions between Investment Chapters in Mega-Regionals and Bilateral Investment Treaties.- Part IV Innovation and International Property Rights: Thomas Cottier, Dannie Jost and Michelle Schupp, The Prospects of TRIPS-plus Protection in Future Mega-Regionals.- Carlos M. Correa, Intellectual Property in the Trans-Pacific Partnership: Increasing the Barriers for the Access to Affordable Medicines.- Bryan Mercurio, Safeguarding Public Welfare? Intellectual Property Rights, Health and the Evolution of Treaty Drafting in international Investment Agreements.- Part V Energy Governance and the Green Economy: Christopher Frey, The Role of Mega-Regionals in the Decarbonization of the Economy.- Markus Krajewski, Liberalizing Trade in Energy Services and Domestic Regulation: New Approaches in Mega-Regionals?.- Part VI Emerging Trends in Other Regulatory Areas: Bernard Hoekman, Trade Agreements and International Cooperation on Public Procurement Regulation.- Simon Lester and Inu Manak, Addressing Regulatory Trade Barriers in Mega-Regional Trade Agreements.
Jessica Gildersleeve, University of Southern Queensland, Toowoomba, QLD, Australia; Richard Gehrmann, University of Southern Queensland, Toowoomba, QLD, Australia

Memory and the Wars on Terror

Australian and British Perspectives
Springer International Publishing
Seiten X, 283 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-56975-8
       9783319569758
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Australasian Culture / Memory Studies
This edited collection aims to respond to dominant perspectives on twenty-first-century war by exploring how the events of 9/11 and the subsequent Wars on Terror are represented and remembered outside of the US framework. Existing critical coverage ignores the meaning of these events for people, nations and cultures apparently peripheral to them but which have - as shown in this collection - been extraordinarily affected by the social, political and cultural changes these wars have wrought. Adopting a literary and cultural history approach, the book asks how these events resonate and continue to show effects in the rest of the world, with a particular focus on Australia and Britain. It argues that such reflections on the impact of the Wars on Terror help us to understand what global conflict means in a contemporary context, as well as what its representative motifs might tell us about how nations like Australia and Britain perceive and construct their remembered identities on the world stage in the twenty-first century. In its close examination of films, novels, memoir, visual artworks, media, and minority communities in the years since 2001, this collection looks at the global impacts of these events, and the ways they have shaped, and continue to shape, Britain and Australia’s relation to the rest of the world.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Memory and the Wars on Terror; Jessica Gildersleeve and Richard Gehrmann.- 2. False Memories and Professional Culture: The Australian Defence Force, the Government and the Media at War in Afghanistan; Kevin Foster.- 3. The Limitations of Memory and the Language of the War on Terror in Australia, 2001-2003; Amanda Laugesen.- 4. Enemies of the State(s): Cultural Memory, Cinema, and the Iraq War; Richard Gehrmann.- 5. Remembering the Warriors: Cultural Memory, the Female Hero and the ‘Logistics of Perception’ in Zero Dark Thirty; Christa van Raalte.- 6. Remembering the First World War after 9/11: Pat Barker’s Life Class and Toby’s Room; Jessica Gildersleeve.- 7. Novel Wars: David Malouf and the Invention of the Iliad; Kezia Whiting.- 8. In Extremis: Apocalyptic Imaginings in Janette Turner Hospital’s post-9/11 Novels; Belinda McKay.- 9. ‘Shock and Awe’: The Memory of Trauma in post-9/11 Artworks; 
Denise N. Rall.- 10. Bearing Witness to Injustice: Latin America, Refugees and Memorialisation in Australia; Robert Mason.- 11. A Sense of Embattlement: Australian Jewish Communal Leadership’s Response to 9/11; Dashiel Lawrence.- 12. Violent Femmes: Collective Memory after 9/11 and Women on the Front Line of Journalism; Rebecca Te’o.- 13. Death and the Maiden: Memorialisation, Scandal, and the Gendered Mediation of Australian Soldiers; Jessica Carniel.- 14. Reflecting on the Wars on Terror;Frank Bongiorno.
Brian R. Pellar, Boston, MA

Moby-Dick and Melville’s Anti-Slavery Allegory

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVII, 234 p. 4 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-52266-1
       9783319522661
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Nineteenth-Century Literature / North American Literature
This book unfurls and examines the anti-slavery allegory at the subtextual core of Herman Melville’s famed novel, Moby-Dick. Brian Pellar points to symbols and allusions in the novel such as the albinism of the famed whale, the “Ship of State” motif, Calhoun’s “cords,” the equator, Jonah, Narcissus, St. Paul, and Thomas Hobbe’s Leviathan. The work contextualizes these devices within a historical discussion of the Compromise of 1850 and subsequently strengthened Fugitive Slave Laws. Drawing on a rich variety of sources such as unpublished papers, letters, reviews, and family memorabilia, the chapters discuss the significance of these laws within Melville’s own life. After clarifying the hidden allegory interconnecting black slaves and black whales, this book carefully sheds the layers of a hidden meaning that will be too convincing to ignore for future readings: Moby-Dick is ultimately a novel that is intimately connected with questions of race, slavery, and the state.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- 2 Melville’s Motivations.- 3 The Ship of State.- 4 Hemp and Calhoun’s “Cords”.- 5 Man as Whale.- 6. “This Afric Temple of the Whale”.- 7 The Equator.-8 “Who Ain’t a Slave?”.- 9 “The Log and the Line”.- 10 St. Paul.- 11“I Do Not Baptise Thee in Name”.- Moby-Dick and “Black Blood”.- 10 Moby Dick in Service.- Epilogue.
W. Godley, Department of Economics, University of Ottawa, Canada; M. Lavoie, King's College, Cambridge University, Cambridge, United Kingdom

Monetary Economics

An Integrated Approach to Credit, Money, Income, Production and Wealth
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XLVI, 530 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-0-230-30184-9
       9780230301849
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
80,24 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
European History / Banking
This book challenges the mainstream paradigm, based on the inter-temporal optimisation of welfare by individual agents. It introduces a methodology for studying how institutions create flows of income, expenditure and production together with stocks of assets and liabilities, thereby determining how whole economies evolve through time.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction Balance Sheets, Transaction Matrices and The Monetary Circuit The Simplest Model with Government Money Government Money with Portfolio Choice Long-Term Bonds, Capital Gains and Liquidity Preference Introducing the Open Economy A Simple Model with Private Bank Money Time, Inventories, Profits and Pricing A Model with Private Bank Money, Inventories and Inflation A Model with both Inside and Outside Money A Growth Model Prototype Open Economy with Flexible Prices and Exchange Rates General Conclusion
Horst Tomann, Freie Universitaet (FU) Berlin, Berlin, Germany

Monetary Integration in Europe

The European Monetary Union after the Financial Crisis
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVII, 246 p. 22 illus., 10 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-59246-6
       9783319592466
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
European Integration / Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics
This book provides a fully revised and up-to-date analysis of the Economic and Monetary Union (EMU). With four entirely new chapters on responses to the financial crisis and the debate on reform options, Tomann assesses the EMU in comparison with other currency regimes through the adoption of a historical analysis. The book discusses in detail basic issues with currency and comprehensively analyzes monetary policy, highlighting problems of policy coordination. Tomann explores new monetary institutions that have been established in response to the financial crisis, before addressing long-term issues and reviewing reform proposals. By focusing on monetary issues the book offers a better understanding of macroeconomic policies and international policy cooperation, and, by extension, provides a thorough economic assessment of the EMU as an institution as it stands today.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: The History of Monetary Integration in Europe.- Part I: The Functioning of the Monetary Union. Chapter 2: Theory of Optimum Currency Areas.- Chapter 3: The Economic and Monetary Union: Institutions and Credibility.- Chapter 4: Conventional Monetary Policy of the ECB.- Chapter 5: Fiscal Policy Coordination and the Stability and Growth Pact.- Chapter 6: The EMU and the Wage Bargain.- Part II: Responses to the Financial Crisis. Chapter 7: The ECB’s Unconventional Monetary Policy.- Chapter 8: The Burden of Public Debt and the European Stability Mechanism.- Chapter 9: The Banking Union and Financial Stability.- Part III: Long-term Issues. Chapter 10: Real Convergence in a Monetary Union.- Chapter 11: The New European Monetary System.- Chapter 12: The Debate on Reform Options.
Benjamin G. Voyer, ESCP Europe, London, UK; Tor Tarantola, University of Cambridge, Cambridge, UK

Moral Psychology

A Multidisciplinary Guide
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XI, 167 p. 6 illus., 5 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-61847-0
       9783319618470
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Personality and Social Psychology / Ethics
This fascinating and timely volume explores current thinking on vital topics in moral psychology, spanning the diverse disciplines that contribute to the field. Academics from cognitive science, evolutionary biology, anthropology, philosophy, and political science address ongoing and emerging questions aimed at understanding the thought processes and behaviors that underlie our moral codes—and our transgressions. Cross-cutting themes speak to individual, interpersonal, and collective morality in such areas as the development of ethical behavior, responses to violations of rules, moral judgments in the larger discourse, and universal versus specific norms. This wide-angle perspective also highlights the implications of moral psychology research for policy and justice, with cogent viewpoints from: ·         Philosophy: empiricism and normative questions, moral relativism. ·         Evolutionary biology: theories of how altruism and moral behavior evolved. ·         Anthropology: common moral values seen in ethnographies from different countries. ·         Cognitive and neural sciences: computational models of moral systems and decision-making. ·         Political science: politics, governance, and moral values in the public sphere. ·         Advice on moral psychology research—and thoughts about its future—from prominent scholars.                                                                                    With the goal of providing a truly multidisciplinary forum for moral psychology, this volume is sure to spark conversations across disciplines and advance the field as a whole. Sampling the breadth and depth of an equally expansive and transformative field, Moral Psychology: A Multidisciplinary Guide will find an engaged audience among psychologists, philosophers, evolutionary biologists, anthropologists, political scientists, neuroscientists, lawyers, and policymakers, as well as a more general audience interested in better understanding the complexity of moral psychology research.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Towards a Multidisciplinary Moral Psychology  By Benjamin G. Voyer and Tor Tarantola.- Chapter 2: Between Facts and Norms: Ethics and Empirical Moral Psychology By Hanno Sauer.- Chapter 3: An Evolutionarily Informed Study of Moral Psychology By Max M. Krasnow.- Chapter 4: Morality Psychology: An Anthropology Perspective by Paolo Heywood.- Chapter 5: Cognitive and Neural Sciences: Investigating the Moral System By Tor Tarantola.- Chapter 6: (Im)Morality in Political Discourse? The Effects of Moral Psychology in Politics By Nicholas Nicoletti & William Delehanty.- Chapter 7: An Open Letter to Our Students: Doing Interdisciplinary Moral Psychology by Edouard Machery & John Doris.- Chapter 8: Current Perspectives in Morality Psychology: Conversations with Frans de Waal Hanno Sauer, Paolo Heywood, Verena Wieser, Edouard Machery, and John Doris by Benjamin Voyer and Tor Tarantola.- Index.
Stacia C Miller, Midwestern State University, Wichita Falls, TX, USA; Suzanne F Lindt, Midwestern State University, Wichita Falls, TX, USA

Moving INTO the Classroom

A Handbook for Movement Integration in the Elementary Classroom
Springer Singapore
Seiten X, 283 p. 35 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-981-10-6423-4
       9789811064234
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
80,24 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Teaching and Teacher Education / Learning & Instruction
This textbook focuses on research in movement integration and the benefits of physical activity to the child’s physical, cognitive, emotional, and social development. It includes research on and suggestions for integrating movement into English-language arts, mathematics, science and social studies for lower and upper elementary students. Though the textbook is specifically aimed at elementary-level teachers, secondary teachers and pre-service teachers can modify the activities to fit their lessons as well.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1 Movement Integration: What is it and why should we do it?.- Chapter 2 Decreasing Perceived Barriers and Enhancing Facilitators of Movement Integration.- Chapter 3 Using this Textbook to Effectively Plan for Movement Integration.- Chapter 4 Integrating Movement in the Language Arts.- Chapter 5 Lessons Plans for Moving in the Language Arts Classroom.- Chapter 6 Movement in the Science Classroom.- Chapter 7 Lesson Plans for Moving in the Science Classroom.- Chapter 8 Movement in the Social Studies Classroom.- Chapter 9 Lesson Plans for Moving in the Social Studies.- Chapter 10 Movement in the Math Classroom.- Chapter 11 Lesson Plans for Movement in the Mathematics Classroom.
Gerald C. Liu, Princeton Theological Seminary, Princeton, NJ, USA

Music and the Generosity of God

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 140 p. 4 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-69492-4
       9783319694924
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Christian Theology / Phenomenology
What if sounds everywhere lavish divine generosity? Merging insights from Jean-Luc Marion with musical ingenuity from Pierre Boulez and John Cage’s 4’33”, Gerald C. Liu blends the phenomenological, theological, and musical to formulate a hypothesis that in all places, soundscapes instantiate divine giving without boundary. He aims to widen apprehension of holiness in the world, and privileges the ubiquity of sound as a limitless and easily accessible portal for discovering the inexhaustible magnitude of divine giving.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. A Silent Prayer.- 3. Theological Stocktaking with Pierre Boulez.- 4. The Epistle of 4’33”.- 5. The Ubiquity of Music and Sacramental Life.- 6. The Spook of Modern Technology and the Generosity of Music.- 7. Conclusion.
Richards Plavnieks, University of Central Florida, Orlando, FL, USA

Nazi Collaborators on Trial during the Cold War

Viktors Ar?js and the Latvian Auxiliary Security Police
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 297 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-57671-8
       9783319576718
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of World War II and the Holocaust / Russian, Soviet, and East European History
This book is a study of the legal reckoning with the crimes of the Latvian Auxiliary Security Police and its political dimensions in the Soviet Union, West and East Germany, and the United States in the context of the Cold War. Decades of work by prosecutors have established the facts of Latvian collaboration with the Nazis during the Holocaust. No group made a deeper mark in the annals of atrocity than the men of the so-called 'Arajs Kommando' and their leader, Viktors Ar?js, who killed tens of thousands of Jews on Latvian soil and participated in every aspect of the 'Holocaust by Bullets.' This study also has significance for coming to terms with Latvia’s encounter with Nazism – a process that was stunted and distorted by Latvia’s domination by the USSR until 1991. Examining the country’s most notorious killers, their fates on both sides of the Iron Curtain, and contemporary Latvians’ responses in different political contexts, this volume is a record of the earliest phases of this process, which must now continue and to which this book contributes.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: The Latvian Auxiliary Security Police and Cold War Justice.- 2. Wartime Latvia: Viktors Arajs, Hell's Plowman.- 3. The Union of Soviet Socialist Republics: Justice behind Propaganda.- 4. West Germany: The Pursuit, Prosecution and Punishment of 'The Chief' Himself.- 5. East Germany: An Elaborately Squandered Opportunity.- 6. The United States: Perjury, the Public, and the Passport.- 7. Conclusion: Justice for Some, the Truth for All of Us.
Mark Langan, Newcastle University, Newcastle upon Tyne, UK

Neo-Colonialism and the Poverty of 'Development' in Africa

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 253 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-58570-3
       9783319585703
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
African Politics / Comparative Politics
Langan reclaims neo-colonialism as an analytical force for making sense of the failure of ‘development’ strategies in many African states in an era of free market globalisation. Eschewing polemics and critically engaging the work of Ghana’s first President – Kwame Nkrumah – the book offers a rigorous assessment of the concept of neo-colonialism. It then demonstrates how neo-colonialism remains an impediment to genuine empirical sovereignty and poverty reduction in Africa today. It does this through examination of corporate interventions; Western aid-giving; the emergence of ‘new’ donors such as China; EU-Africa trade regimes; the securitisation of development; and the UN Sustainable Development Goals. Throughout the chapters, it becomes clear that the current challenges of African development cannot be solely pinned on so-called neo-patrimonial elites. Instead it becomes imperative to fully acknowledge, and interrogate, corporate and donor interventions which lock many poorer countries into neo-colonial patterns of trade and production. The book provides an original contribution to studies of African political economy, demonstrating the on-going relevance of the concept of neo-colonialism, and reclaiming it for scholarly analysis in a global era.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Neo-colonialism and Nkrumah: Recovering a Critical Concept.- Chapter 2: Neo-colonialism and Foreign Corporations in Africa.- Chapter 3: Neo-colonialism and Donor Interventions: Western Aid Mechanisms.- Chapter 4: Emerging Powers and Neo-colonialism in Africa.- Chapter 5: Trade and Neo-colonialism: The Case of Africa-EU ties.- Chapter 6: Security, development and Neo-colonialism.- Chapter 7: The UN Sustainable Development Goals and Neo-colonialism.- Chapter 8: Agency, Sovereignty and Neo-colonialism. 
Agustín Ibáñez, Institute of Cognitive and Translational Neuroscience (INCYT) INECO Foundation, Favaloro University, Buenos Aires, Argentina; Lucas Sedeño, Institute of Cognitive and Translational Neuroscience (INCYT) INECO Foundation, Favaloro Unive

Neuroscience and Social Science

The Missing Link
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVIII, 546 p. 38 illus., 25 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-68420-8
       9783319684208
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
149,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Cognitive Psychology / Sociology, general
This book seeks to build bridges between neuroscience and social science empirical researchers and theorists working around the world, integrating perspectives from both fields, separating real from spurious divides between them and delineating new challenges for future investigation. Since its inception in the early 2000s, multilevel social neuroscience has dramatically reshaped our understanding of the affective and cultural dimensions of neurocognition. Thanks to its explanatory pluralism, this field has moved beyond long standing dichotomies and reductionisms, offering a neurobiological perspective on topics classically monopolized by non-scientific traditions, such as consciousness, subjectivity, and intersubjectivity. Moreover, it has forged new paths for dialogue with disciplines which directly address societal dynamics, such as economics, law, education, public policy making and sociology. At the same time, beyond internal changes in the field of neuroscience, new problems emerge in the dialogue with other disciplines.Neuroscience and Social Science – The Missing Link puts together contributions by experts interested in the convergences, divergences, and controversies across these fields. The volume presents empirical studies on the interplay between relevant levels of inquiry (neural, psychological, social), chapters rooted in specific scholarly traditions (neuroscience, sociology, philosophy of science, public policy making), as well as proposals of new theoretical foundations to enhance the rapprochement in question.By putting neuroscientists and social scientists face to face, the book promotes new reflections on this much needed marriage while opening opportunities for social neuroscience to plunge from the laboratory into the core of social life. This transdisciplinary approach makes Neuroscience and Social Science – The Missing Link an important resource for students, teachers, and researchers interested in the social dimension of human mind working in different fields, such as social neuroscience, social sciences, cognitive science, psychology, behavioral science, linguistics, and philosophy.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Exploring the borderlands of neuroscience and social science.- Part I - Neuroscientific research on social cognition. Chapter 2: Valuing others: evidence from economics, developmental psychology, and neurobiology.- Chapter 3: Bias and control in social decision-making.- Chapter 4: Neurobiological approaches to interpersonal coordination: Achievements and pitfalls Chapter 5: The social neuroscience of attachment.- Chapter 6: Mindreading in altruists and psychopaths.- Chapter 7: From primary emotions to the spectrum of affect: An evolutionary neurosociology of the emotions.- Chapter 8: Moral cognition and moral emotions.- Chapter 9: On the cognitive (neuro)science of moral cognition: utilitarianism, deontology and the ‘fragmentation of value’.- Chapter 10: The social/neuro science: Bridging or polarizing culture and biology?.- Part II - Impact of social neuroscience in social spheres. Chapter 11: Dementia and social neuroscience: Historical and cultural perspectives.- Chapter 12: Clinical studies of social neuroscience: A lesion model approach.- Chapter 13: Psychotherapy and social neuroscience: forging links together.- Chapter 14: The brain in the public space: social neuroscience and the media.- Part III - Integration of social and neuroscientific insights. Chapter 15: Electrophysiological approaches in the study of the influence of childhood poverty on cognition.- Chapter 16: The cultural neuroscience of socioeconomic status.- Chapter 17: Social ties, health and wellbeing: A literature review and model.- Part IV - Philosophical contributions on theoretical, methodological, and ethical questions. Chapter 18: The self-domesticated animal and its study.- Chapter 19: How is our self related to its brain? Neurophilosophical concepts.- Chapter 20: Enaction and neurophenomenology in language.- Chapter 21: A pluralist framework for the philosophy of social neuroscience.- Chapter 22: Social neuroscience and neuroethics: a fruitful synergy.
C. Alexander Simpkins, Private Practice, San Diego, CA, USA; Annellen M. Simpkins, Private Practice, San Diego, CA, USA

Neuroscience for Clinicians

Evidence, Models, and Practice
Springer New York
Seiten XIX, 345 p. 98 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2013
ISBN 978-1-4614-4841-9
       9781461448419
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Clinical Psychology / Neurosciences
This book fills the need for an introductory text that opens the field up to the beginner and takes them to higher-level thinking about neuroscience. Neuroscience has captured the interest of students, professionals, and the general public. In fact it is so new, that there are very few books that gather it together in one text. Neuroscience is an amalgamation of many fields: psychology, cognitive science, chemistry, biology, engineering, philosophy, mathematics, and statistics. People who are new to the discipline have to be able to find their way through all of these fields together. In addition, they need to understand the highly technical lexicon, modeling methods, and theoretical assumptions used to describe brain structure, function, and the interaction between them. This book helps readers navigate the conventions used to describe the brain that developed through the years. The authors crystallize the complex modeling methods and technologies so that readers understand what they are saying and how to use them. They address the important underlying principles and important issues of neuroscience, with the debates and discussions that are ongoing as the field evolves. They  also include many salient fine-grained details so that the book is not just an overview, but also a useful guide for many levels of readers.

Inhaltsangaben

The birth of a new science.-Unlocking the key to neuroscience terminology.- What is the Mind and Brain?.- Learning from brain damaged individuals.- Neuroimaging technologies.- Modeling the Brain.- Neurons and Neurotransmitters.- Brain structures.- Brain Pathways.- Neural Networks: How Neurons Think and Learn.- Evolution of the Brain over Ions of Time.- Brain Development through the Life Span.- Neuroplasticity and Neurogenesis: Changing Moment-by-Moment.- Principles for incorporating the Brain into Treatment.- Working with Attention.- Regulating Emotions.- Reconsolidating Memory.- Maximizing the Social Brain.- How Psychotherapy Changes the Brain.- Relieving Anxiety.- Finding a Better Balance for Depression and Bipolar Disorder.- Recovering from Addiction.
T. Swart; Kitty Chisholm; Paul Brown

Neuroscience for Leadership

Harnessing the Brain Gain Advantage
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVIII, 260 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-46685-3
       9781137466853
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
32,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership / Management
Leadership can be learned: new evidence from neuroscience clearly points to ways that leaders can significantly improve how they engage with and motivate others. This book provides leaders and managers with an accessible guide to practical, effective actions, based on neuroscience.

Inhaltsangaben

1. There is chemistry and then there is Chemistry 2. Brains, Bodies and Businesses: a systems approach 3. The New Model Leader 4. Testosterone, Risk and Entrepreneurship 5. Why is the Soft Stuff so Hard? 6. The Challenge of Decisions 7. Changing Yourself – Changing Others 8. Elite Performance, Brain Agility and Engagement 9. Stress, Resilience and Confidence 10. Creating the Spark, Lighting the Fire 11. Difference, Diversity and Gender 12. Whole Person, Vibrant Organization
Peter Eckersall, The Graduate Center, City University of New York, New York, , USA; Helena Grehan, Murdoch University , Perth, , Australia; Edward Scheer, University of New South Wales, Sydney, NSW, Australia

New Media Dramaturgy

Performance, Media and New-Materialism
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XI, 236 p. 22 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-55603-5
       9781137556035
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Performing Arts / Contemporary Theatre
This book illuminates the shift in approaches to the uses of theatre and performance technology in the past twenty-five years and develops an account of new media dramaturgy (NMD), an approach to theatre informed by what the technology itself seems to want to say. Born of the synthesis of new media and new dramaturgy, NMD is practiced and performed in the work of a range of important artists from dumb type and their 1989 analog-industrial machine performance pH, to more recent examples from the work of Kris Verdonck and his A Two Dogs Company. Engaging with works from a range of artists and companies including: Blast Theory, Olafur Eliasson, Nakaya Fujiko and Janet Cardiff, we see a range of extruded performative technologies operating overtly on, with and against human bodies alongside more subtle dispersed, interactive and experiential media.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Cue Black Shadow Effect: The New Media Dramaturgy Experience.- 2. The Virtual Machine: Projection in the Theatre.- 3. Organised Light and ‘Useful Lumens’ in Environmental Video Projection: Or the Meaning of Light.- 4. The Theatre of Atmospheres.- 5. Robots: Asleep, Awake, Alone, and in Love.- 6. The Theatrical Superfield: On Soundscapes and Acoustic Dramaturgy.- 7. XD: Reproducing Technological Experience.- 8. Play/Pause, FF/Rewind, End. Machine Times, End Times: Theatre, Live Film, and Video.- Bibliography.- Index.-
Marcelo Corrales, Leibniz Universität Hannover, Hannover, Japan; Mark Fenwick, Kyushu University, Fukuoka, Japan; Nikolaus Forgó, Leibniz Universität Hannover, Hannover, Germany

New Technology, Big Data and the Law

Springer Singapore
Seiten XVI, 330 p. 17 illus., 7 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-981-10-5037-4
       9789811050374
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
149,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International IT and Media Law, Intellectual Property Law / Theories of Law, Philosophy of Law, Legal History
This edited collection brings together a series of interdisciplinary contributions in the field of Information Technology Law. The topics addressed in this book cover a wide range of theoretical and practical legal issues that have been created by cutting-edge Internet technologies, primarily Big Data, the Internet of Things, and Cloud computing. Consideration is also given to more recent technological breakthroughs that are now used to assist, and — at times — substitute for, human work, such as automation, robots, sensors, and algorithms. The chapters presented in this edition address these issues from the perspective of different legal backgrounds. The first part of the book discusses some of the shortcomings that have prompted legislators to carry out reforms with regard to privacy, data protection, and data security. Notably, some of the complexities and salient points with regard to the new European General Data Protection Regulation (EU GDPR) and the new amendments to the Japan’s Personal Information Protection Act (PIPA) have been scrutinized. The second part looks at the vital role of Internet intermediaries (or brokers) for the proper functioning of the globalized electronic market and innovation technologies in general. The third part examines an electronic approach to evidence with an evaluation of how these technologies affect civil and criminal investigations. The authors also explore issues that have emerged in e-commerce, such as Bitcoin and its blockchain network effects. The book aims to explain, systemize and solve some of the lingering legal questions created by the disruptive technological change that characterizes the early twenty-first century.

Inhaltsangaben

Disruptive Technologies Shaping the Law of the Future (Marcelo Corrales, Mark Fenwick & Nikolaus Forgó).- Part I Purpose and Limitation.- The Principle of Purpose Limitation & Big Data (Nikolaus Forgó, Stefanie Hänold & Benjamin Schütze).- Scientific Research and Academic e-Learning in Light of the EU’s Legal Framework for Data Protection (Cecilia Magnusson Sjöberg).- Internet of Things – Right to Data from a European Perspective (Christine Storr & Pam Storr).- The Right to be Forgotten: New Privacy Right in the Era of Internet (Yuriko Haga).- Part II Innovation Intermediaries.- Intermediaries and Mutual Trust: The Role of Social Capital in Facilitating Innovation and Creativity (Shinto Teramoto & Paulius Jur?ys).- Nudging Cloud Providers: Improving Cloud Architectures Through Intermediary Services (Marcelo Corrales & George Kousiouris).- A Brokering Framework for Assessing Legal Risks in Big Data and the Cloud (Marcelo Corrales & Karim Djemame).- Internet Intermediaries and Copyright Enforcement in the EU: In Search of a Balanced Approach (Ioannis Revolidis).- Part III Digital Evidence.- The Collection of Electronic Evidence in Germany: A Spotlight on Recent Legal Developments and Court Rulings (Nikolaus Forgó, Christian Hawellek, Friederike Knoke & Jonathan Stoklas).- LegalAIze: Tackling the Normative Challenges of Artificial Intelligence and Robotics Through the Secondary Rules of Law (Ugo Pagallo).- In the Shadow of Banking: Oversight of Fintechs and Their Service Companies(Daniel Bunge).- Index.
Rick Ruddell, University of Regina, Regina, SK, Canada

Oil, Gas, and Crime

The Dark Side of the Boomtown
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XIII, 276 p. 28 illus., 8 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-58713-8
       9781137587138
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Critical Criminology / Corporate Crime
This book addresses the causes of rising crime rates resulting from the rapid population growth and industrialization associated with natural resource extraction in rural communities. Ruddell describes the social problems emerging in these boomtowns, including increases in antisocial behavior, as well as property-related and violent crime, industrial mishaps and traffic collisions. Many of the victims of these crimes are already members of vulnerable or marginalized groups, including rural women, Indigenous populations, and young people. The quality of life in boomtowns also decreases due to environmental impacts, including air, water and noise pollution. Law enforcement agencies, courts, and correction facilities in boomtowns are often overwhelmed by the growing demand as these places are seldom able to manage the population growth. The key questions addressed here are: who should pay the costs of managing these booms, and how can we prepare communities to mitigate the worst effects of this growth and development and, ultimately, increase the quality of life for boomtown residents. An in-depth and timely study, this original work will be of great interest to scholars of violent crime, criminal justice, and corporate harm.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: Boomtown Effects.- Chapter.1. Defining the Boom.- Chapter 2. The Boom-Crime Relationship.- Chapter 3. Violence toward Women: A Boom for Whom?.- Chapter 4. Crimes of the Powerful.- Chapter 5. Dangerous Driving.- Chapter 6. Boomtown Justice Systems.- Chapter 7. Explaining Boomtown Effects.- Chapter 8. The Bust.- Chapter 9. Preparing for the Next Boom
C. Wahl; C. Scriber; B. Bloomfield

On Becoming a Leadership Coach

A Holistic Approach to Coaching Excellence
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XV, 319 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2013
ISBN 978-1-137-32288-3
       9781137322883
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
42,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Human Resource Management / Management
This book focuses on coaching leaders in the context of the organizational systems within which they lead, drawing on the curriculum of the Georgetown University Leadership Coaching Certificate Program, one of the premier coach training programs in the world and the only one with this particular focus.

Inhaltsangaben

PART I: BEING 1. On Becoming a Coach 2. The Coaching Alliance: Creating Sacred Space 3. Eastern Influence on Coaching 4. Continued Development for Coaches PART II: DOING 5. In The Spirit of Coaching 6. G.R.A.C.E. at Work 7. Using Story in Coaching 8. Whose Story is This Anyway? 9. Using Somatics to Coach Leaders 10. Congratulations: You're In Breakdown! 11. Emotions In Coaching 12. Distinctions for Coaching Leaders 13. Me, We, and Us: Ethics in Service to What? PART III: USING: MANAGING TOOLS A LIFE 14. Coaching in Organizations 15. Designing Effective Actions 16. Assessments for Insight, Learning and Choice in Coaching 17. Coaching and Leading as Stewards 18. The Thinking Path 19. Feedback 20. Executive Coaching Programs Organizational and Leadership Development 21. Coaching the Superstar Client 22. Coaching for Presence and Influence 23. Coaching for Leverage 24. Action Learning and Teams 25. Coaching New Teams
Gina Masullo Chen, The University of Texas at Austin, USA School of Journalism, Austin, TX

Online Incivility and Public Debate

Nasty Talk
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 218 p. 9 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-56272-8
       9783319562728
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Media and Communication / Social Media
This book investigates what influence online incivility—through user-generated comments on news websites—has on public debate. Built on the premise that public discussions about important topics are vital to a healthy democracy, the book analyzes 3,508 online comments in order to understand what factors in comments make them more susceptible to incivility, defined as nasty remarks rife with profanity. It also examines comments for attributes of deliberation, which are discussions across difference supported by evidence and rational arguments. Using an experiment, the book shows that uncivil comments jumpstart a chain reaction, leading first to negative emotion and then to greater intention to get politically involved. Overall, Online Incivility and Public Debate: Nasty Talk argues that while incivility mars online debate, it may also spark interest in important topics and allow for positive “deliberative moments” of quality discussion.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction: Incivility in Today’s World.- Chapter 2: Online Incivility and Public Discourse.- Chapter 3: Nasty Talk Online.- Chapter 4: Can Incivility and Deliberation Co-Exist?.- Chapter 5: Analyzing Comments in the News.- Chapter 6: Incivility and Speaking Out.- Chapter 7: Testing the “Defensive Effect”.- Chapter 8: Conclusion: Where Do We Go From Here?.
Giuliana Birindelli, “G. d’Annunzio” University of Chieti-Pescara, Pescara, Italy; Paola Ferretti, University of Pisa, Pisa, Italy

Operational Risk Management in Banks

Regulatory, Organizational and Strategic Issues
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XII, 221 p. 5 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-59451-8
       9781137594518
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Risk Management / Banking
This book focuses on several topical issues related to the operational risk management in bank: regulation, organisation and strategy. It analyses the connections between the different key-players involved in the operational risk process and the most relevant implications, both operational and strategic, arising from the implementation of the prudential framework.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: Definition and Dimensions of operational risk (OR).- Chapter 3: The Regulatory Framework.-Chapter 4: Focus on Operational Risk Measurement Models.- Chapter 5: Organisation and Governance.- Chapter 6: Mitigation Strategies.- Chapter 7: Operational Risk Management in European Banks.- Chapter 8: Concluding Remarks.
Jan Achterbergh, Radboud University Nijmegen Fac. Management Sciences, Nijmegen, Netherlands; Dirk Vriens, Radboud University Nijmegen Fac. Management Sciences, Nijmegen, Netherlands

Organizations

Social Systems Conducting Experiments
Springer Berlin Heidelberg
Seiten XII, 391 p. 73 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-3-642-14315-1
       9783642143151
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Organization / Social Sciences, general
to do to ensure survival, and (2) principles for designing organizational structures in such a way that they can realize the required functions adequately. In the course of their elaboration, we will show that these principles are general – i.e., that they hold for all organizations. 1.5 Conceptual Background To describe organizations as social systems conducting experiments and to present principles for designing an infrastructure supporting the “social experiment,” we use concepts from (organizational) cybernetics, social systems theory, and Aristotle’s ethics. In this book, we hope to show that concepts from these traditions – as introduced by their relevant representatives – can be integrated into a framework supporting our perspective on organizations. To this purpose, we introduce, in each of the following chapters, relevant concepts from an author “belonging” to one of these three traditions and show how these concepts contribute to describing organizations as social experiments (in Part I of the book), to formulating principles for the design of functions and organization structures supporting meaningful survival (Part II), and to formulating principles for the design of organization structures enabling the rich sense of meaningful survival (Part III). Of course, the relevance of cybernetics, social systems theory and Aristotle’s ethics can only be understood in full, after they have been treated in more detail – but based on what we said above, it may already be possible to see why these theories have been chosen as conceptual background.

Inhaltsangaben

Introducing Organizations as Social Systems Conducting Experiments.- Introducing Organizations as Social Systems Conducting Experiments.- The experimental and social arche of organizations.- The Experimental Arche: Ashby’s Cybernetics.- The Experimental Arche Continued: Von Foerster on Observing Systems.- The Social “arche,” Organizations as Social Systems: Luhmann.- Epilogue to Part I: The Two “Archai” Combined.- Designing Organizations as Social Systems Conducting Experiments.- Beer: Functional Design Principles for Viable Infrastructures.- Specific Design Principles: de Sitter’s Organizational Structures.- Epilogue to Part II: functional and specific design principles.- Poor and Rich Survival.- Poor Survival: Disciplining Organizational Behavior.- Towards Rich Survival: Aristotle.- Organizational Structures Supporting Rich Survival.- Epilogue.
Mario Carretero, Autónoma University of Madrid, Madrid, Spain; Stefan Berger, Ruhr Universitat Bochum, Bochum, Germany; Maria Grever, Erasmus University Rotterdam, Rotterdam, The Netherlands

Palgrave Handbook of Research in Historical Culture and Education

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXIII, 856 p. 8 illus., 1 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-52907-7
       9781137529077
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
213,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Historiography and Method / Cultural History
This volume comprises a broad interdisciplinary examination of the many different approaches by which contemporary scholars record our history. The editors provide a comprehensive overview through thirty-eight chapters divided into four parts: a) Historical Culture and Public Uses of History; b) The Appeal of the Nation in History Education of Postcolonial Societies; c) Reflections on History Learning and Teaching; d) Educational Resources: Curricula, Textbooks and New Media. This unique text integrates contributions of researchers from history, education, collective memory, museum studies, heritage, social and cognitive psychology, and other social sciences, stimulating an interdisciplinary dialogue. Contributors come from various countries of Northern and Southern America, Europe and Asia, providing an international perspective that does justice to the complexity of this field of study. The Palgrave Handbook of Research in Historical Culture and Education provides state-of-the-art research, focussing on how citizens and societies make sense of the past through different ways of representing it.

Inhaltsangaben

Acknowledgements.- List of Contributors.- 1 Introduction: Historical Cultures and Education in Transition.- Mario Carretero, Stefan Berger, Maria Grever.- Part I Historical Culture: Conceptualizing the Public Uses of History.- 2 History Writing and Constructions of National Space - The Long Dominance of the National in Modern European Historiographies.- Stefan Berger.- 3 Historical Consciousness and Historical Thinking.- Peter Seixas.- 4 Historical Culture: a Concept Revisited.- Maria Grever and Robbert-Jan Adriaansen.- 5 Historical Rights to Land: How Latin American States Made the Past Normative and What Happened to History and Historical Education as a Result.- Tamar Herzog.- 6 ’The Times They Are a-Changin’. On Time, Space and Periodization in History.- Chris Lorenz.- 7 Democracy and History Museums. Museo de America.- Marisa González de Oleaga.- 8 Illustrating National History.- Peter Burke.- 9 Film, the Past, and a Didactic Dead End: From Teaching History to Teaching Memory.- Wulf Kansteiner.- 10 Historical Edutainment: New Forms and Practices of Popular History?.- Barbara Korte and Sylvia Palatschek.- 11 The Jurassic Park of Historical Culture.- Antonis Liakos and Mitsos Bilalis.- Part II The Appeal of the Nation in History Education of Postcolonial Societies.- 12 Teaching National history to Young People Today.- Jocelyn Letourneau.- 13 Echoing National Narratives in English History Textbooks.- Tina van der Vlies.- 14 Colonial and Postcolonial Contexts of History Textbooks.- Susan Grindel.- 15 History in French Secondary School: a Tale of Progress and Universalism or a Narrative of Present Society?.- Nicole Tutiaux-Guillon.- 16 National Narratives and the Invention of Ethnic Identities in Morocco.- Norah Karrouche.- 17 Constructing Identity and Power in History Education in Ukraine: Approaches to Formation of Peace Culture.- Karina V. Korostelina.- 18 Postcolonial Discourses and Teaching National History. The History Educators' Attempts to Overcome Colonialism in the Republic of Korea.- Sunjoo Kang.- 19 History for Nation-Building: the Case of Greece and Turkey.- Herculas Millas.- 20 Conflicting Narratives about Argentinean 'Conquest of the Desert'. Social Representations, Cognitive Polyphasia, and Nothingness.- Alicia Barreiro, José Antonio Castorina, Floor van Alphen.- 21 After Empire: the Politics of History Education in a Postcolonial World.- Andrew Mycock.- Part III Reflections on History Learning and Teaching.- 22 What to Teach in History Education When the Social Pact Shakes?.- Alberto Rosa and Ignacio Bresco.- 23 The Power of Story: Historical Narratives and the Construction of Civic Identity.- Helen Haste and Ángela Bermúdez.- 24 Shared Principles in History and Social Science Education.- Keith Barton.- 25 Concepts Acquisition and Conceptual Change in History.- Maria Rodriguez-Moneo and Cesar Lopez.- 26 Social Representations Concepts of the Past and Competences in History Education.- Dario Páez, Magdalena Bobowik and James Liu.- 27 Teaching History Master Narratives: Fostering ImagiNATIONS.- Mario Carretero.- 28 Organizing the Past: Historical Accounts, Significance and Unknown Ontologies.- Lis Cercadillo, Arthur Chapman and Peter Lee.- 29 Historical Reading and Writing in Secondary School Classrooms.- Jeffrey Nokes.- 30 Engaging Students in Historical Reasoning: the Need for Dialogic History Education.- Carla van Boxtel and Jannet van Drie.- Part IV Educational Resources: Trends in Curricula, Textbooks, Museums and New Me
David Chandler, University of Westminster, London, UK

Peacebuilding

The Twenty Years’ Crisis, 1997-2017
Springer International Publishing
Seiten VIII, 243 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-50321-9
       9783319503219
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Political History / Peace Studies
This book is the first to chart the rise and fall of peacebuilding. Charting its beginnings, as an ad-hoc extension of peacekeeping responsibilities, and formalisation, as a UN-supported international project of building liberal states. Twenty years later, the grounding policy assumptions of peacebuilding - that democracy, the rule of law and free markets were a universal solution to conflict-prone states and societies - have been revealed as naïve at best, and at worst, hubristic and Eurocentric. Here, Chandler traces the disillusionment with international peacebuilding, and the discursive shifts in the self-understanding of the peacebuilding project in policy and academic debate. He charts the transformation from peacebuilding as an international project based on universalist assumptions, to the understanding of peace as a necessarily indigenous process based on plural and non-linear understandings of difference. Is the end of peacebuilding necessarily a cause for celebration? Does this shift result in a realist resignation to the world as it appears? Is it necessary to “marry idealism with realism” – as E.H. Carr once argued - if we wish to keep open the possibilities for social change? This book seeks to answer these questions, making an invaluable reference both for students and practitioners of peacebuilding and for those interested in the broader shifts in the social and political grounding of policy-making today.

Inhaltsangaben

Part One: Introduction.- Chapter 1: The Twenty Years’ Crisis.- Chapter 2: The Pragmatic Consensus.- Part Two: The Rise of Peacebuilding.- Chapter 3: The Birth of a Mission.- Chapter 4: Peacebuilding as Statebuilding.- Part Three – The Impasse of Peacebuilding.- Chapter 5: Civil Society Buildinh.- Chapter 6: The Institutionalist Approach.- Part Four – Beyond Peacebuilding.- Chapter 7: The Turn to the Local.- Chapter 8: The Rise of Resilience.- Part Five - Conclusion.- Chapter 9: The End of The Liberal Episteme.
Roberto Walton, Universidad de Buenos Aires, Buenos Aires, Argentina; Shigeru Taguchi, Hokkaido University, Sapporo, Japan; Roberto Rubio, Universidad Alberto Hurtado, Santiago, Chile

Perception, Affectivity, and Volition in Husserl’s Phenomenology

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 202 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-55338-2
       9783319553382
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Phenomenology / Psychology Research
This collection of essays by scholars from Europe, Asia, North America, and Latin America offers new perspectives of the phenomenological investigation of experiential life on the basis of Husserl’s phenomenology. Not only well-known works of Husserl are interpreted from new angles, but also the latest volumes of the Husserliana are closely examined. In a variety of ways, the contributors explore the emergence of reason in experience that is disclosed in the very regions that are traditionally considered to be “irrational” or “pre-rational.” The leading idea of such explorations is Husserl’s view that perception, affectivity, and volition are regarded as the three aspects of reason. Without affectivity, which is supposedly irrational, no rationality can be established in the spheres of representation and volition, whereas volitional and representational acts consistently structure the process of affective experience. In such a framework, it is also shown that theoretical and practical reason are inseparably intertwined. Thus, the papers collected here can be regarded as a collaborative phenomenological investigation into the entanglement and mutual dependency of the supposedly “rational” and the “irrational” as well as that of the “practical” and the “theoretical.”

Inhaltsangaben

Percept, Feeling, Pragma: Some Static and Genetic Connections, Luis Román Rabanaque.- Horizonality and Legitimation in Perception, Affectivity, and Volition, Roberto Walton.- Husserl’s Holistic Realism about Perception, Michael K. Shim.- How Husserl Can Reformulate the Discussion about the Conceptual Content of Perception, Pol Vandevelde.- “The Most Beautiful Pearls”: Speculative Thoughts on a Phenomenology of Attention (with Husserl and Goethe), Sebastian Luft.- Toward an A Priori Gefühlsmoral: Husserl's Criticism of Hume´s Theory of Moral Sentiments, Mariano Crespo.- Affectivity and Individuation in Husserl and Margaret Mahler, Kristina Montagová.- The Corporeal Phantasy and the Dynamics of Individuation, Jagna Brudzinska.- Phenomenology of Pain and its Implications for Health Care, Saulius Geniusas.- Limits and Reach of the Act of Willing: Thoughts from the Point of View of Psychoanalysis and Husserl’s phenomenology, Julio César Vargas Bejarano.- Husserl’s Concept of Urstiftung: From Passivity to History, Luis Niel.- Annihilation of the World? Husserl’s Rehabilitation of Reality, Shigeru Taguchi.- Phenomenology and the Other: Phenomenology facing the 21st Century, Javier San Martín.
Michael Quante, University of Münster, Münster, Germany

Personal Identity as a Principle of Biomedical Ethics

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 249 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-56867-6
       9783319568676
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Metaphysics / Ethics
This book brings together the debate concerning personal identity (in metaphysics) and central topics in biomedical ethics (conception of birth and death; autonomy, living wills and paternalism). Based on a metaphysical account of personal identity in the sense of persistence and conditions for human beings, conceptions for beginning of life, and death are developed. Based on a biographical account of personality, normative questions concerning autonomy, euthanasia, living wills and medical paternalism are dealt with. By these means the book shows that “personal identity” has different meanings which have to be distinguished so that human persistence and personality can be used to deal with central questions in biomedical ethics.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: Human persistence.- Chapter 3: The beginning of life.- Chapter 4: Death.- Chapter 5: Personality and autonomy.- Chapter 6: Dying autonomously.- Chapter 7: Extended autonomy.- Chapter 8: Medical paternalism.- Chapter 9: The interlacing of persistence and personality.
Angelos Evangelou, University of Kent, Canterbury, UK

Philosophizing Madness from Nietzsche to Derrida

Springer International Publishing
Seiten IX, 286 p. 6 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-57092-1
       9783319570921
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Existentialism / Modern Philosophy
Drawing connections between madness, philosophy and autobiography, this book addresses the question of how Nietzsche's madness might have affected his later works. It also explores why continental philosophy after Nietzsche is so fascinated with madness, and how it (re)considers, (re)evaluates and (re)valorizes madness. To answer these questions, the book analyzes the work of three major figures in twentieth-century French philosophy who were significantly influenced by Nietzsche: Bataille, Foucault and Derrida, examining the ways in which their responses to Nietzsche’s madness determine how they understand philosophy as well as philosophy’s relation to madness. For these philosophers, posing the question about madness renders the philosophical subject vulnerable and implicates it in a state of responsibility towards that about which it asks. Out of this analysis of their engagement with the question of madness emerges a new conception of 'autobiographical philosophy', which entails the insertion of this vulnerable subject into the philosophical work, to which each of these philosophers adheres or resists in different ways.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: The ‘Nietzsche Event’: Madness and the Limits of Becoming.- Chapter 2: Georges Bataille: Madness and the ‘Ethics of Vulnerability’.- Chapter 3: Michel Foucault: Madness and Philosophical Incapacity.- Chapter 4: Jacques Derrida: Philosophy Opens Up to Madness.- Conclusion: Responding to Madness: ‘Autobiographical Philosophy’.
Nicholas Anthony John Hastings, Wellington Point, QLD, Australia

Physical Asset Management

With an Introduction to ISO55000
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXXI, 540 p. 230 illus., 127 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-14776-5
       9783319147765
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Industrial Organization / Quality Control, Reliability, Safety and Risk
Significantly extended from the first edition and published in response to the new international standard ISO55000, this book on physical asset management (2nd Ed.) presents a systematic approach to the management of physical assets from concept to disposal. It introduces the general principles of physical asset management and covers all stages of the asset management process, including initial business appraisal, identification of fixed asset needs, capability gap analysis, financial evaluation, logistic support analysis, life cycle costing, management of in-service assets, maintenance strategy, outsourcing, cost-benefit analysis, disposal and renewal. Physical asset management is the management of fixed assets such as equipment, plant, buildings and infrastructure. Features include: *Suitable for university courses and builds on first edition to provide further analytical material *Aligned with the international asset management standard ISO55000 *Provides a basis for the establishment of physical asset management as a professional discipline *Presents case studies, analytical techniques and numerical examples with solutionsWritten for practitioners and students in asset management, this textbook provides an essential foundation to the topic. It is suitable for an advanced undergraduate or postgraduate course in asset management, and also offers an ideal reference text for engineers and managers specializing in asset management, reliability, maintenance, logistics or systems engineering.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction to Asset Management.- Structure and Activities.- Asset Management Personnel.- From Concept to Project Approval.- Financial Methods.- Developing a Business Case.- Implementing Development Plans.- Life Cycle Costing.- Know Your Assets.- Asset Continuity Planning.- Management of In-Service Assets.- Capital Planning and Budget.- Asset Management Information Systems.- Cost-Benefit Analysis.- Risk Analysis and Risk Management.- Outsourcing.- Logistic Support.- Asset Basic care.- Maintenance Organization and Budget.- Stock Control.- Reliability, Availability and Maintainability.- Safety 407.- Profit, Depreciation and Tax.- Asset Decision Examples.- Economic Life.- Equipment Replacement Decisions.- Further Financial Topics.- Performance, Audit and Review.- ISO55000 Series Standards.
Nicholas Anthony John Hastings, Wellington Point, QLD, Australia

Physical Asset Management

With an Introduction to ISO55000
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXXI, 540 p. 230 illus., 127 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-33104-1
       9783319331041
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Industrial Organization / Quality Control, Reliability, Safety and Risk
Significantly extended from the first edition and published in response to the new international standard ISO55000, this book on physical asset management (2nd Ed.) presents a systematic approach to the management of physical assets from concept to disposal. It introduces the general principles of physical asset management and covers all stages of the asset management process, including initial business appraisal, identification of fixed asset needs, capability gap analysis, financial evaluation, logistic support analysis, life cycle costing, management of in-service assets, maintenance strategy, outsourcing, cost-benefit analysis, disposal and renewal. Physical asset management is the management of fixed assets such as equipment, plant, buildings and infrastructure. Features include: *Suitable for university courses and builds on first edition to provide further analytical material *Aligned with the international asset management standard ISO55000 *Provides a basis for the establishment of physical asset management as a professional discipline *Presents case studies, analytical techniques and numerical examples with solutionsWritten for practitioners and students in asset management, this textbook provides an essential foundation to the topic. It is suitable for an advanced undergraduate or postgraduate course in asset management, and also offers an ideal reference text for engineers and managers specializing in asset management, reliability, maintenance, logistics or systems engineering.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction to Asset Management.- Structure and Activities.- Asset Management Personnel.- From Concept to Project Approval.- Financial Methods.- Developing a Business Case.- Implementing Development Plans.- Life Cycle Costing.- Know Your Assets.- Asset Continuity Planning.- Management of In-Service Assets.- Capital Planning and Budget.- Asset Management Information Systems.- Cost-Benefit Analysis.- Risk Analysis and Risk Management.- Outsourcing.- Logistic Support.- Asset Basic care.- Maintenance Organization and Budget.- Stock Control.- Reliability, Availability and Maintainability.- Safety 407.- Profit, Depreciation and Tax.- Asset Decision Examples.- Economic Life.- Equipment Replacement Decisions.- Further Financial Topics.- Performance, Audit and Review.- ISO55000 Series Standards.
Denis Oriot, University of Poitiers, Poitiers, France; Guillaume Alinier, Hamad Medical Corp., Ambulance Service , Doha, Qatar

Pocket Book for Simulation Debriefing in Healthcare

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 107 p. 7 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-59881-9
       9783319598819
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Medical Education / Nursing Education
This book is a concise manual on debriefing techniques in a clinical educational context. It presents the most popular debriefing techniques and, hence, can be used as a reference manual by educators to help them achieve their intended debriefing objectives. The overarching objective of debriefing is to promote reflection and improve patient safety awareness at an individual and a team level. This book provides clear explanations of what constitutes a valuable and effective debriefing, and presents the various approaches that can be used and how debriefing differs from feedback. It includes key recommendations on aspects that directly or indirectly impact debriefing with different populations of learners such as students or qualified healthcare professionals of various levels of seniority. This book can also be used as a survival guide for both simulation educators and clinicians during debriefings. It includes several useful sections explaining the different phases of a debriefing session, which help learners develop and consolidate their knowledge, and identify potential knowledge or performance gaps and near misses. The underlying philosophy of this book is to also promote profound respect for the trainee by using a non-offensive debriefing approach. Debriefing facilitators will appreciate the several key sentences that will help them lead and engage their learners in the various phases of expressing their emotions and analyzing their experience and actions.

Inhaltsangaben

Foreword.- Preface.- Acknowledgements.- CHAPTER 1: Introduction to debriefing.- CHAPTER 2: How to run a debriefing?.- CHAPTER 3: General advice and specific issues.- CHAPTER 4: My personal diary of debriefing experiences.
Bob Jickling, Lakehead Univeristy, Thunder Bay, ON, Canada; Stephen Sterling, University of Plymouth, Plymouth, UK

Post-Sustainability and Environmental Education

Remaking Education for the Future
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 155 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-51321-8
       9783319513218
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociology of Education / Sustainable Development
This book provides a critique of over two decades of sustained effort to infuse educational systems with education for sustainable development. Taking to heart the idea that deconstruction is a prelude to reconstruction, this critique leads to discussions about how education can be remade, and respond to the educational imperatives of our time, particularly as they relate to ecological crises and human-nature relationships. It will be of great interest to students and researchers of sociology, education, philosophy and environmental issues.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction; Bob Jickling & Stephen Sterling.- 
PART I. Remaking Education.- Chapter 2. Education Revisited: Creating Experiences That Are Held, Felt, and Disruptive; Bob Jickling.- Chapter 3. Assuming the Future: Re-Purposing Education in a Volatile Age; Stephen Sterling.- PART II. Critique and Proposition.- Chapter 4. Saying Yes to Life: The Search for the Rebel Teacher; Sean Blenkinsop & Marcus Morse.- Chapter 5. Education and the Common Good; Heila Lotz-Sisitka.- PART III. Experience and Relation.- Chapter 6. Sustainability and Human Being: Towards the Hidden Centre of Authentic Education; Michael Bonnett.- Chapter 7. Environmental Education After Sustainability; Lesley Le Grange.- PART IV. Education Through Action.- Chapter 8. Education as Life; Lucie Sauvé.- Chapter 9. Resilient Education: Confronting Perplexity and Uncertainty; Edgar J. González-Gaudiano & José Gutiérrez-Pérez.- Chapter 10. An Afterword; Stephen Sterling & Bob Jickling.
Oliver Lovesey, University of British Columbia, Okanagan, Kelowna, BC, Canada

Postcolonial George Eliot

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten VII, 310 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-33211-0
       9781137332110
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
British and Irish Literature / Nineteenth-Century Literature
This book examines the range of the colonial imaginary in Eliot’s works, from the domestic and regional to ancient and speculative colonialisms. It challenges monolithic, hegemonic views of George Eliot — whose novelistic career paralleled the creation of British India — and also dismissals of the postcolonial as ahistorical. It uncovers often-overlooked colonized figures in the novels. It also investigates Victorian Islamophobia in light of Eliot’s impatience with ignorance, intolerance, and xenophobia as well as her interrogation of the make-believe of endings. Drawing on a range of sources from Eugène Bodichon’s Algerian anthropological texts, the Persian journals of John Martyn, and postmodern re-engagements, Postcolonial George Eliot has implications for an understanding of the globalization of English, the decolonization of disciplinarity and periodization, and the roots of present-day conflict in the wider Mediterranean world.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: George Eliot and the Victorian Postcolonial.- 2. Decolonizing Victorian Anthropology (Scenes of Clerical Life and Adam Bede).- 3. George Eliot and Victorian Islamophobia (Felix Holt's Colonial Subject.- 4. Middlemarch's Colonial Imaginary.- 5. Conclusion: The Leavis Tradition, Educational Assessment, and the Postcolonial Library.- Works Cited.
Martin Kolmar, University of St. Gallen, St. Gallen, Switzerland

Principles of Microeconomics

An Integrative Approach
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XII, 336 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-57588-9
       9783319575889
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
53,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Microeconomics / Behavioral/Experimental Economics
This text provides a comprehensive and unique introduction to modern microeconomics. It pursues an integrative approach by putting the main findings of economics into a broader perspective; theories are critically reflected on from a philosophical standpoint and by comparing them to approaches found in the social sciences, while implications for the design of the legal system and business practices are highlighted throughout. In addition, the book presents brief examples and comprehensive case studies to facilitate an understanding of the theories’ real-world implications. Starting from the question as to why and how societies organize economic activity, the book adopts an institutional perspective to analyze the potential and limitations of different market types with regard to alleviating scarcity and achieving distributive objectives. It not only covers traditional rational-choice models, but also systematically introduces readers to important findings from behavioral economics and psychology. A companion workbook is available which features a wide variety of exercises, ranging from basic multiple-choice questions to challenging mathematical problems and case study scenarios.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: First Principles.- Gains from Trade.- A Primer in Markets and Institutions: Introduction.- Supply and Demand Under Perfect Competition.- Normative Economics.- Externalities and the Limits of Markets.- Foundations of Demand and Supply: Decisions and Consumer Behavior.- Costs.- Firm Behavior and Industrial Organization: A Second Look at Firm Behavior Under Perfect Competition.- Firm Behavior in Monopolistic Markets.- Principles of Game Theory.- Firm Behavior in Oligopolistic Markets.- Appendix: A Case Study.- Mathematical Appendix.
Lorie A. Fridell, University of South Florida Department of Criminology, Tampa, FL, USA

Producing Bias-Free Policing

A Science-Based Approach
Springer International Publishing
Seiten IX, 117 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-33173-7
       9783319331737
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminology and Criminal Justice, general / Social Structure, Social Inequality
This Brief provides specific recommendations for police professionals to reduce the influence of implicit bias on police practice, which will improve both effectiveness (in a shift towards evidence-based, rather than bias-based) practices and police legitimacy. The author is donating her proceeds from this book to the National Law Enforcement Officers Memorial Fund (nleomf.org).

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: The Science of Implicit Bias and Implications for Policing.- Chapter 3: A Comprehensive Program to Produce Fair and Impartial Policing.- Chapter 4: The Way Ahead.
George Danner, Writer, USA

Profit from Science

Solving Business Problems using Data, Math, and the Scientific Process
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XII, 236 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-47484-1
       9781137474841
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Organizational Studies, Economic Sociology / Business Mathematics
In Profit From Science , author George Danner presents solutions to the big problems that modern business face solutions that are grounded in logic and empiricism. This book instructs business leaders in how to add the discipline and technical precision of the scientific method to their strategic planning and decision making.

Inhaltsangaben

Jürg Kuster, Winterthur, Switzerland; Eugen Huber, Sargans, Switzerland; Robert Lippmann, Männedorf, Switzerland; Alphons Schmid, Winkel, Switzerland; Emil Schneider, Warth, Switzerland; Urs Witschi, Ennetbaden, Switzerland; Roger Wüst, Dänikon, Swit

Project Management Handbook

Springer Berlin Heidelberg
Seiten XIV, 449 p. 247 illus., 1 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-662-45372-8
       9783662453728
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Project Management / Engineering Economics, Organization, Logistics, Marketing
This practical handbook offers a comprehensive guide to efficient project management. It pursues a broad, well-structured approach, suitable for most projects, and allows newcomers, experienced project managers and decision-makers to find valuable input that matches their specific needs. The Project Management Compass guides readers through various sections of the book; templates and checklists offer additional support. The handbook’s innovative structure combines concepts from systems engineering, management psychology, and process dynamics. This international edition will allow to share the authors' experience gained in many years of project work and over 2,000 project management and leadership seminars conducted for BWI Management Education in Zurich, Switzerland.This is an excellent handbook for practical project management in today’s world.Prof. Dr. Heinz Schelle, Honorary Chairman of the GPM (German Project Management Association)The authors’ many years in practical experience in setting up, implementing and managing projects shines through in this book. The book also reflects the current trend towards increased social competence. I am therefore pleased to recommend this book as a basis for certification in project management.Dr. Hans Knöpfel, Honorary President of the SPM (Swiss Project Management Association)

Inhaltsangaben

Part I: An overview of project management.- Part II: Structure and approaches.- Part III: Advanced coverage of topics.- Part IV: Tools and instruments.- Certification in project management.- Bibliography.
Jürg Kuster, Winterthur, Switzerland; Eugen Huber, Sargans, Switzerland; Robert Lippmann, Männedorf, Switzerland; Alphons Schmid, Winkel, Switzerland; Emil Schneider, Warth, Switzerland; Urs Witschi, Ennetbaden, Switzerland; Roger Wüst, Dänikon, Swit

Project Management Handbook

Springer Berlin Heidelberg
Seiten XIV, 449 p. 247 illus., 1 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-662-50027-9
       9783662500279
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Project Management / Engineering Economics, Organization, Logistics, Marketing
This practical handbook offers a comprehensive guide to efficient project management. It pursues a broad, well-structured approach, suitable for most projects, and allows newcomers, experienced project managers and decision-makers to find valuable input that matches their specific needs. The Project Management Compass guides readers through various sections of the book; templates and checklists offer additional support. The handbook’s innovative structure combines concepts from systems engineering, management psychology, and process dynamics. This international edition will allow to share the authors' experience gained in many years of project work and over 2,000 project management and leadership seminars conducted for BWI Management Education in Zurich, Switzerland.This is an excellent handbook for practical project management in today’s world.Prof. Dr. Heinz Schelle, Honorary Chairman of the GPM (German Project Management Association)The authors’ many years in practical experience in setting up, implementing and managing projects shines through in this book. The book also reflects the current trend towards increased social competence. I am therefore pleased to recommend this book as a basis for certification in project management.Dr. Hans Knöpfel, Honorary President of the SPM (Swiss Project Management Association)

Inhaltsangaben

Part I: An overview of project management.- Part II: Structure and approaches.- Part III: Advanced coverage of topics.- Part IV: Tools and instruments.- Certification in project management.- Bibliography.
Shuangyi Li, Lund University , Lund, Sweden

Proust, China and Intertextual Engagement

Translation and Transcultural Dialogue
Springer Singapore
Seiten XIII, 246 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-981-10-4453-3
       9789811044533
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Translation Studies / Comparative Literature
The book traces the literary journey that Proust’s work made to China and back by means of translation, intertextual engagement, and the creation of a transcultural dialogue through migrant literature. It begins with a translation history of Proust’s work in China and studies the different (re)translations and editions of La Recherche highlighting their culturally conditioned thematic emphases and negligence, such as time and memory over anti-Semitism and homosexuality. The book then moves on to explore three contemporary mainland Chinese writers’ creative intertextual engagement with Proust against the backdrop of China's explosive development from modernity to post-modernity in the 1990s. Finally, back to France, the book examines the multifarious literary relations between Proust and the Franco-Chinese migrant writer François Cheng. It demonstrates how the cultural heritages of China and the West can be re-negotiated and put into dialogue through the fictional and creative medium of literature, as well as providing a means of understanding the economic, political, and cultural exchanges in our current global context.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Part I: The Reception of Proust in China.- Proust and the Chinese Translations.- Proust and Mainland Chinese Writers: La Recherche and Its Postmodern Hypertexts.- Part II: Proust in the Chinese Diaspora: François Cheng’s Le Dit de Tianyi.- Intertextual and Paratextual Relations between La Recherche and Le Dit.- Traits chinois / démarche proustienne.- Conclusion.
Kriangsak Kittichaisaree, Royal Thai Embassy, Moscow, Russia

Public International Law of Cyberspace

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXXI, 376 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-54656-8
       9783319546568
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
149,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International IT and Media Law, Intellectual Property Law / Sources and Subjects of International Law, International Organizations
This compact, highly engaging book examines the international legal regulation of both the conduct of States among themselves and conduct towards individuals, in relation to the use of cyberspace. Chapters introduce the perspectives of various stakeholders and the challenges for international law. The author discusses State responsibility and key cyberspace rights issues, and takes a detailed look at cyber warfare, espionage, crime and terrorism. The work also covers the situation of non-State actors and quasi-State actors (such as IS, or ISIS, or ISIL) and concludes with a consideration of future prospects for the international law of cyberspace. Readers may explore international rules in the areas of jurisdiction of States in cyberspace, responsibility of States for cyber activities, human rights in the cyber world, permissible responses to cyber attacks, and more. Other topics addressed include the rules of engagement in cyber warfare, suppression of cyber crimes, permissible limits of cyber espionage, and suppression of cyber-related terrorism. Chapters feature explanations of case law from various jurisdictions, against the background of real-life cyber-related incidents across the globe. Written by an internationally recognized practitioner in the field, the book objectively guides readers through on-going debates on cyber-related issues against the background of international law. This book is very accessibly written and is an enlightening read. It will appeal to a wide audience, from international lawyers to students of international law, military strategists, law enforcement officers, policy makers and the lay person.

Inhaltsangaben

1 Introduction: Perspectives of various stakeholders and challenges for international law.- 2 Jurisdiction and attribution of State responsibility in cyberspace.- 3 Regulation of the cyberspace and human rights.- 4 Cyber warfare.- 5 Application of the law of armed conflict, including international humanitarian law, in the cyberspace.- 6 Cyber espionage.- 7 Cyber crimes.- 8 Cyber terrorism.- 9 Future Prospects of International Law of Cyberspace.
Harry Georgakopoulos

Quantitative Trading with R

Understanding Mathematical and Computational Tools from a Quant’s Perspective
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVII, 272 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-35407-5
       9781137354075
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Accounting/Auditing / Knowledge Management
Quantitative Finance with R offers a winning strategy for devising expertly-crafted and workable trading models using the R open source programming language, providing readers with a step-by-step approach to understanding complex quantitative finance problems and building functional computer code.

Inhaltsangaben

1 An Overview 2 Tools of the Trade 3 Working with Data 4 Basic Statistics and Probability 5 Intermediate Statistics and Probability 6 Spreads, Betas and Risk 7 Backtesting with Quantstrat 8 High-Frequency Data 9 Options 10 Optimization
Harry Georgakopoulos

Quantitative Trading with R

Understanding Mathematical and Computational Tools from a Quant’s Perspective
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVII, 272 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-349-46986-4
       9781349469864
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Accounting/Auditing / Knowledge Management
Quantitative Finance with R offers a winning strategy for devising expertly-crafted and workable trading models using the R open source programming language, providing readers with a step-by-step approach to understanding complex quantitative finance problems and building functional computer code.

Inhaltsangaben

1 An Overview 2 Tools of the Trade 3 Working with Data 4 Basic Statistics and Probability 5 Intermediate Statistics and Probability 6 Spreads, Betas and Risk 7 Backtesting with Quantstrat 8 High-Frequency Data 9 Options 10 Optimization
Franz Eisenführ, Universität Köln Seminar für Allgemeine, Köln, Germany; Martin Weber, Universität Mannheim Lehrstuhl f. Allg. BWL, Finanz-, Mannheim, Germany; Thomas Langer, Universität Münster Finance Center Münster, Münster, Germany

Rational Decision Making

Springer Berlin Heidelberg
Seiten XIV, 447 p. 116 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-3-642-02850-2
       9783642028502
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Operations Research/Decision Theory / Industrial and Organizational Psychology
This book is designed to support you in making difficult decisions in a more - tional way. Based on an established theoretical foundation, it shows that simple requirements concerning rational behavior lead to a general calculus of determ- ing optimal decision alternatives; the book then goes on to present methods and instruments useful for the practical implementation of these concepts. Psychological research has uncovered a multitude of systematic cognitive - ases associated with the intuitive decision process, especially concerning the f- mation of preferences and subjective probability judgments for uncertain events. These developments have elevated prescriptive decision theory to the status of an important discipline with increasingly strong practical ties – nowadays, even m- agers are concerned with decision trees, probability distributions and risk profiles. There is also a wide range of software available on the market to aid users with the use of the instruments. We would like to convince you, by help of the many pr- tical questions and case studies included with most chapters, that the material c- ered is not purely an academic diet but also of high practical nutritional value. The mindset suggested by the theory as an approach for decision problems will surely be of much use to you both in your private and professional life, even if you do not apply the presented methods of decision making support in every little - tail.

Inhaltsangaben

What decision analysis is about.- Structuring the decision problem.- Generating objectives and hierarchies.- Generating and preselecting alternatives.- Decision making under certainty with one objective.- Decision making under certainty and with multiple objectives: multiattribute value functions.- The generation of probabilities.- Simulation of an objective variable’s probability distribution.- Decisions under risk and one objective.- Decision under risk: incomplete information and multiple objectives.- Time preferences under certain expectations.- Group decisions.- Descriptive aspects of decision making.
G Jason Goddard, Wachovia Bank (A Wells Fargo Company), Winston-Salem, NC, USA; Bill Marcum, Wake Forest University, Winston-Salem, NC, USA

Real Estate Investment

A Value Based Approach
Springer Berlin Heidelberg
Seiten XIV, 298 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-3-642-23526-9
       9783642235269
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Finance, general / Entrepreneurship
This book fills a gap in the existing resources available to students and professionals requiring an academically rigorous, but practically orientated source of knowledge about real estate finance. Written by a bank vice-president who for many years has practiced as a commercial lender and who teaches real estate investment at university level, and an academic whose area of study is finance and particularly valuation, this book will lead readers to truly understand the fundamentals of making a sound real estate investment decision. The focus is primarily on the valuation of leased properties such as apartment buildings, office buildings, retail centers, and warehouse space, rather than on owner occupied residential property.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface.- 1 Real Estate Investing After the Fall.- 2 Real Estate Finance: Notes, Mortgages, and Payment Structures.- 3 Finance and Real Estate Valuation.- 4 Real Estate Valuation.- 5 The Anatomy of a Lease.- 6 Risk Analysis.- 7 Taxation in Investment Real Estate.- 8 Investing in Residential Apartment Projects.- 9 Investing in Retail and Office Property.- 10 Investing in Warehouse and Industrial Property.- 11 Securitization of Real Estate Assets.- 12 Real Estate Investment Trusts.- Glossary.
G Jason Goddard, Wachovia Bank (A Wells Fargo Company), Winston-Salem, NC, USA; Bill Marcum, Wake Forest University, Winston-Salem, NC, USA

Real Estate Investment

A Value Based Approach
Springer Berlin Heidelberg
Seiten XIV, 298 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-3-642-42705-3
       9783642427053
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Finance, general / Entrepreneurship
This book fills a gap in the existing resources available to students and professionals requiring an academically rigorous, but practically orientated source of knowledge about real estate finance. Written by a bank vice-president who for many years has practiced as a commercial lender and who teaches real estate investment at university level, and an academic whose area of study is finance and particularly valuation, this book will lead readers to truly understand the fundamentals of making a sound real estate investment decision. The focus is primarily on the valuation of leased properties such as apartment buildings, office buildings, retail centers, and warehouse space, rather than on owner occupied residential property.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface.- 1 Real Estate Investing After the Fall.- 2 Real Estate Finance: Notes, Mortgages, and Payment Structures.- 3 Finance and Real Estate Valuation.- 4 Real Estate Valuation.- 5 The Anatomy of a Lease.- 6 Risk Analysis.- 7 Taxation in Investment Real Estate.- 8 Investing in Residential Apartment Projects.- 9 Investing in Retail and Office Property.- 10 Investing in Warehouse and Industrial Property.- 11 Securitization of Real Estate Assets.- 12 Real Estate Investment Trusts.- Glossary.
George A. Bermann, Columbia Law School, New York, NY, USA

Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards

The Interpretation and Application of the New York Convention by National Courts
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIV, 1102 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-50913-6
       9783319509136
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
299,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law / Dispute Resolution, Mediation, Arbitration
This book examines how the Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards, commonly known as The New York Convention, has been understood and applied in [insert number] jurisdictions, including virtually all that are leading international arbitration centers. It begins with a general report surveying and synthesizing national responses to a large number of critical issues in the Convention’s interpretation and application. It is followed by national reports, all of which are organized in accordance with a common questionnaire raising these critical issues. Following introductory remarks, each report addresses the following aspects of the Convention which include its basic implementation within the national legal system; enforcement by local courts of agreements to arbitrate (including grounds for withholding enforcement), recognition and enforcement of foreign awards by local courts under the Convention (including grounds for denying recognition and enforcement), and essential procedural issues in the courts’ conduct of recognition and enforcement. Each report concludes with an overall assessment of the Convention’s interpretation and application on national territory and recommendations, if any, for reform. The New York Convention was intended to enhance the workings of the international arbitral system, primarily by ensuring that arbitral awards are readily recognizable and enforceable in States other than the State in which they are rendered, subject of course to certain safeguards reflected by the Convention’s limited grounds for denying recognition or enforcement. It secondarily binds signatory states to enforce the arbitration agreements on the basis of which awards under the Convention will be rendered. Despite its exceptionally wide adoption and its broad coverage, the New York Convention depends for its efficacy on the conduct of national actors, and national courts in particular. Depending on the view of international law prevailing in a given State, the Convention may require statutory implementation at the national level. Beyond that, the Convention requires of national courts an apt understanding of the principles and policies that underlie the Convention’s various provisions. Through its in-depth coverage of the understandings of the Convention that prevail across national legal systems, the book gives practitioners and scholars a much-improved appreciation of the New York Convention “on the ground.”

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- 1. Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards: The Interpretation and Application of the New York Convention by National Courts.- 2. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Argentina.- 3. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Australia.- 4. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Austria.- 5. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Brazil.- 6. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Canada.- 7. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in China.- 8. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Colombia.- 9. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Croatia.- 10. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Czech Republic.- 11. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in France.- 12. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Georgia.- 13. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Germany.- 14. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Greece.- 15. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Hong Kong.- 16. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Hungary.- 17. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in India.- 18. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Indonesia.- 19. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Ireland.- 20. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Israel.- 21. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Italy.- 22. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Japan.- 23. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Korea.- 24. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Macau.- 25. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Malaysia.- 26. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Mexico.- 27. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Netherlands.- 28. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Norway.- 29. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Paraguay.- 30. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Peru.- 31. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Portugal.- 32. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Romania.- 33. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Russia.- 34. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Singapore.- 35. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Slovenia.- 36. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Spain.- 37. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Sweden.- 38. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Switzerland.- 39. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Taiwan.- 40. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Turkey.- 41. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in United Kingdom.- 42. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in United States.- 43. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Uruguay.- 44. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Venezuela.- 45. Interpretation and application of the New York Convention in Vietnam
Soushi Suzuki, Hokkai-Gakuen University, Sapporo, Japan; Peter Nijkamp, Tinbergen Institute, Amsterdam, The Netherlands

Regional Performance Measurement and Improvement

New Developments and Applications of Data Envelopment Analysis
Springer Singapore
Seiten XII, 185 p. 88 illus., 62 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-981-10-0241-0
       9789811002410
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Regional/Spatial Science / Economic Systems
This is the first book to fully introduce a newly developed distance friction minimization (DFM) model, which is one of the new efficiency improvement projection approaches in data envelopment analysis (DEA). The DFM model can produce a most effective solution in efficiency improvement projections for inefficient spatial entities (decision-making units). The book provides a set of fresh contributions to a quantitative assessment of the performance of such policy entities. First it offers a state-of-the art overview of current DEA models and approaches, followed by the operational design of various new types of DEA models, each of them addressing weaknesses in traditional DEA approaches. Then it illustrates the assessment potential of DEA — and its new variants, in particular, the DFM model and subsequent extensions — on the basis of a broadly composed collection of empirical case studies, centering mainly but not exclusively on Japan and other Asian nations.

Inhaltsangaben

Part 1: Model.- 1. Introduction.- 2. Overview of the Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA) and Improvement Projection.- 3. Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA) for Performance Measurement and Improvement.- 4. Distance Friction Minimization (DFM) Model.- 5. Advanced DFM Models.- 6. Matrix of DFM Model.- Part 2: Applications.- 7. Performance Measurement of Local Government Finance in Japan: Combination of Goal-Achievement Model with CCR Model.- 8. Performance Measurement of Public Transport Operation in Japan: Combination of Stepwise Model with CCR Model.- 9. Performance Measurement of Asian City: Combination of Stepwise Model with SE Model.- 10. Energy-Environment Performance after Fukushima Problem in Japan: Combination of Target-Oriented Model with SE Model.- 11. New Energy Performance in Japan: Combination of Improvement Adjustment Model with CCR Model.- 12. Performance Measurement of Energy-Environment-Economic for EU, APEC and ASEAN Countries: Combination of Fixed Factor Model with Super Efficiency Model.- 13.Performance Measurement of Airport Operation in Japan: Combination of Stepwise Model with Fixed Factor Model.
R. Foltz

Religions of the Silk Road

Premodern Patterns of Globalization
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XIII, 190 p. 2 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-0-230-62125-1
       9780230621251
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
48,14 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociology of Religion / History of Religion
Drawing on the latest research and scholarship, this newly revised and updated edition of Religions of the Silk Road explores the majestically fabled cities and exotic peoples that make up the romantic notions of the colonial era.

Inhaltsangaben

The Silk Road and Its Travellers Religion and Trade in Ancient Eurasia Buddhism and the Silk Road A Refuge of Heretics: Nestorians and Manichaeans on the Silk Road The Islamization of the Silk Road Ecumenical Mischief A Melting Pot No More
Keri Day, Brite Divinity School, USA

Religious Resistance to Neoliberalism

Womanist and Black Feminist Perspectives
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XIV, 213 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-56942-4
       9781137569424
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Political Economy/Economic Policy / Gender Studies
Religious Resistance to Neoliberalism offers compelling and intersectional religious critiques of neoliberalism. Neoliberalism is the normative rationality of contemporary global capitalism that orders people to live by the generalized principle of competition in all social spheres of life. Keri Day asserts that neoliberalism and its moral orientations consequently breed radical distrust, lovelessness, disconnection, and alienation within society. She argues that engaging black feminist and womanist religious perspectives with Jewish and Christian discourses offers more robust critiques of a neoliberal economy. Employing womanist and black feminist religious perspectives, this book provides six theoretical, theologically constructive arguments to challenge the moral fragmentation associated with global markets. It strives to envision a pragmatic politics of hope.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: Neoliberalism and the Religious Imagination 1. The Myth of Progress 2. Resisting the Acquiring Mode 3. Loss of the Erotic 4. Love as a Concrete Revolutionary Practice 5. Hope as Social Practice Conclusion: Radicalizing Hope: Beloved Communities Bibliography
Alessandro Carretta, University of Rome Tor Vergata, Rome, Italy; Franco Fiordelisi, University of Rome III, Rome, Italy; Paola Schwizer, University of Parma, Parma, Italy

Risk Culture in Banking

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIX, 436 p. 47 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-57591-9
       9783319575919
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
149,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Banking /
This book explores risk culture in banks following the financial crisis. It analyses the role of national and institutional risk culture, market competitiveness, organisational systems and institutional practices that led to a weakening of risk culture in financial institutions leading up to the financial crisis. It addresses how to assess and measure risk culture, and analyse the impact on performance and reputation. Finally it explores the impact of regulation and a variety of tools that can be applied from the board down to promote a healthy risk culture in the governance of financial institutions internal controls and risk culture in banks.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: Risk culture.- Chapter 3: Risk culture in different bank business.- Chapter 4: Risk culture in the regulation & supervision framework.- Chapter 5: Internal controls and risk cultures in banks.Chapter 6: Soft tools: HR management, leadership, diversity.- Chapter 7: Measuring and assessing risk culture.- Chapter 8: Impact on bank reputation. Chapter 9: Watchdog or Petdog: Do the media play a role in shaping banks risk culture?.- Chapter 10: Influence of National Culture on Bank Risk-Taking in the European System.- Chapter 11:  Risk-taking of European banks in CEECs: the role of national culture  and stake vs shareholder view.- Chapter 12: Risk culture in different bank business models: the case of real estate financing.- Chapter 13: Supporting an effective risk culture in private banking & wealth management.- Chapter 14: Appetite for Risk and Financial Literacy in Investment Planning.- Chapter 15: Bank credit risk management and risk culture.- Chapter 16: Credit rating culture.- Chapter 17: Accounting conservatism and risk culture.- Chapter 18: Auditing risk culture.
Rebecca S. Merkin, Baruch College, CUNY, New York, NY, USA

Saving Face in Business

Managing Cross-Cultural Interactions
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XIII, 285 p. 5 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-1-137-59173-9
       9781137591739
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
139,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Business / Corporate Communication/Public Relations
This book explains the subtle maneuvers of what researchers call “facework” and demonstrates the vital role it plays in the success or failure of cross-cultural interactions. Building on Geert Hofstede’s seminal research on cultural dimensions, Merkin synthesizes more recent research in business, communication, cross-cultural psychology and sociology to offer a model for better understanding facework.  Additionally, Merkin’s model shows how particular communication strategies can facilitate more successful cross-cultural interactions. The first book of its kind to focus on the practical aspects of employing face-saving, it is a needed text for academics, students, and business professionals negotiating with organizations from different cultures. 

Inhaltsangaben

1: Introduction.- 2: Principles of Saving Face.- 3: Culture and Face Enactment.- 4: Individualism-Collectivism and Saving Face.- 5: Individualism-Collectivism Applied to Direct versus Indirect Facework.- 6: Masculinity-Femininity Applied to Cooperative and Competitive Facework.- 7: Power Distance, Receiver Facework, Innovation, and Superior-Subordinate Relationships.- 8: Uncertainty Avoidance, Face Saving, and Organizations.- 9: Long/Short-Term Orientation, Facework, and Organizational Relationships.- 10: Overview and Facework Model Application for the Cross-Cultural Workplace. 
Michael Tavel Clarke, University of Calgary, Calgary, AB, Canada; David Wittenberg, University of Iowa, Iowa City, IA, USA

Scale in Literature and Culture

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIV, 323 p. 23 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-64241-3
       9783319642413
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Literary Theory / Critical Theory
This collection emphasizes a cross-disciplinary approach to the problem of scale, with essays ranging in subject matter from literature to film, architecture, the plastic arts, philosophy, and scientific and political writing. Its contributors consider a variety of issues provoked by the sudden and pressing shifts in scale brought on by globalization and the era of the Anthropocene, including: the difficulties of defining the concept of scale; the challenges that shifts in scale pose to knowledge formation; the role of scale in mediating individual subjectivity and agency; the barriers to understanding objects existing in scalar realms different from our own; the role of scale in mediating the relationship between humans and the environment; and the nature of power, authority, and democracy at different social scales.

Inhaltsangaben

1 Introduction.- 2 Composing a Cosmic View: Three Alternatives for Thinking Scale in the Anthropocene.- 3 Epistemic Things in Charles and Ray Eames’s Powers of Ten.- 4 Anti-Zoom.- 5 Making It Big: Picturing the Radio Age in King Kong.- 6 The Stature of Man: Population Bomb on Spaceship Earth.- 7 Large-Scale Fakes: Living in Architectural Reproductions.- 8 From the Goddess Ganga to a Teacup: On Amitav Ghosh’s Novel The Hungry Tide.- 9 World Literature as a Problem of Scale.- 10 Toward a Theory of the Megatext: Speculative Criticism and Richard Grossman’s ‘Breeze Avenue Working Paper’.- 11 Cutting Consciousness Down to Size: David Foster Wallace, Exformation, and the Scale of Encyclopedic Fiction.
Olga Castro, Aston University, Birmingham, UK; Sergi Mainer, University of Edinburgh, Edinburgh, UK; Svetlana Page, University of Birmingham, Birmingham, UK

Self-Translation and Power

Negotiating Identities in European Multilingual Contexts
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XV, 302 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-50780-8
       9781137507808
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Translation / European History
This book investigates the political, social, cultural and economic implications of self-translation in multilingual spaces in Europe. Engaging with the ‘power turn’ in translation studies contexts, it offers innovative perspectives on the role of self-translators as cultural and ideological mediators. The authors explore the unequal power relations and centre-periphery dichotomies of Europe’s minorised languages, literatures and cultures. They recognise that the self-translator’s double affiliation as author and translator places them in a privileged position to challenge power, to negotiate the experiences of the subaltern and colonised, and to scrutinise conflicting minorised vs. hegemonic cultural identities. Three main themes are explored in relation to self-translation: hegemony and resistance; self-minorisation and self-censorship; and collaboration, hybridisation and invisibility. This edited collection will appeal to scholars and students working on translation, transnational and postcolonial studies, and multilingual and multicultural identities. 

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Self-Translating, from Minorisation to Empowerment; Olga Castro, Sergi Mainer and Svetlana Page.- I. Hegemony and Resistance.- Chapter 2. Babel in (spite of) Belgium: Patterns of Self-Translation in a Bilingual Country; Rainier Grutman.- Chapter 3. The Three Powers of Self-Translating or Not Self-Translating: The Case of Contemporary Occitan Literature (1950-1980); Christian Lagarde.- Chapter 4. Self-Translation as Testimony: Halide Edib Rewrites The Turkish Ordeal; Mehtap Ozdemir.- II. Self-Minorisation and Self-Censorship.- Chapter 5. The Failure of Self-Translation in Catalan Literature; Josep Miquel Ramis.- Chapter 6. The Power and Burden of Self-Translation: Representation of “Turkish Identity” in Elif Shafak’s The Bastard of Istanbul; Arzu Akbatur.- Chapter 7. Self-Translation and Linguistic Reappropriation: Juan Gelman’s dibaxu;  Brandon Rigby.- Chapter 8. Self-Translating between Minor and Major Languages: a Hospitable Approach in Bernardo Atxaga’s Obabakoak; Harriet Hulme.- III. Collaboration, Hybridisation and Invisibility.- Chapter 9.  – Collaborative Self-Translation in a Minority Language: Power Implications in the Process, the Actors and the Literary Systems Involved; Elizabete Manterola Agirrezabalaga.- Chapter 10. Collaborative Self-Translation as a Catastrophe: The Case of Vadim Kozovoï in French; Julia Holter.- Chapter 11. Beyond Self-Translation: Amara Lakhous and Translingual Writing as Case Study;  Rita Wilson.- Chapter 12. Writing Beyond the Border: Max Frisch, Dialect and Place in Swiss-German Literature; Marc Cesar Rickenbach.
I.D. Visvikis, World Maritime University , Malm?, Sweden; P.M. Panayides, Cyprus University of Technology, Lemesos

Shipping Operations Management

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIII, 248 p. 11 illus., 6 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-62364-1
       9783319623641
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Law of the Sea, Air and Outer Space / Operations Management
This book focuses on the management of ship operations, an activity that requires integrative knowledge and technical expertise that spans various disciplines. As such, ship operations personnel are expected to be well-versed with aspects of management, economics, engineering, technology and law. Further, ship operations management requires the ability to identify and neutralize threats and to manage risks and make decisions that will optimize costs and contribute to performance improvements. Despite the fundamental nature of ship operations management, no book has ever attempted to reconcile and compile a comprehensive body of knowledge, while pursuing a coherent, structured and systematic approach.  This edited volume addresses that fundamental gap in the extant literature, and brings together a wealth of knowledge from experts in their respective fields. Concretely, it explores issues of organization, technical management, crewing and behavioral issues, chartering and post fixture, risk management, finance, legal aspects of international conventions and regulations, attainment of safety, security and marine insurance, as well as ocean governance and sustainability. As such, the book offers a vital reference guide for maritime companies and organizations, while also serving as a teaching supplement in academic and professional maritime programmes.

Inhaltsangaben

1 Fundamentals of Ship Management by Photis Panayides.- 2 Organisational Behaviour in Shipping by Aspasia Pastra, Ioannis Gkliatis and Dimitrios N. Koufopoulos.- 3 Commercial Operations Management by Nicolas Assimenos.- 4 Crew Operations Management by Julia Anastasiou.- 5 Technical Operations Management by David Furnival and Jonathan Crispe.- 6 The Maritime Labour Convention, 2006, Legal Jurisdiction and Port State Control by Cleopatra Doumbia-Henry.- 7 Managing Financial Resources in Shipping by Manolis G. Kavussanos, Ilias D. Visvikis and Ioannis Alexopoulos.- 8 Maritime Energy Management by Aykut Ölçer, Raphael Baumler, Fabio Ballini and Momoko Kitada.- 9 Safety and Security in Shipping Operations by Dimitrios Dalaklis.- 10 The Relationship between Nationality of Ships, 'Genuine Link' and Marine Insurance by George Theocharidis and Patrick Donner.- 11 Ocean Governance and Sustainability by Lawrence P. Hildebrand and Neil A. Bellefontaine.
Hideaki Suzuki, Nagasaki University, Nagasaki, Japan

Slave Trade Profiteers in the Western Indian Ocean

Suppression and Resistance in the Nineteenth Century
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 224 p. 3 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-59802-4
       9783319598024
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of South Asia / Imperialism and Colonialism
This book examines how slave traders interacted with and resisted the British suppression campaign in the nineteenth-century western Indian Ocean. By focusing on the transporters, buyers, sellers, and users of slaves in the region, the book traces the many links between slave trafficking and other types of trade. Drawing upon first-person slave accounts, travelogues, and archival sources, it documents the impact of abolition on Zanzibar politics, Indian merchants, East African coastal urban societies, and the entirety of maritime trade in the region. Ultimately, this ground-breaking work uncovers how western Indian Ocean societies experienced the slave trade suppression campaign as a political intervention, with important implications for Indian Ocean history and the history of the slave trade.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: Slave Traders and the Western Indian Ocean.- 2. The Slave Trade in the Nineteenth-Century Western Indian Ocean: An Overview.- 3. Resistance of Transporters: or, A Cause for Insufficiency of the Indian Navy's Suppression, prior to 1860.- 4. 'They are raising the devil with the trading Dows': Reconsidering the Royal Navy's Anti-Slave Trade Campaign from the Slave Trader Perspective.- 5. Chains of Reselling: Reconsidering Slave Dealings based on Slaves' Own Voices.- 6. The Transformation of the East African Coastal Urban Society in the Slave Distribution System.- 7. Consulate Politics in the Scramble after Sa'id: How Did the British Consulate Secure Superiority to the Sultan of Zanzibar?.- 8. 1860: The Rigby Manumission and the Rise of the Nationality Problem of Indian Residents.- 9. Beyond the Horizon: The Agency of Dhow Traders, L'acte de Francisation and International Politics in the Western Indian Ocean, c. 1860-1900.- 10. General Conclusion: Slave Trade Profiteers.r>
Amy Van Looy, Ghent University (Faculty of Economics and Business Administration), Ghent, Belgium

Social Media Management

Technologies and Strategies for Creating Business Value
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIX, 250 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-21989-9
       9783319219899
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Media Management / IT in Business
This undergraduate textbook adopts the perspective of organizations - not individuals - and clarifies the impact of social media on their different departments or disciplines, while also exploring how organizations use social media to create business value. To do so, the book pursues a uniquely multi-disciplinary approach, embracing IT, marketing, HR and many other fields. Readers will benefit from a comprehensive selection of current topics, including: tools, tactics and strategies for social media, internal and external communication, viral marketing campaigns, social CRM, employer branding, e-recruiting, search engine optimization, social mining, sentiment analysis, crowdfunding, and legal and ethical issues.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Definitions, Social Media Types and Tools.- Social media Strategy and Return on Investment.- Online Advertising and Viral Campaigns.- Social Customer Relationship Management.- Search Engine Optimization.- Sentiment Analysis and Opinion Mining (Business Intelligence).- Social Network Data and Predictive Mining (Business Intelligence).- e-Recruitment.- Crowdfunding.- Legal and Ethical Issues in Social Media.- Wrap-up.
Amy Van Looy, Ghent University (Faculty of Economics and Business Administration), Ghent, Belgium

Social Media Management

Technologies and Strategies for Creating Business Value
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIX, 250 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-37305-8
       9783319373058
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Media Management / IT in Business
This undergraduate textbook adopts the perspective of organizations - not individuals - and clarifies the impact of social media on their different departments or disciplines, while also exploring how organizations use social media to create business value. To do so, the book pursues a uniquely multi-disciplinary approach, embracing IT, marketing, HR and many other fields. Readers will benefit from a comprehensive selection of current topics, including: tools, tactics and strategies for social media, internal and external communication, viral marketing campaigns, social CRM, employer branding, e-recruiting, search engine optimization, social mining, sentiment analysis, crowdfunding, and legal and ethical issues.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Definitions, Social Media Types and Tools.- Social media Strategy and Return on Investment.- Online Advertising and Viral Campaigns.- Social Customer Relationship Management.- Search Engine Optimization.- Sentiment Analysis and Opinion Mining (Business Intelligence).- Social Network Data and Predictive Mining (Business Intelligence).- e-Recruitment.- Crowdfunding.- Legal and Ethical Issues in Social Media.- Wrap-up.
Syed Farid Alatas, National University of Singapore, Singapore, Singapore; Vineeta Sinha, National University of Singapore, Singapore, Singapore

Sociological Theory Beyond the Canon

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten X, 391 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-41133-4
       9781137411334
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociological Theory / Social Theory
This book expands the sociological canon by introducing non-Western and female voices, and subjects the existing canon itself to critique. Including chapters on both the ‘founding fathers’ of sociology and neglected thinkers it highlights the biases of Eurocentrism and androcentrism, while also offering much-needed correctives to them. The authors challenge a dominant account of the development of sociological theory which would have us believe that it was only Western European and later North American white males in the nineteenth and early twentieth century who thought in a creative and systematic manner about the origins and nature of the emerging modernity of their time. This integrated and contextualised account seeks to restructure the ways in which we theorise the emergence of the classical sociological canon. This book’s global scope fills a significant lacuna and provides a unique teaching resource to students of classical sociological theory.

Inhaltsangaben

1: Introduction.- 2: Ibn Khaldun.- 3: Karl Marx.- 4: Harriet Martineau.- 5: Max Weber.- 6: Jose Rizal.- 7: Emile Durkheim.- 8: Said Nursi.- 9: Pandita Ramabai Saraswati.- 10: Florence Nightingale.- 11: Benoy Kumar Sarkar.- 12: Epilogue.-




J. Bernstein

Standing Room Only

Marketing Insights for Engaging Performing Arts Audiences
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XII, 408 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-137-28293-4
       9781137282934
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
48,14 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Marketing / Theatre and Performance Studies
Standing Room Only combines practical advice for creating a strategic marketing program and maintaining a successful performing arts organization. This revised edition lays out a framework to navigate the digital age, from online ticketing options, to marketing options in social, and mobile media.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction 1. The Performing Arts: History And Issues; An Ongoing Crisis? A Growing Crisis? 2. The Evolution and Principles of Marketing 3. Understanding the Performing Arts Market: How Consumers Think 4. Exploring Characteristics of Current and Potential Performing Arts Attenders 5. Planning Strategy and Applying the Strategic Marketing Process 6. Identifying Market Segments, Selecting Target Markets, and Positioning the Offer 7. Conducting and Using Market Research 8. Using Strategic Marketing to Define and Analyze the Product Offering 9. Managing Location, Capacity, and Ticketing Systems 10. Delivering Value and Maximizing Revenue Through Pricing Strategies 11. Identifying and Capitalizing on Brand Identity 12. Formulating Communications Strategies 13. Delivering the Message: Advertising, Personal Selling, Sales Promotion, Public Relations, and Crisis Management 14. Harnessing and Leveraging the Power of Digital Marketing Methods 15. Building Audience Frequency and Loyalty 16. Focusing on the Customer Experience and Delivering Great Customer Service 17. Audiences for Now; Audiences for the Future
Jean-Michel Josselin, University of Rennes 1, Rennes; Benoît Le Maux, University of Rennes 1, Rennes, France

Statistical Tools for Program Evaluation

Methods and Applications to Economic Policy, Public Health, and Education
Springer International Publishing
Seiten X, 531 p. 139 illus., 86 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-52826-7
       9783319528267
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Public Economics / Public Health
This book provides a self-contained presentation of the statistical tools required for evaluating public programs, as advocated by many governments, the World Bank, the European Union, and the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development. After introducing the methodological framework of program evaluation, the first chapters are devoted to the collection, elementary description and multivariate analysis of data as well as the estimation of welfare changes. The book then successively presents the tools of ex-ante methods (financial analysis, budget planning, cost-benefit, cost-effectiveness and multi-criteria evaluation) and ex-post methods (benchmarking, experimental and quasi-experimental evaluation). The step-by-step approach and the systematic use of numerical illustrations equip readers to handle the statistics of program evaluation. It not only offers practitioners from public administrations, consultancy firms and nongovernmental organizations the basic tools and advanced techniques used in program assessment, it is also suitable for executive management training, upper undergraduate and graduate courses, as well as for self-study.

Inhaltsangaben

Statistical Tools for Program Evaluation: introduction and overview.- Part I: Identifying the context of the program. Description of problems and needs, assessment of relationships among variables.- Sampling and construction of variables.- Descriptive statistics and interval estimation.- Measuring and visualizing associations.- Econometric analysis.- Estimation of welfare changes.- Part II: Ex ante evaluation. Assessment of different policy strategies that might solve the problems.- Financial appraisal.- Budget impact analysis.- Cost benefit analysis.- Cost effectiveness analysis.- Multi-criteria decision analysis.- Part III: Ex post evaluation. Assessment of the effects of a strategy after its implementation.- Follow-up by benchmarking.- Randomized controlled experiments.- Quasi-experiments.
Philippe Chereau, SKEMA Business School, Lille, France; Pierre-Xavier Meschi, IAE Aix-en-Provence, Aix-en-Provence, France

Strategic Consulting

Tools and methods for successful strategy missions
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXII, 247 p. 86 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-64421-9
       9783319644219
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
40,65 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership /
Whether you are a business leader, internal business partner or external consultant, there are six key strategy missions that you will need to undertake as you deal with the  re-positioning and growth issues that all businesses face at one stage or another during their life-cycle:assessing the environment
defining a strategic positioning
choosing a growth strategy
expanding internationally
combining strategy, and
innovation or (re)designing the business model
Meschi and Chereau bridge the gaps between academic theory and real world practice, between strategic analysis and strategic management, and between planning and doing, by providing you with six essential mission briefings to help you deliver the best possible outcome. Each briefing is structured the same way, beginning with an outline of the consulting mission and its content before examining the theoretical background, before setting out a complete and practical methodology to complete the mission along with all the tools you will need along the way.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1 Assessing the environment.- Chapter2 Defining a Strategic Positioning.- Chapter3 Choosing Growth Strategy.- Chapter4 Expanding Internationally.- Chapter5 Combining Strategy and Innovation.- Chapter6 (Re)Designing the Business Model.
Bonnie Keith, The Forefront Group; Kate Vitasek, University of Tennessee, USA; Karl Manrodt, Georgia Southern University, USA; Jeanne Kling, University of Tennessee, USA

Strategic Sourcing in the New Economy

Harnessing the Potential of Sourcing Business Models for Modern Procurement
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVIII, 448 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-55218-1
       9781137552181
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
69,54 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Organization / Management
This book provides a comprehensive overview of each of the sourcing business model. Readers will master the art and science of strategic sourcing by being able to chart a unique path that fits their capacity to apply more the full continuum of strategic sourcing concepts and tools.

Inhaltsangaben

Contents Endorsements Introduction PART I 1. The 800 Lb. Gorilla Has Left The Building 2. The Only Person Who Likes Change Is A Wet Baby PART II 3. Sourcing Is A Continuum 4. Trekking Through Transactions 5. Embracing Co-Dependency: Enhancing Success 6. Vested: A Brave New World 7. Investment Based Sourcing Models PART III 8. Selecting The Right Sourcing Business Model For Your Situation 9. Considerations Crossing The Continuum PART IV 10. Maturity Meets Modality 11. There ' 's No Such Thing As Half-Trust 12. Getting To We Conclusion Appendix Glossary Acknowledgements Notes Index
Stefano Caselli, Bocconi University, Milan, Italy; Stefano Gatti, Bocconi University, Milan, Italy

Structured Finance

Techniques, Products and Market
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XI, 207 p. 83 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-54123-5
       9783319541235
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Financial Services / Business Finance
This book, now in its second edition, provides an in-depth overview of all segments of the structured finance business, with particular reference to market trends, deal characteristics and deal structuring. The goal is to assist readers in gaining a clear understanding of the common features of structured finance transactions. The process of deal structuring for each type of transaction is carefully analyzed, with extensively updated chapters on asset securitization, project finance, structured leasing transactions and leveraged acquisitions. In the new edition, particular attention is paid to novel areas of intervention, such as public–private partnerships and non-performing loans in the resolution of bank restructuring. Although the subject of much criticism, structured finance, when used properly, offers an effective solution to the credit crunch that many European countries are suffering and is also a way to revive a single capital market for debt instruments. Readers will find this book to be an illuminating guide to the business and to the best market practices in organizing transactions. It will be of value for BSc and MSc finance students, professionals and consultants alike.

Inhaltsangaben

1 Characteristics and common features of structured finance transactions.- 2 The Alchemy of securitization. Evolution and perspectives.- 3 Project Finance.- 4 Structured leasing transactions.- 5 Leveraged acquisitions: Technical and financial issues.- 6 Issues and trends in project finance for public infrastructure.- 7 Securitisation of non-performing loans.
Michel Foucault, Paris; François Ewald, Columbia Law School , New York, NY, USA; Alessandro Fontana, École Normale Supérieure, Paris, France; Frédéric Gros, Paris-Est Créteil Val-de-Marne University, Paris, France

Subjectivity and Truth

Lectures at the Collège de France, 1980-1981
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XV, 331 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-4039-8664-1
       9781403986641
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Social Philosophy / Philosophy of Man
“The working hypothesis is this:  it is true that sexuality as experience is obviously not independent of codes and systems of prohibitions, but it needs to be recalled straightaway that these codes are astonishingly stable, continuous, and slow to change.  It needs to be recalled also that the way in which they are observed or transgressed also seems to be very stable and very repetitive. On the other hand, the point of historical mobility, what no doubt change most often, what are most fragile, are modalities of experience.”
- Michel Foucault  In 1981 Foucault delivered a course of lectures which marked a decisive reorientation in his thought and of the project of a History of Sexuality outlined in 1976.  It was in these lectures that arts of living became the focal point around which he developed a new way of thinking about subjectivity.  It was also the moment when Foucault problematized a conception of ethics understood as the patient elaboration of a relationship of self to self.  It was the study of the sexual experience of the Ancients that made these new conceptual developments possible.  Within this framework, Foucault examined medical writings, tracts on marriage, the philosophy of love, or the prognostic value of erotic dreams, for evidence of a structuration of the subject in his relationship to pleasures (aphrodisia) which is prior to the modern construction of a science of sexuality as well as to the Christian fearful obsession with the flesh.  What was actually at stake was establishing that the imposition of a scrupulous and interminable hermeneutics of desire was the invention of Christianity.  But to do this it was necessary to establish the irreducible specificity of ancient techniques of self. In these lectures, which clearly foreshadow The Use of Pleasures and The Care of Self, Foucault examines the Greek subordination of gender differences to the primacy of an opposition between active and passive, as well as the development by Imperial stoicism of a model of the conjugal bond which advocates unwavering fidelity and shared feelings and which leads to the disqualification of homosexuality.

Inhaltsangaben

Foreword: François Ewald and Alessandro Fontana.- Abbreviations.- 1. one 7 JANUARY 1981.- 2. two 14 JANUARY 1981.- 3. three 21 JANUARY 1981.- 4. four 28 JANUARY 1981.- 5. five 4 FEBRUARY 1981.- 6. six 11 FEBRUARY 1981.- 7. seven 25 FEBRUARY 1981.- 8. eight 4 MARCH 1981.- 9. nine 11 MARCH 1981.- 10. ten 18 MARCH 1981.- 11. eleven 25 MARCH 1981.- 12. twelve 1 APRIL 1981.- 13. Course summary.- 14. Course context.- Index of notions.- Index of names.
Erik Hofmann, University of St. Gallen, St. Gallen, Switzerland; Urs Magnus Strewe, CRX Markets AG, Munich, Germany; Nicola Bosia, University of St. Gallen, St. Gallen, Switzerland

Supply Chain Finance and Blockchain Technology

The Case of Reverse Securitisation
Springer International Publishing
Seiten VIII, 91 p. 26 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-62370-2
       9783319623702
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Supply Chain Management / Financial Services
This book investigates how the Blockchain Technology (BCT) for Supply Chain Finance (SCF) programs allows businesses to come together in partnerships and accelerate cash flows throughout the supply chain. BCT promises to change the way individuals and corporations exchange value and information over the Internet, and is perfectly positioned to enable new levels of collaboration among the supply chain actors. The book reveals new opportunities stemming from the application of BCT to SCF financing solutions, particularly reverse factoring – or approved payables financing. To do so, it first identifies the principal barriers and pain points in delivering financing solutions. Then, a possible blockchain-driven supply chain model is defined. Using this framework, the book subsequently discusses relevant use cases for the technology, which could open up new opportunities in the SCF space. It demonstrates that blockchain and distributed ledgers technologies could deliver substantial benefits for all parties involved in SCF transactions, promising to expedite the processes and lower the overall costs of financing programs. Industry giants such as IBM, Maersk, China-based Dianrong and FnConn (a Foxconn subsidiary) are currently working to digitize the global, cross-border supply chain using blockchain technology, and will likely soon create blockchain platforms for supply chain finance. These solutions aim to reduce complexity and make data sharing more secure, accurate and efficient. This book offers a highly topical resource for stakeholders across the entire supply chain, helping them prepare for the upcoming technological revolution.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction - Why to pay attention on blockchain-driven supply chain finance?.- Background I - What is buyer-led supply chain finance?.- Background II - What is reverse securitisation?.- Background III - What is blockchain technology?.- Concept - Where are the opportunities of blockchain-driven supply chain finance?.- Discussion - How does the full potential of blockchain technology in supply chain finance look like?.- Conclusion - What can we learn from blockchain-driven supply chain finance?.
Kevin LaGrandeur, New York Institute of Technology, New York, NY, USA; James J. Hughes, University of Massachusetts Boston, Boston, MA, USA

Surviving the Machine Age

Intelligent Technology and the Transformation of Human Work
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 166 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-51164-1
       9783319511641
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Science and Technology Studies /
This book examines the current state of the technologically-caused unemployed, and attempts to answer the question of how to proceed into an era beyond technological unemployment. Beginning with an overview of the most salient issues, the experts collected in this work present their own novel visions of the future and offer suggestions for adapting to a more symbiotic economic relationship with AI. These suggestions include different modes of dealing with education, aging workers, government policies, and the machines themselves. Ultimately, they lay out a whole new approach to economics, one in which we learn to merge with and adapt to our increasingly intelligent creations.       

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: An Overview of Emerging Technology and Employment in the Early Twenty-First Century.-2. Is Technological Unemployment Real? An Assessment and a Plea for Abundance Economics.-3.  Creative Destruction: Emerging Technology and the Changing Course of Job Creation.-4. Employment In The Age of Em: Simulated Brains and the Economics of Labor.-5. Building a Postwork Utopia: Technological Unemployment, Life Extension and the Future of Human Flourishing.-6. Can We Build a Resilient Employment Market for an Uncertain Future?.-7. Unconditional Basic Income as a Solution to Technological Unemployment.-8.Policy Solutions to Technological Unemployment.-9. What is the Job Creation Potential of New Technologies?.-10. Rage Against the Machine: Rethinking Education in the Face of Technological Unemployment.
Thomas Osburg, Fresenius Business School, Munich, Germany; Christiane Lohrmann, FranklinCovey Leadership Institute GmbH, Grünwald, Germany

Sustainability in a Digital World

New Opportunities Through New Technologies
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXI, 268 p. 44 illus., 31 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-54602-5
       9783319546025
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sustainability Management / IT in Business
This book offers a comprehensive introduction to the different emerging concepts in the innovative area of sustainability and digital technology. More than 20 leading thinkers from the fields of digitalization, strategic management, sustainability and organizational development share clearly structured insights on the latest developments, advances and remaining challenges concerning the role of sustainability in an increasingly digital world. The authors not only introduce a profound and unique analysis on the state-of-the art of sustainability and digital transformation, but also provide business leaders with practical advice on how to apply the latest management thinking to their daily business decisions. Further, a number of significant case studies exemplify the issues discussed and serve as valuable blueprints for decision makers.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I: Governance, Strategy and Society.- Part II: Markets, Business and Stakeholders.- Part III: Participation, Education and CSR.
Malcolm H.D. Kemp, Nematrian Limited, London, UK

Systemic Risk

A Practitioner's Guide to Measurement, Management and Analysis
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXVI, 327 p. 15 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-56586-0
       9781137565860
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Risk Management / Banking
Systemic Risk provides readers with a wide-ranging practical guide to systemic risk in the financial system. It challenges the notion that systemic risk is exclusively about interconnectivities within the financial system, showing that past systemic risk crises have often involved a broader range of vulnerabilities.It describes how regulators and governments are seeking to manage systemic risk, and how their concerns are driving change in regulatory and business environments across the financial sector. It sets out how firms and practitioners can effectively respond to these changes (covering topics such as data needs, quantification of risk exposures, management disciplines and skillset requirements etc.). It highlights the sources and characteristics of systemic risk and the concentrations of exposures to this risk. It also links systemic risk with other risk disciplines including exploring how systemic risk ties in with liquidity risk and credit risk and how it interacts with central clearing, collateralisation and pricing of derivatives.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface 1. Introduction 2. The financial sector canvas: similarities and differences between sectors 3. How the canvas can be damaged: systemic risk, its causes and links to other risks 4. Regulator and government responses: macro-prudential policy and other drivers 5. Network effects: the technological and societal environment 6. Measuring systemic risk: 'big data' challenges and network complexities 7. Managing systemic risk: tools and techniques for firms, risk managers and regulators 8. Profiting from systemic risk: adapting business models to respond to systemic risk
Caroline Tagg, Open University , Milton Keynes; Philip Seargeant, The University of Nottingham Ningbo , Ningbo, China; Amy Aisha Brown, Open University , Milton Keynes, UK

Taking Offence on Social Media

Conviviality and Communication on Facebook
Springer International Publishing
Seiten IX, 139 p. 9 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-56716-7
       9783319567167
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Applied Linguistics / Sociolinguistics
This book explores communication on Facebook, developing the new theoretical concept of context design as a way of understanding the dynamics of online interaction. Against a backdrop of fake news and other controversies surrounding online political debate, the authors focus on inadvertent acts of offence on Facebook; that is, when users of the site unwittingly offend or are offended by the airing of political or religious views, or of opinions deemed racist or sexist. Drawing on a survey of Facebook users, they explain why instances of offence occur and what users report doing in response. They argue that Facebook users contribute to the construction of a particular social space, one that is characterised by online conviviality and a belief that Facebook is not the place for serious debate. These views in turn shape the kind of political debate that can take place on the site. This thought-provoking book will appeal to scholars and students of applied linguistics, and anyone interested in the role of social media in contemporary political and social life.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Creating Facebook: A Study of Online Conflict and Conviviality.- Chapter 2. Online Communication as Context Design.- Chapter 3. Giving and Taking Offence: Theoretical and Empirical Approaches.- Chapter 4. Social Media and Intradiverse Networks.- Chapter 5. The Impact of Intradiversity on Online Offence.- Chapter 6. Constructing Conviviality in Online Interaction.
Emma Rees, University of Chester, Chester, UK

Talking Bodies

Interdisciplinary Perspectives on Embodiment, Gender and Identity
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 233 p. 3 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-63777-8
       9783319637778
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Cultural Theory / Feminism
In this collection leading thinkers, writers, and activists offer their responses to the simple question “do I have a body, or am I my body?”. The essays engage with the array of meanings that our bodies have today, ranging from considerations of nineteenth-century discourses of bodily shame and otherness, through to arguing for a brand new corporeal vocabulary for the twenty-first century. Increasing numbers of people are choosing to modify their bodies, but as the essays in this volume show, this is far from being a new practice: over hundreds of years, it has evolved and accrued new meanings. This richly interdisciplinary volume maps a range of cultural anxieties about the body, resulting in a timely and compelling book that makes a vital contribution to today’s key debates about embodiment.  

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: Varieties of Embodiment and ‘Corporeal Style’; Emma L. E. Rees.- 2. Edith Wharton: an Heiress to Gay Male Sexual Radicalism?; Naomi Wolf.- 3. Losing Face Among the Natives: ‘something about tattooing and tabooing’ in Melville’s Typee; Graham Atkin.- 4. What the Body Tells us: Transgender Strategies, Beauty, and Self-Consciousness; Marzia Mauriello.- 5.Tattoos: an Embodiment of Desire; Nina Nyman.- 6. Learning Womanhood: Body Modification, Girls and Identity; Abigail Tazzyman.- 7. The Construction of a Personal Norm of Physical and Psychological ‘Well-Being’ in Female Discourse; Maria Krebber.- 8. No Body, No Crime? (Representations of) Sexual Violence Online; Jemma Tosh.- 9. Heteronormativity as a Painful Script: How Women with Vulvar Pain (re)Negotiate Sexual Practice; Renita Sörensdotter.- 10. Queer Wounds: Writing Autobiography Past the Limits of Language; Quinn Eades.- 11.The Trouble with Body Image: the Need for a Better Corporeal Vocabulary; Melisa Trujillo.
Jen Cadwallader, Randolph–Macon College, Ashland, VA, USA; Laurence W Mazzeno, Alvernia University, Reading, PA, USA

Teaching Victorian Literature in the Twenty-First Century

A Guide to Pedagogy
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXV, 342 p. 9 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-58885-8
       9783319588858
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Nineteenth-Century Literature / Literature and Technology/Media
This edited collection offers undergraduate Literature instructors a guide to the pedagogy and teaching of Victorian literature in liberal arts classrooms. With numerous essays focused on thematic course design, this volume reflects the increasingly interdisciplinary nature of the literature classroom. A section on genre provides suggestions on approaching individual works and discussing their influence on production of texts. Sections on digital humanities and “out of the classroom” approaches to Victorian literature reflect current practices and developing trends. The concluding section offers three different versions of an “ideal” course, each of which shows how thematic, disciplinary, genre, and technological strands may be woven together in meaningful ways. Professors of introductory literature courses aimed at non-English majors to advanced seminars for majors will find accessible and innovative course ideas supplemented with a variety of versatile teaching materials, including syllabi, assignments, and in-class activities.

Inhaltsangaben

1 ?Introduction.- 2 Global Victorians.- 3 Learning through Victorian Garbage: Disgust and Desire in an Interdisciplinary Capstone Course.- 4 Teaching Dickens by the Numbers: A Case Study of The Mystery of Edwin Drood.- 5 Teaching Penny Bloods and Dreadfuls.- 6 Fiction and Finance.- 7 Teaching Across Disciplines: Victorian Literature and Science.- 8 Using Debate to Help Undergraduate Non-Majors Connect with Silas Marner.- 9 Getting More Bang for Your Buck: Teaching Nineteenth-Century Literature and Gender in a Survey Course.- 10 Faith and Doubt in the Nineteenth Century.- 11.Contextualizing the Novel in the Victorian Literature Classroom.- 12 Teaching Victorian Poetry with Twenty-First-Century Psychology.- 13 Teaching the “Forgotten” Genre: Victorian Drama.- 14 The Past as Persistent Presence: Teaching Victorian Nonfiction.- 15 “The office is one thing, and private life is another”: Social Networking with the Victorians.- 16 Teaching About and Through Computing: Victorian Record Keeping, Data Management, and the Class Edition.- 17 Virtually London: Literature and Laptops.- 18 Dickens and the Public Humanities: A Service-Learning Approach.- 19 Adventures in Living Like a Victorian.- 20 Teaching Neo-Victorian Literature.- 21 A Model Victorian Survey Course.- 22 Victorian Visions: Literary Imaginings of Social (In)Justice in the Late Nineteenth Century.- 23 Ecocritical and Environmental Approaches: Teaching Victorian Poets and Novelists in the Age of the Internet.- 24 Appendix. Further Resources.
Henry Kaufman, New York, , USA

Tectonic Shifts in Financial Markets

People, Policies, and Institutions
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVII, 180 p. 30 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-48386-3
       9783319483863
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
29,95 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Finance, general / Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics
In this wide-ranging book, Wall Street legend Henry Kaufman recounts the events surrounding the catastrophic collapse of Lehman Brothers from his then vantage point on the board. He explains how, ironically, the Federal Reserve’s shortcomings contributed to its growing power. And he argues that Dodd-Frank – by sanctioning rather than truly addressing the too?big?to?fail dilemma – squandered a rare opportunity for essential reform. Whether sparring in print with Citicorp’s mercurial Walter Wriston, consulting with British Prime Minister Margaret Thatcher, spurning a deal with junk bond king Michael Milken, or reflecting on his long-time friend Paul Volcker, Kaufman brings readers inside post-war Wall Street. Looking ahead, he dissects major national and global trends and the likely future of credit markets, financial institutions, and leading economies. As we search for bearings in the wake of the 2008 financial debacle, Henry Kaufman offers sage and penetrating analysis of today’s superheated and – he argues – still?fragile financial world.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1.How It Began at Salomon Brothers.-Chapter 2.The Art and Science of Forecasting. Chapter3.Presidents versus Fed Chairmen. Chapter4.Paul Volcker, Perennial Public Servant.-Chapter5.The Fed and Financial Markets: Greenspan and Bernanke.-Chapter6.Charles Sanford and the Rise of Quantitative Risk Management.-Chapter7.The Dominance of Walter Wriston.- Chapter8.The Bigness Crisis.-Chapter9.A Meeting with Margaret Thatcher.-Chapter10.Michael Milken: Moving Junk Bonds to Preeminence.-Chapter11.Financial Crises and Regulatory Reform.-Chapter12.The Present Value of Financial History.-Chapter13.The Politicizing of the Fed.-Chapter14.Tectonic Shifts.-Chapter15.You Can’t Go Home Again.
Peter Mickan, University of Adelaide Faculty of Arts, Adelaide, , Australia; Elise Lopez, University of Adelaide, Adelaide, , Australia

Text-Based Research and Teaching

A Social Semiotic Perspective on Language in Use
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXIII, 372 p. 53 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-59848-6
       9781137598486
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Semiotics / Discourse Analysis
Contributions in this book illustrate the many methods available for researching language in context and for the analysis of everyday text types. Each chapter highlights language as a resource for the expression of meanings—a social semiotic resource. Text analysis is used to reveal our capacity to formulate multiple meanings for participation in different social practices—in relationships, in work, in education and in leisure. The approach is applied in text-based teaching and in the critical analysis of public discourses. The texts come from different social spheres including banking, language classes, senate hearings, national tests and textbooks, and interior architecture. Text-based research makes a major contribution to Critical Discourse Analysis. The editors and authors of this book demonstrate the value of text analysis for awareness of the role of language for accountable citizenship and for teaching and learning. This book will be of interest to anyone researching in the fields of language learning and teaching, functional linguistics, multimodality, social semiotics, systemic functional linguistics, text-based teaching, and genre analysis, as well as literacy teachers and undergraduate and postgraduate students of linguistics, media and education.

Inhaltsangaben

- Chapter 1: Introduction: Text-Based Research and Teaching.- Part I: Text-Based Research in Everyday Social Settings.- Chapter 2: Text-Based Research and Teaching from a Social Semiotic Perspective: Transformative Research and Pedagogy.- Chapter 3: A Month of Climate Change in Australia: A Corpus-Driven Analysis of Media Discourse.- Chapter 4: A (Critical) Discourse Analysis of Alan Greenspan’s Public Discourses on the Housing Bubble: The Trigger to the Global Financial Crisis.- Chapter 5: A Social Semiotic Perspective of Multimodal Banking Discourse in the Context of the Global Financial Crisis.- Chapter 6: Locating Voices in Memoir: Modelling Voice through an Analysis of Interpersonal Linguistic Choices.- Chapter 7: The Generic Structure of the Call for Papers of Predatory Journals.- Part II: Text-Based Language Pedagogy.- Chapter 8: Students Questions in Talk around Children’s Picture Books.- Chapter 9: Text-Based Teaching in a High School Setting.- Chapter 10: A Socio-Semiotic Perspective on a Unit of Work in an Indonesian Textbook.- Chapter 11: The Text-Based Approach in the German as a Foreign Language Secondary Classroom: A Case Study.- Chapter 12: Spoken Texts in High-Stakes EFL Testing in Korea and their Impact on High School English Teaching.- Chapter 13: Text: A Means for Language Socialisation in Communities of Practice.- Chapter 14: Self-Learning a Foreign Language through Literature: A Case Study of a Self-Learner’s Socialisation into Czech through Czech Literature.- Chapter 15: Thematic Options and Success in ESL Writing.- Chapter 16: Using Student-Selected Texts in Speaking Classes.- Chapter 17: ‘Now We Are All Friends’: An Exploratory Study of Social Networking Texts in the Context of Second Language Learning.- Chapter 18: Academic Literacies in the Field of Interior Architecture: A Multimodal Analysis.- Chapter 19: Documentation, Renewal and Semiotic Mediation: Continuing Text-Based Research and Teaching.
Berit Åström, Umeå University , Umeå, Sweden

The Absent Mother in the Cultural Imagination

Missing, Presumed Dead
Springer International Publishing
Seiten IX, 264 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-49036-6
       9783319490366
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Cultural Theory / Cultural History
This anthology explores the recurring trope of the dead or absent mother in Western cultural productions. Across historical periods and genres, this dialogue has been employed to articulate and debate questions of politics and religion, social and cultural change as well as issues of power and authority within the family. Åström seeks to investigate the many functions and meanings of the dialogue by covering extensive material from the 1200s to 2014 including hagiography, romances, folktales, plays, novels, children’s literature and graphic novels, as well as film and television. This is achieved by looking at the discourse both as products of the time and culture that produced the various narratives, and as part of an on-going cultural conversation that spans the centuries, resulting in an innovative text that will be of great interest to all scholars of gender, feminist and media studies.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. The Lady Vanishes: The Rise of the Spectral Mother.- 3. Saintly Protection: The Post-Mortem 'Mothers'of Medieval Hagiography.- 4. 'Be War Be My Wo': Gaynour and Her Mother in The Awntyrs off Arthure.- 5. 'A dumme thynge': The Posthumous Voice as Rhetoric in the Mothers' Legacies of Dorothy Leigh and Elizabeth Joscelin.- 6. Dead Mothers and Absent Stepmothers in Slovak and Romani Fairy Tales.- 7. 'Born in a Tempest when My Mother Died': Shakespeare's Motherless Daughter.- 8. Ophelia's Mother: The Phantom of Maternity in Shakepseare's Hamlet.- 9. Missing Mothers on the Page and Stage: Hamlet and Henry V.- 10. A Side of the Family, Hold the Mother: Dare Wright and Her Fictive Kin in the Lonely Doll Series.- 11. Dead, but not Gone: Mother and Othermother in Holly Black and Ted Naifeh's The Good Neighbours.- 12. Victims and Villains: The Legacy of Mother Blame in Violent-Eye American Literature.- 13. Symbolic Matricide gone Awry: On Absent and - Maybe Even Worse - Present Mothers in Horror Movies.- 14. Television and the Absent Mother: Why Girls and Young Women Struggle to Find the Maternal Role.- 15. Marginalizing Motherhood: Postfeminist Fathers and Dead Mothers in Animated Film.-
Stephen Kemmis, Charles Sturt University, Wagga Wagga, NSW, Australia; Robin McTaggart, Griffith University, Gold Coast, QLD, Australia; Rhonda Nixon, University of Victoria, Victoria, BC, Canada

The Action Research Planner

Doing Critical Participatory Action Research
Springer Singapore
Seiten XI, 200 p. 6 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-981-4560-66-5
       9789814560665
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Teaching and Teacher Education / Learning & Instruction
A fully-updated and reworked version of the classic book by Stephen Kemmis and Robin McTaggart, now joined by Rhonda Nixon, The Action Research Planner is a detailed guide to developing and conducting a critical participatory action research project. The authors outline new views on ‘participation’ (based on Jürgen Habermas’s notion of a ‘public sphere’), ‘practice’ (as shaped by practice architectures), and ‘research’ (as research within practice traditions). They provide five extended examples of critical participatory action research studies. The book includes a range of resources for people planning a critical participatory research initiative, providing guidance on how to establish an action research group and identify a shared concern, research ethics, principles of procedure for action researchers, protocols for collaborative work, keeping a journal, gathering evidence, reporting, and choosing academic partners. Unlike earlier editions, The Action Research Planner focuses specifically on critical participatory action research, which occupies a particular (critical) niche in the action research 'family'. The Action Research Planner is an essential guide to planning and undertaking this type of research.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introducing critical participatory action research.- 2. A new view of participation: Participation in public spheres.- 3. A new view of practice: Practices held in place by practice architectures.- 4. A new view of research: Research within practice traditions.- 5. Doing critical participatory action research: The ‘planner’ part.- 6. Examples of critical participatory action research.- 7. Resources for critical participatory action researchers.- Index.    
Stephen Kemmis, Charles Sturt University, Wagga Wagga, NSW, Australia; Robin McTaggart, Griffith University, Gold Coast, QLD, Australia; Rhonda Nixon, University of Victoria, Victoria, BC, Canada

The Action Research Planner

Doing Critical Participatory Action Research
Springer Singapore
Seiten XI, 200 p. 6 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-981-10-1350-8
       9789811013508
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
53,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Teaching and Teacher Education / Learning & Instruction
A fully-updated and reworked version of the classic book by Stephen Kemmis and Robin McTaggart, now joined by Rhonda Nixon, The Action Research Planner is a detailed guide to developing and conducting a critical participatory action research project. The authors outline new views on ‘participation’ (based on Jürgen Habermas’s notion of a ‘public sphere’), ‘practice’ (as shaped by practice architectures), and ‘research’ (as research within practice traditions). They provide five extended examples of critical participatory action research studies. The book includes a range of resources for people planning a critical participatory research initiative, providing guidance on how to establish an action research group and identify a shared concern, research ethics, principles of procedure for action researchers, protocols for collaborative work, keeping a journal, gathering evidence, reporting, and choosing academic partners. Unlike earlier editions, The Action Research Planner focuses specifically on critical participatory action research, which occupies a particular (critical) niche in the action research 'family'. The Action Research Planner is an essential guide to planning and undertaking this type of research.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introducing critical participatory action research.- 2. A new view of participation: Participation in public spheres.- 3. A new view of practice: Practices held in place by practice architectures.- 4. A new view of research: Research within practice traditions.- 5. Doing critical participatory action research: The ‘planner’ part.- 6. Examples of critical participatory action research.- 7. Resources for critical participatory action researchers.- Index.    
Mario E. Moreira, Winchester, MA, USA

The Agile Enterprise

Building and Running Agile Organizations
Apress
Seiten XIII, 280 p. 107 illus., 10 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-4842-2390-1
       9781484223901
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Project Management / Software Engineering
Discover how to implement and operate in an Agile manner at every level of your enterprise and at every point from idea to delivery. Learn how Agile-mature organizations adapt nimbly to microchanges in market conditions. Learn cutting-edge practices and concepts as you extend your implementation of Agile through the entire enterprise to meet customer needs.Veteran Agile coach Mario Moreira argues that two critical conditions must be conscientiously cultivated at a company before it can expect to reap in full measure the business benefits of mature Agile. First, individuals at every level must be committed to the mindset and the implementation of practices rigorously focused on delivering value to the customer. Second, all employees must be empowered to take ownership. This holistic transformation wrenches the status quo and provokes a strong focus where customers and employees matter. What You'll LearnEstablish an idea pipeline to quickly and productively evolve customer value through all levels of the enterpriseIncorporate a discovery mindset—experimental, incremental, design, and divergent thinking—and fast feedback loops to increase the odds that what you build aligns more closely to what customer wantsLeverage Lean Canvas, personas, story mapping, value stream mapping, Cost of Delay, servant leadership, self-organization, and more to deliver optimum value to customersUse continuous agile budgeting and idea pipelines at the senior levels of the enterprise to enable you to adapt to the speed of the marketReinvent human resources, portfolio management, finance, and many areas of management toward new roles in the enablement of customer valueMap a top-to-bottom and end-to-end holistic view of your Agile galaxy to gauge where you are today and where you’d like to go in your Agile futureBe truly Agile throughout your enterprise, focused on customer value and employees above all else Who This Book Is For Executives and senior management; sponsors of Agile within a company; ScrumMasters and Agile coaches, champions, and consultants; project management and quality assurance officers (PMOs and AMOs); portfolio managers; product managers and product owners; marketing and business managers; functional, middle, and resource managers; engineering heads and managers; cross-functional engineering/scrum teams; and entrepreneurs and venture capitalists

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Getting Started.- Chapter 2: Envisioning a Customer Value Driven Enterprise.- Chapter 3: Achieving Better Business Outcomes .- Chapter 4: Building Your Agile Galaxy.- Chapter 5: Activating an Agile Culture .- Chapter 6: Embracing Customers .- Chapter 7: Embracing Employees .- Chapter 8: Evolving Roles in Your Agile Enterprise.- Chapter 9: Building a Learning Enterprise.- Chapter 10: Applying a Discovery Mindset.- Chapter 11: Visualizing the Enterprise Idea Pipeline.- Chapter 12: Prioritizing with Cost of Delay.- Chapter 13: Capturing Ideas with Lean Canvas.- Chapter 14: Incorporating Customer Feedback .- Chapter 15: Establishing Your Requirements Tree.- Chapter 16: Decomposing Ideas with Story Mapping.- Chapter 17: Connecting the Idea Pipeline to Backlogs.- Chapter 18: Collaborating on User Stories.- Chapter 19: Promoting Agile Budgeting .- Chapter 20: Applying Agile Success Measures .- Chapter 21: Evolving HR for Agile.- Chapter 22: Sharing an Agile Enterprise Story.-
Jens Maier, Universitat St. Gallen, St. Gallen, Switzerland

The Ambidextrous Organization

Exploring the New While Exploiting the Now
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIII, 276 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-48812-1
       9781137488121
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
42,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership / Innovation/Technology Management
How can businesses balance the demands of both exploiting and exploring? Companies and their leaders have to use both hands: on the one hand making next quarter's targets through existing business, whilst simultaneously exploring new opportunities. This is the first book to explain how to use this approach to encourage innovation.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction - The Case for Ambidextrous Organizations and Leaders Part I: Challenges - Introduction to Part I - Strategic Challenges - Leadership Challenges - Process Challenges - Mindset Challenges - Summary Part I Part II: Solutions - Introduction to Part II - Solution: Corporate Universities - Solution: Scouting - Solution: Convergence Engineering - Solution: De-risking - Summary Part II Conclusion the way forward
Dennis P. Hupchick, Wilkes-Barre, PA, USA

The Bulgarian-Byzantine Wars for Early Medieval Balkan Hegemony

Silver-Lined Skulls and Blinded Armies
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXXV, 363 p. 9 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-56205-6
       9783319562056
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of Medieval Europe / History of Military
This book provides an interpretive narrative of the wars fought by Bulgaria against the Byzantine Empire for dominant control of the Balkan Peninsula during the early medieval era. Over a span of two centuries, from the early ninth through the early eleventh, and under the leadership of the Bulgarian rulers Krum, Simeon I, and Samuil, those conflicts evolved from simple confrontations for territorial possession into a life-or-death struggle for imperial precedence within the Orthodox world then emerging in Eastern Europe—a struggle that the Bulgarians ultimately lost. The primary focus is on Bulgaria, rather than Byzantium, and an effort is made to provide a historically reliable chronology of the assorted campaigns. The various belligerents’ military organizations, defensive technologies, armaments, and tactics are surveyed in an introduction to the main narrative. A prelude chapter sets the stage for the hegemonic conflict, which was divided into three distinct phases by interludes of relative peace between the contending parties, during which Bulgaria’s domestic, foreign, and cultural developments shaped the nature and conduct of the fighting in each successive phase.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter One. Introduction: The Belligerents.- Chapter Two. Prelude: Establishment and Survival of the Bulgar State, 679-803.- Chapter Three. Krum’s Campaigns of Expansion, 809-814.- Chapter Four. Interlude: From Bulgar State to Bulgaria, 816-893.- Chapter Five. Simeon’s Campaigns for Imperial Recognition, 894-927.- Chapter Six. Interlude: From Wary Peace Through Rus’ Intervention, 927-971 .- Chapter Seven. Samuil’s Campaigns to Preserve Bulgaria and Bulgarian Defeat, 976-1018.- Chapter Eight. Epilogue.- Bibliography.- Index.
Jan Jones, Professional

The CEO’s Secret Weapon

How Great Leaders and Their Assistants Maximize Productivity and Effectiveness
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XV, 219 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-44423-3
       9781137444233
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
29,95 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership / Management
Many executives don't take full advantage of the assistant who sits right outside their door. This book educates executives about all the ways in which they can streamline and improve the way they work with the help of a great assistant, while teaching them to identify great candidates and maximize the benefits of this special relationship.

Inhaltsangaben

Francesco Boccia, Italian Chamber of Deputies, Roma, Italy; Robert Leonardi, LUISS University, Rome, Italy

The Challenge of the Digital Economy

Markets, Taxation and Appropriate Economic Models
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVII, 148 p. 10 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-43689-0
       9783319436890
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Corporate Finance / Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics
This volume presents contributions that analyse the extraordinary impact of digital technology on business, services, and the production of value in many sectors of the economy. At the heart of this book is the fact that the entire digital economy is now worth almost 6% of global GDP, and it continues to grow at an unprecedented rate. The volume covers the general debate on taxation and the digital economy with the chapters by Russo, Makiyama and Boccia, before completing the analysis with discussion of three national case studies covering the U.S. (Pagano), U.K. (Leonardi) and Italy (Boccia and Leonardi). Contributors are leading experts in the fields of taxation and the digital economy and contextualise the key issues surrounding the digitalisation of the economy from an international perspective.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1) Introduction: The Digital Economy and Fiscal Policy in the Age of E-Commerce; Francesco Boccia.- Chapter 2) BEPS – Base Erosion and Profit Shifting; Raffaele Russo.- Chapter 3) Reconciling Global Trade, Taxation Principles and the Digital Economy; Hosuk Lee-Makiyama.- Chapter 4) Federalism, Electronic Commerce and Public Finance in the United States; Michael Pagano.- Chapter 5) Some Ideas for Reforming Internet Taxation; Antonio Uricchio.- Chapter 6) The Digital Economy and the Tax Regime in the U.K.; Robert Leonardi.- Chapter 7) Conclusions: What Needs to Be Done for an Effective and Equitable Digital Economy Tax Policy?: The European and Global Scenario; Francesco Boccia and Robert Leonardi.
Sunil K. Choudhary, University of Delhi, Delhi, India

The Changing Face of Parties and Party Systems

A Study of Israel and India
Springer Singapore
Seiten XXXII, 379 p. 45 illus., 33 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-981-10-5174-6
       9789811051746
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Political Science / Regionalism
This book focuses on the changes currently redefining parties and party systems in Israel and India with regard to parliamentary democracy, coalitional polity, electoral profiles and social diversity. It compares the nature of parties and party systems in Israel and India since their independence and documents how the societies, states and governments have undergone significant transformations during the long course of their existence.  In this regard, it also investigates the many significant similarities and glaring differences between India and Israel as two leading parliamentary democracies.  Characterizing the transition of two countries’ party systems as ‘a shift from predominance to pluralism’, the book underlines its impact on the societies, democracies and governance of the two parliamentary nations. The book combines theoretical underpinnings with an empirical understanding of the subject matter, particularly the parties, leaders, state and government, pursuing an interdisciplinary approach, which would appeal to a broad readership from academe and industry alike, and a valuable guide for students and scholars of Political Science, Public Administration, Sociology, Governance and Law.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Part I: Parties and Party Systems: A Conceptual Framework.- Theorizing Parties and Party Systems.- Locating Israeli and Indian Parties and Party Systems.- Part II: Parties and the State Formation.- Yishuv:  The Pre-State Period in Israel.- Indian National Congress: From a ‘Safety Valve’ to the Pioneer of Freedom Struggle.- Part III: Parties in Post-Independence Polities: From ‘Predominance to Pluralism’.- Mapaivot vs Congress System.- Mahapach vs Janata Parivar.- Towards A Coalitional Multipolarity.- Part IV: Ideological Roots, Social Bases and Electoral Patterns of the Parties: Exploring Israel and India.- The Left Wing Parties (Socialist Block).- The Right Wing Parties (Nationalist Block).- The Centrist Parties.- The Ethno-Religious Parties.- The Arab Block.- Part V: Parties and the Government Making.- Coalition Politics in Israel and India.- Competing Issues of Governance: Israel and India Compared.- Conclusion: The Way Forward. 
Guangyu Hu, Beijing, China

The Cost of Development in China

Springer Singapore
Seiten XXI, 537 p. 108 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-981-10-4174-7
       9789811041747
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
160,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Development Economics / Development Studies
This book focuses on the future of China and its sustainable development, and summarizes the implications, forms, causes, countermeasures and related rules of the main costs generated during a country’s period of development, so as to provide a theoretical reference and decision-making consulting tools for institutions and scientific governance and management professionals. Combining China’s national situation and development characteristics with the country as a unit, it uses case studies to propose the concept of cost theory and the theoretical system of national development cost. Focusing on the goals of innovation in nation building, common development and prosperity, as well as enhancement of people’s net welfare, the book summarizes and draws conclusions about various aspects of national development, including economic development cost; political, social and cultural development cost; foreign opening-up development cost and nature development cost. It primarily establishes an indicator system of national development cost for promoting full-factor productivity and reducing development cost, and provides a theoretical basis for implementing the scientific political-achievement view.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I Proposition of Development Cost in China.- Chapter I Learning and Practice of Scientific Outlook on Development: Considering Maximization of Net Welfare as the Scientific Political Achievement View.- Chapter II Scientific Development of China in the Future: Inspiration of Chinese Dream to Development Cost.- Chapter III Innovation Powerhouse: Build a Society of Joint Development and Common Prosperity.- Chapter IV Economic Growth Cost in China.- Chapter V Cost of Economic Transformation in China.- Chapter VI Cost of Economic Disturbance in China.- Chapter VII Cost of Economic Regulation and Control in China.- Summary of Economic Development Cost in China.- Chapter VIII Political Reform Cost in China.- Chapter IX Chinese Political System Construction Cost.- Chapter X Cost of Chinese Political Decision-making System.- Chapter XI Cost of Chinese Ruling Party Construction.- Chapter XII Cost of Chinese Political consultation and Crossing of Information Gap.- Chapter XIII Cost of Chinese Democracy Construction.- Summary of Chinese Political Development Cost.- Part IV Cost of Chinese Social Development.- Chapter XIV Chinese Social Livelihood Issues and Their Cost.- Chapter XV Cost of Population Change in Chinese Society.- Chapter XVI Chinese Social Management Cost.- Chapter XVII Chinese Social Stability Cost.- Chapter XVIII Chinese Social Advancement Cost.- Summarization of Chinese Social Development Cost.- Chapter XIX China’s Cost of Civilization Inheriting and National Customs Protection.- Chapter XX Cost of Chinese Ideological Evolution and Modern Media System Construction.- Chapter XXI Cost of Chinese Soft Power Construction and Response to International Cultural Invasion.- Summary of the Cost of Chinese Cultural Development.- Chapter XXII China’s Opening Development Thoughts and Their Cost.- Chapter XXIII China’s Cost of International Exchange and Consensus.- Chapter XXIV China’s Cost of Investment and Construction of Investment Environment.- Chapter XXV Cost of International Trade Development.- Chapter XXVI Construction Cost of China’s Three-dimensional Transportation.- Chapter XXVII The Cost of China’s Creditability Construction and Handling of Threats.- Summary of the Cost of Foreign Opening-up Development.- Chapter XXVIII Cost of China’s Resource and Energy.- Chapter XXIX Cost of China’s Ecological Environment.- Chapter XXX Cost of Disasters in.- Chapter XXXI China’s Cost of Handling Climate Change.- Chapter XXXII Cost of Harmony between Human and Nature
Summary of China’s Cost of Nature Development.- Part VIII Inspiration of China’s Development Cost Theory for China’s Development.- Chapter XXXIII Indicator System Foundation of Development Cost Chapter XXXIV Promote the Enhancement of Total Factor Productivity and Reduce Development Cost.- Chapter XXXV Benchmarking of Scientific Achievement View.- References.
David Lehmann, University of Cambridge, London, UK

The Crisis of Multiculturalism in Latin America

Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XXVII, 230 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-50957-4
       9781137509574
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Political Science / Latin American Culture
This book presents a challenging view of the adoption and co-option of multiculturalism in Latin America from six scholars with extensive experience of grassroots movements and intellectual debates. It raises serious questions of theory, method, and interpretation for both social scientists and policymakers on the basis of cases in Mexico, Brazil, Argentina, Bolivia, and Ecuador. Multicultural policies have enabled people to recover the land of their ancestors, administer justice in accordance with their traditions, provide recognition as full citizens of the nation, and promote affirmative action to enable them to take the place in society which is theirs by right. The message of this book is that while the multicultural response has done much to raise the symbolic recognition of indigenous and Afro-descendant peoples nationally and internationally, its application calls for a profound reappraisal in spheres such as land, gender, institutional design, and equal opportunities. Written by scholars with long-term and in-depth engagement in Latin America, the chapters show that multicultural theories and policies, which assume racial and cultural boundaries to be clear-cut, overlook the pervasive reality of racial and cultural mixture and place excessive confidence in identity politics.

Inhaltsangaben

Foreword; John Gledhill .- Introduction; David Lehmann .- 1. Multiculturalism as a juridical weapon: The use and abuse of the concept of ‘pueblo originario’ in agrarian conflicts in Michoacán, Mexico; Luis Vázquez .- 2. Paradoxes of Multiculturalism in Bolivia; Andrew Canessa .- 3. The ethnicisation of agrarian conflicts: an Argentine case; Maité Boullosa-Joly .- 4. Inventing rights of our own: women transcending the opposition between the indigenous and the universal; Manuela Picq .- 5. The demand for recognition and access to citizenship: ethnic labelling and territorial restructuring in Brazil; Véronique Boyer .- 6. The politics of naming; David Lehmann
Laszlo Matyas, Central European University, Budapest, Hungary

The Econometrics of Multi-dimensional Panels

Theory and Applications
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIX, 456 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-60782-5
       9783319607825
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
160,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Econometrics / Statistics for Business/Economics/Mathematical Finance/Insurance
This book presents the econometric foundations and applications of multi-dimensional panels, including modern methods of big data analysis. The last two decades or so, the use of panel data has become a standard in many areas of economic analysis. The available models formulations became more complex, the estimation and hypothesis testing methods more sophisticated. The interaction between economics and econometrics resulted in a huge publication output, deepening and widening immensely our knowledge and understanding in both. The traditional panel data, by nature, are two-dimensional. Lately, however, as part of the big data revolution, there has been a rapid emergence of three, four and even higher dimensional panel data sets. These have started to be used to study the flow of goods, capital, and services, but also some other economic phenomena that can be better understood in higher dimensions. Oddly, applications rushed ahead of theory in this field. This book is aimed at filling this widening gap. The first theoretical part of the volume is providing the econometric foundations to deal with these new high-dimensional panel data sets. It not only synthesizes our current knowledge, but mostly, presents new research results. The second empirical part of the book provides insight into the most relevant applications in this area. These chapters are a mixture of surveys and new results, always focusing on the econometric problems and feasible solutions.

Inhaltsangaben

Fixed Effects Models.- Random Effects Models.- Models with Endogenous Regressors.- Dynamic Models and Reciprocity.- Random Coefficients Models.- Discrete Response Models.- Nonparametric Models with Random Effects.- Multi-dimensional Panels in Quantile Regression Models.- Models for Spatial Panels.- Modelling in the Presence of Cross-sectional Error Dependence.- The Estimation of Gravity Models in International Trade.- Modelling Housing Using Multi-dimensional Panel Data.- Modelling Migration.- Modeling Heterogeneity in Country-Industry-Year Panel Data: Two Illustrative Econometric Analyses.- The Determinants of Consumer Price Dispersion: Evidence from French Supermarkets.
Nauro F. Campos, Brunel University, St Albans, UK; Fabrizio Coricelli, Paris School of Economics, Paris, France

The Economics of UK-EU Relations

From the Treaty of Rome to the Vote for Brexit
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 297 p. 49 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-55494-5
       9783319554945
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics / European Integration
This book brings together contributions from leading scholars around the world on the most relevant and pressing economic themes surrounding the UK–EU relationship. With chapters spanning from the UK’s accession to the bloc to the aftermath of its decision to leave, the book explores key themes in UK economic growth and EU membership, international trade, foreign direct investment, financial markets and migration. Chapters interrogate the history of the relationship, the depth of foreign direct investment, and responses to the financial crisis. Considering both the history and future of UK and EU relations, the book is a relevant and timely volume that gives welcome context to a fast-changing relationship.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1 .Introduction.- .Chapter 2 UK Economic Growth Performance in a European Context: Has EU Membership Made Much Difference?.- .Chapter 3 How Does European Integration Work? Lessons from Revisiting the British Relative Economic Decline.- .Chapter 4 European Monetary Integration and the EU-UK Relationship.- . Chapter 5 The UK Financial Sector and EU Integration after Brexit: The Issue of Passporting.- . Chapter 6 Foreign Direct Investment and the  Relationship between the United Kingdom  and the European Union.- . Chapter 7    Immigration and the UK-EU relationship.- . Chapter 8 EU Regional Policy and the UK.- .Chapter 9 Brexit and EU regulation.- .Chapter 10 Deep Integration and UK-EU Trade Relations.- .Chapter 11 Conclusions 
A. Pigou

The Economics of Welfare

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XX, 876 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2013
ISBN 978-0-230-24931-8
       9780230249318
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
40,65 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Political Economy/Economic Policy / Economic History
Originally published in 1920, The Economics of Welfare provided a solution to the much discussed problem of externalities associated with market inefficiencies such as the problem of pollution. The concept of externalities remains central to modern day welfare economics and particularly environmental economics.

Inhaltsangaben

PART I: WELFARE AND THE NATIONAL DIVIDEND 1. Welfare and Economic Welfare 2. Desires and Satisfactions 3. The National Dividend 4. What is Meant by Capital Intact 5. Changes in Size of the National Dividend 6. The Measurement of Changes in the Size of the National Dividend 7. Economic Welfare and Changes in the Size of the National Dividend 8. Economic Welfare and Changes in the Distribution of the National Dividend 9. Reactions Through the Numbers of the Population 10. The National Dividend and the Quality of the People 11. The Method of Discussion to be Followed PART II: THE SIZE OF THE NATIONAL DIVIDEND AND THE DISTRIBUTION OF RESOURCES AMONG DIFFERENT USES 12. Introductory 13. The Definition of Marginal Social and Private Net Products 14. The Values of Marginal Social Net Products and the Size of the National Dividend 15. Rates of Return and the Values of Marginal Private Net Products 16. The Effects of Eliminating Obstacles to Movement 17. Hindrances to Equality of Returns due to Imperfect Knowledge 18. Hindrances to Equality of Returns due to Imperfect Divisibility of the Units in Terms of which Transactions are Conducted 19. Hindrances to Equality of Returns due to Relative Variations of Demand for Productive Resources in Different Occupations and Places 20. Divergence between Marginal Social Net Product and Marginal Private Net Product 21. Marginal Private and Social Net Products I Relation to Industrial Forms 22. Increasing and Decreasing Supply Price 23. State Regulation of Competitive Prices 24. State Regulation of Supplies 25. The Conditions of Monopolisation 26. Monopolistic Competition 27. Simple Monopoly 28. Discriminating Monopoly 29. The Special Problem of Railway Rates 30. Purchasers' Associations 31. Intervention by Public Authorities 32. Public Control of Monopoly 33. Public Operation of Industries PART III: THE NATIONAL DIVIDEND AND LABOUR 34. Industrial Peace 35. The Classification of Industrial Differences 36. Voluntary Arrangements for Conciliation and Arbitration 37. Mediation 38. Coercive Intervention 39. An Analytical View of Industrial Peace 40. Hours of Labour 41. The Methods of Industrial Remuneration 42. The Distribution of Labour Among Occupations and Places 43. Employment Exchanges 44. Unemployment versus Short Time 45. The Practicability of Interference to Raise Wages 46. Methods of Engaging Labour 47. Interference to Raise Wages in Places and Occupations where they are Unfair 48. Fair Wages Inside Particular Industries 49. Fairness as a Variable Relation 50. Interference to Raise Wages in Places and Occupations where they are already Fair 51. Wage Rates and Capacity 52. A National Minimum Time-Wage 53. Fixed and Fluctuating Wage Rates PART IV: THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE NATIONAL DIVIDEND 54. The General Problem of Disharmony 55. Pareto's Law 56. The Supply of Capital and Labour 57. Inventions and Improvements 58. The Manipulation of Wages 59. Rationing 60. Subsidies to Wages 61. Direct Transferences from the Relatively Rich to the Relatively Poor 62. The Effect on the National Dividend of the Expectation of Transferences from the Relatively Rich 63. The Effect on the National Dividend of the Expectation of Transferences to the Poor 64. Bounties on Things Purchased by the Poor 65. The Effect on the National Dividend of the Fact of Transferences from the Relatively Rich to the Poor 66. A National Minimum Standard of Real Income APPENDICES 1. Uncertainty-Bearing as a Factor of Production 2. The Measurement of Elasticities of Demand 3. A Mathematical and Diagrammatic Treatment of Certain Problems of Competition and Monopoly
Tirthankar Roy, LSE, London, UK

The Economy of South Asia

From 1950 to the Present
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 351 p. 42 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-54719-0
       9783319547190
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Economic History / Development Economics
This book explores the historical roots of rapid economic growth in South Asia, with reference to politics, markets, resources, and the world economy. Roy posits that, after an initial slow period of growth between 1950 and the 1980s, the region has been growing rapidly and fast catching up with the world on average levels of living. Why did this turnaround happen? Does it matter? Is it sustainable? The author answers these questions by drawing connections, comparisons, and parallels between the five large countries in the region: India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka and Nepal. It shows why, despite differences in political experience between these countries, similarities in resources and markets could produce similar trajectories. Home to a fifth of the world’s population, South Asia’s transformation has the power to change the world. Most accounts of the process focus on individual nations, but by breaking out of that mould, Roy takes on the region as a whole, and delivers a radical new interpretation of why the economy of South Asia is changing so fast.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Defining the Region: Geography and History.- Chapter 3. The State and the Economy I: India, Pakistan and Bangladesh.- Chapter 4. The State and the Economy II: Sri Lanka and Nepal.- Chapter 5. Growth and Development.- Chapter 6. Land Reform.- Chapter 7. The Green Revolution.- Chapter 8. Trade and Industry I: India.- Chapter 9. Trade and Industry II: Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka and Nepal.- Chapter 10. Business.- Chapter 11. Migration.- Chapter 12. Summary and Conclusion.
David Haigron, Université Rennes 2, Rennes, France

The English Countryside

Representations, Identities, Mutations
Springer International Publishing
Seiten X, 273 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-53272-1
       9783319532721
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
British Culture / British Cinema
This collection of essays examines representations of the English countryside and its mutations, and what they reveal about a nation’s, communities’ or individuals’ search for identity – and fear of losing it. Based on a pluridisciplinary approach and a variety of media, this book challenges the view that the English countryside is an apolitical space characterised by permanence and lack of conflict. It analyses how the pastoral motif is actually subverted to explore liminal spaces and temporalities. The authors deconstruct the “rural idyll” myth to show how it plays a distinctive and yet ambiguous part in defining Englishness/Britishness. A must read for both scholars and students interested in British rural and cultural history, media and literature.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction - David Haigron.- 2. Part I: Rural Communities and Modernity: The English Countryside as an Invested Space - 2. Rural Protest in England - Brendan Prendiville.- 3. Agents, Beneficiaries and Victims: Picturing People on the Land - Jonathan Bignell & Jeremy Burchardt.- 4. Visions of Rurality in Popular British Fictional Television Series from the 1970s to the Present Day - Renée Dickason.- 5. Part II: Praised Harmony and Revealing Dissonance: The English Countryside as a Resonant Space - 5. Rural Landscape in Patrick Keiller’s Robinson in Space and Robinson in Ruins - Georges Fournier.- 6. London’s Parks, Suburbs and Environs: The English Countryside through the Eyes of French Visitors (1814-1914) - Richard Tholoniat.- 7. Myths of “Old England” Revisited: Thomas Hardy’s Dissonant Representations of Rural Spaces in Under the Greenwood Tree, Far From the Madding Crowd, and The Woodlanders - Thierry Goater.- 8. Going and Staying: Traditional Music in the Poetry of Thomas Hardy - Dennis Siler.- 9. Part III: Exploration and Meaning: The English Countryside as a Liminal Space - 9. “The Innocent Island”: A Language of Violence in Woolf and Bowen - Gregory Dekter.- 10. Rosamond Lehmann’s In-between Landscapes: Taking Possession of the “Empty Pastoral Scene” - Jessica Le Flem.- 11. Rural Sites: Transformations and Experiment in the Poetry of Mark Goodwin - Kerry Featherstone.
Mario Baldassarri, Sapienza University of Rome, Rome, Italy

The European Roots of the Eurozone Crisis

Errors of the Past and Needs for the Future
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXXVII, 459 p. 74 illus., 31 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-58079-1
       9783319580791
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
European Economics / Economic Theory/Quantitative Economics/Mathematical Methods
This book examines the Eurozone crisis in light of theoretical and empirical evidence. The first half explores specific theoretical contributions within a framework of growth theory models to examine the two major pillars of the European construction, the European Central Bank and the Maastricht Treaty, and seeks to explain why they are theoretically wrong.  The second half presents results of counterfactual simulations using the Oxford Econometric model and estimates what the Eurozone has lost in terms of economic and social cost from 2002 to 2014 as a consequence of the super-evaluation of the Euro and the Maastricht Treaty parameters being mistakenly fixed and pursued. Finally, the author supports the urgent need to refund the European Union, up-dating The Maastricht Treaty and the ECB statute to build three concentric circles: the USE (United States of Europe), the EU (European Union), the EAFTDA (Europe/Africa Free Trade and Development Area).

Inhaltsangaben

1.- Introduction: Theoretical and Empirical Achievements.- PART I: Some Theoretical Foundations: Why European Treaties and Theoretically Wrong.- 2. Government Expenditure, Inflation and Growth: The Base Model.- 3. sp;6. the='' there?Economic Policy, Government Investment Programs, Inflation and Growth.- 4. Government Investment Programs in the Open-Economy Case.- 5. Optimal Growth Path for the Economy and Optimal Policies for Government Expenditure.- 6.Optimal Discount Rates for Investment Decisions: Myopic Private Rules versus  Hyperopic Government Rules.- 7. Allocation of Time, Human Capital and Endogenous Growth.- 8. Earnings and Human Capital in a Deterministic Life-Cycle Model: Spring-Saving Behavior for Growth.- 9. Taxation, Income Distribution and Optimal Programs to Finance Higher Education.- 10. Income Distribution, Equity and Growth.- PART II: Some Empirical Evidence: Why European Treaties are a Negative-sum Game.- 11. The Cost of the Super-Euro: 2002-2014.- 12. A new Maastricht Treaty?.- 13. What Would Have Happened in Europe if  Mr.Draghi Had Not Been There?
Stefano Ugolini, University of Toulouse, Toulouse, France

The Evolution of Central Banking: Theory and History

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIII, 330 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-48524-3
       9781137485243
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
139,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Economics, general / History of Italy
This book is the first complete survey of the evolution of monetary institutions and practices in Western countries from the Middle Ages to today. It radically rethinks previous attempts at a history of monetary institutions by avoiding institutional approach and shifting the focus away from the Anglo-American experience. Previous histories have been hamstrung by the linear, teleological assessment of the evolution of central banks. Free from such assumptions, Ugolini’s work offers bankers and policymakers valuable and profound insights into their institutions.Using a functional approach, Ugolini charts an historical trajectory longer and broader than any other attempted on the subject. Moving away from the Anglo-American perspective, the book allows for a richer (and less biased) analysis of long-term trends. The book is ideal for researchers looking to better understand the evolution of the institutions that underlie the global economy.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. The Payments System.- 3. Lending of Last Resort and Supervision.- Issuing Money.- 5. Monetary Policy.- 6. Conclusions
NA NA

The Family Council Handbook

How to Create, Run, and Maintain a Successful Family Business Council
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVIII, 371 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-0-230-11219-3
       9780230112193
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
40,65 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Family Business / Management
A Family Council oversees a family on everything from educating the family for their future responsibilities as owners, to settling disputes within the family. With this in mind, this practical manual will guide business families on how to manage how their family governs itself and relates to their business.

Inhaltsangaben

Carl Baudenbacher, EFTA Court, Luxembourg, Luxembourg

The Fundamental Principles of EEA Law

EEA-ities
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XX, 251 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-45188-6
       9783319451886
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
European Law / European Integration
This book features eleven contributions on the fundamental principles of EEA law: legislative and judicial homogeneity, reciprocity, prosperity, priority, authority, loyalty, proportionality, equality, liability and sovereignty. Written by EFTA Court and national judges, high EFTA officials, private practitioners and scholars, it raises awareness of EEA law and provides insights for EEA and EU law practitioners and researchers. It focuses on the principles at the core of EEA law, some of which are common to EU and EEA law, while others have a specific place in EEA law and some ensure consistency between the EEA Agreement and the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union. It is the only book to focus on the fundamental principles of EEA law.

Inhaltsangaben

Prosperity, by  Sven Erik Svedman.- Legislative Homogeneity, by Dag Wernø Holter.- Judicial Homogeneity, by Philipp Speitler.- Reciprocity, by Carl Baudenbacher.- Priority, by Carsten Zatschler.- Authority, by Skúli Magnússon.- Loyalty, by John Temple Lang.- Proportionality, by Páll Hreinsson.- Equality, by Magnus Schmauch.- Liability, by Michael Waibel.- Sovereignty, by Mads Andenas.
Bart Custers, Leiden University, Leiden, The Netherlands

The Future of Drone Use

Opportunities and Threats from Ethical and Legal Perspectives
T.M.C. Asser Press
Seiten XXIII, 386 p. 5 illus., 3 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-94-6265-131-9
       9789462651319
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Law of the Sea, Air and Outer Space / International Humanitarian Law, Law of Armed Conflict
Given the popularity of drones and the fact that they are easy and cheap to buy, it is generally expected that the ubiquity of drones will significantly increase within the next few years. This raises questions as to what is technologically feasible (now and in the future), what is acceptable from an ethical point of view and what is allowed from a legal point of view. Drone technology is to some extent already available and to some extent still in development. The aim and scope of this book is to map the opportunities and threats associated with the use of drones and to discuss the ethical and legal issues of the use of drones. This book provides an overview of current drone technologies and applications and of what to expect in the next few years. The question of how to regulate the use of drones in the future is addressed, by considering conditions and contents of future drone legislation and by analyzing issues surrounding privacy and safeguards that can be taken. As such, this book is valuable to scholars in several disciplines, such as law, ethics, sociology, politics and public administration, as well as to practitioners and others who may be confronted with the use of drones in their work, such as professionals working in the military, law enforcement, disaster management and infrastructure management. Individuals and businesses with a specific interest in drone use may also find in the nineteen contributions contained in this volume unexpected perspectives on this new field of research and innovation. Bart Custers is Associate Professor and Head of Research at eLaw, the Center for Law and Digital Technologies at Leiden University, The Netherlands. He has presented his work at international conferences in the United States, China, Japan, the Middle East and throughout Europe and has published over 80 scientific, professional and popularizing publications, including three books.

Inhaltsangaben
Bernardo Nicoletti, Rome

The Future of FinTech

Integrating Finance and Technology in Financial Services
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 328 p. 33 illus., 3 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-51414-7
       9783319514147
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Financial Services / Information Systems and Communication Service
This book provides an introduction to the state of the art in financial technology (FinTech) and the current applications of FinTech in digital banking. It is a comprehensive guide to the various technologies, products, processes, and business models integral to the FinTech environment. Covering key definitions and characteristics, models and best practice, as well as presenting relevant case studies related to FinTech and e-Business, this book helps build a theoretical framework for future discussion.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: Financial Services and Fintech.- Chapter 3: Model and Classifications.- Chapter 4:Fintech Innovation.- Chapter 5: Critical Sucess Factors.- Chapter 6: Responses of Traditional Players.- Chapter 7: Regulations.- Chapter 8: A Business Model for Insurtech Initiatives.- Chapter 9: A Case.- Chapter 10: The Future: Financial Services as Platforms.- Chapter 11: Conclusions.
Gemma Andreone, Italian National Research Council, Rome

The Future of the Law of the Sea

Bridging Gaps Between National, Individual and Common Interests
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XX, 269 p. 5 illus., 4 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-51273-0
       9783319512730
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
53,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Law of the Sea, Air and Outer Space / International Environmental Law
This book is open access under a CC BY-NC 4.0 license. It explores the diverse phenomena which are challenging the international law of the sea today, using the unique perspective of a simultaneous analysis of the national, individual and common interests at stake. This perspective, which all the contributors bear in mind when treating their own topic, also constitutes a useful element in the effort to bring today’s legal complexity and fragmentation to a homogenous vision of the sustainable use of the marine environment and of its resources, and also of the international and national response to maritime crimes.The volume analyzes the relevant legal frameworks and recent developments, focusing on the competing interests which have influenced State jurisdiction and other regulatory processes. An analysis of the competing interests and their developments allows us to identify actors and relevant legal and institutional contexts, retracing how and when these elements have changed over time.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I - The equitable and sustainable exploitation of marine environment and of its resources: Serra Sefrioui, Adapting to Sea Level Rise: A Law of the Sea Perspective.- Josè Manuel Sobrino and Marta Sobrido, The Common Fisheries Policy: A Difficult Compromise between Relative Stability and the Discard Ban.- Gabriela A. Oanta, Some recent questions regarding the European Union’s public access fisheries agreements.- Marta Chantal Ribeiro, The Protection of Biodiversity in the Framework of the Common Fisheries Policy: What Room for the Shared Competence?.- Emmanuela Doussis, Marine Scientific Research: Taking Stock and Looking Ahead.- Kamrul Hossain and Kathleen Morris, Protecting Arctic Ocean Marine Biodiversity In The Area Beyond National Jurisdiction: Plausible Legal Frameworks For Protecting High Arctic Waters.- Enrique J. Martin Perez, The environmental legal framework for the development of blue energy in Europe.- Monserrat Abad Castellos, The Black Sea and Blue Energy: challenges, opportunities and the role of the European Union.- Part II - The national and international response to maritime crimes: Giorgia Bevilacqua, Exploring the Ambiguity of Operation Sophia between Military and Search and Rescue Activities.- Jasenko Marin, Miso Mudric and Robert Mikac, Private Maritime Security Contractors and Use of Lethal Force in Maritime Domain.- Magne Frostad, United Nations authorized Embargoes and Maritime Interdiction: a Special Focus on Somalia.- Pirjo Kleemola-Juntunen, The Right of Innocent Passage: The Challenge of the Proliferation Security Initiative and the Implications for the Territorial Waters of the Åland Islands.
Elleke Boehmer, University of Oxford , Oxford; Rouven Kunstmann, University of Oxford , Oxford; Priyasha Mukhopadhyay, Harvard University, Cambridge, MA, USA; Asha Rogers, University of Birmingham, Birmingham, UK

The Global Histories of Books

Methods and Practices
Springer International Publishing
Seiten X, 334 p. 13 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-51333-1
       9783319513331
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of the Book / Postcolonial/World Literature
This book is an edited volume of essays that showcases how books played a crucial role in making and materialising histories of travel, scientific exchanges, translation, and global markets from the late-eighteenth century to the present. While existing book historical practice is overly dependent on models of the local and the national, we suggest that approaching the book as a cross-region, travelling – and therefore global- object offers new approaches and methodologies for a study in global perspective. By thus studying the book in its transnational and inter-imperial, textual, inter-textual and material dimensions, this collection will highlight its key role in making possible a global imagination, shaped by networks of print material, readers, publishers and translators.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction.- SECTION ONE: COLONIAL NETWORKS.- Chapter 2. London’s Geographic Knowledge Network and the Anson Account (1748) - Katherine Parker.- Chapter 3. The Other Empire: Australian Books and American Publishers in the late nineteenth century- David Carter.- Chapter 4. Reading by Chance in a World of Wandering Texts - Alexander Bubb.- SECTION TWO: GLOBAL GENRES.- Chapter 5. ‘Read! Learn!’: Globalisation and (G)localisation in Caribbean Textbook Publishing - Gail Low.- Chapter 6. Governing by the Book: Mediterranean Travel and Sanitary Prophylaxis in the Nineteenth-Century - Riccardo Liberatore.- Chapter 7. The Circle of Knowledge: Radical Commensurability and the Deaf Textbook - Hansun Hsiung.- SECTION THREE: READING RELATIONSHIPS.- Chapter 8. ‘Bringing Spring to Sahbai’s Rose-Garden’: Persian Printing in North India after 1857 - Zahra Shah.- Chapter 9. Reading The Discovery of India in the Library of an Australian Prime Minister - Sybil Nolan.- SECTION FOUR: CULTURAL TRANSLATION.- Chapter 10. Bust?n?’s Iliad and Imperialism in the Middle East - Evelyn Richardson.- Chapter 11. ‘The Narcissism of Small Differences’: Plagiarism in South African Letters - Kate Highman.- Chapter 12. The Fear of Solitude: How Marketing Makes Real Magic - Ben Holgate.- Afterword - Elleke Boehmer.-
Ludger Kühnhardt, Bonn University, Bonn, Germany

The Global Society and Its Enemies

Liberal Order Beyond the Third World War
Springer International Publishing
Seiten VIII, 276 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-55903-2
       9783319559032
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Globalization / International Security Studies
This book discusses contemporary constellations of international politics and global transformation. It offers guidance on how to conceptualize the complexity of current global changes and practical policy advice in order to promote an open global society. In the light of today’s challenges, the author re-interprets the main argument of the philosopher Karl Popper in 'The Open Society and Its Enemies'. Based on this framework and new empirical evidence, the book discusses the thesis of an ongoing Third World War, triggered by fundamental deficits in nation-building, occurring primarily within states and not between them, and accelerated by asymmetric forms of warfare and Islamist totalitarianism.The book also explores various threats to the global order, such as the paradox of borders as barriers and bridges, the global effects of the youth bubble in many developing countries, and the misuse of religious interpretation for the use of political violence. Lastly, the author identifies advocates and supporters of a liberal, multilateral and open order and argues for a reinvention of the Western world to contribute to a revival of a liberal global order, based on mutual respect and joint leadership.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: The World in Times of Globality.- Third World War: The Enemies of Global Society.- Spaces and Spheres.- Borders and Orders.- People and Peoples.- Sources and Resources.- A New World Order: The Global Society and its Friends.- Outlook: Prospects and Uncertainties.
Leon Wiener Dow, Shalom Hartman Institute, Jerusalem, Israel

The Going

A Meditation on Jewish Law
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 106 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-68830-5
       9783319688305
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
53,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Jewish Theology / Jewish Cultural Studies
In a work that casts philosophical and theological reflections against a backdrop of personal experience, Leon Wiener Dow offers a learned discourse that elucidates the telos of Jewish law and the philosophical-theological commitments that animate it. To the reader gazing upon the halakha from the outside, this book offers a glimpse of its central, orienting concepts. To the reader who lives amidst the rigor of halakha, this book bestows an insightful glance at the law’s orienting ethos and higher aspirations that often remain opaque.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Beginnings.- 2. Saying, Writing, Doing.- 3. Shared Spacetime: Community.- 4. The Ineffable.- Epilogue. Parting ways.
Ilan Oshri, Loughborough, UK; Julia Kotlarsky, Birmingham, UK; Leslie P. Willcocks, London School of Economics, London, UK

The Handbook of Global Outsourcing and Offshoring 3rd edition

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIV, 351 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-43742-6
       9781137437426
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
48,14 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Operations Management / International Business
Now in its third edition, this is the only outsourcing and offshoring book to offer a broad but coherent guide to the strategy, operations and management of ITO and BPO outsourcing and offshoring, from how to source new relationships to managing business processes in a national and global context.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction PART I: MAKING A SOURCING DECISION 1. Overview of the Global Sourcing Marketplace 2. Sourcing Models: What and When to Outsource or Offshore 3. Country Attractiveness for Outsourcing and Captive Centres 4. The Attractiveness of Western Countries for Outsourcing Services PART II: BUILDING SOURCING COMPETENCIES 5. Supplier Core Capabilities and Strategies for Sustainability and Growth 6. Leveraging Knowledge and Expertise 7. The Client Perspective: Vendor Selection Strategy, Retained Management Capabilities PART III: MANAGING SOURCING RELATIONSHIPS 8. Legal Issues in Outsourcing and Offshoring 9. The IT Outsourcing Life Cycle and the Transition Phase 10. Governance of Outsourcing Projects 11. Managing Globally Distributed Teams 12. High Performance BPO 13. Shared Service Centres 14 . Cloud Computing 15. Innovation Through Sourcing Teaching Case Norwich Union and IBM
S. Wright, English Lawyer, UK

The Handbook of International Loan Documentation

Second Edition
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVI, 387 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-137-46758-4
       9781137467584
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Investments and Securities / International Economics
This new edition provides a highly practical and comprehensive resource for bankers and lawyers, at all levels of experience, involved in international lending. The author covers the terms of international loan documentation with comprehensive explanations of the purpose of the provisions, and of areas that may require negotiation.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction PART I: ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS 1. Interpretation 2. The Facility 3. Utilization 4. Repayment, Prepayment and Cancellation 5. Costs of Utilization 6. Additional Payment Obligations PART II: GUARANTEE, REPRESENTATIONS, UNDERTAKINGS AND EVENTS OF DEFAULT 7. Guarantee 8. Representations, Undertakings, and Events of Default PART III: BOILERPLATE AND SCHEDULES 9. Changes to Parties 10. The Finance Parties 11. Administration 12. Governing Law and Enforcement 13. Schedules
Martin Gill, Perpetuity Research and Consultancy International, UK

The Handbook of Security

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXXIII, 1049 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-137-32327-9
       9781137323279
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
267,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Organized Crime / Criminology and Criminal Justice, general
The substantially revised second edition of the Handbook of Security provides the most comprehensive analysis of scholarly security debates and issues to date. Including contributions from some of the world's leading scholars it critiques the way security is provided and managed.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction; Martin Gill PART I: DISCIPLINES AND SECURITY 2. History of Security; Bruce George and Steve Kimber 3. Environmental Studies and Security; Richard H. Schneider 4. Criminology and Security; Graham Farrell and Ken Pease 5. Politics, Economics and Security; Adam White 6. Engineering and Security; David Brooks and Clif Smith 7. Design and Security; Paul Ekblom PART II: OFFENCES 8. Terrorism; Kumar Ramakrishna 9. Murder at Work; Zech Lee and Bob McCrie 10. Workplace Violence; Amy L. Stutzenberger and Bonnie Fisher 11. Piracy and Robbery; Robert Beckman and Monique Page 12. Organised Crime; Mike Levi 13. Commerical Burglary; Rob Mawby 14. Identity Fraud; Henry Pontell and G. Geiss 15. Cyber Crime; Lennon Chang and Peter Grabosky 16. Counterfeiting; Virginie de Barnier PART III: CRIME AND SECURITY IN SECTORS 17. Crime, Security and the Retail Sector; Adrian Beck 18. Crime, Security and Tourism; Rob Mawby 19. Crime and Security and the Food Sector; Hope Johnson and Reece Walters 20. Crime, Security and the Financial Sector; Mark Button and Martin Tunley PART IV: RESEARCHING SECURITY 21. The Influence of Security Research; James Calder 22. Knowledge Transfer; Paul Ekblom 23. Working with Offenders; Richard Moule 24. The Ethnographic Approach and Security: The Case of Airports; Alan Kirschenbaum 25. Crime Mapping; Shane Johnson and Kate Bowers 26. Systematic Reviews and Meta-Analysis; Matthew Manning 27. Evaluations and Randomized Controlled Trials in Security Research; Read Hayes and Kyle Grottini PART V: SECURITY PROCESSES AND SERVICES 28. Signs; Nick Tilley 29. Technologies and Security; Clifton Smith 30. Alarms and Security; David Brooks 31. CCTV; Emmeline Taylor and Martin Gill 32. Security Officers; Mahesh Nalla and Alison Wakefield 33. Private Military Companies; K. Carmola PART VI: SECURITY AND ITS MANAGEMENT 34. The Role of Partnerships in Security Management; Tim Prenzler and Rick Sarre 35. Management and Risk Management; Joshua Bamfield 36. Disaster and Crisis Management; Dominic Elliott 37. Managing Intelligence and Responding to Emerging Threats, Patrick F. Walsh 38. Regulation and Security; Tim Prenzler and Rick Sarre PART VII: CRITIQUING SECURITY 39. Corporate Security; Kevin Walby and Randy K. Lippert 40. Liberty and Security; John Deukmedjian 41. Professionalisation and Security; Alison Wakefield 42. Trading and the Commodification of Security; Julie Ayling 43. Security and Ethics; Andrew Adams 44. Some Contradictions of Security; Martin Gill
Michael D. Robinson, North Dakota State University, Fargo, ND, USA; Michael Eid, Freie Universität Berlin, Berlin, Germany

The Happy Mind: Cognitive Contributions to Well-Being

Springer International Publishing
Seiten VII, 480 p. 23 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-58761-5
       9783319587615
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
149,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Positive Psychology / Quality of Life Research
This edited volume focuses on different views of happiness and well-being, considering constructs like meaning and spirituality in addition to the more standard constructs of positive emotion and life satisfaction. A premise of the volume is that being happy consists of more than having the right things happen to us; it also depends on how we interpret those events as well as what we are trying to achieve. Such considerations suggest that cognitive-emotional factors should play a fairly pronounced role in how happy we are. The present volume pursues these themes in the context of 25 chapters organized into 5 sections. The first section centers on cognitive variables such as attention and executive function, in addition to mindfulness. The second section considers important sources of positive cognition such as savoring and optimism and the third section focuses on self-regulatory contributions to well-being. Finally, social processes are covered in a fourth section and meaning-related processes are covered in the fifth. What results is a rich and diverse volume centering on the ways in which our minds can help or hinder our aspirations for happiness.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction; Michael D. Robinson and Michael Eid.- Part I. The Mind.- Chapter 2. Attention, Emotion, and Well-Being: An Adult Lifespan Perspective; Kimberley M. Livingstone and Derek Isaacowitz.- Chapter 3. Autobiographical Memory; Dieter Ferring.- Chapter 4. Mindfulness and Well-being; Hooria Jazaieri and Shauna Shapiro.- Chapter 5. The Quiet Ego: Concept, Measurement, and Well-Being; Heidi A. Waymen and Jack J. Bauer.- Chapter 6. Staying Happier; Megan M. Fritz, Lisa C. Walsh and Sonja Lyubomirsky.- Part II. Positive Cognitions.- Chapter 7. Beyond Hedonic and Eudaimonic Well-Being: Inspiration and the Self-Transcendence Tradition; Will C.M. Belzak, Yoon Young Sim and Lena M. Wadsworth.- Chapter 8. Savoring and Well-Being: Mapping the Cognitive-Emotional Terrain of the Happy Mind; Jennifer L. Smith and Fred B. Bryant.- Chapter 9. Cognitive Aspects of Positive Emotions: A Broader View for Well-Being; Laura G. Kiken and Barbara L. Fredrickson.- Chapter 10. Positive Illusions and the Happy Mind; Astrid Schütz and Roy F. Baumeister.- Chapter 11. Optimism; Suzanne C. Segerstrom, Charles S. Carver and Michael F. Scheier.- Part III. Self-Regulation.- Chapter 12. Perspectives on Studying Perceived Control in the 21st Century; Judith G. Chipperfield, Jeremy M. Hamm, Raymond P. Perry and Joelle C. Ruthig.- Chapter 13. Means, Ends, and Happiness: The Role of Goals for Subjective Well-Being; Marie Hennecke and Veronika Brandstätter.- Chapter 14. Coping, Emotion Regulation, and Well-Being: Intrapersonal and Interpersonal Processes; Brett Marroquín, Howard Tennen and Annette L. Stanton.- Chapter 15. Autobiographical Memory, Self-Regulation, and Well-Being; Dieter Ferring and Isabelle Tournier.- Chapter 16. Self-Affirmation: Protecting the Self and Protecting Subjective Well-Being; Natalie Schüz and Benjamin Schüz.- Part IV. Social Processes.- Chapter 17. Social Comparisons and Well-Being; Abraham P. Buunk and Pieternel Dijkstra.- Chapter 18. Prosocial Behavior and Empathy-Related Responding: Relations to Children’s Well-Being; Tracy L. Spinrad and Nancy Eisenberg.- Chapter 19. On the Road to Social Well-Being; Giulia Weyrich, Alex Zautra and Eva Zautra.- Part V. Meaning.- Chapter 20. The Functionality of Emotional Clarity: A Process-Oriented Approach to Understanding the Relation Between Emotional Clarity and Well-Being; Tanja Lischetzke and Michael Eid.- Chapter 21. Can Affectively Negative Experiences Contribute to Well-Being? The Affectively Negative Need-Fulfillment Model; Jacob Juhl, Clay Routledge and Joshua A. Hicks.- Chapter 22. Making Sense: Meaning in Life in a Cognitive Context; Sarah Ward and Laura King.- Chapter 23. Nostalgia as a Psychological Resource for a Meaningful Life; Andrew A. Abeyta and Clay Routledge.- Chapter 24. Religious Cognitions and Well-Being: A Meaning Perspective; Crystal L. Park.- Chapter 25. Wiser But Not Sadder, Blissful But Not Ignorant: Exploring the Co-Development of Wisdom and Well-Being Over Time; Nic. M. Weststrate and Judith Glück.
Gregor Thuswaldner, North Park University, Chicago, IL, USA; Daniel Russ, Gordon College, Wenham, MA, USA

The Hermeneutics of Hell

Visions and Representations of the Devil in World Literature
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XI, 322 p. 8 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-52197-8
       9783319521978
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Literary History / Comparative Literature
This collection of essays analyzes global depictions of the devil from theological, Biblical, and literary perspectives, spanning the late Middle Ages to the 21st century. The chapters explore demonic representations in the literary works of Johann Wolfgang von Goethe, Fyodor Dostoyevsky, Dante Alighieri, Charles Baudelaire, John Milton, H.P. Lovecraft, and Cormac McCarthy, among others. The text examines other media such as the operas Orfeo and Erminia sul Giordano and the television shows Breaking Bad, The Sopranos, and Mad Men. The Hermeneutics of Hell, featuring an international set of established and up-and-coming authors, masterfully examines the evolution of the devil from the Biblical accounts of the Middle Ages to the individualized presence of the modern world.

Inhaltsangaben

1 Introduction: The Devil You Know and the Devils You Don’t Know.- 2 Two Brass Mites of the Widow : Saint Bridget of Sweden and the Terrors of Hell.- 3 The Uses of Tentatio: Satan, Luther, and Theological Maturation.- 4 As an Angel of Light: Satanic Rhetoric in Early Modern Literature and Theology.- 5 Astrophal redivivus: The Coinage of the Discourse on the Devil in the Early Modern Age in Georg Bernardt SJ’s Tundalus redivivus (1622).- 6 The Drama of Hell: Sources and Interpretation in 17th Century Operatic Infernal Scenes.- 7 The Dia-bolic Logic of logos Towards a Hermeneutics of Hell in Goethe’s Faust.- 8 Literature, Theology, Survival.- 9 Dostoevsky’s Demons.- 10 “la manière de Milton”: Baudelaire Reads Milton’s Satan.- 11 Money as the Devil in B. Traven’s “Assembly Line” and Its Sources in Scripture, the Faust Legend, and New England Puritanism.- 12 Visions of Hell in Flannery O’Connor.- 13 “He Haunts One for Hours Afterwards”: Demonic Dissonance in Milton’s Satan and Lovecraft’s Nyarlathotep.- 14 “The One Who Knocks:” Milton’s Lucifer and the American Tragic Character.- 15 Reading the devil in the landscape.- 16 A Landscape of the Damned: Evil and Nothingness in Cormac McCarthy’s Outer Dark.
Clare Hanson, University of Southampton Department of English, Southampton, UK; Susan Watkins, Leeds Beckett University, Leeds , UK

The History of British Women's Writing, 1945-1975

Volume Nine
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXIII, 305 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-47735-4
       9781137477354
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Twentieth-Century Literature / Literary History
This volume reshapes our understanding of British literary culture from 1945-1975 by exploring the richness and diversity of women’s writing of this period. Essays by leading scholars reveal the range and intensity of women writers’ engagement with post-war transformations including the founding of the Welfare State, the gradual liberalization of attitudes to gender and sexuality and the reconfiguration of Britain and the empire in the context of the Cold War. Attending closely to the politics of form, the sixteen essays range across ‘literary’, ‘middlebrow’ and ‘popular’ genres, including espionage thrillers and historical fiction, children’s literature and science fiction, as well as poetry, drama and journalism. They examine issues including realism and experimentalism, education, class and politics, the emergence of ‘second-wave’ feminism, responses to the Holocaust and mass migration and diaspora. The volume offers an exciting reassessment of women’s writing at a time of radical social change and rapid cultural expansion.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction- Clare Hanson and Susan Watkins.- 1. Post-War Fiction: Realism and Experimentalism: Kaye Mitchell.- 2. Lyric, Narrative and Performance in Poetry: Jane Dowson.- 3 Look Back in Gender: Drama: Gabriele Griffin.- 4. Journalism: Deborah Chambers.- 5. Angry Young Women: Education, Class, and Politics: Mary Eagleton.- 6. Sex, Censorship and Identity: Kerry Myler.- 7. The Second Wave: Leanne Bibby.- 8. The Aftermath of War: Kristin Bluemel.- 9. Responding to the Holocaust: Sue Vice.- 10. Internal Empire: Katie Gramich.- 11. The Transcultural Tryst in Migration, Exile and Diaspora: Sandra Courtman.- 12. ‘Witness Literature’ in the post-war novels of Storm Jameson and Doris Lessing: Elizabeth Maslen.- 13. Double Trouble: Helen MacInnes’s and Agatha Christie’s Speculative Spy Thrillers: Phyllis Lassner.- 14. Historical Fictions: Diana Wallace.- 15. Children’s Literature: Ideologies of the Past, Present and Future: Catherine Butler.- 16. Science Fiction: Susan Watkins.- Index.
Adam Possamai, Western Sydney University, Sydney, NSW, Australia

The i-zation of Society, Religion, and Neoliberal Post-Secularism

Springer Singapore
Seiten XV, 244 p. 2 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-981-10-5941-4
       9789811059414
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociology of Religion / Politics and Religion
This book explores the elective affinity of religion and post-secularism with neoliberalism. With the help of digital capitalism, neoliberalism dominates, more and more, all aspects of life, and religion is not left unaffected. While some faith groups are embracing this hegemony, and others are simply following the signs of the times, changes have been so significant that religion is no longer what it used to be. Linking theories from Fredric Jameson and George Ritzer, this book presents the argument that our present society is going through a process of i-zation in which (1) capitalism dominates not only our outer, social lives (through, for example, global capitalism) but also our inner, personal lives, through its expansion in the digital world, facilitated by various i-technology applications; (2) the McDonaldization process has now been normalized; and (3) religiosity has been standardized. Reviewing the new inequalities present in this i-society, the book considers their impact on Jurgen Habermas’s project of post-secularism, and appraises the roles that various religions may have in supporting and/or countering this process. It concludes by arguing that Habermas’s post-secular project will occur but that, paradoxically, the religious message(s) will be instrumentalized for capitalist purposes. 

Inhaltsangaben

1. Religions Aligned with Neoliberalism.- 2. Religions within Neoliberalism.- 3. Religious Alternatives to Neoliberalism.- 4. There is no such thing as a religion.- 5. Jameson (1):From Late Capitalism to Digital Capitalism.- 6. Jameson (2): From Pastiche to the Pygmalion Process.- 7.  Ritzer (1): From The McDonaldization Thesis to the i-zation of Society.- 8. Ritzer (2) - Standardization and Branding.- 9. Habermas (1): A Neoliberal Post-secular Project.- 10. Habermas (2):Neoliberal Post-secularism and the i-zation of Society.- 11. Revising Religious Tax Exemption.- 12. Conclusions: A Global Compassionate Tax for the i-Society.
Andrew Novak, George Mason University, Fairfax, VA, USA

The International Criminal Court

An Introduction
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVII, 116 p. 7 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-15831-0
       9783319158310
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
42,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminology and Criminal Justice, general / Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law
This book is about the International Criminal Court (ICC), a new and highly distinctive criminal justice institution with the ability to prosecute the highest-level government officials, including heads of state, even in countries that have not accepted its jurisdiction. The book explores the historical development of international criminal law and the formal legal structure created by the Rome Statute, against the background of the Court’s search for objectivity in a political global environment. The book reviews the operations of the Court in practice and the Court’s position in the power politics of the international system. It discusses and clarifies all stages of an international criminal proceeding from the opening of the investigation to sentencing, reparations, and final appeals in the context of its restorative justice mission. Making appropriate comparisons and contrasts between the international criminal justice system and domestic and national systems, the book fills a gap in international criminal justice study.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface.- The Organization of This Book.- Acknowledgments.- 1. Introduction.- 2. Origins of International Criminal Justice.- 3. The Rome Statute of the International Criminal Court.- 4. Jurisdiction of the Court.- 5. Investigation and Prosecution.- 6. Sentencing, Punishment, and Appeals.- 7. Current Controversies.- Discussion Questions.- Further Reading.- Reference List.- About the Author.- Index.
Andrew Novak, George Mason University, Fairfax, VA, USA

The International Criminal Court

An Introduction
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVII, 116 p. 7 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-3-319-36843-6
       9783319368436
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
42,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminology and Criminal Justice, general / Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law
This book is about the International Criminal Court (ICC), a new and highly distinctive criminal justice institution with the ability to prosecute the highest-level government officials, including heads of state, even in countries that have not accepted its jurisdiction. The book explores the historical development of international criminal law and the formal legal structure created by the Rome Statute, against the background of the Court’s search for objectivity in a political global environment. The book reviews the operations of the Court in practice and the Court’s position in the power politics of the international system. It discusses and clarifies all stages of an international criminal proceeding from the opening of the investigation to sentencing, reparations, and final appeals in the context of its restorative justice mission. Making appropriate comparisons and contrasts between the international criminal justice system and domestic and national systems, the book fills a gap in international criminal justice study.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface.- The Organization of This Book.- Acknowledgments.- 1. Introduction.- 2. Origins of International Criminal Justice.- 3. The Rome Statute of the International Criminal Court.- 4. Jurisdiction of the Court.- 5. Investigation and Prosecution.- 6. Sentencing, Punishment, and Appeals.- 7. Current Controversies.- Discussion Questions.- Further Reading.- Reference List.- About the Author.- Index.
Res Schuerch, Zürich , Zürich, Switzerland

The International Criminal Court at the Mercy of Powerful States

An Assessment of the Neo-Colonialism Claim Made by African Stakeholders
T.M.C. Asser Press
Seiten XVIII, 305 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-94-6265-191-3
       9789462651913
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
149,79 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Criminal Law / Criminal Justice
This book aims to investigate whether, and if so, how, an institution designed to bring to justice perpetrators of the most heinous crimes can be regarded a tool of oppression in a (neo-)colonial sense. To do so, it re-invents the concept of neo-colonialism, which is traditionally associated more with economic or political implications, from an international criminal law perspective, combining historical, political and legal analyses. Allegations of neo-colonialism in relation to the International Criminal Court (ICC) became widespread after the Court had issued an arrest warrant against the Sudanese President Omar Al-Bashir in 2009. While the Court, since its entry into function in 2002, has been confronted with criticism from various corners, the neo-colonialism controversy was sparked by African stakeholders. Unlike other contributions in this domain, thus, this book provides a Western perspective on an issue more often addressed from an African standpoint, with the intention of distinguishing itself from the more political and emotive and sometimes superficial arguments that exist within critical legal approaches towards the ICC. The subject matter will primarily be of interest to scholars of international criminal law or those operating at the intersection of law and politics/history, nationals of African states and from other parts of the world professionally interested and/or involved in international criminal law and justice and the ICC, and governmental and non-governmental organizations. Secondly, the book will also appeal and speak to critical legal scholars and those interested in historical legal analysis. Res Schuerch is a Swiss lawyer specialized in the field of International Criminal Law and the ICC. He previously worked as a researcher at the University of Amsterdam and as an academic assistant at the University of Zürich.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: The International Criminal Court – Old Wine in a New Bottle?.- The Historical Concepts of Colonialism and Neo-colonialism.- Introduction Part I.- European Colonialism and Neo-colonialism.- Legal Colonialism by European States.- Imposition of Laws and Western Values in the Field of International Criminal Law.- Introduction Part II.- The Universalisation of Western Values since the Second World War.- The Application of Universal Values in the Field of International Criminal Law.- Re-inventing the Concept of Neo-colonialism by Adopting an International Criminal Law Perspective.- Introduction Part III.- The Issue of Unjustified Asymmetry in the Enforcement of International Criminal Law.- The Security Council Referral Power under Article 13 (b) Rome Statute.- The Security Council Deferral Power under Article 16 Rome Statute.- U.S. Bilateral Non-Surrender Agreements and Article 98 (2) Rome Statute.- Concluding Remarks.- Table of Treaties and Legislation.- Table of Cases.- Index.
Manolis G. Kavussanos, Athens University of Economics and Business, Athens, Greece; Ilias D. Visvikis, World Maritime University , Malmö, Sweden

The International Handbook of Shipping Finance

Theory and Practice
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XLII, 430 p. 106 illus., 86 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-46545-0
       9781137465450
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Capital Markets / Risk Management
The International Handbook of Shipping Finance is a one-stop resource, offering comprehensive reference to theory and practice in the area of shipping finance. In the multibillion dollar international shipping industry, it is important to understand the various issues involved in the finance of the sector. This involves the identification and evaluation of the alternative sources of capital available for financing the ships, including the appraisal and budgeting of shipping investment projects; legal and insurance aspects of ship finance; the financial analysis and modelling of investment projects; mergers and acquisitions; and the commercial and market risk management issues involved. Edited by two leading academics in this area, and with contributions from 25 prominent market practitioners and academics over 16 chapters, this Handbook covers shipping finance and banking, maritime financial management and investments. As such, it includes: shipping markets; asset backed finance; shipbuilding finance; debt finance; public and private equity and debt markets; structured finance; legal aspects and key clauses of ship mortgages; marine insurance; mechanisms for handling defaulted loans; investment appraisal and capital budgeting; financial analysis and investment modelling; business risk management and freight derivatives; and mergers and acquisitions. Thus, the Handbook offers a rigorous understanding of the different aspects of modern shipping finance and maritime financial management and investments, the various characteristics of the available products, the capital needs and requirements, and a clear view on the different financial management strategies through a series of practical examples and applications. Technical where appropriate, but grounded in market reality, this is a “must-have” reference for anyone involved in shipping finance, from bank practitioners and commodity trading houses, to shipbrokers, lawyers and insurance houses as well as to university students studying shipping finance. Table of ContentsPreface by EditorsManolis Kavussanos, Professor, Director, MSc in International Shipping, Finance and Management, Athens University of Economics and Business, GreeceIlias Visvikis, Professor, Director Executive Education and Professional Development, World Maritime University, Sweden Chapter 1: Shipping Markets and their Economic Drivers Jan-Henrik Huebner, Head of Shipping Advisory, DNV GL, Germany Chapter 2: Asset Risk Assessment, Analysis and Forecasting in Asset Backed FinanceHenriette Brent Petersen, Head of Shipping & Offshore Research, DVB Bank SE, The Netherlands Chapter 3: Overview of Ship Finance Fotis Giannakoulis, Research Vice President, Morgan Stanley, USA Chapter 4: Shipbuilding Finance Charles Cushing, C.R. Cushing & Co. Inc., USA Chapter 5: Debt Financing in Shipping George Paleokrassas, Partner, Watson, Farley & Williams, Greece Chapter 6: Public Debt Markets for Shipping Basil Karatzas, Founder & CEO, Karatzas Marine Advisors & Co., USA Chapter 7: Public and Private Equity Markets Jeffrey Pribor, Global Head, Maritime Investment Banking, Jefferies LLC, USACecilie Lind, Associate Investment Banking, Jefferies LLC, USA Chapter 8: Structured Finance in Shipping Contributor: Ioannis Alexopoulos, Director, Shipping Financier, Eurofin Group, GreeceNikos Stratis, Managing Director of Augustea Group, UK Chapter 9: Ke

Inhaltsangaben

Preface; Manolis Kavussanos and Ilias Visvikis.- 1. Shipping Markets and their Economic Drivers; Jan-Henrik Huebner.- 2. Asset Risk Assessment, Analysis and Forecasting in Asset Backed Finance; Henriette Brent Petersen.- 3. Overview of Ship Finance; Fotis Giannakoulis.- 4. Shipbuilding Finance; Charles Cushing.- 5. Debt Financing in Shipping; George Paleokrassas.- 6. Public Debt Markets for Shipping; Basil Karatzas.- 7. Public and Private Equity Markets; Jeffrey Pribor and Cecilie Lind.- 8. Structured Finance in Shipping; Ioannis Alexopoulos, Director and Nikos Stratis.- 9. Key Clauses of a Shipping Loan Agreement; Kyriakos Spoullos.- 10. Legal Aspects of Ship Mortgages; Simon Norton and Claudio Chistè.- 11. Reasons and Mechanics of Handling Defaulted Shipping Loans and Methods of Recovery; Dimitris Anagnostopoulos and Philippos Tsamanis.- 12. Marine Insurance; Marc Huybrechts and Theodora Nikaki.- 13. Maritime Investment Appraisal and Budgeting; Wolfgang Drobetz, Stefan Albertijn and Max Johns.- 14. Financial Analysis and Modelling of Ship Investments; Lars Patterson.- 15. Maritime Business Risk Management; Manolis Kavussanos and Ilias Visvikis.- 16. Mergers and Acquisitions in Shipping; George Alexandridis and Manish Singh.
Colin Shaw, Beyond Philosophy , Orlando,; Ryan Hamilton, Atlanta,; Ryan Hamilton

The Intuitive Customer

7 Imperatives For Moving Your Customer Experience to the Next Level
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIX, 216 p. 23 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-53428-6
       9781137534286
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
40,65 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Marketing / Organization
Building on the work of Daniel Kahneman (Thinking Fast and Slow), Dan Ariely (Predictably Irrational), Shaw and Hamilton provide a new understanding of how people behave, explain what it means for organizations who really want to understand their customers, and show you what to do to create exceptional customer experiences.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Too Often Organizations Are Solving The Wrong Problem 2. Guiding Principle 1: Customers Are Irrational Don't Fight It, Embrace It 3. Guiding Principle 2: Customer's Minds Can Be In Conflict With Themselves 4. Guiding Principle 3: Easy Is More Important Than You Think It Is 5. Guiding Principle 4: Customers Are What They Do 6. Guiding Principle 5: Customer Loyalty Is Only A Memory 7. Guiding Principle 6: Customers Do Things And They Don't Know Why 8. Guiding Principle 7: Organizations Halo's Are Slipping 9. What Do Organizations Need To Do? 10. Pulling It All Together
Dennis C. Jett, Pennsylvania State University, University Park, PA, USA

The Iran Nuclear Deal

Bombs, Bureaucrats, and Billionaires
Springer International Publishing
Seiten LVII, 481 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-59821-5
       9783319598215
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Popular Science in Political Science and International Relations / US Politics
This book examines attempts to influence the outcome of the negotiations between Iran and the United States over Iran’s nuclear capabilities. In particular, it focuses on struggles within the United States around public and congressional opinion with regard to the accord. Trying to prevent a successful outcome to the talks became a cottage industry in Washington, with the casino billionaire Sheldon Adelson being just one of those who were pouring millions of dollars into the effort. On the pro-diplomacy side, there were a wide range of religious, peace, and arms control groups with some financial support coming from the Ploughshares Fund trying to create the space for a negotiated agreement. The tactics of both sides of the debate are described and analyzed to show how a contentious foreign policy issue can become not just a decision for high-level government decision makers, but a wide-ranging fight that involves scores of nongovernmental organizations, the media, and thousands of activists.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. A Bit of History.- 3. Who Was Involved.- 4. The Tactics Involved.- 5. The Results and the Future.
Reshmi Dutta-Flanders, University of Kent School of European Culture and Languages, Canterbury, UK

The Language of Suspense in Crime Fiction

A Linguistic Stylistic Approach
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVII, 500 p. 13 illus., 12 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-47027-0
       9781137470270
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Stylistics / Fiction
This book introduces readers to linguistic stylistic analysis and combines both literary and linguistic analysis to explore suspense in crime fiction. Employing critical linguistics, discourse analysis and functional grammar, it demonstrates that suspense in plot-based stories is created through non-linear, causative presentation of the narrative. The author investigates how plot sequence is manipulated to ensure the reader cannot resolve the order of events until the end of the tale. From two-dimensional circumstantial detection in mystery stories to three-dimensional re-evaluation of offender orientation, she uses a linguistic-based stylistic framework to analyse offender motive. She also employs a 'discourse-based' frame analysis to examine the plot structure of crime stories for micro context and set-up scenarios, demonstrating that it is the unravelling of these devices that creates the suspense in murder mysteries and thrillers alike. Finally, she shows how grammaticization of the offending-self reveals an embedded diegetic space in the offender engagement discourse, provoking an intellectual and affective response and reshaping our overall outlook of the crime in the story. This book will appeal to researchers and students from literary and non-literary backgrounds looking for theoretical and practical advice on the linguistic stylistic approach to reading texts.

Inhaltsangaben

- Chapter 1: Manipulated Context.- Chapter 2: Double function.- Chapter 3: Disposition.- Chapter 4: Orientation.- Chapter 5: Contrasting mind styles.- Chapter 6: Conclusion.
Kimberly Williams, RedShift Legal, Inc. and New York Law School, Brooklyn, NY; John M. Facciola, U.S. Federal Judge (ret.) and Georgetown Law School, Washington DC, DC; Peter McCann, Loop, Philadelphia, PA, USA; Vincent M. Catanzaro, Shook, Hardy &

The Legal Technology Guidebook

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XI, 142 p. 3 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-54522-6
       9783319545226
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
69,54 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International IT and Media Law, Intellectual Property Law / Innovation/Technology Management
This book explores the transformational impact of new technological developments on legal practice. More specifically, it addresses knowledge management, communication, and e-discovery related technologies, and helps readers develop the project management and data analysis skills needed to effectively navigate the current, and future, landscapes. It studies the impact of current trends on business practices, as well as the ethical, procedural, and evidentiary concerns involved. Introducing novel interactive technologies as well as traditional content, the book reflects expertise from across the legal industry, including practitioners, the bench, academia, and legal technology consultants. All of the contributing authors currently teach aspiring lawyers and/or paralegals and have identified a gap in the available instructional material. Rapid technology advances have radically changed the way we all live and work, and the legal profession is by no means exempt from the impact of these changes. In order to better assist their clients, and to better compete on the legal market, it is imperative for lawyers to understand the ethical, functional, and business consequences of new technologies on their respective practices. This book provides the necessary content by including legal technology texts, information about novel pedagogical technologies, helpful tools for managing legal technologies and IT staff, statistical methods, tips and checklists.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1-Introduction to Ethics and Technology.- Chapter 2-Technological Competence.- Chapter 3-Outsourcing.- Chapter 4-Receipt of Privileged Information.- Chapter 5– What Is Technology?.- Chapter 6-How Did We Get Here?.- Chapter 12–Technology Assisted Review.- Chapter 14-Effective Communication.- Chapter 17–Effective Supervision.- Chapter 18–Using Technology for Improved Billing & Business.- Chapter 19-Understanding Business Impact of Competence Failures in Technology.
Mike R. Schoenberg, University of South Florida School of Medicine, Tampa, FL, USA; James G. Scott, University of Oklahoma Dept. Psychiatry & Behavioral Health, Oklahoma, OK, USA

The Little Black Book of Neuropsychology

A Syndrome-Based Approach
Springer US
Seiten XVIII, 968 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2011
ISBN 978-0-387-70703-7
       9780387707037
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Neuropsychology /
From translating the patient’s medical records and test results to providing recommendations, the neuropsychological evaluation incorporates the science and practice of neuropsychology, neurology, and psychological sciences. The Little Black Book of Neuropsychology brings the practice and study of neuropsychology into concise step-by-step focus—without skimping on scientific quality. This one-of-a-kind assessment reference complements standard textbooks by outlining signs, symptoms, and complaints according to neuropsychological domain (such as memory, language, or executive function), with descriptions of possible deficits involved, inpatient and outpatient assessment methods, and possible etiologies. Additional chapters offer a more traditional approach to evaluation, discussing specific neurological disorders and diseases in terms of their clinical features, neuroanatomical correlates, and assessment and treatment considerations. Chapters in psychometrics provide for initial understanding of brain-behavior interpretation as well as more advanced principals for neuropsychology practice including new diagnostic concepts and analysis of change in performance over time. For the trainee, beginning clinician or seasoned expert, this user-friendly presentation incorporating ‘quick reference guides’ throughout which will add to the practice armentarium of beginning and seasoned clinicians alike. Key features of The Black Book of Neuropsychology:  Concise framework for understanding the neuropsychological referral. Symptoms/syndromes presented in a handy outline format, with dozens of charts and tables. Review of basic neurobehavioral examination procedure. Attention to professional issues, including advances in psychometrics and diagnoses, including tables for reliable change for many commonly used tests. Special “Writing Reports like You Mean It” section and guidelines for answering referral questions.Includes appendices of practical information, including neuropsychological formulary. The Little Black Book of Neuropsychology is an indispensable resource for the range of practitioners and scientists interested in brain-behavior relationships. Particular emphasis is provided for trainees in neuropsychology and neuropsychologists. However, the easy to use format and concise presentation is likely to be of particular value to interns, residents, and fellows studying neurology, neurological surgery, psychiatry, and nurses. Finally, teachers of neuropsychological and neurological assessment may also find this book useful as a classroom text.'There is no other book in the field that covers the scope of material that is inside this comprehensive text. The work might be best summed up as being a clinical neuropsychology postdoctoral residency in a book, with the most up to date information available, so that it is also an indispensible book for practicing neuropsychologists in addition to students and residents…There is really no book like this available today. It skillfully brings together the most important foundationsof clinical neuropsychology with the 'nuts and bolts' of every facet of assessment. It also reminds the more weathered neuropsychologists among us of the essential value of neuropsychological assessment…the impact of the disease on the patient’s cognitive functioning and behavior may only be objectively quantified through a neuropsychological assessment.'Arch Clin Neuropsychol (2011) first published online June 13, 2011 Read the full review acn.oxfordjournals.org

Inhaltsangaben

Part I: Neuropsychology – General Issues: The Neuropsychological Referral.- Medical Records.- Basic Neuroanatomy.- Basic components of a Neuropsychological Evaluation.- Part II: Neuropsychological Domains: Arousal: The drowsy, lethargic, or stuporous patient.- Attention/Concentration Problems: The distractible patient.- Inattention/Neglect Syndromes.- Language Problems.- Learning and Memory: The Forgetful Patient.- Visuospatial/Visuoconstructional Problems.- Apraxias.- Agnosias.- Executive Functions (problem solving, abstraction, sequencing, inhibition, self-monitoring, planning, and initiation).- Emotional/Mood.- Episodic Neurological Dysfunction.- Part III: Specific Neurological Diseases: Aphasia.- Cerebrovascular Disease and Stroke.- Dementia.- Seizures/Epilepsy.- Somatization Disorders, blackout spells, fits/convulsions.- Parkinson’s Disease and other movement disorders.- Multiple Sclerosis and Other Demyelinating Disorders.- Traumatic Brain Injury and Concussion.- Infections.- Neoplasms/Neoplastic Syndromes .- Psychiatric – depression and anxiety.- Part IV: Special Considerations: Medicolegal exposure.- Reporting Test performance/scores.- Limitations.- Answering Referral Questions.- Placement issues.
Mike R. Schoenberg, University of South Florida School of Medicine, Tampa, FL, USA; James G. Scott, University of Oklahoma Dept. Psychiatry & Behavioral Health, Oklahoma, OK, USA

The Little Black Book of Neuropsychology

A Syndrome-Based Approach
Springer US
Seiten XVIII, 968 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2011
ISBN 978-1-4899-7755-7
       9781489977557
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,15 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Neuropsychology /
From translating the patient’s medical records and test results to providing recommendations, the neuropsychological evaluation incorporates the science and practice of neuropsychology, neurology, and psychological sciences. The Little Black Book of Neuropsychology brings the practice and study of neuropsychology into concise step-by-step focus—without skimping on scientific quality. This one-of-a-kind assessment reference complements standard textbooks by outlining signs, symptoms, and complaints according to neuropsychological domain (such as memory, language, or executive function), with descriptions of possible deficits involved, inpatient and outpatient assessment methods, and possible etiologies. Additional chapters offer a more traditional approach to evaluation, discussing specific neurological disorders and diseases in terms of their clinical features, neuroanatomical correlates, and assessment and treatment considerations. Chapters in psychometrics provide for initial understanding of brain-behavior interpretation as well as more advanced principals for neuropsychology practice including new diagnostic concepts and analysis of change in performance over time. For the trainee, beginning clinician or seasoned expert, this user-friendly presentation incorporating ‘quick reference guides’ throughout which will add to the practice armentarium of beginning and seasoned clinicians alike. Key features of The Black Book of Neuropsychology:  Concise framework for understanding the neuropsychological referral. Symptoms/syndromes presented in a handy outline format, with dozens of charts and tables. Review of basic neurobehavioral examination procedure. Attention to professional issues, including advances in psychometrics and diagnoses, including tables for reliable change for many commonly used tests. Special “Writing Reports like You Mean It” section and guidelines for answering referral questions.Includes appendices of practical information, including neuropsychological formulary. The Little Black Book of Neuropsychology is an indispensable resource for the range of practitioners and scientists interested in brain-behavior relationships. Particular emphasis is provided for trainees in neuropsychology and neuropsychologists. However, the easy to use format and concise presentation is likely to be of particular value to interns, residents, and fellows studying neurology, neurological surgery, psychiatry, and nurses. Finally, teachers of neuropsychological and neurological assessment may also find this book useful as a classroom text.'There is no other book in the field that covers the scope of material that is inside this comprehensive text. The work might be best summed up as being a clinical neuropsychology postdoctoral residency in a book, with the most up to date information available, so that it is also an indispensible book for practicing neuropsychologists in addition to students and residents…There is really no book like this available today. It skillfully brings together the most important foundationsof clinical neuropsychology with the 'nuts and bolts' of every facet of assessment. It also reminds the more weathered neuropsychologists among us of the essential value of neuropsychological assessment…the impact of the disease on the patient’s cognitive functioning and behavior may only be objectively quantified through a neuropsychological assessment.'Arch Clin Neuropsychol (2011) first published online June 13, 2011 Read the full review acn.oxfordjournals.org

Inhaltsangaben

Part I: Neuropsychology – General Issues: The Neuropsychological Referral.- Medical Records.- Basic Neuroanatomy.- Basic components of a Neuropsychological Evaluation.- Part II: Neuropsychological Domains: Arousal: The drowsy, lethargic, or stuporous patient.- Attention/Concentration Problems: The distractible patient.- Inattention/Neglect Syndromes.- Language Problems.- Learning and Memory: The Forgetful Patient.- Visuospatial/Visuoconstructional Problems.- Apraxias.- Agnosias.- Executive Functions (problem solving, abstraction, sequencing, inhibition, self-monitoring, planning, and initiation).- Emotional/Mood.- Episodic Neurological Dysfunction.- Part III: Specific Neurological Diseases: Aphasia.- Cerebrovascular Disease and Stroke.- Dementia.- Seizures/Epilepsy.- Somatization Disorders, blackout spells, fits/convulsions.- Parkinson’s Disease and other movement disorders.- Multiple Sclerosis and Other Demyelinating Disorders.- Traumatic Brain Injury and Concussion.- Infections.- Neoplasms/Neoplastic Syndromes .- Psychiatric – depression and anxiety.- Part IV: Special Considerations: Medicolegal exposure.- Reporting Test performance/scores.- Limitations.- Answering Referral Questions.- Placement issues.
Kevin McCain, Department of Philosophy Univ of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL

The Nature of Scientific Knowledge

An Explanatory Approach
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 277 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-33403-5
       9783319334035
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
64,19 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Philosophy of Science / Epistemology
This book offers a comprehensive and accessible introduction to the epistemology of science. It not only introduces readers to the general epistemological discussion of the nature of knowledge, but also provides key insights into the particular nuances of scientific knowledge. No prior knowledge of philosophy or science is assumed by The Nature of Scientific Knowledge. Nevertheless, the reader is taken on a journey through several core concepts of epistemology and philosophy of science that not only explores the characteristics of the scientific knowledge of individuals but also the way that the development of scientific knowledge is a particularly social endeavor. The topics covered in this book are of keen interest to students of epistemology and philosophy of science as well as science educators interested in the nature of scientific knowledge.  In fact, as a result of its clear and engaging approach to understanding scientific knowledge The Nature of Scientific Knowledge is a book that anyone interested in scientific knowledge, knowledge in general, and any of a myriad of related concepts would be well advised to study closely.  

Inhaltsangaben

Preface.- The Importance of Understanding the Nature of Scientific Knowledge.- Part I: General Features of Knowledge.- The Traditional Account of Knowledge.- Belief.- Truth.- Justification.- Evidence.- Basing a Belief on the Evidence.- A Problem for the Traditional Account of Knowledge.- Part II:  Knowledge of Scientific Claims.- Explanation and Understanding.- From Explanation to Knowledge.- Part III:  Challenges to Scientific Knowledge.- Skepticism about the External World.- Skepticism about Induction.- Empirical Evidence of Irrationality.- Anti-Realism about Science.- Part IV:  Social Dimensions of Scientific Knowledge.- Gaining Scientific Knowledge from Others.- Knowledge in a Scientific Community.- Looking Back and Looking Forward.- Notes.- References.- Index.
Donald R. Wehrs, Auburn University, Auburn, AL, USA; Thomas Blake, Monroe Community College, Rochester, NY, USA

The Palgrave Handbook of Affect Studies and Textual Criticism

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIX, 883 p. 30 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-63302-2
       9783319633022
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
192,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Comparative Literature / Literary Theory
This volume provides a comprehensive account of how scholarship on affect and scholarship on texts have come to inform one another over the past few decades. The result has been that explorations of how texts address, elicit, shape, and dramatize affect have become central to contemporary work in literary, film, and art criticism, as well as in critical theory, rhetoric, performance studies, and aesthetics. Guiding readers to the variety of topics, themes, interdisciplinary dialogues, and sub-disciplinary specialties that the study of interplay between affect and texts has either inaugurated or revitalized, the handbook showcases and engages the diversity of scholarly topics, approaches, and projects that thinking of affect in relation to texts and related media open up or enable. These include (but are not limited to) investigations of what attention to affect brings to established methods of studying texts—in terms of period, genre, cultural contexts, rhetoric, and individual authorship.

Inhaltsangaben

1 Introduction: Affect and Texts: Contemporary Inquiry in Historical Contexts32 Place-in-Process in Colm Tóibín’s The Blackwater Lightship: Human Affect and the Physical Environment.- 2 Affect and Emotion: James, Dewey, Tomkins, Damasio, Massumi, Spinoza.- 3 Affect Studies and Cognitive Approaches to Literature.- 4 The Bio-Cultural Evolution of Language and Prosocial Emotions.- 5 Trust in Theatre.-6 Social Identity: Categorization, Cognition, and Affect.-7 Affective Aversion, Ethics, and Fiction.- 8 Affect and Narratology.- 9 The Turn to Affect: Emotions without Subjects, Causality without Demonstrable Cause.-10 Are there States of Mind Which We Can Call “Inner Sensuousness”?.- 11 Affect and Intention in Rhetoric and Poetics.- 12 Empathy and Love: Types of Textuality and Degrees of Affectivity.- 13 “That’s Deep!”: The Role of Being Moved and Feelings of Profundity in the Appreciation of Serious Narratives.- 14 The Priority of Form: Kenneth Burke and the Rediscovery of Affect and Rhetoric.- 15 Tragedy “Before” Pity and Fear.- 16 Narrative and Affect in Epic, Romance, and the Novel.- 17 Empathy’s Neglected Cousin: How Narratives Shape Our Sympathy.- 18 Laurence Sterne’s “Poor Maria” as Model of Empathic Response.-19 Film and Affect, Theories Entwined: The Case of the War Genre in Saving Private Ryan (Steven Spielberg, 1998).- 20 Medieval English Texts and Affects: Narratives as Tools for Feeling.- 21 Rhythmic Cognition in Late Medieval Lyrics: BL MS Harley 2253.-22 A Wild Fable: Affect and Reception of Fernando de Rojas’ Celestina (1499).- 23 Don Quixote’s Affective Thoughts.- 24 Descartes, Emotions and the Inner Life of the Subject.- 25 “The History and Science of Feeling”: Wordsworth’s Affective Poetics, Then and Now.- 26 Kierkegaard’s “Ugly Feelings”.- 27 Affect and the Victorian Novel.-28 Affect in Film Music: A Brief History.- 29 Affect and Fascism in Lolita.- 30 From Bateman to Rat Man: American Psycho’s Unnatural Selections.- 31 Fascism, Torture, and Affect in Postwar Spain: Memoria Histórica Narratives and  Audience Empathy.
Adeshina Afolayan, University of Ibadan, Ibadan, Nigeria; Toyin Falola, The University of Texas at Austin, Austin, TX, USA

The Palgrave Handbook of African Philosophy

Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XXIX, 867 p. 5 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-59290-3
       9781137592903
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
246,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of Philosophy / African History
This handbook investigates the current state and future possibilities of African Philosophy, as a discipline and as a practice, vis-à-vis the challenge of African development and Africa’s place in a globalized, neoliberal capitalist economy. The volume offers a comprehensive survey of the philosophical enterprise in Africa, especially with reference to current discourses, arguments and new issues—feminism and gender, terrorism and fundamentalism, sexuality, development, identity, pedagogy and multidisciplinarity, etc.—that are significant for understanding how Africa can resume its arrested march towards decolonization and liberation.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: Rethinking African Philosophy in the Age of Globalization.- 2. African Philosophy: appraisal of a recurrent problematic.- 3. Archaeologies of African Thought in a Global Age.- 4. A Philosophical Rereading of Fanon, Nkrumah and Cabral in the Age of Globalization and Post-Modernity.- 5. Africanizing Philosophy: Wiredu, Hountondji and Mudimbe..- 6. Oruka and Sage Philosophy: New Insights in Sagacious Reasoning.- 7. Rethinking the History of African Philosophy.- 8. The Question of African Logic: Beyond Apologia and Polemics.- 9. Revisiting the Language Question in African Philosophy.- 10. Is African Studies Afraid of African Philosophy?.-11. The Geography of African Philosophy.-12. Philosophy in Portuguese-Speaking Africa.-13. An Interpretive Introduction to Classical Ethiopian Philosophy.-14. Confucianism and African Philosophy.-15.Islamic Philosophy and the Challenge to African Philosophy.-16. Philosophy of Afrocentricity.-17. “Black” Philosophy, “African” Philosophy, “Africana” Philosophy: Transnational Deconstructive and Reconstructive Renovations in “Philosophy”.-18. Between Africa and the Caribbean: The Nature of Afro-Caribbean Philosophy.-19. The Advent of Black Thinkers and the Limit of Continental Philosophy.-20. On Vernacular Rationality: Gadamer and Eze in Conversation.-21. Sophia, Phronesis and the Universality of Ifá in African Philosophy.-22. Gendering African Philosophy; Or: African Feminism as Decolonising Force.-23. Feminism(s) and Oppression: Rethinking Gender from a Yoruba Perspective.-24. Africa and the Philosophy of Sexuality.-25. African Philosophy, Afropolitanism and “Africa”.-26. Philosophy of Nationalism in Africa.-27. Sovereignty in Pre-colonial Mali and North Africa.-28. The Repressive State in African Literature: A Philosophical Reading.-29. Re-imagining the Philosophy of Decolonization.-30. Community, Communism, and Communitarianism.-31. African Humanism and Ethics: The Case of Ubuntu and Omolúwàbí .-32. Ubuntu and the Emancipation of Law.- 33. Philosophy and Artistic Creativity in Africa.-34. African Philosophy at the African Cinema.-35. Philosophy of Science and Africa.- 36. Supporting the African Renaissance: Afrocentric Leadership and the Imperative of Strong Institutions.- 37. Africa and the Philosophy of Democratic Governance.- 38. Indigenous (African) Knowledge System, Science and Technology.- 39. African Philosophy and the Challenge of Science and Technology.- 40. Humanitatis-Eco (Eco-Humanism): An African Environmental Theory.- 41. Ubuntu and the Environment.- 42. African Philosophy in a World of Terror.- 43. Yorùbá Conception of Peace.- 44. African Philosophy and Education.- 45. Ritual Archives.- 46. Philosophy, Education and Art in Africa.-47. Teaching African Philosophy and a Postmodern Dis-position.-48. African Philosophy for Children.- 49. African Philosophy as a Multidisciplinary Discourse.-50. A Bibliographical Report on African Philosophy.
Samuel Ojo Oloruntoba, University of South Africa, Johannesburg, South Africa; Toyin Falola, University of Texas at Austin, Austin, TX, USA

The Palgrave Handbook of African Politics, Governance and Development

Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XXIX, 925 p. 14 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-1-349-95231-1
       9781349952311
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
246,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Governance and Government / African Politics
This handbook constitutes a single collection of well researched articles and essays on African politics, governance and development from the pre-colonial through colonial to the post-colonial eras. Over the course of these interconnected periods, African politics have evolved with varied experiences across different parts of the continent. As politics is embedded both in the economy and the society, Africa has witnessed some changes in politics, economics, demography and its relations with the world in ways that requires in-depth analysis. This work provides an opportunity for old and new scholars to engage in the universe of the debate around African politics, governance and development and will serve as a ready reference material for students, researchers, policy makers and investors that are concerned with these issues.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: Contextualizing the Debates on Politics, Governance, and Development .- 2. Competing Theories and Concepts on Politics, Governance, and Development .- 3. Theory of the Crises of the State .- 4. Post-colonialism: Theoretical Foundations and Relevance to African Politics .- 5. Decoloniality as a Combative Ontology in African Development .- 6. Theories of Social change and Development in Africa .- 7. Theoretical Foundations of Nation-building .- 8. Pre-colonial political institutions: Relevance for Contemporary Africa .- 9. Politics and Society in Pre-Colonial Africa: Implications for Governance in Contemporary Times .- 10. Settler and Non-settler Colonialism in Africa .- 11. Nationalism in Africa: concepts, types and phases .- 12. Nationalism and Political Independence in Africa .- 13. Theories of Military in African Politics .- 14. Coups and counter-coups in Africa .- 15. Military and Transition Politics .- 16. Civil Military Relations in Africa .- 17. Politics of identity and the crisis of nation-building in Africa.- 18. Migration and Xenophobia in Africa .- 19. Identity politics and wars of secession in Africa .- 20. Ethnic Identity and Conflicts in Africa .- 21. Identities, Conflicts, and Africa Refugee Crises .- 22. Resource Control and Conflict in Africa .- 23. Trade Unions and the struggle for democracy in Africa .- 24. The Peasantry and politics in Africa .- 25. Civil Society Organizations and Democratic Governance in Africa .- 26.Uncivil society and ethnic militia in African politics .- 27. Migration and Urbanization in Africa .- 28. Democracy and Political Development in Africa .- 29. Political Parties and Democracy in Africa .- 30. Institutions, Neopatriomonial Politics, and Democratic Development .- 31. Gender and Governance .- 32. Political Participation and Political Citizenship .- 33. Media and Politics in Africa .- 34. Public Procurement and Development in Africa .- 35. Challenges of Economic Development .- 36. Resource Governance and the Crisis of Development .- 37. Illicit Financial Flows and African Development Conundrum .- 38. Public Good and the Crises of Service Delivery in Africa .- 39. Regional Integration and Development .- 40. Resilient/Informal  Economy and African Development .- 41. The Role of International Financial Institutions .- 42. Africa in the global trading system .- 43. Africa and foreign direct investment .- 44. Africa in the BRICS: In whose interest? .- 45. Africa's Development Narratives: From Growth to Wellbeing .- 46. The politics of foreign aid .- 47. From OAU to AU: Rethinking supranational governance in Africa .- 48. Pan Africanism is Africa’s Third Way: The Cultural Relevance of African Political Economy .- 49. Demography and the Future of Africa .- 50. From Hard to Human Security: Rethinking Security Architecture in Africa .- 51. Research, Innovation and Higher Education in Sub-Saharan Africa .- 52. Energy Security and the future of development in Africa .- 53. Climate Change, Food Security and Sustainable Development in Africa .- 54. The Political Economy of Corruption .- 55. Rethinking Governance and Development.
Antje Deckert, Auckland University of Technology, Auckland, New Zealand; Rick Sarre, University of South Australia, Adelaide, SA, Australia

The Palgrave Handbook of Australian and New Zealand Criminology, Crime and Justice

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIX, 916 p. 33 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-55746-5
       9783319557465
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
245,03 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminological Theory / Human Rights and Crime
This handbook engages key debates in Australian and New Zealand criminology over the last 50 years. In six sections, containing 56 original chapters, leading researchers and practitioners investigate topics such as the history of criminology; crime and justice data; law reform; gangs; youth crime; violent, white collar and rural crime; cybercrime; terrorism; sentencing; Indigenous courts; child witnesses and children of prisoners; police complaints processes; gun laws; alcohol policies; and criminal profiling. Key sections highlight criminological theory and, crucially, Indigenous issues and perspectives on criminal justice. Contributors examine the implications of past and current trends in official data collection, crime policy, and academic investigation to build up an understanding of under-researched and emerging problem areas for future research. An authoritative and comprehensive text, this handbook constitutes a long-awaited and necessary resource for dedicated academics, public policy analysts, and university students.

Inhaltsangaben

Section I: The crime and justice landscape.- 1. Fifty years of Australian criminology; Duncan Chappell.- 2. A short history of New Zealand criminology; James Rodgers and Philip Stenning.- 3. Public sector criminological research; Russell G Smith.- 4. The Asian and Pacific Conference of Correctional Administrators; David Biles.- 5. Crime and justice data; Fiona Dowsley and Timothy Hart.- 6. Crime, news, and the media; Judy McGregor.- 7. Law reform targeting crime and disorder; Lorana Bartels and Rick Sarre.- Section II: Patterns of crime.- 8. Mapping common crime; Jason Payne and Fiona Hutton.- 9. Violent crime; Stuart Ross and Kenneth Polk.- 10. Commercial armed robbery; Emmeline Taylor.- 11. Outlaw motorcycle gangs; Mark Lauchs and Jarrod Gilbert.- 12. Samoan youth crime; Laumua Tunufa’i.- 13. Domestic violence, violence in close relationships, and violence against women; Samantha Jeffries and Sharon Hayes.- 14. Sexual violence and harassment in the digital era; Anastasia Powell and Nicola Henry.- 15. Cybercrime; Roderic Broadhurst.- 16. Corporate and white collar crime; Fiona Haines.- 17. Corruption; Adam Graycar.- 18. Fraud victimisation and prevention; Tim Prenzler.- 19. Rural crime; Elaine Barclay.- 20. Transnational organised crime, border policing, and refugees; Michael Grewcock.- Section III: State and non-state responses.- 21. A Gallipoli trope on Australian peacekeeping; John Braithwaite.- 22. Terrorism and anti-terrorism laws; Selda Dagistanli and Scott Poynting.- 23. New Zealand penal policy in the twenty-first century; John Pratt.- 24. Sentencing theories, practices, and trends; James C. Oleson.- 25. Indigenous sentencing courts in Australia; Elena Marchetti.- 26. Restorative justice; Masahiro Suzuki and William Wood.- 27. Emotion and language in restorative youth justice; Hennessey Hayes.- 28. Child witnesses in criminal courts; Kirsten Hanna and Emily Henderson.- 29. Children of prisoners; Catherine Flynn and Anna Eriksson.- 30. Redress for historical institutional abuse of children; Kathleen Daly.- 31. Privatisation of criminal justice; Alice Mills.- 32. The third sector in criminal justice; Janet Ransley and Lorraine Mazerolle.- 33. The pluralisation of policing; Trevor Bradley.- 34. Policing and crime policy; Andrew Goldsmith.- 35. The police complaints process; John Buttle and Antje Deckert.- Section IV: Crime and justice through different theoretical lenses.- 36. Strain theory and crime; Li Eriksson and Lisa Broidy.- 37. Developmental and life-course criminology; Paul Mazerolle and Tara Renae McGee.- 38. Left realist criminology; David Brown.- 39. Feminist criminology; Kathryn Henne.- 40. Convict criminology; Greg Newbold.- 41. Green criminology; Rob White and Sarah Wright Monod.- 42. Narrative criminology; Mark Halsey.- 43. Victims, legal consciousness, and legal mobilisation; Robyn Holder.- Section V: Indigenous perspectives on crime and justice.- 44. Indigenous peoples and criminal justice in Australia; Chris Cunneen and Amanda Porter.- 45. M?ori experiences of colonisation and M?ori criminology; Robert Webb.- 46. Colonial law, dominant discourses, and intergenerational trauma; Rawiri Waretini-Karena.- 47. Rangatahi courts; Khylee Quince.- 48. M?ori and prison; Tracey McIntosh and Kim Workman.- 49. Crime and M?ori in the media; Simone Bull.- 50. Doing research with the Indigenous domain as a non-Ind
Ross McGarry, University of Liverpool, UK, LIVERPOOL; Sandra Walklate, University of Liverpool, UK, Liverpool

The Palgrave Handbook of Criminology and War

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXI, 469 p. 8 illus., 3 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-43169-1
       9781137431691
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
234,33 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Criminology and Criminal Justice, general / Military and Defence Studies
This interdisciplinary Handbook brings together into one coherent volume a range of international authors, who firmly establish the relevance of war within the discipline of criminology. The chapters address emerging and prevailing issues in the criminological study of war, including state crime, corporate crime, victimology, genocide, policing, security and various forms of violence. Taking a critical standpoint including feminist, cultural, and radical approaches amongst others, the Handbook is split into five clear sections: (1) The Criminogenic Contexts of War; (2) Violence and Victimization at War; (3) Violence, War and Security; (4) Perpetrators of Violence and the Aftermath of War; and (5) Cultural and Methodological Developments for a Criminology of War. Edited by two leading experts in the field, this Handbook provides an original point of reference on the contemporary debates and applications of criminology and war and will be a key resource for academics and students across criminology, international relations, critical military studies, military sociology, peace studies and law.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction. The Criminology of War, What is it Good For?; Ross McGarry and Sandra Walklate.- Part I. The Criminogenic Contexts of War.- Chapter 1. War and Criminal Justice and the Rebirth of Privatisation; John Lea.- Chapter 2. Terrorism and War: Interrogating Discourses of Risk and Security; Gabe Mythen.- Chapter 3. Corporate War Crimes; Vincenzo Ruggiero.- Chapter 4. Criminology, War and Environmental Despoliation; Carmel O’Sullivan and Reece Walters.- Part II. Violence and Victimization at War.- Chapter 5. Genocide in the Context of War; Alex Alvarez.- Chapter 6. Sexual Violence During Armed Conflict; Christopher W. Mullins.- Chapter 7. Soldiers and Victims: Conceptions of Military Service and Victimhood, <1914-1945; Zoe Alker and Barry Godfrey.- Chapter 8. 'I'm the Victim Here': Intrastate Conflict and the Legacy of Political Violence; Neil Ferguson.- Chapter 9. Framing Blame and Victimhood in Post-Conflict Northern Ireland; Ruth Jamieson.- Part III. Violence, War and Security.- Chapter 10. Private Security Contractors as Criminals/Victims; Adam White.- Chapter 11. Police Pluralisation and Private Security; Ruth Delaforce.- Chapter 12. An Analysis of the War-Policing Assemblage: The Case of Iraq (2003-2015); Teresa Degenhardt.- Chapter 13. Violence, Policing and War; Jude McCulloch.- Part IV. Perpetrators of Violence and the Aftermath of War.- Chapter 14. The Dark Side of Defence: Masculinities and Violence in the Military; Ben Wadham.- Chapter 15. Imprisonment in Military Realms; Barry Goldson.- Chapter 16. Veterans, Crime and Criminal Justice Policy in England and Wales; Emma Murray.- Chapter 17. Should the Forces be in the Firing Line? Social Policy, the Veteran and the 'Acceptable Face' of Violent Criminality; James Treadwell.- Chapter 18. Lethal Innovation: The Nexus of Criminology, War and Malevolent Creativity; David H. Cropley.- Part V. Cultural and Methodological Developments for a Criminology of War.- Chapter 19. Cultural Criminology of War; Josh Klein.- Chapter 20. Reading Between the Lines: the Normalisation of Violence within Military Memoirs; Rachel Woodward and K. Neil Jenkings.- Chapter 21. Online Engagements: War and Social Media; Andrew Kirton.- Chapter 22. The Violence You Were/n't Meant to See: Representations of Death in an Age of Digital Reproduction; Michael Mair, Chris Elsey, Paul V. Smith and Patrick G. Watson.- Conclusion. Taking Account of War, Making it Count; Sandra Walklate and Ross McGarry.
Alan Cafruny, Hamilton College , New York, , USA; Leila Simona Talani, King's College London , London; Gonzalo Pozo Martin, University of Stockholm, Grojecc, Sweden

The Palgrave Handbook of Critical International Political Economy

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVII, 469 p. 16 illus., 9 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-50017-5
       9781137500175
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
181,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Political Economy / Political Theory
Challenging the assumptions of ‘mainstream’ International Political Economy (IPE), this Handbook demonstrates the considerable value of critical theory to the discipline through a series of cutting-edge studies. The field of IPE has always had an inbuilt vocation within Historical Materialism, with an explicit ambition to make sense, from a critical standpoint, of the capitalist mode of production as a world system of sometimes paradoxically and sometimes smoothly overlapping states and markets. Having spearheaded the growth of a vigorous critical scholarship in the 1960s and 1970s, however, Marxism and neo-Gramscian approaches became increasingly marginalized over the course of the 1980s. The authors respond to the exposure of limits to mainstream contemporary scholarship in the wake of the onset of the Global Financial Crisis, and provide a comprehensive overview of the field of Critical International Political Economy. Problematizing socioeconomic and political structures, and considering these as potentially transitory and subject to change, the contributors aim not simply to understand a world of conflict, but furthermore to uncover the ways in which purportedly objective analyses reflect the interests of those in positions of privilege and power.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction; Alan Cafruny.- Part I: Theory.- Chapter 1: The Transatlantic Imperium after the Global Financial crisis: Atlanticism fractured or consolidated?; Alan Cafruny.- Chapter 2: Critical Global Political Economy and the Global Organic Crisis; Stephen Gill.- Chapter 3: Marxism Critical IPE Reader; Allex Callinicos.- Chapter 4: (Neo)Gramscians and IPE: A Socio-Economic Understanding of Transnationalism, Hegemony and Civil Society; Leila Simona Talani.- Chapter 5: Feminism and Critical International Political Economy; Anne E. Lacsamana.- Chapter 6: Critical International Political Economy and Method (Johannes Jäger, Laura Horn and Joachim Becker.- Chapter 7: Development and the Outer Periphery: The Logic of Exclusion; Robert Fatton Jr..- Part II: Issues.- Chapter 8: American foreign policy from a Critical International Political Economy perspective: capitalist empire and the social sources of grand strategy; Bastiaan van Apeldoorn.- Chapter 9: Being Critical About Security: What Critical Political Economy Says About Security and Identity; Evertina Silina.- Chapter 10: Inequality and Poverty in the Neoliberal Era; Roberto Roccu.- Chapter 11: The migration crisis before and after the Arab Spring: A transnationalist perspective; Leila Simona Talani.- Chapter 12: Crises as Driving Forces of Neoliberal 'Trasformismo:' The Contours of the Turkish Political Economy since the 2000s; Galip L. Yalman.- Chapter 13: Energy, Capital as Power and World Order; Tim Di Muzio.- Chapter 14: Coming in from the cold: intellectual property rights as a key international political economy issue; Valbona Muzaka.- Part III: Regional Analysis.- Chapter 15: Globalizing China: A Critical International Political Economy Perspective on China's Rise; Henk Overbeek.- Chapter 16: Antinomies of the Indian State; Waquar Ahmed, Ipsita Chatterjee.- Chapter 17: BRICS within critical international political economy; Patrick Bond.- Chapter 18: East-Central Europe in the European Union; Dorothee Bohle.- Chapter 19: The Political Economy of Russia; Ruslan Dzarasov.- Chapter 20: The EU-MENA relationship before and after the Arab Spring; Christos Kourtelis.- Chapter 21: International Political Economy in Latin America: Redefining the Periphery; Ana Saggioro Garcia, Maria Luisa Mendonça, Miguel Borba de Sá.-
Brendan Gough, Leeds Beckett University, Leeds, UK

The Palgrave Handbook of Critical Social Psychology

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXIX, 651 p. 2 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-51017-4
       9781137510174
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
181,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Personality and Social Psychology / Critical Psychology
This handbook is the first to bring together the latest theory and research on critical approaches to social psychological challenges. Edited by a leading authority in the field, this volume further establishes critical social psychology as a discipline of study, distinct from mainstream social psychology. The handbook explains how critical approaches to social processes and phenomena are essential to fully understanding them, and covers the main research topics in basic and applied social psychology, including social cognition, identity and social relations, alongside overviews of the main theories and methodologies that underpin critical approaches. This volume features a range of leading authors working on key social psychological issues, and highlights a commitment to a social psychology which shuns psychologisation, reductionism and neutrality. It provides invaluable insight into many of the most pressing and distressing issues we face in modern society, including the migrant and refugee crises affecting Europe; the devaluing of black lives in the USA; and the poverty, ill-health, and poor mental well-being that has resulted from ever-increasing austerity efforts in the UK. Including sections on critical perspectives, critical methodologies, and critical applications, this volume also focuses on issues within social cognition, self and identity. This one-stop handbook is an indispensable resource for a range of academics, students and researchers in the fields of psychology and sociology, and particularly those with an interest in social identity, power relations, and critical interventions.

Inhaltsangaben

PART I. Introduction.- Chapter 1. Critical Social Psychologies: Mapping the Terrain; Brendan Gough.- PART II. Critical Perspectives.- Chapter 2. Feminisms, Psychologies, and the Study of Social Life; Eva Magnusson & Jean Marecek.- Chapter 3. Marxism as a Foundation for Critical Social Psychology; Michael Arfken.- Chapter 4. Social Constructionism; Viv Burr & Penny Dick.- Chapter 5. The Radical Implications of Psychoanalysis for a Critical Social Psychology; Tom Goodwin.- Chapter 6. Queer Theory; Damien Riggs & Gareth Treharne.- Chapter 7. Critical Race Studies in Psychology; Phia S. Salter & Andrea D. Haugen.- Chapter 8. Psychology of Liberation Revised (A Critique of Critique); Maritza Montero.- PART III. Critical Methodologies.- Chapter 9. Phenomenology; Darren Langdridge.- Chapter 10. Narrative Social Psychology; Michael Murray.- Chapter 11. Discourse Analysis; Martha Augoustinos.- Chapter 12. Psychosocial Research; Stephanie Taylor.- Chapter 13. Innovations in Qualitative Methods; Virginia Braun, Victoria Clarke & Debra Gray.- PART IV. Rethinking Social Cognition.- Chapter 14. Attitudes and Attributions; Andy MacKinlay & Chris McVittie.- Chapter 15. Social Influence; Stephen Gibson & Cordet Smart.- Chapter 16. Prejudice; Keith Tuffin.- Chapter 17. Prosocial Behaviour; Irene Bruna Seu.- Chapter 18. Relationships: From Social Cognition to Critical Social; Simon Watts.- PART V. Social Identities/Relations/Conflicts.- Chapter 19. The Self; Chris McVittie & Andy MacKinlay.- Chapter 20. Gender; Sarah Riley & Adrienne Evans.- Chapter 21. Sexual Identities and Practices; Majella McFadden.- Chapter 22. Critical Approaches to Race; Simon Goodman.- Chapter 23. Towards a Critical Social Psychology of Social Class; Katy Day, Bridgette Rickett & Maxine Woolhouse.- Chapter 24. Critical Disability Studies; Dan Goodley, Rebecca Lawthom, Kirsty Liddiard & Katherine Runswick-Cole.- Chapter 25. Intersectionality: An Underused but Essential Theoretical Framework for Social Psychology; Lisa Bowleg.- PART VI. Critical Applications.- Chapter 26. Critical Health Psychology; Antonia C. Lyons & Kerry Chamberlain.- Chapter 27. Critical Clinical Psychology; Steven Coles & Aisling Mannion.- Chapter 28. Educational Psychology in (times of) Crisis: Psycho-Politics and the Goovernance of Poverty; China Mills.- Chapter 29. Critical Organisational Psychology; Matthew McDonald & David Bubna-Litic.- Chapter 30. Environment: Critical Social Psychology in the Anthropocene; Matthew Adams.
Michael J. Thompson, William Paterson University, Wayne, NJ, USA

The Palgrave Handbook of Critical Theory

Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVII, 739 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-55800-8
       9781137558008
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
181,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Political Theory / Political Sociology
This handbook is the only major survey of critical theory from philosophical, political, sociological, psychological and historical vantage points. It emphasizes not only on the historical and philosophical roots of critical theory, but also its current themes and trends as well as future applications and directions. It addresses specific areas of interest that have forged the critical theory tradition, such as critical social psychology, aesthetics and the critique of culture, communicative action, and the critique of instrumental reason. It is intended for those interested in exploring the influential paradigm of critical theory from multiple, interdisciplinary perspectives and understanding its contribution to the humanities and the social sciences.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: What Is Critical Theory? .- Critical Foundations: History, Reflection, Praxis .- Marx’s Influence on the Early Frankfurt School .- Lukács’s Theory of Reification and the Tradition of Critical Theory .- Totality, Reason, Dialectics: The Importance of Hegel for Critical Theory .- Why Students of the Frankfurt School Need to Read Lukacs .- Critical Theory and the Historical Transformations of Capitalist Modernity .- Critical Theory as Radical Comparative-Historical Research .- The Frankfurt School and the Critique of Instrumental Reason .- Materialism in Critical Theory: Marx and the Early Horkheimer .- Critique As the Epistemic Framework of the Critical Social Sciences .- Christoph Henning: Theories of Culture in the Frankfurt School of Critical Theory .- On Adorno’s Aesthetic Theory .- Art and the Concept of Autonomy in Adorno’s Critique of Kant .- Judging by Refraining from Judgment: The Artwork and Its Einordnung .- Dirk Michel-Schertges: Critical Theory and the Aesthetic Conditions for Revolution .- What Does It Mean to be Critical? On Literary and Social Critique in Walter Benjamin .- Theory and Class Consciousness .- The Frankfurt School, Authority, and the Psychoanalysis of Utopia .- Culture, Character and Critique: The Social Psychology of the Frankfurt School .- The Critical Theory of Sadomasochism and Authoritarianism .- The Fromm-Marcuse Debate Revisited: Reformulating the Critical Theory of the Authoritarian Character .- The Metaethics of Critical Theories .- Collective Agency and Intentionality: A Critical Theory Perspective .- Recognition, Identity and Subjectivity .- Recognition, Social Systems and Critical Theory .- The Sociological Roots and Deficits of Axel Honneth’s Theory of Recognition .- Experience and Temporality: Toward a New Paradigm of Critical Theory .- Critical Theory of Human Rights .- Immanent Critique and the Exhaustion Thesis: Neoliberalism and History’s Vicissitudes .- Critical Theory and Global Development .- The New Sensibility, Intersectionality, and Democratic Attunement: the Future of Critical Theory.
<
Oliver Richmond, University of Manchester Peace and Conflict Studies, Manchester; Sandra Pogodda, University of Manchester Humanitarian and Conflict Response Insti, Manchester; Jasmin Ramovic, University of Manchester Humanitarian and Conflict Respon

The Palgrave Handbook of Disciplinary and Regional Approaches to Peace

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXII, 568 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-40759-7
       9781137407597
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
213,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Conflict Studies / International Relations
In this handbook, a diverse range of leading scholars consider the social, cultural, economic, political, and developmental underpinnings of peace. This handbook is a much-needed response to the failures of contemporary peacebuilding missions and narrow disciplinary debates, both of which have outlined the need for more interdisciplinary work in International Relations and Peace and Conflict studies. Scholars, students, and policymakers are often disillusioned with universalist and northern-dominated approaches, and a better understanding of the variations of peace and its building blocks, across different regions, is required. Collectively, these chapters promote a more differentiated notion of peace, employing comparative analysis to explain how peace is debated and contested.

Inhaltsangaben

PART I: DISCIPLINARY PERSPECTIVES 1. History Peace in History; John Gittings 2. Politics and Governance: From Emergency to Emergence ; David Chandler 3. Philosophy: The Philosophy of Peace; Nick Rengger 4. International Relations: Peace in International Relations Theory; Oliver P. Richmond 5. Anthropology: Implications for Peace; Geneviève Souillac and Douglas P. Fry 6. Arts and Theatre for Peacebuilding; Nilanjana Premaratna and Roland Bleiker 7. Sociology: A Sociological Critique of Liberal Peace; Nicos Trimikliniotis 8. Economics: Neoliberal Peace and the Politics of Social Economics; Brendan Murtagh 9. Geography: Geography and Peace; Nick Megoran, Fiona McConnell and Phillipa Williams 10. Development: Peace and Development Studies; Caroline Hughes 11. Postcolonialism: A Postcolonial Perspective on Peacebuilding; Vivienne Jabri 12. Religion: Peace through Non-Violence in Four Religious Traditions; Caron Gentry 13. Gender: The Missing Piece in the Peace Puzzle; Annika Bjorkdahl and Johanna M. Selimovic 14. Education: Cultural Reproduction, Revolution and Peacebuilding in Conflict-affected Societies; Tejendra Pherali 15. Children: Children and Peace; Ben Collins and Alison Watson 16. Social Psychology: Social Psychology and Peace; Shelley McKeown and Daniel Christie 17. Humanitarianism: Humanitarianism and Peace; Jenny H. Peterson 18. International Law: To End the Scourge of War … and to Build a Just Peace?; Wendy Lambourne 19. Indigeneity and Peace; Morgan Brigg and Polly O. Walker 20. Critical Security Studies: Alternative Dialogues for Peace Reconstructing 'Language Barriers' and 'Talking Points'; Faye Donnelly PART II: REGIONAL PERSPECTIVES 21. South Africa's Incomplete Peace; Andries Odendaal 22. West Africa: Peace in West Africa; Patrick Tom 23. The Great Lakes Region of Africa; Local Perspectives on Liberal Peacebuilding from the Democratic Republic of Congo ; Josaphat M. Bussy and Carol Gallo 24. The Horn of Africa: Peace in the Horn of Africa; Christopher Clapham 25. Southeast Asia: Peace through Retribution or Reconciliation? Some Insights and Evidence from Southeast Asia; Sorpong Peou 26. East Asia: Understanding the Broken Harmony in Confucian Asia; Ching-Chang Chen 27. South Asia: Human Development and Minority Empowerment – Exploring Regional Perspectives on Peace in South Asia; Florian Krampe and Ashok Swain 28. Emerging Countries: Peace and the Emerging Countries; Kai Michael Kenkel 29. Central Asia Central Asia: Contested Peace; David Lewis 30. Middle East and North Africa: Hegemonic Modes of Pacification in Crisis; Sandra Pogodda 31. Europe: Peace in Europe; Roberto Belloni 32. Balkans; Jasmin Ramovic 33. South America; Peacebuilding in South America: Roddy Brett and Diana Florez 34. Central America: From War to Violence; Jenny Pearce 35. North America: Peace Studies versus the Hegemony of Realist and Liberal Methods; Henry F. Carey 36. Pacific: Peace in the Pacific – Grounded in Local Custom, Adapting to Change; Volker Boege
Howard Marchitello, Rutgers University–Camden, Camden, NJ, , USA; Evelyn Tribble, University of Otago, Dunedin, New Zealand

The Palgrave Handbook of Early Modern Literature and Science

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XLVI, 544 p. 10 illus., 9 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-46778-2
       9781137467782
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
213,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Early Modern/Renaissance Literature / History of Science
This book is about the complex ways in which science and literature are mutually-informing and mutually-sustaining. It does not cast the literary and the scientific as distinct, but rather as productively in-distinct cultural practices: for the two dozen new essays collected here, the presiding concern is no longer to ask how literary writers react to scientific writers, but rather to study how literary and scientific practices are imbricated. These specially-commissioned essays from top scholars in the area range across vast territories and produce seemingly unlikely unions: between physics and rhetoric, math and Milton, Boyle and the Bible, plague and plays, among many others. In these essays so-called scientific writing turns out to traffic in metaphor, wit, imagination, and playfulness normally associated with literature provides material forms and rhetorical strategies for thinking physics, mathematics, archeology, and medicine.

Inhaltsangaben

INTRODUCTION; Howard Marchitello and Evelyn Tribble.- PART I: THEORIZING EARLY MODERN SCIENCE AND LITERATURE.- 1. The Grounds of Literature and Science: Margaret Cavendish’s Creature Manifesto; Liza Blake.- 2. Metaphor as a Strategy for Decoding Nature: Sir Thomas Browne and the ‘Hieroglyph’ Trope; Wendy Beth Hyman.- 3. Imaginary Voyages: The New Science and Its Search for a Vantage Point; Ofer Gal.- 4. Francis Bacon’s Literary-Scientific Utopia; Angus Fletcher.- PART II: READING MATTER.- 5. John Donne and the New Science; Mary Crane.- 6. God’s Game of Hide-and-Seek: Bacon and Allegory; Kristen Poole.- 7. Crafting Early Modern Readers: Galileo and His Interlocutors; Crystal Hall.- 8. Milton, the Poetics of Matter and the Science of Reading; Elizabeth Spiller.- 9. Reading Literally: Boyle, the Bible, and the Book of Nature; James Bono.- 10. Communicating Medical Recipes: Robert Boyle’s Genre and Rhetorical Strategies for Print; Michelle DiMeo.- PART III: PRE-DISCIPLINARY KNOWLEDGES.- 11. The Orphic Physics of Early Modern Eloquence; Jenny C. Mann.- 12. Hurricanes, Tempests, and the Meteorological Globe; Steve Mentz.- 13. Milton, Leibniz, and the Mathematics of Motion; Shankar Raman.- 14. No Joyful Voices: The Silence of the Urns in Browne’s Hydriotaphia and Contemporary Archaeology; Philip Schwyzer.- 15. Robert Boyle’s Accidents of an Ague and its Precursors; Claire Preston.- 16. Poetico-Mathematical Women and The Ladies’ Diary; Jacqueline Wernimont.- 17. Curiosity and the Occult: The Ambiguities of Science in Eighteenth-Century British Literature; Barbara Benedict.- PART IV: MODALITIES.- 18. Medical Discourses of Virginity and the Bed-Trick in Shakespearean Drama; Kaara L. Peterson.- 19. ‘Angry Mab with Blisters Plague’: The Pre-modern Science of Contagion in Romeo and Juliet; Mary Floyd-Wilson.- 20. Poetic Science: Wonder and the Seas of Cognition in Bacon and Pericles; Jean E. Feerick.- 21. A Mythography of Water: Hydraulic Engineering and the Imagination; Louise Noble.- 22. Hybrid Philosophers: Cavendish’s Reading of Hooke’s Micrographia; Ian Lawson.- 23. Making Worlds: Invention and Fiction in Bacon and Cavendish; Frédérique Aït-Touati.- AFTERWORD; Peter Dear.- TOPICAL BIBLIOGRAPHY AND SELECTED FURTHER READING: EARLY MODERN LITERATURE, SCIENCE, AND CULTURE; Christopher Morrow.- Index.-
Georgina Barton, Griffith University, Mt Gravatt, QLD, Australia; Margaret Baguley, University of Southern Queensland, Toowoomba, QLD, Australia

The Palgrave Handbook of Global Arts Education

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXXVIII, 572 p. 102 illus., 86 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-55584-7
       9781137555847
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
213,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Creativity and Arts Education /
This extensive Handbook addresses a range of contemporary issues related to arts education across the world. It is divided into six sections; Contextualising Arts Education, Globally and Locally; Arts Education, Curriculum, Policy and Schooling; Arts Education Across the Life Span; Arts Education for Social Justice: Indigenous and Community Practice; Health, Wellbeing and Arts Education and Arts-Based and Research-Informed Arts Education. The Handbook explores global debates within education in the areas of dance, drama, music, media and visual arts. Presenting wide-ranging research from pedagogies of adaptation developed in Uganda to ethnomusicology in Malaysia and community participatory arts to wellbeing in Canada the Handbook highlights the universal need for arts education and in particular the importance of indigenous (including both traditional and contemporary practice) arts education. With contributions from internationally renowned scholars and practitioners and building on the World Alliance for Arts Education Global Summit in 2014, the Handbook creates an essential resource for arts education practices in and out of school alongside institutional, traditional and contemporary contexts. Students, teachers and practitioners across the arts disciplines will find the text invaluable for developing further opportunities to promote and study arts education.

Inhaltsangaben

SECTION I. Contextualizing Arts Education Globally and Locally.- Chapter 1. Sustainable Arts Education in a Prosumer World; Susan Wright & Samuel Leong.- Chapter 2. Contextualizing Dance Education Globally and Locally; Ralph Buck & Jeff Meiners.- Chapter 3. Drama Education: In the Global Context; Robin Pascoe & Lynn FC Yau.- Chapter 4. Music Education in the Global Context; Margaret Barrett & Heidi Westerlund.- Chapter 5. Visual Arts Education and the Challenges of the Millennium Goals; Teresa Torres de Eça, Melody K. Milbrandt, Ryan Shin & Kevin Hsieh.- SECTION II. Arts Education, Curriculum, Policy and Schooling.- Chapter 6. Arts Education and Pedagogy in the Learning Profile in Tanzania: Current Trends; Charles Enock Mulimba Ruyembe.- Chapter 7. Arts Education across Australia, New Zealand and Papua New Guinea; Kay Hartwig, Stuart Wise & Naomi Faik-Simet.- Chapter 8. How to Practically Help Non-Specialist Teachers to Implement Various Ways to Better Integrate Art Education in Ordinary Classroom Practices: The French Program AlféArt, between Research and Resource; Jean-Charles Chabanne & Martin Kerby.- Chapter 9. Looking at New Trends and Policies in Latin American Art Education; Belidson Dias, Irene Tourinho, Fernando Miranda, Olga Parra Lucia Alaya, Vanessa Freitag & Tatiana Fernandez.- Chapter 10. Reflections on Contemporary Arts Education in Egypt, Lebanon and Saudi Arabia; Rose Martin, Samia El-Sheikh & Bilal Makled.- Chapter 11. Arts Education in Canada and the United States; Susan A. O’Neill & Patrick Schmidt.- Chapter 12. School Music Education in Hong Kong after Returning to China: Policy, Curriculum and Teaching Practice; Bo-Wah Leung.- SECTION III. Arts Education Across the Life Span.- Chapter 13. Encouraging a Dynamic Relationship between the Arts and Literacy; Georgina Barton & Robyn Ewing.- Chapter 14. Young Children and Early Childhood Arts Education: What can we Learn from Current Research?; Susanne Garvis & Pernilla Lagerlöf.- Chapter 15. Creating Contemporary Asian Dance in Tertiary Dance Education: Research-Based Choreography at Nanyang Academy of Fine Arts; Caren Carino.- Chapter 16. The Arts Contribution to the Process of ‘Coming into the World’; Janeke Wienk.- Chapter 17. Pedagogies of Adaptation: Teachers’ Reflections on Teaching Traditional Ugandan Dances in Urban Schools in Kampala, Uganda; Alfdaniels Mabingo.- SECTION IV. Arts Education for Social Justice: Indigenous and Community Practice.- Chapter 18. Indigenous Participation in Arts Education: A Framework for Increasing Engagement and Learning Outcomes; Robert Barton.- Chapter 19. Applied Theatre as a Medium of Communal Communication: ‘Access to Justice’ Project in Kwale, Kenya; Wabende Kimingichi & Jeong Kyung Park.- Chapter 20. Transmitting Intangible Cultural Heritage through Ethnomusicology Coursework: Cases from Sabah, Malaysia; Jacqueline Pugh-Kitingan.- Chapter 21. (Mis)Representing Others: Ethical Dilemmas of Socially Engaged Art Practice; Kate Blackmore.- Chapter 22. Remembrance of Things Past: Historical Commemoration in an Educational Setting; Margaret Baguley & Martin Kerby.- SECTION V. Health, Wellbeing and Arts Education.- Chapter 23. Wellbeing in Classroom Arts Collaborations; Janet McDonald, Arnold Aprill & Deborah Mills.- Chapter 24. Growing Wellbeing through Community Participatory Arts: The Anishinaabek Cervical Cancer Screening Study (ACCSS); Pauline Sameshima, Pamela Wakewich & Ingeborg Zehbe.- Chapter 25. Cello Lessons and Teargas: War, Peace and Music Education; Laura Hassler & Chris Nicholson.- Chapter 26. Understanding Caregiving and Alzheimer’s Disease through the Arts; Ardra L. Cole.- SECTION VI. Arts-Based and Research-Informed Arts Education.- Chapter 27. Arts-Based Research with Young Children Across Health and Education; Susanne Garvis.- Chapter 28. A
Jonathan Culpeper, Lancaster University, Lancaster, UK; Michael Haugh, University of Queensland, Brisbane, QLD, Australia; Dániel Z. Kádár, University of Huddersfield, Queensgate, UK

The Palgrave Handbook of Linguistic (Im)politeness

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXI, 824 p. 21 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-37507-0
       9781137375070
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
245,03 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociolinguistics / Pragmatics
This handbook comprehensively examines social interaction by providing a critical overview of the field of linguistic politeness and impoliteness. Authored by over forty leading scholars, it offers a diverse and multidisciplinary approach to a vast array of themes that are vital to the study of interpersonal communication. The chapters explore the use of (im)politeness in specific contexts as well as wider developments, and variations across cultures and contexts in understandings of key concepts (such as power, emotion, identity and ideology). Within each chapter, the authors select a topic and offer a critical commentary on the key linguistic concepts associated with it, supporting their assertions with case studies that enable the reader to consider the practicalities of (im)politeness studies. This volume will be of interest to students and scholars of linguistics, particularly those concerned with pragmatics, sociolinguistics and interpersonal communication. Its multidisciplinary nature means that it is also relevant to researchers across the social sciences and humanities, particularly those working in sociology, psychology and history.

Inhaltsangaben

- Chapter 1: Introduction; Jonathan Culpeper, Michael Haugh and Dániel Kádár.- PART I: FOUNDATIONS.- Chapter 2: Pragmatic approaches to (im)politeness; Jonathan Culpeper and Marina Terkourafi.- Chapter 3: Socio-cultural approaches to (im)politeness; Sara Mills.- Chapter 4: Ideology and (im)politeness; Manfred Kienpointner and Maria Stopfner.- Chapter 5: Face and (im)politeness; Jim O’Driscoll.- Chapter 6: Power, solidarity and (im)politeness; Helen Spencer-Oatey and Vlad Žegarac.- Chapter 7: Indexicality and (im)politeness; Barbara Pizziconi and Chris Christie.- Chapter 8: Convention and ritual (im)politeness; Marina Terkourafi and Dániel Kádár.- PART II: DEVELOPMENTS.- Chapter 9: Impoliteness; Jonathan Culpeper and Claire Hardaker.- Chapter 10: (Im)politeness and identity; Pilar Garcés-Conejos Blitvich and Maria Sifianou.- Chapter 11: (Im)politeness and relationality; Jun Ohashi and Wei-Lin Melody Chang.- Chapter 12: (Im)politeness and emotion; Andreas Langlotz and Miriam A. Locher.- Chapter 13: (Im)politeness and mixed messages; Jonathan Culpeper, Michael Haugh and Valeria Sinkeviciute.- Chapter 14: (Im)politeness: Prosody and gesture; Lucien Brown and Pilar Prieto.- Chapter 15: Experimental approaches to (im)politeness; Thomas Holtgraves and Jean-François Bonnefon.- Chapter 16: (Im)politeness and developments in methodology; Andreas H. Jucker and Larssyn Staley.- PART III: (IM)POLITENESS AND VARIATION.- Chapter 17: Historical (im)politeness; Andreas H. Jucker and Joanna Kopaczyk.- Chapter 18: (Im)politeness: Language socialization; Haruko Minegishi Cook and Matthew Burdelski.- Chapter 19: (Im)politeness: Learning and teaching; J. César Félix-Brasdefer and Gerrard Mugford.- Chapter 20: (Im)politeness and gender; Malgorzata Chalupnik, Chris Christie and Louise Mullany.- Chapter 21: (Im)politeness and regional variation; Klaus P. Schneider and María Elena Placencia.- Chapter 22: (Im)politeness and cultural variation; Maria Sifianou and Pilar Garcés-Conejos Blitvich.- Chapter 23: Intercultural (im)politeness; Michael Haugh and Dániel Kádár.- PART IV: (IM)POLITENESS IN SPECIFIC CONTEXTS.- Chapter 24: (Im)politeness in the workplace; Janet Holmes and Stephanie Schnurr.- Chapter 25: (Im)politeness in service encounters; Rosina Márquez Reiter and Patricia Bou-Franch.- Chapter 26: (Im)politeness in health settings; Miriam A. Locher and Stephanie Schnurr.- Chapter 27: (Im)politeness in legal settings; Dawn Archer.- Chapter 28: Facework and (im)politeness in political exchanges; Karen Tracy.- Chapter 29: (Im)politeness in fictional texts; Derek Bousfield and Dan McIntyre.- Chapter 30: (Im)politeness in digital communication; Sage Lambert Graham and Claire Hardaker.
Robert Dover, University of Leicester, Leicester, UK; Huw Dylan, King's College London, London, UK; Michael S. Goodman, King's College London, London, UK

The Palgrave Handbook of Security, Risk and Intelligence

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XV, 501 p. 10 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-53674-7
       9781137536747
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
181,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Military and Defence Studies / International Security Studies
This handbook provides a detailed analysis of threats and risk in the international system and of how governments and their intelligence services must adapt and function in order to manage the evolving security environment. This environment, now and for the foreseeable future, is characterised by complexity. The development of disruptive digital technologies; the vulnerability of critical national infrastructure; asymmetric threats such as terrorism; the privatisation of national intelligence capabilities: all have far reaching implications for security and risk management. The leading academics and practitioners who have contributed to this handbook have all done so with the objective of cutting through the complexity, and providing insight on the most pressing security, intelligence, and risk factors today. They explore the changing nature of conflict and crises; interaction of the global with the local; the impact of technological; the proliferation of hostile ideologies and the challenge this poses to traditional models of intelligence; and the impact of all these factors on governance and ethical frameworks. The handbook is an invaluable resource for students and professionals concerned with contemporary security and how national intelligence must adapt to remain effective.

Inhaltsangaben

Part One: The Changing Nature of Conflict and Crises.- Chapter 1:‘Rapid Urbanisation and Security: Holistic Approach to Enhancing Security of Urban Spaces’ Ksenia Chmutina & Lee Bosher.- Chapter 2: ‘Energy Security’ Petra Dolata.- Chapter 3: ‘Evolving Biosecurity Frameworks’ Caitriona McLeish.- Chapter 4:‘Resilience and National Security’ Gail Ridley.- Chapter 5: 'Proxy Wars and the Contemporary Security Environment’ Andrew Mumford & Vladimir Rauta.- Chapter 6: ‘Resilience and Critical Infrastructure: Origins, Theories and Critiques’ Chris Zebrowski.- Chapter 7: ‘Intelligence and Organised Crime – Paradigms and Paradoxes’ John Buckley.- Part Two: The Changing Nature of Technology.- Chapter 8:‘Cyber Security’ Scott Jasper & James Wirtz.- Chapter 9:‘Securing State Secrets’ Patrick F Walsh.- Chapter 10: ‘The Rise of Smart Machines: The Unique Peril of Intelligence Software Agents in Defense and Intelligence’ Nina A Kollars.- Chapter 11: ‘The More Thing Change: Humint in the Digital Age’ David V Gioe.- Chapter 12: ‘Drones – Opportunities, Threats and Challenges’ Peter Lee.- Chapter 13: ‘Invisible Battlegrounds: On Force and Revolutions, Military and Otherwise’ Michael Warner.- Part Three: The Changing Nature of Intelligence.- Chapter 14: ‘Globalisation and Intelligence’ Zakia Shiraz.- Chapter 15: ‘Capacity Building and Security Sector Reform’ Paul Jackson.- Chapter 16: ‘Privatisation’ Damien Van Puyvelde.- Chapter 17: ‘Criminality, Terrorism and the Changing Nature of Conflict’ Angela Gendron.- Chapter 18: ‘Secret Interventions and Clandestine Diplomacy’ Huw Dylan.- Chapter 19: ‘Social Media Intelligence (SOCMINT)’ David Omand.- Chapter 20: ‘Corporate Intelligence’ Arthur Weiss.- Part Four: The Changing Nature of Governance in the Developed World.- Chapter 21: ‘The Ethics of Intelligence’ Ross Bellaby.- Chapter 22: ‘Risk, Security and International Law’ Robert Dover.- Chapter 23: ‘The Changing Media’ Peter Busch.- Chapter 24: ‘Terrorism and the News Media: Symbiosis, Control and Framing’ Alexander Spencer.- Chapter 25: ‘Two Worlds, One Common Pursuit: Why Greater Engagement with the Academic Community Could Benefit the UK’s National Security’ Robert Dover, Michael S Goodman & Martha White.- Chapter 26: ‘The Ethics of Whistle-blowing, Leaking and Disclosure’ Seumas Miller.
F. Collyer

The Palgrave Handbook of Social Theory in Health, Illness and Medicine

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXX, 710 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-35561-4
       9781137355614
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
192,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Social Theory / History of Medicine
This wide-reaching handbook offers a new perspective on the sociology of health, illness and medicine by stressing the importance of social theory. Examining a range of classic and contemporary female and male theorists from across the globe, it explores various issues including chronic illness, counselling and the rising problems of obesity.

Inhaltsangaben

1. The Sociology of Health, Illness and Medicine: Institutional Progress and Theoretical Frameworks ; Fran Collyer and Graham Scambler PART I: THE 19TH CENTURY THEORISTS 2. Harriet Martineau and Charlotte Perkins Gilman: Forgotten Women in the Study of Gender and Health?; Ellen Annandale 3. Karl Marx and Frederich Engels: Capitalism, Health and the Healthcare Industry; Fran Collyer 4. Florence Nightingale: A Research-Based Approach to Health, Healthcare and Hospital Safety; Lynn McDonald 5. Émile Durkheim: Social Order and Public Health; Kevin Dew 6. Émile Durkheim and Thomas Luckmann: Religion, Spirituality and Mental Health; Rosemary Aird 7. George Herbert Mead: Meanings and Selves in Illness; Linda Liska Belgrave and Kathy Charmaz 8. Max Weber: Bureaucracy, Formal Rationality and the Modern Hospital; William C Cockerham PART II: THE EARLY 20TH CENTURY THEORISTS 9. Ludwik Fleck: Thought Collectives and the Sociology of Medical Knowledge; Kevin White 10. Norbert Elias and Erving Goffman: Civilised-Dramaturgical Bodies, Social Status and Health Inequalities; Peter Freund 11. Alfred Schutz: The Co-Construction of Meaning Within Professional-Patient Interaction; Patrick Brown 12. Antonio Gramsci and Pierre Bourdieu: 'Whiteness' and Indigenous Healthcare; Angela Durey PART III: THE MID 20TH CENTURY THEORISTS 13. Talcott Parsons: His Legacy and the Sociology of Health and Illness; Evan Willis 14. Robert Merton: Occupational Roles, Social Status and Health Inequalities; Johannes Siegrist 15. George Libman Engel: The Biopsychosocial Model and the Construction of Medical Practice; Marilys Guillemin and Emma Barnard 16. Harold Garfinkel: Lessons on Emergent Behaviours in Complex Organisations; Peter Nugus and Jeffrey Braithwaite 17. Meg Stacey: The Sociology of Health and Healing; Hannah Bradby 18. Erving Goffman: The Moral Career of Stigma and Mental Illness; Bernice Pescosolido 19. Eliot Freidson: Sociological Narratives of Professionalism and Modern Medicine; Michael Calnan 20. Ivan Illich and Irving Kenneth Zola: Disabling Medicalisation; Joseph E Davis 21. Michel Foucault: Governmentality, Health Policy and the Governance of Childhood Obesity; Julie Henderson 22. Niklas Luhmann: Social Systems Theory and the Translation of Public Health Research; Samantha Meyer, Barry Gibson and Paul Ward 23. Jürgen Habermas: Health and Healing Across the Lifeworld-System Divide; Graham Scambler 24. Pierre Bourdieu: Health Lifestyles, the Family and Social Class; Kate Huppatz PART IV: THE LATE 20TH CENTURY AND THEORISTS OF THE PRESENT 25. Colin Leys and Colin Hay: Market-Driven Politics and the Depoliticisation of Healthcare; Heather Whiteside 26. Vicente Navarro: Marxism, Medical Dominance, Healthcare and Health; David Coburn 27. Anthony Giddens: Structuration, Drug Use, Food Choice and Long-Term Illness; Jonathan Gabe and Joana Almeida 28. Anthony Giddens: The Reflexive Self and the Consumption of Alternative Medicine; Katie Hughes 29. Anthony Giddens: Risk, Globalisation and Indigenous Public Health; Eileen Willis and Meryl Pearce 30. William C Cockerham: The Sociology of Health Lifestyles; Brian Hinote 31. George Ritzer: Rationalisation, Consumerism and the McDonaldisation of Surgery; Justin Waring and Simon Bishop 32. Julia Kristeva: Abjection, Embodiment and Boundaries; Trudy Rudge 33. Magali Sarfatti-Larson and Anne Witz: Professional Projects, Class and Gender; Ivy Bourgeault 34. Raewyn Connell: Hegemonic Masculinities, Gender and Male Health; John Scott 35. Raewyn Connell: Gender, Health and Healthcare; Maree Herrett and Toni Schofield 36. Donna Haraway: The Digital Cyborg Assemblage and the New Digital Health Technologies; Deborah Lupton 37. Mike Bury: Biographical Disruption and Long-Term and Other Health Conditions; Louise Locock and Sue Ziebland 38. Bryan S Turner: Bringing Bodies and Citizenship Into the Discussion of Disability; Gary
F. Collyer

The Palgrave Handbook of Social Theory in Health, Illness and Medicine

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXX, 710 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-349-47022-8
       9781349470228
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Social Theory / History of Medicine
This wide-reaching handbook offers a new perspective on the sociology of health, illness and medicine by stressing the importance of social theory. Examining a range of classic and contemporary female and male theorists from across the globe, it explores various issues including chronic illness, counselling and the rising problems of obesity.

Inhaltsangaben

1. The Sociology of Health, Illness and Medicine: Institutional Progress and Theoretical Frameworks ; Fran Collyer and Graham Scambler PART I: THE 19TH CENTURY THEORISTS 2. Harriet Martineau and Charlotte Perkins Gilman: Forgotten Women in the Study of Gender and Health?; Ellen Annandale 3. Karl Marx and Frederich Engels: Capitalism, Health and the Healthcare Industry; Fran Collyer 4. Florence Nightingale: A Research-Based Approach to Health, Healthcare and Hospital Safety; Lynn McDonald 5. Émile Durkheim: Social Order and Public Health; Kevin Dew 6. Émile Durkheim and Thomas Luckmann: Religion, Spirituality and Mental Health; Rosemary Aird 7. George Herbert Mead: Meanings and Selves in Illness; Linda Liska Belgrave and Kathy Charmaz 8. Max Weber: Bureaucracy, Formal Rationality and the Modern Hospital; William C Cockerham PART II: THE EARLY 20TH CENTURY THEORISTS 9. Ludwik Fleck: Thought Collectives and the Sociology of Medical Knowledge; Kevin White 10. Norbert Elias and Erving Goffman: Civilised-Dramaturgical Bodies, Social Status and Health Inequalities; Peter Freund 11. Alfred Schutz: The Co-Construction of Meaning Within Professional-Patient Interaction; Patrick Brown 12. Antonio Gramsci and Pierre Bourdieu: 'Whiteness' and Indigenous Healthcare; Angela Durey PART III: THE MID 20TH CENTURY THEORISTS 13. Talcott Parsons: His Legacy and the Sociology of Health and Illness; Evan Willis 14. Robert Merton: Occupational Roles, Social Status and Health Inequalities; Johannes Siegrist 15. George Libman Engel: The Biopsychosocial Model and the Construction of Medical Practice; Marilys Guillemin and Emma Barnard 16. Harold Garfinkel: Lessons on Emergent Behaviours in Complex Organisations; Peter Nugus and Jeffrey Braithwaite 17. Meg Stacey: The Sociology of Health and Healing; Hannah Bradby 18. Erving Goffman: The Moral Career of Stigma and Mental Illness; Bernice Pescosolido 19. Eliot Freidson: Sociological Narratives of Professionalism and Modern Medicine; Michael Calnan 20. Ivan Illich and Irving Kenneth Zola: Disabling Medicalisation; Joseph E Davis 21. Michel Foucault: Governmentality, Health Policy and the Governance of Childhood Obesity; Julie Henderson 22. Niklas Luhmann: Social Systems Theory and the Translation of Public Health Research; Samantha Meyer, Barry Gibson and Paul Ward 23. Jürgen Habermas: Health and Healing Across the Lifeworld-System Divide; Graham Scambler 24. Pierre Bourdieu: Health Lifestyles, the Family and Social Class; Kate Huppatz PART IV: THE LATE 20TH CENTURY AND THEORISTS OF THE PRESENT 25. Colin Leys and Colin Hay: Market-Driven Politics and the Depoliticisation of Healthcare; Heather Whiteside 26. Vicente Navarro: Marxism, Medical Dominance, Healthcare and Health; David Coburn 27. Anthony Giddens: Structuration, Drug Use, Food Choice and Long-Term Illness; Jonathan Gabe and Joana Almeida 28. Anthony Giddens: The Reflexive Self and the Consumption of Alternative Medicine; Katie Hughes 29. Anthony Giddens: Risk, Globalisation and Indigenous Public Health; Eileen Willis and Meryl Pearce 30. William C Cockerham: The Sociology of Health Lifestyles; Brian Hinote 31. George Ritzer: Rationalisation, Consumerism and the McDonaldisation of Surgery; Justin Waring and Simon Bishop 32. Julia Kristeva: Abjection, Embodiment and Boundaries; Trudy Rudge 33. Magali Sarfatti-Larson and Anne Witz: Professional Projects, Class and Gender; Ivy Bourgeault 34. Raewyn Connell: Hegemonic Masculinities, Gender and Male Health; John Scott 35. Raewyn Connell: Gender, Health and Healthcare; Maree Herrett and Toni Schofield 36. Donna Haraway: The Digital Cyborg Assemblage and the New Digital Health Technologies; Deborah Lupton 37. Mike Bury: Biographical Disruption and Long-Term and Other Health Conditions; Louise Locock and Sue Ziebland 38. Bryan S Turner: Bringing Bodies and Citizenship Into the Discussion of Disability; Gary
Yujin Nagasawa, University of Birmingham, Birmingham, UK; Benjamin Matheson, University of Gothenburg , Göteborg, Sweden

The Palgrave Handbook of the Afterlife

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIII, 458 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-48608-0
       9781137486080
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
181,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Philosophy of Religion / Metaphysics
This unique Handbook provides a sophisticated, scholarly overview of the most advanced thought regarding the idea of life after death. Its comprehensive coverage encompasses historical, religious, philosophical and scientific thinking. Starting with an overview of ancient thought on the topic, The Palgrave Handbook of the Afterlife examines in detail the philosophical coherence of the main traditional notions of the nature of the afterlife including heaven, hell, purgatory and rebirth. In addition (and breaking with traditional conceptions) it also explores the most recent exciting advance – digital models. Later sections include analysis of various possible metaphysical accounts that might make sense of the afterlife (including substance dualism, emergent dualism and materialism) and the science of near death experiences as well as the links between human psychology and our attitude to the afterlife. Key features: • Grounded in the most advanced philosophical, theological and scientific thinking • Contributions by eminent scholars from the world’s top universities • Balanced treatment of fundamental issues that are relevant to everyone • Diverse approaches ranging from the religious to the scientific, from the optimistic to the pessimistic • A major section on the meaning of the afterlife which includes chapters on fear, purpose, evil, and issues regarding identity The Palgrave Handbook of the Afterlife is essential reading for scholars, researchers and advanced students researching attitudes to and effects of beliefs about death and life after death from philosophical, historical, religious, psychological and scientific perspectives.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction; Benjamin Matheson.- Part I. The History of the Afterlife.- 2. The afterlife in early civilizations; Gregory Shushan.- 3. Classical Mediterranean Conceptions of the Afterlife; Stephen R. L. Clark.- Part II. The Afterlife in World Religions.- 4. Hinduism; Ankur Barua.- 5. Buddhism; Peter Harvey.- 6. Judaism; Tyron Goldschmidt and Aaron Segal.- 7. Christianity; Joshua Farris.- 8. Islam; Amir Dastmalchian.- Part III. Models of the Afterlife.- 9. Heaven; Luke Henderson.- 10. Divine Love and Hell; Andrei Buckareff and Allen Plug.- 11. Purgatory; David Hershenov and Rose Hershenov.- 12. Rebirth; Mikel Burley.- 13. Digital Afterlives; Eric Steinhart.- Part IV. The Metaphysics of the Afterlife.- 14. Substance Dualism; Uwe Meixner.- 15. Emergent Dualism; William Hasker.- 16. Resurrecting Material Persons; Lynne Rudder Baker.- Part V. The Meaning of the Afterlife.- 17. The Fear of Death; John Bishop.- 18. Meaning in Life; Thaddeus Metz.- 19. The Problem of Evil; Stephen T. Davis. 20. Practical Identity; Benjamin Matheson.- Part VI. The Science of the Afterlife.- 21. Do Near Death Experiences Provide Evidence of an Afterlife?; Mark Fox.- 22. How Psychological Dispositions Influence the Theology of the Afterlife; Helen de Cruz and Johan de Smedt.
Thijs Van de Graaf, Ghent Institute for Int. Studies Ghent University, Ghent, Belgium; Benjamin K. Sovacool, University of Sussex , Brighton, UK; Arunabha Ghosh, Council on Energy, Environment and Water , New Delhi; Florian Kern, University of Sussex

The Palgrave Handbook of the International Political Economy of Energy

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXIII, 743 p. 46 illus., 22 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-55630-1
       9781137556301
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
245,03 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Political Economy / Energy Policy, Economics and Management
This Handbook is the first volume to analyse the International Political Economy, the who-gets-what-when-and-how, of global energy. Divided into five sections, it features 28 contributions that deal with energy institutions, trade, transitions, conflict and justice. The chapters span a wide range of energy technologies and markets - including oil and gas, biofuels, carbon capture and storage, nuclear, and electricity - and it cuts across the domestic-international divide. Long-standing issues in the IPE of energy such as the role of OPEC and the ‘resource curse’ are combined with emerging issues such as fossil fuel subsidies and carbon markets. IPE perspectives are interwoven with insights from studies on governance, transitions, security, and political ecology. The Handbook serves as a potent reminder that energy systems are as inherently political and economic as they are technical or technological, and demonstrates that the field of IPE has much to offer to studies of the changing world of energy.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I. Introduction.- Chapter 1: States, markets and institutions: Integrating International Political Economy and global energy politics; Thijs Van de Graaf, Benjamin K. Sovacool, Arunabha Ghosh, Florian Kern, and Michael T. Klare.- Part II: Energy actors and institutions; Primary editor: Thijs Van de Graaf.- Chapter 2: Actors, frames and institutions in global energy politics; Thijs Van de Graaf and Fariborz Zelli.- Chapter 3: The past, present and future role of OPEC; Bassam Fattouh and Anupama Sen.- Chapter 4: Corporations, civil society and disclosure: a case study of the Extractive Industries Transparency Initiative (EITI); James van Alstine and Nathan Andrews.- Chapter 5: The UN, energy, and the Sustainable Development Goals; Sylvia Karlsson-Vinkhuyzen.- Chapter 6: The World Trade Organization’s role in global energy governance; Timothy Meyer.- Part III: Energy trade, finance and investment;
iv>Primary editor: Arunabha Ghosh.- Chapter 7: Green energy trade conflicts: the political economy of a future energy system; Arunabha Ghosh; Chapter 8: The Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership, energy and divestment; Rafael Leal-Arcas and Constantino Grasso.- Chapter 9: The international oil and gas pricing regimes; Ustina Markus.- Chapter 10: The political economy of carbon markets; Richard Lane and Peter Newell.- Chapter 11: The politics and governance of energy subsidies; Harro van Asselt and Jakob Skovgaard.- PART IV. Energy transitions; Primary editor: Florian Kern.- Chapter 12: Energy transition studies and political economy considerations: prospects and challenges; Florian Kern and Jochen Markard.- Chapter 13: Developing and Deploying Carbon Capture and Storage Technologies: Explaining uneven progress; James Meadowcroft and James Gaede.- Chapter 14: Democracy and transitions: European experiences of policy inclusiveness and changes in the electricity industry; Mari Ratinen and Peter D. Lund.- Chapter 15: Second life or half-life? The contested future of nuclear power and its potential role in a sustainable energy transition; M.V. Ramana.- Chapter 16: The politics of biofuels.- John Alic; Part V. Energy conflict and the resource curse; Primary editor: Michael T. Klare.- Chapter 17: No blood for oil? Hydrocarbon abundance and international security; Michael T. Klare.- Chapter 18: Do countries fight over oil? Emily Meierding.- Chapter 19: Does Russia have a potent gas weapon? James Henderson.- Chapter 20: Energy, coercive diplomacy and sanctions
Llewellyn Hughes and Eugene Gholz.- Chapter 21: The resource curse puzzle across four waves of research; William Gochberg and Victor Menaldo.- Part VI: Energy justice and political ecology; Primary editor: Benjamin K. Sovacool.- Chapter 22: The political ecology and justice of energy; Benjamin K. Sovacool.- Chapter 23: The political ecology of oil and gas in West Africa’s Gulf of Guinea: State, petroleum, and conflict in Nigeria; Michael J. Watts.- Chapter 24: Dispossession, justice and a sustainable energy future; Majia H. Nadesan and Martin Pasqualetti.- Chapter 25: Energy and global production networks; Dustin Mulvaney.- Chapter 26: Enclosure and exclusion within emerging forms of energy resource extraction: shale fuels and biofuels; Arielle Hesse, Jennifer Baka, and Kirby Calvert.- Chapter 27: The political economy of energy justice: A nuclear energy perspective; Kirsten Jenkins, Raphael Heffron, and Darren McCauley.- Chapter 28: Energy justice in theory and practice: Building a pragmatic roadmap; Mark Cooper.-
Italo Pardo, University of Kent, Canterbury, UK; Giuliana B. Prato, University of Kent, Canterbury, UK

The Palgrave Handbook of Urban Ethnography

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIX, 575 p. 26 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2018
ISBN 978-3-319-64288-8
       9783319642888
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
192,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Social Anthropology / Urban Studies/Sociology
These ethnographically-based studies of diverse urban experiences across the world present cutting edge research and stimulate an empirically-grounded theoretical reconceptualization. The essays identify ethnography as a powerful tool for making sense of life in our rapidly changing, complex cities. They stress the point that while there is no need to fetishize fieldwork—or to view it as an end in itself —its unique value cannot be overstated. These active, engaged researchers have produced essays that avoid abstractions and generalities while engaging with the analytical complexities of ethnographic evidence. Together, they prove the great value of knowledge produced by long-term fieldwork to mainstream academic debates and, more broadly, to society.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction: Urban Ethnography Matters.- 2. From Jaffa to New York: The Scope of Urban Anthropology.- 3. Between Stereotype and Bad Governance: An Italian Ethnography.- 4. Rethinking the City as Urban Community: Views from South Europe.- 5. The Multitude of Approaches to Urban Ethnography: Blessing or Curse?.- The Lives of Others: The Production and Influence of Neighbourhood Cultures in Urban India.- 7. The Beginnings and the Ends: A ‘Superdiverse’ London Housing Estate.- 8. Everyday Mobility: Encountering Difference.- 9. Betwixt and Between in Beer-Sheva: Consumption and Chronotopes in the Negev.- 10. Shipbuilding Decline and Dubious Futures: A Greek Ethnography of Creative Destruction.- 11. Navigating the Seas of the World of Unemployment in America.- 12. ‘Swimming against the Tide’: Working Class Discourse on Gentrification in Northern Brooklyn.- 13. The Plow and the Stallion: Political Turmoil in a Working-class District of Budapest.- 14. From the Ban on Enjoyment to the Injunction to Enjoy: The Post-industrial City and its New Spaces of Control.- 15. Resistance to Places of Collective Memories: A Rapid Transformation Landscape in Beijing.- 16.  Multiple Positionality: A Challenge for West African Urbanists.- 17. The Strength of Weak Heritages: Urbanity, Utopias and the Commitment to Intangible Heritage.- 18. Sport and the City: Olympic Games and the Reimagining of East London.- 19. A Revolution of the Urban Lifestyle in China? Urban Politics and Community Experience in Harbin.- 20. Secondary Cities and the Formation of Political Space in West and East Africa.- 21. Two Types of Community-based Organizations in Urban Africa.- 22. Urban Ethnography: Nothing About Us Without Us Is For Us.- 23. An Ethnography of Space, Creative Dissent and Reflective Nostalgia in the City Centre of Global Istanbul.- 24. Anglo-Indians: Buying into Nationhood?.- 25. Transnational Fragmentation of Globality: Eastern-European Post-socialist Strategies in Chicago.- 26. Haitians in Manaus: Challenges of the Sociocultural Insertion Process of Inclusion.- 27. Imagined Multiculturalism in a Malaysian Town: Ideological Constructions and Empirical Evidences.- 28. Urban Development and Vernacular Religious Landscapes in Seoul.- 29. Becoming Cities, Losing Paradise? Gentrification in the Swiss Alps.- 30. Unfolding Lisbon: An Anthropologist Gazes at a Capital City.- 31. Lost in the Shuffle: Urban African-American Students Cast into a Rural White University in the United States.
Rachel Woodward, Newcastle University, Newcastle upon Tyne, UK; Claire Duncanson, University of Edinburgh, Edinburgh, UK

The Palgrave International Handbook of Gender and the Military

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XI, 580 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-51676-3
       9781137516763
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
246,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Military and Defence Studies / Gender Studies
The Palgrave International Handbook of Gender and the Military provides a comprehensive overview of the multiple ways in which gender and militaries connect. International and multi-disciplinary in scope, this edited volume provides authoritative accounts of the many intersections through which militaries issues and military forces are shaped by gender. The chapters provide detailed accounts of key issues, informed by examples from original research in a wealth of different national contexts. This Handbook includes coverage of conceptual approaches to the study of gender and militaries, gender and the organisation of state military forces, gender as it pertains to military forces in action, transitions and transgressions within militaries, gender and non-state military forces, and gender in representations of military personnel and practices. With contributions from a range of both established and early career scholars, The Palgrave International Handbook of Gender and the Military is an essential guide to current debates on gender and contemporary military issues.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: Gender and the Military.- Part 1 Conceptual approaches.- Liberal feminist approaches .- Radical and anti-militarism feminism .- Institutional approaches .- Organisational sociological approaches .- Critical military studies and gender .- Intersections of gender and sexuality .- Narrative approaches to gender and militarised security .- Part 2 Exploring state militaries .- Sexualities in the British armed forces .- Intimate partner abuse in military households .- Civilian wives of British military personnel based overseas.- Military identities amongst deserters from the Zimbabwean armed forces .- War resistance in apartheid South Africa .- The recruitment of women in the transition of the Swedish armed forces from conscription to an all-volunteer force .- Transgender personnel in the US military.- Military masculinities in the Norwegian defence forces.- Gender and the recruitment of Commonwealth personnel in the UK .- Gender and gender-based violence in the Australian defence forces.- Gender and mental health amongst military personnel .- The Falklands War and its aftermath for veterans and their families.- Gender, masculinities and conscientious objection in the Second World War.- Part 3 State militaries in action .- Gender integration in the Bundeswehr.- Gender and peacekeeping .- Gender, military forces and humanitarian interventions .- Counterinsurgency operations in Afghanistan and gender .- The intersection of ethnic and gendered identities in the Israeli defence forces.- Cohesion and gender in armed forces .- Gender and military outsourcing .- Gender and the transition in South Africa from SADF to SANDR .- Part 4 Non-state militaries and supra national organisations.- Women and terrorist movements .- Gender and identity amongst private military security contractors .- Intersections of gendered and racialized identities in third country security contractors from the global south .- Women in paramilitary organisations .- Women and girl soldiers in Sierra Leone.- Icelandic peacekeepers in international deployments .- Part 5 Representations.- Visual representations of women soldiers in Israel .- Gender, cadets the militarisation of childhood.- The gendering of military memoirs.- Representations of military bodies in the 20th century.- Medals, heroism and military masculinities .- Gender, militaries and war film.- The mediatisation of child soldiers in literary fiction and film.- Gendered representations of soldier deaths in the USA.
Matthew C. Altman, Central Washington University, Ellensburg, WA, USA

The Palgrave Kant Handbook

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XLIV, 851 p. 6 illus., 2 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-54655-5
       9781137546555
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
246,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of Philosophy / German Idealism
This remarkably comprehensive Handbook provides a multifaceted yet carefully crafted investigation into the work of Immanuel Kant, one of the greatest philosophers the world has ever seen. With original contributions from leading international scholars in the field, this authoritative volume first sets Kant’s work in its biographical and historical context. It then proceeds to explain and evaluate his revolutionary work in metaphysics and epistemology, logic, ethics, aesthetics, philosophy of science, philosophy of religion, political philosophy, philosophy of history, philosophy of education, and anthropology. Key Features: • Draws attention to the foundations of Kant’s varied philosophical insights — transcendental idealism, logic, and the bridge between theoretical and practical reason• Considers hitherto neglected topics such as sexuality and the philosophy of education• Explores the immense impact of his ground-breaking work on subsequent intellectual movements Serving as a touchstone for meaningful discussion about Kant’s philosophical and historical importance, this definitive Handbook is essential reading for Kant scholars who want to keep abreast of the field and for advanced students wishing to explore the frontiers of the subject.

Inhaltsangaben

Contents.- Series Editor’s Preface.- Preface.- Notes on Contributors.- Note on Sources and Key to Abbreviations.- Introduction: Kant the Revolutionary: Matthew C. Altman.- Part I. Biographical and Historical Background.- 1. Kant’s Life: Steve Naragon.- 2. Kant and His Philosophical Context: The Reception and Critical Transformation of the Leibnizian-Wolffian Philosophy: Manuel Sánchez-Rodríguez.- Part II. Metaphysics and Epistemology.- 3. Transcendental Idealism: What and Why?: Paul Guyer.- 4. Noumenal Ignorance: Why, for Kant, Can’t We Know Things in Themselves?: Alejandro Naranjo Sandoval and Andrew Chignell.- 5. Kant’s Concept of Cognition and the Key to the Whole Secret of Metaphysics: Chong-Fuk Lau.- 6. Apperception, Self-Consciousness, and Self-Knowledge in Kant: Dennis Schulting.- Part III. Logic.- 7. The Place of Logic within Kant’s Philosophy: Clinton Tolley.- Part IV. Relation between Theoretical and Practical Reason.- 8. The Primacy of Practical Reason: Ralph C. S. Walker.- 9. A Practical Account of Kantian Freedom: Matthew C. Altman.- 10. Moral Skepticism and the Critique of Practical Reason: David Zapero.- Part V. Ethics.- 11. How a Kantian Decides What to Do: Allen W. Wood.- 12. Duties to Oneself: Oliver Sensen.- 13. Demandingness, Indebtedness, and Charity: Kant on Imperfect Duties to Others: Kate Moran.- 14. Kant and Sexuality: Helga Varden.- 15. Kant in Metaethics: The Paradox of Autonomy, Solved by Publicity: Carla Bagnoli.- Part VI. Aesthetics.- 16. Feeling the Life of the Mind: Mere Judging, Feeling, and Judgment: Fiona Hughes.- 17. On Common Sense, Communicability, and Community: Eli Friedlander.- 18. Immediate Judgment and Non-Cognitive Ideas: The Pervasive and Persistent in the Misreading of Kant’s Aesthetic Formalism: Jennifer A. McMahon.- 19. Sublimity and Joy: Kant on the Aesthetic Constitution of Virtue: Melissa McBay Merritt.- Part VII. Philosophy of Science.- 20. “Proper Science” and Empirical Laws: Kant’s Sense of Science in the Critical Philosophy: John H. Zammito.- 21. From General to Special Metaphysics of Nature: Michael Bennett McNulty (with Marius Stan) .- Part VIII. Philosophy of Religion.- 22. Kant on Faith: Religious Assent and the Limits to Knowledge: Lawrence Pasternack.- 23. The Fate of Religion within the Boundaries of Mere Reason: Martin Moors.- Part IX. Political Philosophy.- 24. The Critical Legal and Political Philosophy of Immanuel Kant: Howard Williams.- 25. A Cosmopolitan Law Created by Cosmopolitan Citizens: The Kantian Project Today: Soraya Nour Sckell.- 26. Kant’s Mature Theory of Punishment, and a First Critique Ideal Abolitionist Alternative: Benjamin Vilhauer.- Part X. Anthropology, History, and Education.- 27. Denkungsart in Kant’s Anthropology from a Pragmatic Point of View: Patrick R. Frierson.- 28. Kant on Emotions, Feelings, and Affectivity: Alix Cohen.- 29. The Philosopher as Legislator: Kant on History: Katerina Deligiorgi.- 30. Becoming Human: Kant’s Philosophy of Education and Human Nature: Robert B. Louden.- Part XI. The Kantian Aftermath, and Kant’s Contemporary Relevance.- 31. Kant after Kant: The Indispensable Philosopher: Michael Vater.- 32. Kant, the Copernican Devolution, and Real Metaphysics: Robert Hanna.- 33. Contemporary Kantian Moral Philosophy: Michael Rohlf.- Conclusion: Kant the Philosopher: Matthew C. Altman.- Index.
Sandra Shapshay, Indiana University-Bloomington, Bloomington, IN, USA

The Palgrave Schopenhauer Handbook

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXVIII, 520 p. 10 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-62946-9
       9783319629469
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
213,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
German Idealism / Aesthetics
This comprehensive Handbook offers a leading-edge yet accessible guide to the most important facets of Arthur Schopenhauer’s philosophical system, the last true system of German philosophy.  Written by a diverse, international and interdisciplinary group of eminent and up-and-coming scholars, each of the 28 chapters in this Handbook includes an authoritative exposition of different viewpoints as well as arguing for a particular thesis.  Authors also put Schopenhauer’s ideas into historical context and connect them when possible to contemporary philosophy.Key features: Structured in six parts, addressing the development of Schopenhauer’s system, his epistemology and metaphysics, aesthetics and philosophy of art, ethical and political thought, philosophy of religion and legacy in Britain, France, and the US.
Special coverage of Schopenhauer’s treatment of Judaism, Christianity, Vedic thought and Buddhism
Attention to the relevance of Schopenhauer for contemporary metaphysics, metaethics and ethics in particular. The Palgrave Schopenhauer Handbook is an essential resource for scholars as well as advanced students of nineteenth-century philosophy. Researchers and graduate students in musicology, comparative literature, religious studies, English, French, history, and political science will find this guide to be a rigorous and refreshing Handbook to support their own explorations of Schopenhauer’s thought.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction; Sandra Shapshay.- Part I. The Development of Schopenhauer’s System.- 2. Becoming The Author of World as Will and Representation; David Cartwright.- 3. How Platonic are Schopenhauer’s Platonic Ideas?; Wolfgang Mann.- 4. Schopenhauer’s System of Freedom; Günter Zöller.- 5. Inspiration from India; Martina Kurbel.- Part II. Epistemology and Metaphysics.-  6 . A Dream within a Dream;  Douglas McDermid.- 7. Schopenhauer’s Two Metaphysics; Alistair Welchman.- 8. Metaphysics and the Sciences in Schopenhauer; Marco Segala.- Part III. Aesthetics & Philosophy of Art.- 9. Aesthetic Humanism;Elisabeth Millán.- 10 . Music and Pessimism; Judith Norman.- 11. Schopenhauer, Schenker, and the Will of Music; Diego Cubero.- Part IV. Ethical and Political Thought.- 12. Schopenhauer and Contemporary Metaethics; Colin Marshall.- 13. Schopenhauer and Kant on Menschenliebe; Gudrun von Tevenar.- 14. Schopenhauer on the Moral Considerability of Animals; Sandra Shapshay.- 15. Schopenhauer on the State and Morality; David Woods.- Part V. Religion.- 16. Schopenhauer and Judaism; Robert Wicks.- 17. Schopenhauer’s Christian Perspectives; Christopher Janaway.- 18. Schopenhauer and Gotama on Life’s Suffering; Christopher Ryan.- Part VI. Legacy.-  19. Schopenhauer and British Literary Feminism; Pearl Brilmyer.- 20. Nietzsche and Schopenhauer; João Constâncio.- 21. Wolves, Dogs, and Moral Geniuses; Matthew C. Altman & Cynthia D. Coe.- 22. Schopenhauer’s French Reception; Arnaud François.- 23. Grappling with German Atheism and Pessimism; Christa Buschendorf.- 24. Conclusion; Sandra Shapshay.- Index.
Paul Cairney, University of Stirling , Stirling

The Politics of Evidence-Based Policy Making

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XV, 137 p. 1 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-51780-7
       9781137517807
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Public Policy /
The Politics of Evidence Based Policymaking identifies how to work with policymakers to maximize the use of scientific evidence. Policymakers cannot consider all evidence relevant to policy problems. They use two shortcuts: ‘rational’ ways to gather enough evidence, and ‘irrational’ decision-making, drawing on emotions, beliefs, and habits. Most scientific studies focus on the former. They identify uncertainty when policymakers have incomplete evidence, and try to solve it by improving the supply of information. They do not respond to ambiguity, or the potential for policymakers to understand problems in very different ways. A good strategy requires advocates to be persuasive: forming coalitions with like-minded actors, and accompanying evidence with simple stories to exploit the emotional or ideological biases of policymakers. 

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. The Science of Policy Making.- Chapter 2. The Role of Evidence in Theories of the Policy Process.- Chapter 3. Health and advocacy: what are the barriers to the use of evidence in policy?.- Chapter 4. Evidence in environmental policy: learning lessons from health?.- Chapter  5. Conclusion: How to Respond to The Limits of Evidence-Based Policy Making. 
Philip J. Mazzocco, Ohio State University, Mansfield, OH, USA

The Psychology of Racial Colorblindness

A Critical Review
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVII, 205 p. 3 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-59967-4
       9781137599674
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Psychosocial Studies / Personality and Social Psychology
This book summarizes and integrates the social scientific research on racial colorblindness, focusing primarily on work within the field of psychology.  A new multi-variety colorblind framework is presented, which provides theoretical coherence to the present literature as well as a guide for future research.  After considering the historical context in which colorblind ideologies have manifested and operated, research is presented that establishes how the colorblind mentality ignores important racial realities and tends to harm racial minorities across a wide variety of domains.  Beneficial alternative ideologies are discussed, as are strategies that may be useful in challenging the colorblind ideology.  This book will be of interest to both researchers and theorists who study racial ideology, as well as social justice advocates and practitioners who contend with racial colorblindness in real-world contexts.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. Race and Colorblindness: A Historical Overview.- 3. Existing Theories of Colorblindness and a New Framework.- 4. Colorblind Measures and Inductions.- 5. The Reality of Racial Inequality in America.- 6. Perceptions of Racial Inequality in America.- 7. Colorblind Impacts: Individual, Interactional, and Societal.- 8. Institutional Colorblindness: Education, Law, and Organizations.- 9. Building a Conceptual Network around Colorblindness.- 10. Challenging Colorblindness and Future Directions.
Michel Foucault; Arnold I. Davidson, University of Chicago, USA

The Punitive Society

Lectures at the Collège de France, 1972-1973
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIX, 320 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-4039-8660-3
       9781403986603
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
39,58 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Political Philosophy / Social Philosophy
These thirteen lectures on the 'punitive society,' delivered at the Collège de France in the first three months of 1973, examine the way in which the relations between justice and truth that govern modern penal law were forged, and question what links them to the emergence of a new punitive regime that still dominates contemporary society.

Inhaltsangaben

Foreword: François Ewald And Alessandro Fontana Introduction: Arnold I. Davidson Translator's Note 1. 3 January 1973 2. 10 January 1973 3. 17 January 1973 4. 24 January 1973 5. 31 January 1973 6. 7 February 1973 7. 14 February 1973 8. 21 February 1973 9. 28 February 1973 10. 7 March 1973 11. 14 March 1973 12. 21 March 1973 13. 28 March 1973 Course Summary Course Context Index Of Notions Index Of Names
Christian Schuh, A. T. Kearney Ges.m.b.H. , Vienna, Austria; Joseph L. Raudabaugh, A.T. Kearney Inc., Chicago, IL, USA; Robert Kromoser, A.T. Kearney Ges.m.b.H. , Vienna, Austria; Michael F. Strohmer, A.T. Kearney Ges.m.b.H. , Vienna, Austria; Alenka

The Purchasing Chessboard

64 Methods to Reduce Costs and Increase Value with Suppliers
Springer New York
Seiten XVII, 247 p. 10 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-4939-6763-6
       9781493967636
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
53,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Procurement / Business Strategy/Leadership
The bestselling Purchasing Chessboard® concept, used by hundreds of corporations worldwide to reduce costs and increase value with suppliers, is the topic of this successful professional book now published in its third edition. The 64 squares on the Purchasing Chessboard provide a wealth of methods that can be applied either individually or in combination. And because many of these methods are not customarily used by procurement, the Purchasing Chessboard is also the perfect tool for helping procurement professionals to think and act outside the box and find new solutions. A well tested concept that works across all industries and all categories in any given situation, it is little wonder that business leaders and procurement professionals alike are excited by, and enjoy strategizing around, the Purchasing Chessboard. It encourages greater rigor and creativity and the building of world class capabilities. The explosive growth in analytics and the rise in the number of specialists in procurement practice have taken the application of the Purchasing Chessboard to new levels. This third edition of the book includes a rich assortment of case examples to reflect the lessons learned across geographies and industries. Some of the chapters have also been updated to accurately reflect these trends.

Inhaltsangaben

A CEO who thinks like a CPO who thinks like a CEO.- From four basic strategies to 64 methods.- Using the Purchasing Chessboard.- The Purchasing Chessboard.- The way forward.- How to build a winning Purchasing Chessboard® team.- Epilogue: Reflections on Sales and Marketing.
Gillian McCann, Nipissing University, North Bay, ON, Canada; Gitte Bechsgaard, Vidya Institute, Toronto, ON, Canada

The Sacred in Exile

What it Really Means to Lose Our Religion
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XI, 146 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-66498-9
       9783319664989
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Religion and Health / Sociology of Religion
This book addresses the fact that, for the first time in history, a large segment of the population in the western world is living without any form of religious belief.  While a number of writers have examined the implications of this shift, none have approached the phenomenon from the perspective of religious studies. The authors examine what has been lost from the point of view of sociology, psychology, and philosophy of religion. The book sits at the nexus of a number of important debates including: the role of religion in public life, the connection between religion and physical and psychological well-being, and the implications of the loss of ritual in terms of maintaining communities.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction The Spiritual Malaise of Our Time.- 2. Religion as Ordering Principle and Higher Law.- 3. The Importance of Self-Cultivation.- 4.The Limiting Function of Religion.- 5. The Sacrality of the Body.- 6. The Relational Matrix.- 7. The Supremacy of the Subtle.- 8. Conclusion: Coming Out of the Desert: The Vision of Ezekiel.
D. Forbes, Forbes Consulting Group, USA

The Science of Why

Decoding Human Motivation and Transforming Marketing Strategy
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten IX, 254 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-50203-2
       9781137502032
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Film and Television Studies / Sales/Distribution
In this groundbreaking book, author David Forbes explains human motivation and provides ways that marketers can effectively reach the consumer. The book uses decades of psychology research and the author's own tool, the Forbes Matrix that identifies, organizes, and explains the nine core motivations.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction Chapter 1 The Rise of Marketing to Motivation Chapter 2 The Motivational Matrix Chapter 3 Introduction to the Intrapsychic Motives Chapter 4 Security Chapter 5 Identity Chapter 6 Mastery Chapter 7 Introduction to the Instrumental Motives Chapter 8 Empowerment Chapter 9 Engagement Chapter 10 Achievement Chapter 11 Introduction to the Interpersonal Motives Chapter 12 Belonging Chapter 13 Nurturance Chapter 14 Esteem Chapter 15 The Scholarship on Motivation Chapter 16 Measuring Motivation The MindSight Method Chapter 17 Epilogue and Predictions for a Motivationally Aware Planet
Susana Pendzik, Tel Hai Academic College Social Sciences and Humanities, Upper Galilee; Renée Emunah, California Institute of Integral Studies , San Francisco,; David Read Johnson, Yale University , New Haven, CT

The Self in Performance

Autobiographical, Self-Revelatory, and Autoethnographic Forms of Therapeutic Theatre
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XVI, 271 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-54153-6
       9781137541536
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Theatre and Performance Studies / Psychoanalysis
This book is the first to examine the performance of autobiographical material as a theatrical form, a research subject, and a therapeutic method. Contextualizing personal performance within psychological and theatrical paradigms, the book identifies and explores core concepts, such as the function of the director/therapist throughout the creative process, the role of the audience, and the dramaturgy involved in constructing such performances. It thus provides insights into a range of Autobiographic Therapeutic Performance forms, including Self-Revelatory and Autoethnographic Performance. Addressing issues of identity, memory, authenticity, self-reflection, self-indulgence, and embodied self-representation, the book presents, with both breadth and depth, a look at this fascinating field, gathering contributions by notable professionals around the world. Methods and approaches are illustrated with case examples that range from clients in private practice in California, through students in drama therapy training in the UK, to inmates in Lebanese prisons.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. The Self In Performance; Susana Pendzik, Renee Emunah, and David Read Johnson.- Part I. Influences and Concepts.- Chapter 2. Influences of Experimental Theatre on the Emergence Of Self-Revelatory Performance; Stephen Snow.- Chapter 3. From Behind the Scenes to Facing an Audience in Self- Revelatory Performance; Renee Emunah.- Chapter 5. Surprise and Otherness in Self-Revelatory Performance; David Read Johnson.- Chapter 6. Relational Aesthetics in the Performance of Personal Story; Nisha Sajnani.- Chapter 7. Intersubjectivity in Autobiographical Performance in Dramatherapy; Jean-Francois Jacques.- Part II. Applications and Approaches.- Chapter 8. Autobiographical Therapeutic Performance as Individual Therapy; Armand Volkas.- Chapter 9. Embodied Life-Stories; Sheila Rubin.- Chapter 10. Restoried Script Performance; Pam Dunne.- Chapter 11. The Performative; Gideon Zehavi.- Chapter 12. Heuristic Methodology in Arts-Based Inquiry of Autobiographcial Therapeutic Performance; Drew Bird.- Chapter 13. A Retrospective Study of Autobiographical Performance During Dramatherapy Training; Ditty Dokter and Alida Gersie.- Chapter 14. Personal Theatre and Pedagogy; Anna Seymour.- Chapter 15. Autobiographical Therapeutic Theatre With Older People With Dementia; Dovrat Harel.- Chapter 16. The Unheard Stories Of Those Forgotten Behind Bars In Lebanon; Zeina Daccache.- Chapter 17. Reflections On Terrorists Of The Heart: A Couple’s Performance On Loss And Acceptance; Jules Dorey Richmond and David Richmond.- Chapter 18. The Play As Client; Maria Hodermarska, Prentiss Benjamin, and Stephanie Omens.
John Smyth, University of Huddersfield, Huddersfield, UK

The Toxic University

Zombie Leadership, Academic Rock Stars and Neoliberal Ideology
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XI, 235 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-54976-1
       9781137549761
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Higher Education / Sociology of Education
This book considers the detrimental changes that have occurred to the institution of the university, as a result of the withdrawal of state funding and the imposition of neoliberal market reforms on higher education. It argues that universities have lost their way, and are currently drowning in an impenetrable mush of economic babble, spurious spin-offs of zombie economics, management-speak and militaristic-corporate jargon. John Smyth provides a trenchant and excoriating analysis of how universities have enveloped themselves in synthetic and meaningless marketing hype, and explains what this has done to academic work and the culture of universities – specifically, how it has degraded higher education and exacerbated social inequalities among both staff and students. Finally, the book explores how we might commence a reclamation. It should be essential reading for students and researchers in the fields of education and sociology, and anyone interested in the current state of university management.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction: 'Getting an Academic Life'.- Chapter 2. Neoliberalism: An Alien Interloper in Higher Education.- Chapter 3. Why the 'Toxic' University? A Case of Two Very Different Academics.- Chapter 4. Why Zombie Leadership?.- Chapter 5. Cultivation of the 'Rock Star' Academic Researcher?.- Chapter 6. The University as an Instrument of 'Class'.- Chapter 7. The 'Cancer Stage of Capitalism' in Universities.- Chapter 8. Enough is Enough... of this Failed Experiment of Killing the Host.- Chapter 9. Get Off My Bus! The Reversal of What We have been Doing in Universities.
A. Kjaer

The Trend Management Toolkit

A Practical Guide to the Future
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIV, 243 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-137-37008-2
       9781137370082
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
40,65 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Mathematics / Marketing
In a fast moving world, businesses need to keep up with data analysis and pattern spotting to identify future opportunities. Anne Lise Kjaer presents a unique methodology for global trend spotting along with practical tools and approaches to help companies and organizations analyse market changes and determine the way ahead.

Inhaltsangaben

1. From Facts to Feelings 2. Sense Making in a Fast Forward Society 3. Trend Mapping: Past, Present and Future 4. Your Essential Trend Toolkit 5. Major Trends 2030+ 6. Practical Trend Mapping: Focusing on People 7. Practical Trend Mapping: Organizations
A. Kjaer

The Trend Management Toolkit

A Practical Guide to the Future
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIV, 243 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-349-47519-3
       9781349475193
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
32,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Mathematics / Marketing
In a fast moving world, businesses need to keep up with data analysis and pattern spotting to identify future opportunities. Anne Lise Kjaer presents a unique methodology for global trend spotting along with practical tools and approaches to help companies and organizations analyse market changes and determine the way ahead.

Inhaltsangaben

1. From Facts to Feelings 2. Sense Making in a Fast Forward Society 3. Trend Mapping: Past, Present and Future 4. Your Essential Trend Toolkit 5. Major Trends 2030+ 6. Practical Trend Mapping: Focusing on People 7. Practical Trend Mapping: Organizations
Michael Cox, London School of Economics Department of International Relations, London, UK; E.H. Carr, University of Cambridge Trinity College, Cambridge, UK

The Twenty Years' Crisis, 1919-1939

Reissued with a new preface from Michael Cox
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten CXXIV, 233 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-349-95075-1
       9781349950751
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Political Science and International Relations, general / History of World War II and the Holocaust
E.H. Carr's Twenty Years' Crisis is a classic work in International Relations. Published in 1939, on the eve of World War II, it was immediately recognized by friend and foe alike as a defining work in the fledgling discipline. The author was one of the most influential and controversial intellectuals of the twentieth century. The issues and themes he develops in this book continue to have relevance to modern day concerns with power and its distribution in the international system. Michael Cox's critical introduction provides the reader with background information about the author, the context for the book, its main themes and contemporary relevance. Written with the student in mind, it offers a guide to understanding a complex, but crucial text. Now updated with a new preface from Michael Cox.

Inhaltsangaben

Part One: The Science of International Politics.- Part Two: The International Crisis.- Part Three: Politics, Power and Morality.- Power Four: Laws and Change.
S. Scandizzo, European Investment Bank, Luxembourg

The Validation of Risk Models

A Handbook for Practitioners
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten VIII, 242 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-43695-5
       9781137436955
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
90,94 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Risk Management / Banking
This book is a one-stop-shop reference for risk management practitioners involved in the validation of risk models. It is a comprehensive manual about the tools, techniques and processes to be followed, focused on all the models that are relevant in the capital requirements and supervisory review of large international banks.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: A Model Risk Primer PART I: A FRAMEWORK FOR RISK MODEL VALIDATION 1. Validation, governance and supervision 2. A validation framework for risk models PART II: CREDIT RISK 3. Credit risk models 4. Probability of default models 5. Loss Given Default models 6. Exposure at Default models PART III: MARKET RISK 7. Value at risk models 8. Interest rate risk on the banking book PART IV: COUNTERPARTY CREDIT RISK 9. Counterparty Credit Risk Models PART V: OPERATIONAL RISK 10. The validation of AMA models 11. Use test for operational risk PART VI: PILLAR 2 MODELS 12. Economic capital models 13. Stress testing models 14. Conclusion
Nancy Tengler

The Women's Guide to Successful Investing

Achieving Financial Security and Realizing Your Goals
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XIII, 210 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-137-40334-6
       9781137403346
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Literary History / Economics, general
Providing proven wealth accumulation strategies, tailored advice and a comprehensive market analysis, this book is a must-read for female investors who want to master volatile markets with long-term success.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1: Wealth Accumulation Is An Attitude - Investing for your future requires a few goals and much less capital than you think. Chapter 2: Why Women Make Excellent Investors - Women inherently display the traits required for successful investing. Chapter 3: In Order to Get There We Need to Know Where We Are Going - Establishing financial goals informs successful savings and investment plans. Chapter 4: Developing an Investment Discipline That Will Achieve our Goals - For the diligent student and practitioner, investing - like any skill - can be perfected. Matching our investment strategy with our goals is paramount. Chapter 5: Developing an Investment Discipline That Will Achieve our Goals - Continued - The stock market is a tug of war between fear and greed. Arm yourself with the tools to succeed. Chapter 6: Construct Your Portfolio Like a Dinner Party Invitation List - Holdings should be balanced and behave well if things get out of hand. Chapter 7: Meet Your Research Team: A Smart Phone and Sirius XM Radio Account - Accessible and timely financial information for busy women. Chapter 8: Apple Computer - A Case Study in How to Select a Core Holding - A role model investment you will want to emulate. Chapter 9: A Case Study of a Stalled Luxury Brand: Coach, Inc.-Whether Coach bags fit your budget or style, we can learn a great deal from this Fallen Angel. Chapter 10: Stocks to Own for a Lifetime - Identifying industry leaders provides the conviction required to buy stocks we are willing to hold for decades. Chapter 11: ETFs to Own for a Lifetime - How women investors can get their groove back. Chapter 12: Five Critical Lessons and Warnings - Don't touch a hot stove, don't talk to strangers and other lessons for the ages. Chapter 13: Eleven Intelligent Investing Rules - And One More for Good Measure - Rules for women to invest by. Chapter 14: If You Are Going to Hire a Professional Investment Advisor, Let's Make Sure You Hire the Best - You really can do this on your own but for those of you who won't, consider the following guidelines. Glossary of Investment Terms - Mastering the language will provide you with confidence and will broaden your knowledge base. Appendix - A List of Investing and Research Websites
Jonathan H. Turner, University of California, Riverside, Riverside, CA, USA

Theoretical Principles of Sociology, Volume 1

Macrodynamics
Springer New York
Seiten XIX, 364 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-1-4419-6227-0
       9781441962270
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
160,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociology, general / Personality and Social Psychology
In a general study of Sociological Theory, social processes are usually broken down into three tiers: macrodynamics (societies and large-scale institutions), microdynamics (interpersonal encounters), and mesodynamics (corporations, communities, smaller organizations). In this seminal work, the author pulls these separate areas of research into one comprehensive general theory of social reality. More than analytical distinctions or research terminology, the author demonstrates that the social world actually unfolds along these three (macro, micro, and meso) levels of interaction. By developing a set of explanatory, testable, repeatable principles, the author creates a general empirical framework for sociological research. The three volumes of Principles of Sociology explore each level of social dynamics individually, with cross-references to bring the three together. This work will be essential for researchers in Sociological Theory and Social Psychology. Individual volumes will present new research of interest for researchers in Race and Ethnicity, Stratification, Demography, Political Sociology, Organizations and Community Movements, Motivation and Emotions.

Inhaltsangaben

Macrodynamics: First Steps in Developing a General Sociological Theory.- Selection Pressures and the Evolution of the Macrodynamic Realm.- Elemenary Principles on Macrodynamic Forces.- The Dynamics of Institutional Domains.- The Dynamics of Stratification Domains.- The Dynamics of Stratification Systems.- The Dynamics of Societal Systems.- The Dynamics of Inter-Societal Systems.- Principles of Macrodynamics.- Microdynamics: Encounters at the Micro-level Realm of Reality.- The Embedding of Encounters.- Demographic and Ecological Dynamics of Encounters.- Status Dynamics in Encounters.- Role Dynamics in Encounters.- Cultural Dynamics in Encounters.- Motivational Dynamics in Encounters.- Emotional Dynamics in Encounters.- Principles of Microdynamics.- Mesodynamics: The Meso-Level Realm of Reality.- Micro-and Macro-Level Constrains under Mesodynamics.- Corporate Unit Dynamics: Groups, Organizations, Communities.- Corporate Unit Dynamics in Categoric-Unit Dynamics.- Principles of Mesodynamics.
Jonathan H. Turner, University of California, Riverside, Riverside, CA, USA

Theoretical Principles of Sociology, Volume 1

Macrodynamics
Springer New York
Seiten XIX, 364 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-1-4899-8822-5
       9781489988225
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
160,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociology, general / Personality and Social Psychology
In a general study of Sociological Theory, social processes are usually broken down into three tiers: macrodynamics (societies and large-scale institutions), microdynamics (interpersonal encounters), and mesodynamics (corporations, communities, smaller organizations). In this seminal work, the author pulls these separate areas of research into one comprehensive general theory of social reality. More than analytical distinctions or research terminology, the author demonstrates that the social world actually unfolds along these three (macro, micro, and meso) levels of interaction. By developing a set of explanatory, testable, repeatable principles, the author creates a general empirical framework for sociological research. The three volumes of Principles of Sociology explore each level of social dynamics individually, with cross-references to bring the three together. This work will be essential for researchers in Sociological Theory and Social Psychology. Individual volumes will present new research of interest for researchers in Race and Ethnicity, Stratification, Demography, Political Sociology, Organizations and Community Movements, Motivation and Emotions.

Inhaltsangaben

Macrodynamics: First Steps in Developing a General Sociological Theory.- Selection Pressures and the Evolution of the Macrodynamic Realm.- Elemenary Principles on Macrodynamic Forces.- The Dynamics of Institutional Domains.- The Dynamics of Stratification Domains.- The Dynamics of Stratification Systems.- The Dynamics of Societal Systems.- The Dynamics of Inter-Societal Systems.- Principles of Macrodynamics.- Microdynamics: Encounters at the Micro-level Realm of Reality.- The Embedding of Encounters.- Demographic and Ecological Dynamics of Encounters.- Status Dynamics in Encounters.- Role Dynamics in Encounters.- Cultural Dynamics in Encounters.- Motivational Dynamics in Encounters.- Emotional Dynamics in Encounters.- Principles of Microdynamics.- Mesodynamics: The Meso-Level Realm of Reality.- Micro-and Macro-Level Constrains under Mesodynamics.- Corporate Unit Dynamics: Groups, Organizations, Communities.- Corporate Unit Dynamics in Categoric-Unit Dynamics.- Principles of Mesodynamics.
Jonathan H. Turner, University of California, Riverside, Riverside, CA, USA

Theoretical Principles of Sociology, Volume 2

Microdynamics
Springer New York
Seiten XVII, 348 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-1-4419-6224-9
       9781441962249
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
160,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociology, general /
Micro-level dynamics revolve around face-to-face interactions among individuals. What occurs within encounters is constrained by their embedding with corporate and categoric units and, by extension, institutional domains, stratification systems, community networks, societies, and inter-societal systems. In this Handbook, the author explores the effect of microdynamics on these larger social systems.

Inhaltsangaben

The Micro-level Realm of Social Reality.- The Embedding of Encounters.- Ecological and Demographic Dynamics in Encounters.- Status Dynamics in Encounters.- Role Dynamics in Encounters.- Cultural Dynamics in Encounters.- Motivational Dynamics in Encounters.- Emotional Dynamics in Encounters.- The Micro Basis of the Meso and Macro Social Realms.- Principles of Microdynamics.
Jonathan H. Turner, University of California, Riverside, Riverside, CA, USA

Theoretical Principles of Sociology, Volume 2

Microdynamics
Springer New York
Seiten XVII, 348 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2010
ISBN 978-1-4899-8819-5
       9781489988195
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
160,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociology, general /
Micro-level dynamics revolve around face-to-face interactions among individuals. What occurs within encounters is constrained by their embedding with corporate and categoric units and, by extension, institutional domains, stratification systems, community networks, societies, and inter-societal systems. In this Handbook, the author explores the effect of microdynamics on these larger social systems.

Inhaltsangaben

The Micro-level Realm of Social Reality.- The Embedding of Encounters.- Ecological and Demographic Dynamics in Encounters.- Status Dynamics in Encounters.- Role Dynamics in Encounters.- Cultural Dynamics in Encounters.- Motivational Dynamics in Encounters.- Emotional Dynamics in Encounters.- The Micro Basis of the Meso and Macro Social Realms.- Principles of Microdynamics.
Jonathan H. Turner, University of California, Riverside, Riverside, CA, USA

Theoretical Principles of Sociology, Volume 3

Mesodynamics
Springer New York
Seiten XIV, 434 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-1-4419-6220-1
       9781441962201
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
139,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociology, general /
The meso-level realm of social reality is structured by corporate and categoric units, along with their respective cultures. Unlike the macro and micro realms of social reality, the meso-level does not reveal its own unique forces. Rather, the dynamics of meso-structures and cultures are driven by macro- and micro-level forces pushing on individual and collective actors as they build corporate units and develop parameters defining membership in particular social categories.

Inhaltsangaben

Acknowledgements.- Preface.- Chapter 1. The Meso-level Realm of Social Reality.- Chapter 2. Macrodynamic Environments of the Meso Realm.- Chapter 3. Micro Environments of the Meso Realm.- Chapter 4. The Dynamics of Categoric Units.- Chapter 5. The Dynamics of Groups.- Chapter 6. The Dynamics of Organizations.- Chapter 7. The Dynamics of Communities.- Chapter 8. Meso-Level Social Change.- Chapter 9. Principles of Mesodynamics.- References.
Jonathan H. Turner, University of California, Riverside, Riverside, CA, USA

Theoretical Principles of Sociology, Volume 3

Mesodynamics
Springer New York
Seiten XIV, 434 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-1-4939-0047-3
       9781493900473
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
139,09 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Sociology, general /
The meso-level realm of social reality is structured by corporate and categoric units, along with their respective cultures. Unlike the macro and micro realms of social reality, the meso-level does not reveal its own unique forces. Rather, the dynamics of meso-structures and cultures are driven by macro- and micro-level forces pushing on individual and collective actors as they build corporate units and develop parameters defining membership in particular social categories.

Inhaltsangaben

Acknowledgements.- Preface.- Chapter 1. The Meso-level Realm of Social Reality.- Chapter 2. Macrodynamic Environments of the Meso Realm.- Chapter 3. Micro Environments of the Meso Realm.- Chapter 4. The Dynamics of Categoric Units.- Chapter 5. The Dynamics of Groups.- Chapter 6. The Dynamics of Organizations.- Chapter 7. The Dynamics of Communities.- Chapter 8. Meso-Level Social Change.- Chapter 9. Principles of Mesodynamics.- References.
Fred Reid, Kenilworth, UK

Thomas Hardy and History

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIV, 238 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-54174-7
       9783319541747
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Nineteenth-Century Literature / Fiction
This book addresses the questions 'What did Thomas Hardy think about history and how did this enter into his writings?' Scholars have sought answers in 'revolutionary', 'gender', 'postcolonial' and 'millennial' criticism, but these are found to be unsatisfactory. Fred Reid is a historian who seeks answers by setting Hardy more fully in the discourses of philosophical history and the domestic and international affairs of Britain. He shows how Hardy worked out, from the late 1850s, his own 'meliorist' philosophy of history and how it is inscribed in his fiction. Rooted in the idea of cyclical history as propounded by the Liberal Anglican historians, it was adapted after his loss of faith through reading the works of Auguste Comte, George Drysdale and John Stuart Mill and used to defend the right of individuals to break with the Victorian sexual code and make their own 'experiments in living'.

Inhaltsangaben

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION: APPROACHES TO HARDY AND HISTORY.- CHAPTER 2 The Liberal Anglican idea of history.- CHAPTER 3 Horace Moule and ‘the evils of our era’.- CHAPTER 4 Walter Bagehot and the writing of history.- CHAPTER 5 Essays and Reviews: Frederick Temple and Baden Powell.- CHAPTER 6 Auguste Comte.- CHAPTER 7 George Drysdale and the Radical Hardy.- CHAPTER 8 John Stuart Mill.- CHAPTER 9 The Poor Man and the Lady.- CHAPTER 10 Desperate Remedies and Under the Greenwood Tree.- CHAPTER 11 The Franco-Prussian War.- CHAPTER 12 Satire and Romance: A Pair of Blue Eyes.- CHAPTER 13 ‘Lead kindly light’: Satire and History in Far from the Madding Crowd.- CHAPTER 14 Hardy and Patriotism.- CHAPTER 15 Crisis of Civilisation.- CHAPTER 16 Meliorism in The Mayor of Casterbridge and The Woodlanders.- CHAPTER 17 Stopping Wedding Guests.- CHAPTER 18 LAST WORD.- FURTHER READING.
Christophe Bouton, Université Bordeaux Montaigne, Pessac Cedex, France; Philippe Huneman, CNRS/Université Paris 1 Panthéon-Sorbonne, Paris, France

Time of Nature and the Nature of Time

Philosophical Perspectives of Time in Natural Sciences
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XIII, 403 p. 82 illus., 29 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-53723-8
       9783319537238
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Philosophy of Science / Epistemology
This volume addresses the question of time from the perspective of the time of nature. Its aim is to provide some insights about the nature of time on the basis of the different uses of the concept of time in natural sciences. Presenting a dialogue between philosophy and science, it features a collection of papers that investigate the representation, modeling and understanding of time as they appear in physics, biology, geology and paleontology. It asks questions such as: whether or not the notions of time in the various sciences are reducible to the same physical time, what status should be given to timescale differences, or what are the specific epistemic issues raised by past facts in natural sciences. The book first explores the experience of time and its relation to time in nature in a set of chapters that bring together what human experience and physics enable metaphysicians, logicians and scientists to say about time. Next, it studies time in physics, including some puzzling paradoxes about time raised by the theory of relativity and quantum mechanics. The volume then goes on to examine the distinctive problems and conceptions of time in the life sciences. It explores the concept of deep time in paleontology and geology, time in the epistemology of evolutionary biology, and time in developmental biology. Each scientific discipline features a specific approach to time and uses distinctive methodologies for implementing time in its models. This volume seeks to define a common language to conceive of the distinct ways different scientific disciplines view time. In the process, it offers a new approach to the issue of time that will appeal to a wide range of readers: philosophers and historians of science, metaphysicians and natural scientists - be they scholars, advanced students or readers from an educated general audience.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction: Time Between Metaphysics and Natural Sciences: From Physics to Biology (Christophe Bouton).- Part I. The Experience of Time and the Scientific Framing of Time.- Chapter 2. Passage, Flow, and the Logic of Temporal Perspectives (Jenann Ismael).- Chapter 3. Time of Logics and Time of Physics (Carlo Proietti).- Chapter 4. Time Variable and Time Scales in Natural Systems and their Modeling (Annick Lesne).- Chapter 5. On Time and the Varieties of Science (Kristie Miller).- Part II. Time Paradoxes in Physics.- Chapter 6. Is the Future already Present? The Special Theory of Relativity and the Block Universe View (Christophe Bouton).- Chapter 7. Dispelling the Quantum Spooks – a Clue that Einstein Missed? (Huw Price).- Chapter 8. On time, causation and explanation in the causally symmetric Bohmian model of quantum mechanics (Joseph Berkovitz).- Chapter 9. The Representation of Time in Discrete Mechanics (Anouk Barberousse).- Part III. Dealing with deep time (Paleontology).- Chapter 10. Paleontology: Outrunning Time (John Huss).- Chapter 11. The Biologist’s time and Deep Time: essay on the psychology of the Paleobiologist (Armand J. de Ricqlès).- Chapter 12. The Making of Paleontological Time (Pascal Tassy).- Part IV. Time of the Evolution (Evolutionary and developmental Biology).- Chapter 13. Repetition and Reversibility in Evolution: Theoretical Population Genetics (Jean Gayon).- Chapter 14. Macroevolution and Microevolution: Issues of Time Scale in Evolutionary Biology (Philippe Huneman).- Chapter 15. The timing of development (Antonine Nicoglou).
Klaus Neusser, Bern, Switzerland

Time Series Econometrics

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXIV, 409 p. 66 illus., 64 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-3-319-32861-4
       9783319328614
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Econometrics / Macroeconomics/Monetary Economics//Financial Economics
This text presents modern developments in time series analysis and focuses on their application to economic problems. The book first introduces the fundamental concept of a stationary time series and the basic properties of covariance, investigating the structure and estimation of autoregressive-moving average (ARMA) models and their relations to the covariance structure. The book then moves on to non-stationary time series, highlighting its consequences for modeling and forecasting and presenting standard statistical tests and regressions. Next, the text discusses volatility models and their applications in the analysis of financial market data, focusing on generalized autoregressive conditional heteroskedastic (GARCH) models. The second part of the text devoted to multivariate processes, such as vector autoregressive (VAR) models and structural vector autoregressive (SVAR) models, which have become the main tools in empirical macroeconomics. The text concludes with a discussion of co-integrated models and the Kalman Filter, which is being used with increasing frequency. Mathematically rigorous, yet application-oriented, this self-contained text will help students develop a deeper understanding of theory and better command of the models that are vital to the field. Assuming a basic knowledge of statistics and/or econometrics, this text is best suited for advanced undergraduate and beginning graduate students.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Introduction.- 2. ARMA models.- 3. Forecasting stationary processes.- 4. Estimation of Mean and Autocovariance Function.- 5.Estimation of ARMA Models.- 6. Spectral Analysis and Linear Filters.- 7. Integrated Processes.- 8. Models of Volatility.- 9. Multivariate Time series.- 10. Estimation of Covariance Function.- 11. VARMA Processes.- 12. Estimation of VAR Models.- 13. Forecasting with VAR Models.- 14. Interpretation of VAR Models.- 15. Co-integration.- 16. The Kalman Filter.- 17. Appendices.
Christopher Vaccaro, University of Vermont, Burlington, VT, USA; Yvette Kisor, Ramapo College of New Jersey, Mahwah, NJ, USA

Tolkien and Alterity

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XII, 270 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-61017-7
       9783319610177
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Medieval Literature / British and Irish Literature
This exciting collection of essays explores the role of the Other in Tolkien’s fiction, his life, and the pertinent criticism. It critically examines issues of gender, sexuality, race and ethnicity, language, and identity in The Lord of the Rings, The Silmarillion, and lesser-known works by Tolkien. The chapters consider characters such as Lobelia Sackville-Baggins, Saruman, Éowyn, and the Orcs as well as discussions of how language and identity function in the source texts. The analysis of Tolkien’s work is set against an examination of his life, personal writing, and beliefs. Each essay takes as its central position the idea that how Tolkien responds to that which is different, to that which is “Other,” serves as a register of his ethics and moral philosophy. In the aggregate, they provide evidence of Tolkien’s acceptance of alterity.

Inhaltsangaben

1 ?Introduction.-2 Queer Tolkien: A Bibliographical Essay on Tolkien and Alterity.-3 Race in Tolkien Studies: A Bibliographic Essay.-4 Revising Lobelia.-5 Medieval Organicism or Modern Feminist Science.-6 Cinema, Sexuality, Mechanical Reproduction: Peter Jackson’s Saruman.-7 Saruman’s Sodomitic Resonances: Alain de Lille’s De Planctu Naturae and J. R. R. Tolkien’s The Lord of the Rings.-8 Cruising Fairies: Queer Desire in Gilles, Niggle, and Smith.-9 Language and Alterity in Tolkien and Lévinas.-10 The Orcs and the Others: Familiarity as Estrangement in The Lord of the Rings.-11 Silmarils and Obsession: The Undoing of Fëanor.-12 The Other as Kolbítr: Tolkien’s Faramir and Éowyn as Alfred and Æthelflæd
Huidi Ma, Institute of Chinese Culture, Beijing, China; Er Liu, Harbin Institute of Technology, Weihai, China

Traditional Chinese Leisure Culture and Economic Development

A Conflict of Forces
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten IX, 264 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-59660-4
       9781137596604
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
128,39 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Asian Culture / Sociology of Sport and Leisure
This book explores the history of leisure in Chinese culture by tracing the development of Chinese philosophy and leisure values in Chinese tradition and civilization. It addresses the tremendous changes in Chinese society brought about by the country’s rapid economic development and the impact on Chinese culture and leisure. It considers the social, political and economic challenges facing China, from corruption to sharpening inequalities, from ecological crisis to the need for a revival of Chinese culture and for political democratization. It suggests that leisure can exert an invisible and formative influence on people’s lifestyle and value system and considers ongoing trends in the development of leisure activities as they relate to modern Chinese society and social reform.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction.- Leisure and Traditional Chinese Society.- Leisure in the Modern Cultural Movements of China.- The Rise of China’s Economy and Trends in Leisure Development.- Aspects of Leisure Life in Contemporary China.- Forces in Conflict.- Conclusion and Further Thinking.
Jennifer Dailey-O’Cain, University of Alberta, Edmonton, , Canada

Trans-National English in Social Media Communities

Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XI, 315 p. 6 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-50614-6
       9781137506146
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
English / Sociolinguistics
This book explores the use of English within otherwise local-language conversations by two continental European social media communities. The analysis of these communities serves not only as a comparison of online language practices, but also as a close look at how globalization phenomena and ‘international English’ play out in the practices of everyday life in different non-English-speaking countries. The author concludes that the root of the distinctive practices in the two communities studied is the disparity between their language ideologies. She argues that community participants draw on their respective national language ideologies, which have developed over centuries, but also reach beyond any static forms of those ideologies to negotiate, contest, and re-evaluate them. This book will be of interest to linguists and other social scientists interested in social media, youth language and the real-world linguistic consequences of globalization.

Inhaltsangaben

- Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Language Ideologies, Multilingualism, and Social Media.- Chapter 3. The Who and the What: Amounts and Types of English.- Chapter 4. The How: Interactional Functions of English.- Chapter 5. The Why: Ideology, Positioning, and Attitudes Toward English.- Chapter 6. English as a Trans-National Language.
O. Garcia; L. Wei

Translanguaging

Language, Bilingualism and Education
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten X, 175 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-137-38575-8
       9781137385758
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Language Teaching / Linguistics, general
This book addresses how the new linguistic concept of 'Translanguaging' has contributed to our understandings of language, bilingualism and education, with potential to transform not only semiotic systems and speaker subjectivities, but also social structures.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction Part I. Language and Translanguaging 1. Language, Languaging and Bilingualism 2. The Translanguaging Turn and its Impact Part II. Education and Translanguaging 3. Language, Bilingualism and Education 4. Translanguaging and Education 5. Translanguaging to Learn 6. Translanguaging to Teach 7. Translanguaging in Education: Principles, Implications, Challenges Conclusion
O. Garcia; L. Wei

Translanguaging

Language, Bilingualism and Education
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten X, 175 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2014
ISBN 978-1-349-48138-5
       9781349481385
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Language Teaching / Linguistics, general
This book addresses how the new linguistic concept of 'Translanguaging' has contributed to our understandings of language, bilingualism and education, with potential to transform not only semiotic systems and speaker subjectivities, but also social structures.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction Part I. Language and Translanguaging 1. Language, Languaging and Bilingualism 2. The Translanguaging Turn and its Impact Part II. Education and Translanguaging 3. Language, Bilingualism and Education 4. Translanguaging and Education 5. Translanguaging to Learn 6. Translanguaging to Teach 7. Translanguaging in Education: Principles, Implications, Challenges Conclusion
David Hook, University of Oxford, Oxford, UK; Graciela Iglesias-Rogers, University of Winchester, Winchester, UK

Translations In Times of Disruption

An Interdisciplinary Study in Transnational Contexts
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVII, 315 p. 3 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-1-137-58333-8
       9781137583338
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
106,99 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Translation / World History, Global and Transnational History
This book throws light on the relevance and role played by translations and translators at times of serious discontinuity throughout history. Topics explored by scholars from different continents and disciplines include war, the disintegration of transnational polities, health disasters and revolutions - be they political, social, cultural and/or technological. Surprisingly little is known, for example, about the role that translated constitutions had in instigating and in shaping political crises at both a local and global level, and how these events had an effect on translations themselves. Similarly, the role that translations played as instruments for either building or undermining empires, and the extent to which interpreters could ease or hamper negotiations and foster new national identities has not been adequately acknowledged. This book addresses all these issues, among others, through twelve studies focused not just on texts but also on instances of verbal and non-verbal communications in a range of languages from around the world. This interdisciplinary work will engage scholars working in fields such as Translation Studies, History, Modern Languages, English, Law, Politics and Social Studies.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. Introduction: Translations in Times of Disruption; David Hook and Graciela Iglesias-Rogers.- Chapter 2. Can constitutions be translated?: The case of the Cadiz Constitution in German; Horst Dippel.- Chapter 3. From Philos Hispaniae to Karl Marx: The first English translation of a Liberal Codex; Graciela Iglesias-Rogers.- Chapter 4. Distant disruption: Some Italian editions of the Costituzione Politica della Monarchia Spagnuola and their significance; David Hook.- Chapter 5. Translating into stone: The monument to the Constitution of Cadiz in Saint Augustine, Florida; M. C. Mirow.- Chapter 6. Translating the US Constitution for the federal cause in New Granada at the time of independence; Eduardo Posada-Carbó.- Chapter 7. Translations of medical texts of the Habsburg Monarchy in the long eighteenth century; Teodora Daniela Sechel.- Chapter 8. Translation, interpretation and the Danish Conquest of England, 1016; Emily A. Winkler.- Chapter 9. ‘A True Translation’: Translation as a weapon in the Peninsular War; 1808-1814; Alicia Laspra-Rodríguez.- Chapter 10. Anglo-Spanish transfers in Peninsular War poetry; 1808-1814: Translating and zero-translating; Agustín Coletes-Blanco.- Chapter 11. Globalization and the translation of minority languages in film subtitling; Gemma Martínez-Garrido.- Chapter 12. Resistance to the original: Polish translation at the turn of 1989; Kasia Szymanska.
William H. Moorcroft, Northern Colorado Sleep Consultants, Fort Collins, CO, USA

Understanding Sleep and Dreaming

Springer US
Seiten XIV, 369 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2013
ISBN 978-1-4614-6466-2
       9781461464662
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Clinical Psychology / Health Psychology
An updated edition of Moorcroft’s 2003 volume, this new work reflects recent scientific advances in the area of sleep and disorders. As in the previous book, Understanding Sleep and Dreaming, this new edition serves as a compact overview for now sleep experts, covering physiological sleep mechanisms, brain function, psychological ramifications of sleep, dimensions of dreaming, and clinical disorders associated with sleep. It is accessibly written with specially boxed material that enhances the text. It also offers a good foundation for those who will continue sleep studies, while at the same time offering enough information for those who will apply this knowledge in other ways such as clinicians private practices or researchers. It is an excellent text for courses on sleep at the undergraduate and graduate levels. The section on sleep labs will show how computers have replaced former models of data collection and storage; includes the new area of the genetics of sleep; add a new box on teen sleep; insert a new box on the emerging information about how technology use affects sleep; emphasize the controversy over rampart, wide-spread sleep deprivation; and include a new box covering the connection between sleep loss and weight gain. Additional inclusions might incorporate current “hot topics,” such as the effect of shift work on sleep, sleep problems in adolescents, and nightmare treatment for people suffering from PTSD.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I: Sleep and Dreaming.- Part II: What Causes us to Sleep?.- Part III: Dreams and Dreaming.- Part IV: Why We Sleep and Dream?.- Part V: Problems with Sleeping and Dreaming.
William H. Moorcroft, Northern Colorado Sleep Consultants, Fort Collins, CO, USA

Understanding Sleep and Dreaming

Springer US
Seiten XIV, 369 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2013
ISBN 978-1-4899-8824-9
       9781489988249
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Clinical Psychology / Health Psychology
An updated edition of Moorcroft’s 2003 volume, this new work reflects recent scientific advances in the area of sleep and disorders. As in the previous book, Understanding Sleep and Dreaming, this new edition serves as a compact overview for now sleep experts, covering physiological sleep mechanisms, brain function, psychological ramifications of sleep, dimensions of dreaming, and clinical disorders associated with sleep. It is accessibly written with specially boxed material that enhances the text. It also offers a good foundation for those who will continue sleep studies, while at the same time offering enough information for those who will apply this knowledge in other ways such as clinicians private practices or researchers. It is an excellent text for courses on sleep at the undergraduate and graduate levels. The section on sleep labs will show how computers have replaced former models of data collection and storage; includes the new area of the genetics of sleep; add a new box on teen sleep; insert a new box on the emerging information about how technology use affects sleep; emphasize the controversy over rampart, wide-spread sleep deprivation; and include a new box covering the connection between sleep loss and weight gain. Additional inclusions might incorporate current “hot topics,” such as the effect of shift work on sleep, sleep problems in adolescents, and nightmare treatment for people suffering from PTSD.

Inhaltsangaben

Part I: Sleep and Dreaming.- Part II: What Causes us to Sleep?.- Part III: Dreams and Dreaming.- Part IV: Why We Sleep and Dream?.- Part V: Problems with Sleeping and Dreaming.
Francisco J. López Lubián, IE Business School. IE University, Madrid, Spain; José Esteves, IE Business School. IE University, Madrid, Spain

Value in a Digital World

How to assess business models and measure value in a digital world
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XXII, 168 p. 15 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-51749-0
       9783319517490
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Online Marketing/Social Media / Knowledge Management
An in-depth examination of the concept of value in a digital world, an analysis of a range of digital business models and a framework for assessing the value of digital businesses.
Assessing the value of traditional business was easy. There are hard, well tested metrics and tangible, measurable assets you can literally kick the tyres of. But how do you measure the value of something that consists of little more than bits of information, brand awareness and a compelling idea? In the winner takes all digital world how do you know if this idea is one that will attract billions of dedicated users or a few thousand fleeting trialists? And, most importantly, how do you assess whether any given business model is robust enough to make billions or flawed in a way that will lose millions? Lopez Lubian and Esteves look at what economic value means in a digital world, and argue for a shift from traditional value metrics to digital value metrics. Through high profile case studies they examine the process of valuation in the digital world – examining the challenges of making objective judgments from subjective information and how to assess the value of data. Next they analyse in depth a number of different digital business models from the perspective of delivering value to investors, stakeholders and society at large. Finally they present a framework model for assessing value in digital business.  
 

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1.- The new digital economy Chapter2.- Economic Value and Digital Business Chapter3.-Escaping the hype: Dealing with subjectivity Chapter4.-Weighing the air: Valuing digital intangibles Chapter5.- Web Business Models and EV Chapter6.- Managing to delivering value in a digital world Chapter 7.- Summary and Conclusions.
Simon Kelly, Rotherham; Paul Johnston, Nottingham; Stacey Danheiser, Denver, CO

Value-ology

Aligning sales and marketing to shape and deliver profitable customer value propositions
Springer International Publishing
Seiten XX, 199 p. 30 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-45625-6
       9783319456256
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Innovation/Technology Management / Human Resource Development
This book offers both marketing and sales professionals a rare combined insight into both worlds to continuously capture customer intelligence and create value, by blending detailed research with academic rigor and commercial experience of the authors in both Europe and North America. It has never been easier to produce great marketing content and sales collateral. And yet, 90% of the content that marketing produces is NEVER used by sales. Why not? Because it’s not relevant to the audience or the prospect doesn’t even know the content exists. Furthermore 58% of deals end up in “no decision” because Sales has not presented value effectively. Companies are creating lots of noise but failing to resonate with the customers. So what? The danger, aside from marketing wasting tens of millions of dollars on ineffective content and tools, is that customers will disengage. 94% of prospects say they have completely disengaged with vendors because of irrelevant content. In order to grow fast, the authors argue, Sales and Marketing teams need to slow down. They need to work together to truly understand their customers’ needs, wants, motivations and pain points so that they can offer customized “value”. The book sets out how to establish a formal program to continuously capture customer intelligence and insights – the shiny gems of understanding that help prospects to connect the dots – so that value can be consistently articulated in marketing and sales conversations. By integrating the best ideas and practice from commercial experience and academic research the authors show how to create value across the entire marketing and sales value chain – not only get a new customer, but to continue to create value for future purchases by creating “post-sales” value.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter1.- Unlocking Customer Value Chapter2.- What is Value? Chapter3.- Value Propositions Chapter4.- Value Conversations Chapter5.- Unearthing Customer Value Chapter6.- From Value Propositions to solutions Chapter7.- Developing Coherent Campaigns Chapter8.- Align or Die Chapter9.- New Value Curve.
Tarang Shah; Shital Shah

Venture Capitalists at Work

How VCs Identify and Build Billion-Dollar Successes
Apress
Seiten 500 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2011
ISBN 978-1-4302-3837-9
       9781430238379
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
35,30 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business and Management, general /
'This is probably the single most valuable resource for the entrepreneurs aspiring to build successful companies'—Ron Conway, Special Adviser, SV Angel, and investor in Facebook, Google, Twitter, Foursquare, PayPal, Zappos 'I highly recommend Venture Capitalists at Work. This book captures the personalities and approaches of a number of leading VC practitioners and displays the heart and soul of the venture capital process, by offering an exclusive window into the voice of the practitioners.'—Gus Tai, Trinity Ventures 'Venture Capitalists at Work is a foundational pillar in an entrepreneur's understanding and resources. This is a first in terms of the level of detail, quality of discussion, and value to the entrepreneur.'—George Zachary, Charles River Ventures and Investor in Twitter Venture Capitalists at Work: How VCs Identify and Build Billion-Dollar Successes offers unparalleled insights into the funding and management of companies like YouTube, Zappos, Twitter, Starent, Facebook, and Groupon. The venture capitalists profiled—among the best in the business—also reveal how they identify promising markets, products, and entrepreneurs. Author Tarang Shah, a venture capital professional himself, interviews rising VC stars, Internet and software investment pioneers, and venture investment thought leaders. You’ll learn firsthand what criteria venture capitalists use to make investments, how they structure deals, the many ways they help the companies they fund, avoidable mistakes they see all too often, the role of luck in a success, and why so many startups fail. Venture Capitalists at Work also contains interviews with those on the receiving end of venture money—entrepreneurs in high-profile startups that went on to achieve great success. Whether you’re an entrepreneur, an aspiring VC, an M&A professional, or an ambitious student, the knowledge you will gain from Venture Capitalists at Work could provide a significant shortcut to success. Other books in the Apress At Work Series: Coders at Work, Seibel, 978-1-4302-1948-4 CIOs at Work, Yourdon, 978-1-4302-3554-5 CTOs at Work, Donaldson, Seigel, & Donaldson, 978-1-4302-3593-4 Founders at Work, Livingston, 978-1-4302-1078-8 European Founders at Work, Santos, 978-1-4302-3906-2 Women Leaders at Work, Ghaffari, 978-1-4302-3729-7 Advertisers at Work, Tuten, 978-1-4302-3828-7 Gamers at Work, Ramsay. 978-1-4302-3351-0

Inhaltsangaben

K. Vitasek; M. Ledyard

Vested Outsourcing, Second Edition

Five Rules That Will Transform Outsourcing
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten XII, 227 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2013
ISBN 978-1-137-29719-8
       9781137297198
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
39,58 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Asian Economics / Business Strategy/Leadership
In her classic book Vested Outsourcing , Kate Vitasek identified the top 10 flaws in most outsourced business models and shows organizations how to rethink their outsourcing relationships in a way that will lower costs, improve service, and increase innovation. This revised edition includes updated case studies and a new chapter based on Dell.

Inhaltsangaben

1. The Whole Nine Yards 2. The History of Outsourcing: Lessons Learned 3. The 10 Viruses in Non-Vested Outsourcing or Conventional vs. Traditional Outsourcing 4. Changing the Game 5. Game Theory/Economics of Innovation 6. Lay the Ground Work 7. Understand the Business 8. Align Interests 9. Establish the Contract 10. Manage the Performance
Kinga Tibori-Szabó, Kosovo Specialist Chambers , The Hague, The Netherlands; Megan Hirst, Doughty Street Chambers , London, UK

Victim Participation in International Criminal Justice

Practitioners’ Guide
T.M.C. Asser Press
Seiten XVIII, 479 p. 4 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-94-6265-176-0
       9789462651760
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
160,49 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
International Criminal Law / Victimology
This book is a guide to the law and practice of victims’ roles before the International Criminal Court, the Extraordinary Chambers in the Courts of Cambodia and the Special Tribunal for Lebanon. The various chapters focus on the provisions relevant to victim participation at these courts and the case law interpreting and applying those provisions. The book thus informs the reader on the principal ways in which the relevant practice is developing, the distinct avenues taken in the application of similar provisions as well as the ensuing advantages and challenges. Unlike other volumes focusing on relevant academic literature, this volume is written mainly by practitioners and is addressed to those lawyers, legal advisers and victimologists who work or wish to work in the field of victim participation in international criminal justice. Kinga Tibori-Szabó is legal officer for the Kosovo Specialist Chambers in The Hague and has previously worked for the Legal Representative of Victims at the Special Tribunal for Lebanon. Megan Hirst is a barrister at Doughty Street Chambers in London and has worked on victims' participation issues in the Registries of the International Criminal Court and the Special Tribunal for Lebanon, as well as in an LRV team in Prosecutor v. Dominic Ongwen.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: Victim Participation in International Criminal Justice.- The Application Process: Procedure and Players.- Requirements for Victim Participation.- The Role of Intermediaries and Third Parties in Victim Participation.- Legal Representation of Participating Victims.- The Protection of Victims Participating in International Criminal Justice.- Victims’ Rights and Obligations as regards the Case File: Access, Disclosure and Filing of Submissions.- Victims’ Lawyers in the Courtroom: Opening and Closing Statements, Questioning Witnesses, Challenging and Presenting Evidence.- Victims Appearing in Person before a Chamber.- Victims in the Witness Stand: Socio-Cultural and Psychological Challenges in Eliciting Victim Testimony.- Victims’ Attendance at the Tribunal to Observe Proceedings.- The Rights of Participating Victims to Appeal and Participate in the Appeal against Interlocutory Decisions and Final Judgments.- Reparations, Assistance and Support.- Termination of Victim Participation.- Communication between Victims’ Lawyers and their Clients.- International Criminal Proceedings – An Adequate Tool for Victims’ Justice?.
Gilbert M. Khadiagala, University of the Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, South Africa

War and Peace in Africa’s Great Lakes Region

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVIII, 148 p. 1 illus. in color.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-58123-1
       9783319581231
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
58,84 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
African Politics / Governance and Government
The book probes major security and governance trends in Africa’s Great Lakes region since the 1990s. It examines political dynamics in key states – Burundi, the DRC, Rwanda, and Uganda – as well as the role of international actors such as the AU, the EU, and the UN, thereby providing a unique perspective on efforts towards regional peace and prosperity. The authors suggest that while the region has made tremendous progress, it faces continuing challenges (including reversals in governance) that threaten future regional security.

Inhaltsangaben

1. Security and Governance in the Great Lakes Region: An Introduction .- 2. Burundi: Between War and Negative Peace .- 3. The Democratic Republic of the Congo: An Elusive Peace .- 4. Rwanda: Setting the Stage for the 2017 and Beyond .- 5. Uganda in the Great Lakes Region: Obstacles to Peace and Security .- 6. The African Union’s Role in Maintaining Peace and Security in the Great Lakes Region .- 7. The European Union and the Great Lakes Region: Constraints and Inconsistencies .- 8. The United Nations in the Great Lakes Region .- 9. Conclusions: Reversing the Spirals of Conflict and Instability in the Great Lakes Region.
Peter Lacy, Accenture, UK; Jakob Rutqvist, Accenture, Sweden

Waste to Wealth

The Circular Economy Advantage
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XXVII, 264 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-53068-4
       9781137530684
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
37,44 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Business Strategy/Leadership / Innovation/Technology Management
Waste to Wealth proves that 'green' and 'growth' need not be binary alternatives. The book examines five new business models that provide circular growth from deploying sustainable resources to the sharing economy before setting out what business leaders need to do to implement the models successfully.

Inhaltsangaben

1. On Borrowed Time 2. The Roots of the Circular Economy 3. Gaining the Circular Advantage 4. Circular Supply-Chain: ' 'Right from the Start ' ' 5. Recovery & Recycling: Making History of Waste 6. The Product Life-Extension Business Model: Products That Are Built to Last 7. The Sharing Platform Business Model: Sweating Idle Assets 8. The Product as a Service Business Model: Performance over Ownership 9. Circular Business Models: Evaluation, Enablers and Ecosystems 10. Driving the Technology & Digital Edge in Circular Advantage: Ten Transformational Plays 11. Five Circular Capabilities for Driving Value 12. The Power of Policy 13. Capturing the Advantage: Getting Started
Paul Davidson, University of Tennessee at Knoxville, Knoxville, TN, USA

Who's Afraid of John Maynard Keynes?

Challenging Economic Governance in an Age of Growing Inequality
Springer International Publishing
Seiten X, 162 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-64503-2
       9783319645032
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
28,88 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
History of Economic Thought/Methodology / International Political Economy
This is a book with many benefits.  Davidson explains the importance of the market economy, and unveils how and why global financial crises occur when the liquidity of financial assets traded in the market, suddenly collapse.70 years after Keynes’ death, in another era of financial crisis and economic slump, Keynes’ ideas have made a comeback within economic circles. Yet these ideas are not represented in contemporary government policy decisions. This book explains why Keynes’ ideas need to be used by political parties in order to restore global prosperity and close the gap between income and wealth inequality. This book will is essential reading for researchers, practitioners, students and the wider public interested in an economic understanding of today's global economic problems.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1 - Who saw the coming of the global financial crisis 2007-8?.- .Chapter 2 - Alternative explanations of how the capitalist economy in which we live operates?.- .Chapter 3 - Understanding the role of money and money contracts in a market economy.- .Chapter 4. Unemployment: Why can't people who want to work find jobs?.- .Chapter 5  - Creating a prosperous full employment economy.- .Chapter 6. Can we prevent inflation and still achieve full employment.- .Chapter 7. The role of financial markets and liquidity.- .Chapter 8. Globalization and international trade effects on employment and prosperity.- .Chapter 9. Are free trade agreements desirable.- .Chapter 10. President Trump's anti-free trade agreements policy.- .Chapter 11. What economic policies can a democracy adopt to assure we live in a prosperous, civilised, capitalist system.  
Simon Lancaster, Bespoke Speechwriting Services Ltd, UK

Winning Minds

Secrets From the Language of Leadership
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten X, 226 p. 82 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-46592-4
       9781137465924
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
29,95 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Marketing / Human Resource Management
Shhh . Did you know there is a secret Language of Leadership: a timeless set of cues and signals that still determines who reaches the top in politics and business today. The ancient Greeks were the first to study the art of communication 2,500 years ago. It is only now, with recent breakthroughs in neuroscience, that we can say for sure what works and how. In Winning Minds, top speechwriter Simon Lancaster blends ancient rhetoric and neuroscience to create the definitive guide to the Language of Leadership. With trust in business and political leaders at record lows, there's never been a better time for a fresh perspective on communication. Winning Minds is packed with insights into the effects of metaphors, stories, and sound bites on the brain. We know what the brain looks like on heroin. This book shows the brain on Branson, Obama, and Boris.

Inhaltsangaben

Joachim Schwass, IMD Global Family Business Center, Lausanne, Switzerland; Anne-Catrin Glemser, IMD Global , LAUSANNE, Switzerland

Wise Family Business

Family Identity Steering Brand Success
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XVI, 284 p. 47 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2016
ISBN 978-1-137-58599-8
       9781137585998
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
85,59 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Family Business / Small Business
Wise Family Business aims to help families in business to identify new and better ways of achieving longevity, sustainability and performance. The book presents ground-breaking new insights and practical examples from a range of growing family businesses in which the owning families are visible and, in most cases, have branded the business with their family name. This comprehensive and important study explores how family identity has the power to tie together families in business and leverage their values when developing and sharing the owner’s vision with their stakeholder communities. Developing a family business identity is key when building and managing an authentic, recognizable and trusted brand. It argues that family businesses that have successfully translated strong identities into strong brands are not only perceived as attractive employers but also add meaningful value to the business over generations.

Inhaltsangaben

Foreword by Professor Dominique Turpin.- Chapter 1: Family Business Identity.- Chapter 2: The Nature of Family Business.- Chapter 3: Best Practices and Examples from Family Businesses.- Chapter 4: Overall Lessons and Analysis of the Company Cases.- Chapter 5: The Expert View: Proactive Communications- Building, Projecting and Preserving Reputation for Business Families and Family Businesses.- Chapter 6: Toolbox- A Process for Moving from Family Identity to Family Business Brand.- Chapter 7: Conclusion.
Garry L. Hagberg, Bard College, US, Rhinebeck, NY, USA

Wittgenstein on Aesthetic Understanding

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XVI, 394 p. 1 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-40909-2
       9783319409092
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
117,69 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Aesthetics / Analytic Philosophy
This book investigates the significance of Wittgenstein’s philosophy for aesthetic understanding. Focusing on the aesthetic elements of Wittgenstein’s philosophical work, the authors explore connections to contemporary currents in aesthetic thinking and the illuminating power of Wittgenstein’s philosophy when considered in connection with the interpretation of specific works of literature, music, and the arts. Taken together, the chapters presented here show what aesthetic understanding consists of and the ways we achieve it, how it might be articulated, and why it is important. At a time of strong renewal of interest in Wittgenstein’s contributions to the philosophy of mind and language, this book offers insight into the connections between philosophical-psychological and linguistic issues and the understanding of the arts.

Inhaltsangaben

Introduction: Garry L. Hagberg.- PART I: THE AESTHETIC DIMENSION OF WITTGENSTEIN’S PHILOSOPHICAL WORK.- 1. The Aesthetic Dimension of Wittgenstein’s Later Writings: William Day.- 2. Improvisation and Imagination in Wittgenstein’s Philosophical Investigations: Beth Savickey.- 3. Wittgenstein, Music, and the Philosophy of Culture: Garry L. Hagberg.- PART II: NARRATIVE, INTERPRETATION, AND LITERARY LANGUAGE.- 4. Is a Narrative a Something or a Nothing?: Robert Chodat.- 5. Narrative Aspect Change and Alternating Systems of Justice: A Wittgensteinian Reading of Borges: Shlomy Mualem.- 6. Thinking the Poem: Bishop’s Transcendental “Crusoe in England” (For Example): Walter Jost.- PART III: MUSICAL UNDERSTANDING.- 7. Wittgenstein on Musical Depth and Our Knowledge of Humankind: Eran Guter.- 8. Wittgenstein and the Inner Character of Musical Experience: Gary Kemp.- 9. Wittgenstein's Criticism of a 'Science of Aesthetics' and the Understanding of Music: Alessandra Brusadin.- PART IV: EXPERIENCING ART AND PERCEIVING PERSONS: AN INTIMATE CONNECTION.- 10. The Philosophy of the Face: Bernard Rhie.- 11. Seeing Stars: The Reception and Ontology of Movie Stars: David Goldblatt.- 12. If an Artwork Could Speak: Aesthetic Understanding After Wittgenstein: Constantine Sandis.- Index.
Gunter Gebauer, Freie Universität Berlin, Berlin, Germany

Wittgenstein's Anthropological Philosophy

Springer International Publishing
Seiten XV, 271 p. 3 illus.
Erscheinungsjahr 2017
ISBN 978-3-319-56150-9
       9783319561509
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
96,29 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Analytic Philosophy / Philosophy of Man
This book explores how Wittgenstein’s personal life provided more of a reference point for his philosophical work than has been previously thought. Focusing on two key phases in Wittgenstein’s life during which he dramatically changed his philosophical orientation and reinvented both his intellectual methods and himself, the author presents and alternative understanding of Wittgenstein and his work. The book firstly addresses the period of his “anthropological turn” (1929-1932), in which Wittgenstein developed one of his central arguments concerning the role of the body in the acquisition of language and the rules of social practice. The second key phase, commencing after the end of the Second World War, was one of introspection, during which Wittgenstein became intensely preoccupied by inner events, sensations, and his own personality. As his work evolved, the anthropological aspects became the primary focus of his work by the end of his life. Providing an accessible and novel insight into Wittgenstein’s work and his interest in ‘continental’ philosophy, this translation will appeal to a wide audience.

Inhaltsangaben

Chapter 1. The Practice of Philosophy.- Chapter 2. From Seeing to Practice.- Chapter 3. The Turn to Anthropology.- Chapter 4. Intentions and Perspectives of the Language Game.- Chapter 5. The Interaction between Rules and Habitus.- Chapter 6. Materialism and Belief.- Chapter 7. Wittgenstein’s Pictures: Aspect-Seeing and Experience.
M. Jones

Women of The Street

Why Female Money Managers Generate Higher Returns (and How You Can Too)
Palgrave Macmillan US
Seiten X, 300 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2015
ISBN 978-1-137-46289-3
       9781137462893
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
28,88 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Investments and Securities / Economics, general
Women invest differently than men. Collectively, their approach has proven profitable and reliable, and it outperforms the industry at large. The portfolio managers interviewed in this book exemplify the best traits that women investors tend to exhibit. Read Women of the Street to learn from them and start investing a little more like a girl.

Inhaltsangaben

Part 1: The Research Introduction: The Women Chapter 1: The Feminine Investing Mystique Part II: From Theory to Practice Chapter 2: Aim Small, Miss Small: Targeting International Small Company Stocks Chapter 3: Quite Contrary: Going Long in Mid-Cap Stocks Chapter 4: Getting Extra from Ordinary: Investing Long & Short in Micro & Small Caps Chapter 5: She Blinded Me With Science: Long & Short Biotech Investing Chapter 6: Puzzling It Out: Investing in Distressed Credit Chapter 7: Making all the Rules: Relative Value and Directional Credit Investing Chapter 8: In the Beginning: Investing in Seed and Early Stage Venture Capital Chapter 9: The Pragmatist: Growth Equity Investing Chapter 10: Mrs. Fix-It: Distressed and Turnaround Private Equity Investing Chapter 11: Billion Dollar Listing: Real Estate Investing Chapter 12: The Sleuths: Fund of Funds Investing Part II: Investing as and Like a Girl Chapter 13: Lessons From The 'Broad' Market
Wendy Harcourt

Women Reclaiming Sustainable Livelihoods

Spaces Lost, Spaces Gained
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIII, 274 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-0-230-31648-5
       9780230316485
 (Hardcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
82,38 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Political Science / Gender Studies
This volume highlights women's work sustaining local economies and environments, particularly in response to the current food, fuel and climate crises. It includes women's role in the green entrepreneurship, women's reproductive and productive work in the care economy, and a further examination of eco feminist debates.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface; W.Harcourt Introduction Women Reclaiming Sustainable Livelihoods; W.Harcourt & J.Stremmelaar Redefining Sustainable Livelihoods; S.Krishna PARTI: FRAMING GENDER AND LIVELIHOOD CONCERNS TODAY Women Advocating for Gender Equality and Sustainable Livelihoods on the Global Stage; I.Dankelman Towards Gender Equality in Global Sustainable Consumption and Production Agreements; K.Sexsmith Gender Equality in Certified Agricultural Value Chains; N.Verhart & R.Pyburn Global Agricultural Policies, Institutional Interventions and Women's Livelihoods; A.Rao Global Institutions Try to Get it Right: An Insider's Perspective; G.Bloom PART II: GENDER AND LIVELIHOODS IN PLACE Your Caring Sharing Co-op: Women, Work and Sustainability in a Polanyian Paradigm; M.S.Cato Gender and Sustainable Livelihoods in India: 'Side-stream'/'Mainstream'; S.Krishna The Dream Merchants Have No Clothes: Women's Rights and Empowerment in the Micro Finance Regime; S.K.Parthasarathy The Cost of Peace: Exploring Opportunities for Women's Livelihoods in Post Conflict Settings; S.Aguiari Sustaining Women's and Community Livelihoods in Rural Tanzania; M.Masaiganah Sustainable Livelihoods and Gender in the Marginal Alpine Communities of Trentino; M.Zucca Indigenous Women Claiming Their Land; M.B.Rius PART III: EMERGING ISSUES FOR GENDER AND LIVELIHOODS Biocapital, Biopolitics and Biosocialities: Reframing Health, Livelihoods and Environments with New Genetics and Biotechnology; L.Acero Gender and Sustainable Livelihoods in Urban Honiara; A.Lacey Gender and Climate Justice; A.Agostino & R.Lizarde Epilogue Green Washing Warnings; W.Harcourt
Wendy Harcourt

Women Reclaiming Sustainable Livelihoods

Spaces Lost, Spaces Gained
Palgrave Macmillan UK
Seiten XIII, 274 p.
Erscheinungsjahr 2012
ISBN 978-1-349-33975-4
       9781349339754
 (Softcover)
Regular Price (Scholarly Sale Expired)
74,89 €
(inkl. 7% Mwst)
 Merken  Bestellen
Lieferstatus  
 
Political Science / Gender Studies
This volume highlights women's work sustaining local economies and environments, particularly in response to the current food, fuel and climate crises. It includes women's role in the green entrepreneurship, women's reproductive and productive work in the care economy, and a further examination of eco feminist debates.

Inhaltsangaben

Preface; W.Harcourt Introduction Women Reclaiming Sustainable Livelihoods; W.Harcourt & J.Stremmelaar Redefining Sustainable Livelihoods; S.Krishna PARTI: FRAMING GENDER AND LIVELIHOOD CONCERNS TODAY Women Advocating for Gender Equality and Sustainable Livelihoods on the Global Stage; I.Dankelman Towards Gender Equality in Global Sustainable Consumption and Production Agreements; K.Sexsmith Gender Equality in Certified Agricultural Value Chains; N.Verhart & R.Pyburn Global Agricultural Policies, Institutional Interventions and Women's Livelihoods; A.Rao Global Institutions Try to Get it Right: An Insider's Perspective; G.Bloom PART II: GENDER AND LIVELIHOODS IN PLACE Your Caring Sharing Co-op: Women, Work and Sustainability in a Polanyian Paradigm; M.S.Cato Gender and Sustainable Livelihoods in India: 'Side-stream'/'Mainstream'; S.Krishna The Dream Merchants Have No Clothes: Women's Rights and Empowerment in the Micro Finance Regime; S.K.Parthasarathy The Cost of Peace: Exploring Opportunities for Women's Livelihoods in Post Conflict Settings; S.Aguiari Sustaining Women's and Community Livelihoods in Rural Tanzania; M.Masaiganah Sustainable Livelihoods and Gender in the Marginal Alpine Communities of Trentino; M.Zucca Indigenous Women Claiming Their Land; M.B.Rius PART III: EMERGING ISSUES FOR GENDER AND LIVELIHOODS Biocapital, Biopolitics and Biosocialities: Reframing Health, Livelihoods and Environments with New Genetics and Biotechnology; L.Acero Gender and Sustainable Livelihoods in Urban Honiara; A.Lacey Gender and Climate Justice; A.Agostino & R.Lizarde Epilogue Green Washing Warnings; W.Harcourt

Scholarly Sale 2018: Springer Wirtschaft, Finanzen, Jura, Sozial- und Geisteswissenschaften >>